FCC ID: GM3WLPC24H

 

7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual March 9, 2000 Part No. 80439.C Copyright 2000 by Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Teklogix Inc., is issued in strict condence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, manufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Teklogix Inc. All trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Return-To-Factory Warranty Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of 90 days from shipment or 120 days from shipment where Teklogix installs the equipment. The warranty on Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Teklogix service organization. See Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details. Service When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred. Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any products to the factory, call the Service Centre in your region for a Return Authorization number. This will help us to service your product more efciently. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate and up-to-date. Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be held responsible for damages resulting from reliance on the material presented in this manual. Declaration Of Conformity Product:

7035 Hand-Held Terminal Application of Council Directive(s):

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Conformity Declared to Standards:

EN 55022: 1994; Class B; ETS 300 328: 1996 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997, ETS 300 826: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4 kV CD; 8 kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1999 Manufacturers Address in the European Community:

Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial Declaration Of Conformity Product:

8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Application of Council Directive(s):

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC Conformity Declared to Standards:

EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4 kV CD; 8 kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz ISO 7637-1: 1990 ISO 7637-2: 1990 EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1999 Manufacturers Address in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. Teklogix S.A. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial Declaration Of Conformity Product:

8255 LCD Vehicle-Mount Terminal Application of Council Directive(s):

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC Conformity Declared to Standards:

EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4 kV CD; 8 kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz ISO 7637-1: 1990 ISO 7637-2: 1990 EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1999 Manufacturers Address in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. Teklogix S.A. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial Declaration Of Conformity Product:

8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Application of Council Directive(s):

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC Conformity Declared to Standards:

EN 55022: 1998; Class B; ETS 300 826: 1997 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4 kV CD; 8 kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3 V/m, 80-1000 MHz ISO 7637-1: 1990 ISO 7637-2: 1990 EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1999 Manufacturers Address in European Community: Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. Teklogix S.A. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial T ABLE OF C ONTENTS

. ix

. xi Program License Agreement Safety Summary Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 About This Manual . 3 1.2 Text Conventions . 4 1.3 About The Terminals . 5 1.3.1 Features . 5 1.3.2 The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal . 7 1.3.3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers . 11 1.3.4 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal LCD or VFD . 11 1.3.5 The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only . 12 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation 2.2 2.1 Preparing The 7035 For Operation . 17 2.1.1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna . 17 2.1.2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing. 17 2.1.3 Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip . 19 Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals. 20

. 20 2.2.1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal 2.2.2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate . 21 2.2.3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal . 23 2.2.4 Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna . 24 2.2.5 Installing The Cables . 24 2.2.6 Installing The Extension Power Cable . 25 2.3 Basic Operation Of The Terminals . 26

. 26 2.3.1 Turning The Terminals On And Off 2.3.2 Resetting Terminals . 27 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual i Contents 2.3.3 The Display Menu . 28 2.3.4 The Keyboard . 30 2.4 The Indicators . 39 2.4.1 LEDs . 39 2.4.2 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only . 40 2.4.3 Softkeys . 42 2.4.4 The Battery Gauge (7035 Only) . 42 2.4.5 The Beeper . 42 2.5 The Display . 44 2.5.1 Adjusting The Display Contrast . 44 2.5.2 Panning . 45 2.6 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only . 46 2.6.1 Warnings . 46 2.6.2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner . 46 2.6.3 Scanning Techniques. 48 2.7 Infrared (IrDA) Port 7035 Only . 48 2.8 Maintenance . 48 2.8.1 Cleaning All Terminals . 48 2.8.2 7035 Special Instructions. 49 2.8.3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery . 49 Chapter 3: Tekterm 3.1 Introduction . 53 3.2 Launching Tekterm . 53 3.3 Working With Application Session Windows . 54 3.4 Radio Statistics Screens . 54 3.4.1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen. 54 3.4.2 802.11 Radio Statistics Screen . 55 3.4.3 TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen. 56 3.4.4 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen. 57 3.5 Resetting Radio Statistics . 60 3.6 Exiting Tekterm . 60 Chapter 4: TESS Operations 4.1 Conguration . 63 4.2 Working With Multiple Sessions . 63 ii Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents 4.3 The Field Types . 64 4.4 Data Entry . 64 4.4.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement

. 65 4.4.2 <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS . 66 4.4.3 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS . 67 4.5 Lock Messages . 69 4.6 Control Commands . 69 Chapter 5: ANSI Operations 5.1 Conguration . 73 5.2 Sending Data To The Host

. 73 5.3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys. 74 5.4 Working With Sessions . 75 5.4.1 Establishing A New Session. 75 5.4.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions . 75 5.4.3 Closing A Session . 76 5.4.4 Printing A Screen . 76 5.4.5 Smart Echo Disabling . 76 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters 6.1 Using The Parameter Manager . 81 6.2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu . 81 6.3 Working With Menus . 83 6.3.1 Softkey Function Keys . 83 6.3.2 Displaying Sub-Menus . 84 6.3.3 Numeric Parameters . 84 6.3.4 Y/N Parameters . 85 6.3.5 Alpha Parameters . 85 6.3.6 String Entry Parameters . 85 6.3.7 Saving Changes To Parameters . 87 6.3.8 Resetting The Terminal . 87 6.3.9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values . 87 6.4 Terminal Parameters. 88 6.4.1 Displaying The Parameters Menu . 88 6.5 System. 90 6.5.1 Volume And Contrast . 90 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual iii Contents 6.5.2 Key Click. 91 6.5.3 Typematic Rpt . 91 6.5.4 Panning . 92 6.5.5 Backlight . 94 6.5.6 Code Page . 95 6.5.7 Font Size North American And European . 96 6.5.8 Font Size Chinese And Korean . 97 6.5.9 Palette Remap . 98 6.5.10 Watchdog Timer . 99 6.5.11 Power 7035 Only. 99 6.5.12 One-Shot Mode . 100 6.6 Scanner. 101 6.6.1 Type . 101 6.6.2 Options . 102 6.6.3 Barcode. 105 6.7 Applications . 115 6.7.1 ANSI Settings . 116 6.7.2 Serial . 126 6.7.3 TESS Settings . 126 6.7.4 Features. 138 6.8 View Manager . 139 6.9 Ports Serial 1 And Console 2 . 141 6.9.1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options . 141 6.9.2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings . 142 6.9.3 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad . 144 6.9.4 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-See . 144 6.10 Global Macros . 150 6.10.1 Displaying The Global Macros Menu . 150 6.10.2 Displaying The Global Macros Table . 151 6.10.3 Choosing An ASCII Character. 152 6.10.4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters . 152 6.10.5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros. 153 6.11 Network . 153 6.12 Radio . 154 6.13 Sound . 154 iv Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories 7.1.1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader 7.1 External Bar Code Readers . 159

. 159 7.2 The 7035 Battery . 160 7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions. 161 7.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specifications . 162 7.3 The 7942 In-Unit Charger. 163 7.3.1 Mounting Bracket . 164 7.3.2 Connecting The Power Source . 164 7.3.3 In-Unit Charger LED Indicators. 164 7.3.4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger . 165 7.3.5 Charging The Battery . 165 7.3.6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions . 165 7.3.7 Charger Fault Conditions . 166 7.3.8 Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit Charger . 166 7.3.9 7942 Charger Specifications. 166 7.4 The 7967 Gang Charger. 167 7.4.1 Connecting The Power Source . 167 7.4.2 Inserting And Charging The Battery . 167 7.4.3 Fault Conditions . 168 7.4.4 7967 Charger Specifications. 169 7.5 Important Charger Safety Instructions . 169 7.6 Antenna Types. 170 7.7 The 7035 Picker Cradle . 171 7.7.1 Mounting Hardware . 171 7.7.2 Installation . 171 7.7.3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting . 172 7.7.4 Mounting The Cradle . 173 7.7.5 Installing The Cables . 173 7.7.6 Connecting A Cable . 173 7.7.7 Connecting The Power Source . 174 7.7.8 Attaching A Port Replicator . 174 7.7.9 Picker Cradle Maintenance . 174 7.7.10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal . 175 7.7.11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator . 176 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual v Contents 7.7.12 Specifications. 177 7.8 Accessories Part Number List . 179 Chapter 8: Specifications 8.1 Radio Specications . 183 8.2 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specications . 186 8.3 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications . 188 8.4 Peripheral Ports . 191 8.4.1 Serial Port 1 (COM 1) . 191 8.4.2 Serial Port 2 (COM 2) . 191 8.5 Memory Expansion Board . 192 8.6 IrDA Port (7035 Only) . 192 8.7 Wireless Communication Options . 192 8.8 Bar Code Scanning. 193 8.8.1 Internal Scanners (7035 Only) . 193 8.8.2 External Scanners . 193 8.8.3 Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only) . 193 8.9 Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) . 194 8.10 Power Management (7035 Only) . 197 8.10.1 Power Save States . 197 8.11 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) . 199 Appendices Appendix A: Support Services And Worldwide Offices A.1 Support Services . A-1 A.1.1 North American Helpdesk . A-1 A.1.2 International Support . A-1 Appendices Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams

(28-Pin PCR) B.1 7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector

. B-1

. B-2 B.2 8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector B.3 8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR). B-4

(28-Pin PCR) vi Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Contents B.4 Internal Scanner Connector . B-6 B.5 Flash Serial Download Cable . B-6 B.6 28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector P.N. 19726 . B-7 B.7 28-Pin PCR To 7-Pin DIN Connector P.N. 19727 . B-7 B.8 Flash Serial Download Cable P.N. 20075 . B-8 B.9 Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable P.N. 30092. B-8 Appendix C: ASCII Character Table Appendix D: Radio Parameters D.1 TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio Parameters . D-1 D.2 TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio Parameters . D-4 D.3 TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters . D-6

. D-6 D.3.1 Cellular D.3.2 Channel

. D-7 D.3.3 Poll Timing . D-9 D.3.4 Power Saving . D-11 D.3.5 CIS Data . D-11 D.4 TRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters . D-12 D.4.1 Channel

. D-12 D.4.2 WLAN Timing. D-14 D.4.3 Power Saving . D-14 D.4.4 CIS Data . D-15 D.5 TRX7460 Mobitex Radio . D-15 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual vii P ROGRAM L ICENSE A GREEMENT These products contains proprietary information of Teklogix Inc. as well as the following companies: International Business Machines Corporation, Phoenix 1 and Pacic Softworks Incorporated. Technologies Limited, Datalight, Inc. Software restrictions are as follows and shall be enforced to the fullest extent possi-

ble by applicable law:

i. ii. copying and/or transfer of the software is prohibited; and reverse assembly, reverse compilation, or other translation of the software is prohibited; and iii. software is copyrighted and licensed (not sold) and that title to the software is not transferred; and iv. v. vi. the owner of the software DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE INCLUDING (WITHOUT LIMITATION) ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE; and liability is limited to the amount paid by the end user for the software;

and the use of the software is allowed only in conjunction with products described herein. 1 Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc. FlashFX is a trademark of Datalight, Inc. Copyright 1993-1999 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual ix S AFETY S UMMARY This safety information is for the protection of both operating and service personnel. This equipment complies with Class B, Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For sites in Canada, Teklogix TRX7430 and TRX7440 802.11 radios require a radio licence unless they are installed totally within a building (user shall obtain licence from Industry Canada). Use only Teklogix approved peripheral devices and cables. RF E EQUIREMENTS XPOSURE R To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for mobile transmitting devices, a separation distance of 20 cm or more should be maintained between the antenna of this device and persons during device operation. To ensure com-

pliance, operation at closer than this distance is not recommended. O OT Operating Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion. I PERATE TMOSPHERE XPLOSIVE E N A N A D N O D O NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualied service personnel. Do not operate the equipment without the covers and enclosures properly installed. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual xi Safety Summary DO NOT HOLD ANTENNA To avoid discomfort due to the local heating effect of Radio Frequency energy, do not touch the antenna when a terminal is transmitting. USE PROPER FUSE For vehicle-mount terminals, use only the fuses specied. A replacement fuse must meet the type, voltage rating and current rating for the fuse it replaces or a re may result. CAUTION!

Danger of explosion if a 7035 battery is incorrectly handled, charged, disposed of or replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions described in Maintaining The 7035 Battery on page 49. Carefully review all battery safety issues listed in the section titled Lith-

ium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 161 and page 162. VORSICHT!

Explosiongefahr bei unsachgemem Austausch der Batterie Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. xii Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual INTRODUCTION 11 1.1 About This Manual . 3 1.2 Text Conventions . 4 1.3 About The Terminals . 5 1.3.1 Features . 5 1.3.2 The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal

. 7 1.3.3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers . 11 1.3.4 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal LCD or VFD . 11 1.3.5 The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only. 12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 1 Chapter 1:

Introduction About This Manual 1.1 About This Manual This manual describes how to operate the Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals. Chapter 1: Introduction provides a basic overview of the 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals. Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation explains how to attach an antenna, how to work with internal and external power supplies and how to mount vehicle-mount terminals. It also describes the LEDs, beeper and display. Chapter 3: Tekterm describes how to work with application sessions within the Tekterm program. Chapter 4: TESS Operations describes editing modes, status messages and control commands for TESS operations. Chapter 5: ANSI Operations provides information about function key equivalents and data entry for ANSI operations. Chapter 6: Setting Parameters lists and denes the terminal parameters. Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories provides information about using barcode readers and other accessories such as the AC power adaptor, battery chargers, and so on. Chapter 8: Specications contains the technical specications for the terminal, the battery charger and the COM ports. Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables. Appendix C: ASCII Character Table provides a table of ASCII characters. Appendix D: Radio Parameters describes the parameters for the TRX7370 Narrowband radio, the TRX7430 Lucent WaveLAN II IEEE 802.11 PC Card and the TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802 8400 PC Card and the TRX7410/TRX7410A 902 SS PC card. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 3 Chapter 1:

Text Conventions Introduction 1.2 Text Conventions Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information. Important:

These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment. Warning:

These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury, equipment damage or data loss. 4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction About The Terminals 1.3 About The Terminals The 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount RF terminals all run DOS and can operate in a Teklogix narrowband or 902 spread spectrum RF system using the cellular or new protocol. They can also operated in a 2.4 GHz 802.11 system. 1.3.1 Features Some features of these terminals include:

7035s are equipped with 33 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache. 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are equipped with 66 MHz 486DX CPU with internal cache. 8 MB RAM can be expanded to 16 MB. 4 MB of Flash ROM can be expanded to 8 MB. RF connectivity options include:

IEEE 802.11 2.4 GHz frequency hopping and direct sequence PC card radios (1-2 Mbps) (TRX7430), (TRX7440). TRX7370 Narrowband PC card-based radios (403-512 MHz, 4800-

19200 bps).

TRX7410 TekLan 902 MHz direct sequence spread spectrum radios. 7035 terminal can support a standard external or optional internal antenna.

(Note that the internal antenna is only available with certain 802.11 radios.) 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are shipped with external antennas that are compatible with the operating RF system. Rugged, sealed enclosure, suitable for industrial environments. Seamless operation on all Teklogix 32-bit narrowband RF backbones:

- ANSI, TESS (IBM 3270, IBM5250 and HP2392) emulation application built in. uses high performance TRX7370 narrowband radio.

Embedded DOS. Ergonomic design:

7035 offers one-handed scan & conrm design all terminals provide high visibility display fonts and low impact keys. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 5 Chapter 1:

Features Introduction

full alphanumeric keyboard. keyboard can be customized using overlays, soft-label function keys and macro keys. vehicle-mount terminals can be ordered with a QWERTY, an ABC or an AZERTY keyboard. autopanning in text mode. 7035 status screen area displays system information battery gauge, RF link status and shift indicators as the application is running. vehicle-mounts are equipped with a special set of LEDs that act as shift indicators, blinking when a key is active and staying on when a key is locked on. softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of all terminal screens, indicating the function of function keys <F1> to <F4> on the 7035

<F1> to <F6> on vehicle-mounts. Two internal PC Card Type II slots:

one slot is reserved for the terminal radio. the extra slot can be used for any PC Card Type II Flash disk, adding from 16 to 128 MB of additional mass storage that appears as an additional drive. (Note that this slot is not available if the terminal is operating with a TRX7370 narrowband or a TRX7410 TekLan 902 spread spectrum radio.) RS-232 peripheral port supports decoded and non-decoded scanners, serial printers and COM devices. Macro keys to program special characters, keys and/or frequently-used key strokes. 6 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 1.3.2 The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Chapter 1:

Introduction The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Figure 1.1 The 7035 Hand-Held Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7 Chapter 1:

The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Introduction Figure 1.2 7035-I With Optional Pistol Grip Handle 8 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Figure 1.3 7035 Peripheral Port Integrated Scanner IrDA Port Figure 1.4 Infrared (IrDA) Port Warning:

Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specied herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 9 A C Chapter 1:

The 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Introduction CAUTION LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 630-680nm LASER DIODE 1.0 MILLIWATT MAX.OUTPUT CLASS II LASER PRODUCT 20599-001 CANADA: XXX XXX XXX FCC ID: XXXXXX - XX This product contains XXXXXX 2.4 GHz Radio XXXXX XXX - XX PN: XXX-XXXXXX-XX This device complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received,in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. SEE BATTERY COMPARTMENT FOR MANUFACTURING DATA. A. Laser Radiation Warning Label 20605 LITHIUM-ION RECHARGEABLE BATTERY 7.2 V, 1350mAh ASSEMBLED IN JAPAN RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF PROPERLY WARNING!

BURN HAZARD, DO NOT INCINERATE OR HEAT ABOVE 100C (212F) DO NOT DISASSEMBLE NOT FOR USE BELOW -20C (-4F) A 7 9 5 0 2 B. Lithium-Ion Battery Warning Label This label is affixed to the underside of the battery. B Made in Canada Mississauga, Ont. Canada, L5N 7J9 U.S. PAT. 4,758,717 Model 7035 Handheld Serial No.:

Ref No.:

Manufactured:

C. Model/Serial Number Label This label lists the following:

Serial Number Reference Number. This field contains a numeric code used to identify the country code, the temperature range of the terminal, and so on. Manufactured. This field contains the terminal's date of manufacture. Figure 1.5 Safety Labels 10 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Introduction 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers Chapter 1:

1.3.3 7035 Integrated Scanner Patent Numbers The integrated scanner used in the 7035 may be covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents:

4,360,798; 4,369,361; 4,387,297; 4,460,120; 4,496,831; 4,593,186; 4,603.262; 4,607,156; 4,652,750;

4,673,805; 4,736,095; 4,758,717; 4,816,660; 4,845,350; 4,896,026; 4,897,532; 4,923,281; 4,933,538;

4,992,717; 5,015,833; 5,017,765; 5,021,641; 5,029,183; 5,047, 617; 5,103,461; 5,113,445; 5,130,520;

5,140,144; 5,142,550; 5,149,950; 5,157,687; 5,168,148; 5,168,149; 5,180,904; 5,229,591; 5,230,088;

5,235,167; 5,243,655; 5,247,162; 5,250,791; 5,250,792; 5,262,627; 5,280,163; 5,280,164; 5,280,498;

5,304,786; 5,304,788; 5,321,246; 5,367,151; 5,373,148; 5,378.882; 5,377,361; 5,396,053; 5,396,055;

5,399,846; 5,408,081; 5,410,139; 5,410,140; 5,412,198; 5,418,812; 5,420,411; 5,436,440; 5,444,231;

5,449,891; 5,449,893; 5,468,949; 5,479,000; 5,479,002; 5,479,441; 5,504,322; 5,528,621; 5,532,469;

5,543,610; 5,545,889; 5,552,592; 5,578,810; 5,589,680;D305,885; D341,584; D344,501; D359,483;

D362,435; D363,700; D363,918; D370,478. Invention No. 55,358; 62,539; 69,060; 69,187 (Taiwan); No: 1,601,796; 1,907,875; 1,955,269 (Japan). European Patent 367,299; 414,281; 367,300; 367,298; UK 2,072,832; France 81/03938;

Italy 1,138,713. 1.3.4 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal LCD or VFD Note: The 8255 terminal is available with a liquid crystal display (LCD) or a vacuum uorescent display (VFD). Figure 1.6 The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 11 Chapter 1:

The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only Introduction Expansion Port Scanner Port Figure 1.7 8255 Ports 1.3.5 The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only Figure 1.8 The 8260 Vehicle-Mount 12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Introduction The 8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal - LCD Only Chapter 1:

Keyboard Connector Scanner Port Expansion Port Figure 1.9 8260 Ports Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 13 BASIC ASSEMBLY AND OPERATION 22 2.1 Preparing The 7035 For Operation . 17 2.1.1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna . 17 2.1.2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing . 17 2.1.3 Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip. 19 2.1.3.1 Attaching The Hand Strap . 19 2.1.3.2 Attaching The Pistol Grip. 19 2.2 Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals . 20 2.2.1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal . 20 2.2.2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate . 21 2.2.3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal . 23 2.2.4 Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna. 24 2.2.5 Installing The Cables. 24 2.2.6 Installing The Extension Power Cable . 25 2.3 Basic Operation Of The Terminals . 26 2.3.1 Turning The Terminals On And Off . 26 2.3.1.1 7035 Hand-Held . 26 2.3.1.2 8255 And 8260 Vehicle-Mounts . 27 2.3.2 Resetting Terminals . 27 2.3.2.1 Resetting The 7035 . 27 2.3.2.2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 . 27 2.3.3 The Display Menu . 28 2.3.3.1 Bypassing Tekterm At Terminal Bootup . 28 2.3.3.2 Launching And Exiting The Parameters Menu . 28 2.3.3.3 Launching And Exiting Tekterm . 29 2.3.3.4 Launching And Exiting DOS . 29 2.3.4 The Keyboard . 30 2.3.4.1 The Status Area 7035 Only . 30 2.3.4.2 <ORANGE> And <BLUE> Keys . 30 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 15 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation 2.3.4.3 The Standard Keys. 31 2.3.4.4 Key Lock Function . 34 2.3.4.5 The Function Keys Softkeys. 36 2.3.4.6 The 7035 Hand-Held Accessing Function Keys . 36 2.3.4.7 The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts Accessing Function Keys . 37 2.3.4.8 The Macro Keys Creating Macros . 39 2.4 The Indicators . 39 2.4.1 LEDs . 39 2.4.2 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only. 40 2.4.3 Softkeys. 42 2.4.5 The Beeper . 42 2.4.5.1 Beeper Volume <BLUE> <F3> And <F4> . 43 2.4.5.2 Beeper Volume The Volume Parameter . 43 2.5 The Display . 44

. 44 2.5.1.1 Contrast Adjustment <BLUE> <F1> And <F2> . 44 2.5.1.2 Contrast Adjustment Using The Contrast Parameter . 45 2.5.2 Panning . 45 2.6 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only . 46 2.6.1 Warnings . 46 2.6.2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner

. 46 2.6.3 Scanning Techniques . 48 2.7 Infrared (IrDA) Port 7035 Only. 48 2.8 Maintenance. 48 2.8.1 Cleaning All Terminals . 48 2.8.2 7035 Special Instructions . 49 2.8.3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery . 49 2.5.1 Adjusting The Display Contrast 16 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Preparing The 7035 For Operation 2.1 Preparing The 7035 For Operation Note: For vehicle-mount installation instructions, refer to Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals beginning on page 20. Preparing the 7035 terminal for operation includes installing the battery pack, and if an external antenna is required, connecting the antenna to the 7035. Important: All battery packs must be charged before use. Refer to The 7967 Gang Charger on page 167 for battery charging details. 2.1.1 Connecting The 7035 Whip Antenna To begin, if your 7035 has a plastic cap at the top of the unit, it uses an internal antenna a whip antenna is not required. If a whip antenna was supplied with the 7035, it should be attached to the top of the unit. Make certain that the antenna is securely attached to the terminal. Important:

If you are unsure if the antenna supplied is intended for your terminal, refer to Antenna Types on page 170. In addition, failure to securely attach the antenna to the terminal can result in poor communication quality. 2.1.2 The Battery Pack Removing And Installing The 7035 hand-held terminal operates with a Lithium-Ion battery pack. Important: Before attempting to install, use or charge the battery pack, it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines listed on page 50 and also in the section titled Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 161. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 17 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Battery Pack Removing And Installing Warning:

When a battery is removed from the terminal, a backup of the system, application and any work in progress is maintained for up to 10 minutes. A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute timeframe. THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED. Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot. Even after the system backup has expired, the date and time are maintained for 100 hours without a battery. To remove the battery pack:

Turn the terminal upside down (antenna pointing down). Grasp the unit around the keypad area with your forenger resting on the battery release button. The battery release button is located at the base of the terminal, just above the 28-pin port. Press the button until the battery unlatches. Battery Release Button Figure 2.1 Battery Compartment Of The 7035 Terminal To install the battery pack:

Insert the battery pack with the textured plastic facing you. Click the battery into place. 18 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip 2.1.3 Attaching The 7035 Hand-Strap Or The Pistol Grip Note: For a list of additional accessories, refer to Accessories Part Number List on page 179. 2.1.3.1 Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required. Attaching The Hand Strap Teklogix recommends that the hand strap provided with your terminal always be used. However, if your terminal has an internal scanner and you plan to use the pistol grip accessory, a hand strap is not required. Each end of the hand strap has two holes drilled in it. The holes nearest the outer edges of the hand strap allow the hand strap to be installed more loosely while the holes closer to the centre of the strap provide a tighter t. The hand strap can be secured either on the left or the right side of the terminal, depending on operator preference. Two black #4-40 Phillips head screws are provided with the hand strap for attachment. Four threaded inserts are available on the back of the terminal. The hand strap can be attached either to the upper- and lower-most inserts on the left side of the terminal or to the upper- and lower-most inserts on the right side of the terminal. To attach the hand strap, choose on which side of the terminal the hand strap is to be attached and securely fasten the screws into the back of the terminal. Attaching The Pistol Grip 2.1.3.2 Note: A Phillips head screwdriver is required. The four threaded inserts in the upper part of the terminal casing are used to attach the pistol grip. Four black #4-40 Phillips head screws are provided with this accessory. Note: Prior to installation, make sure the trigger mechanism has been securely snapped into the pistol grip body and the trigger operates properly. Position the pistol grip so that it ts snugly over the back of the terminal and the holes on the terminal and pistol grip are aligned. Using a Phillips screw driver, securely fasten the pistol grip to the back of the terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 19 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals 2.2 Installing 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminals The installation of the vehicle-mount terminal depends on the type of vehicle and the application environment. A typical installation includes:

1. Mounting the terminal. 2. Connecting the antenna. 3. Installing the power extension Note: Make certain that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage. 2.2.1 Mounting The 8255 Vehicle-Mount Terminal There are two mounting options available:

1. Using the horizontal/vertical mounting cradle. (Refer to Figure 2.2.) 2. Using the cradle (P.N. 18457) and cradle mounting plate (P.N. 18197). Note: The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20. 30 18452 Horizontal/vertical cradle 15 30 Figure 2.2 The Horizontal/Vertical Mounting Cradle 20 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate 2.2.2 Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Attaching The Terminal And Cradle First, the terminal must be attached to the cradle (Figure 2.3). To do this:

Place the terminal in the cradle so that the display side of the terminal is on the same side as the quick release fasteners. The keyboard side of the termi-

nal should be on the same side as the tabs. Match the side screw holes on the terminal with the appropriate pairs of holes on the cradle and screw them together. The choice of holes determines the angle at which the terminal tilts. Screw Holes 29.8 cm 11.45 in. Tabs Front Quick Release Fasteners Back 5 .25 cm in . 2 4.2 1 0.7 5 in. 5 c m Figure 2.3 The Terminal Cradle (P.N. 18457) Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 21 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Using The Cradle And Cradle Mounting Plate Installing The Cradle Mounting Plate Next, the cradle mounting plate must be attached to the vehicle. The cradle mounting plate shown in Figure 2.4 holds the terminal and cradle in place. Screw the cradle mounting plate onto the vehicle using the four 1/4" holes. Note: The bolts used for all installations are SAE 1/4-20. Post Back Front 25.4 cm 10.0 in. Tab Guides 1 5 i 3 c

. n m Figure 2.4 The Cradle Mounting Plate (P.N. 18197) Attaching The Cradle To The Cradle Mounting Plate Next, the terminal and cradle must be attached to the cradle mounting plate. Align the tabs on the rear of the cradle to the tab guides on the mounting plate and push the cradle back and down. Slide the fasteners on the front of the cradle until they snap to the posts on the mounting plate. Warning:

Never operate the vehicle if the quick release fasteners are not locked. 22 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Mounting The 8260 Terminal 2.2.3 Mounting The 8260 Terminal 18452-001 Horizontal/vertical cradle 15 15 20164

(15 foot cable) 19448

(6 foot cable) 19449

(10 inch cable) 15 15 18239 Keyboard cradle 18451 Cradle support plate Figure 2.5 8260 Mounting Options Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 23 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna There are three mounting options available. Each possible option is listed below. Figure 2.5 on page 23 provides a visual illustration of the mounting options. 1. The horizontal/vertical mounting cradle (P.N. 18452) and the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239). 2. The combined mounting option using the horizontal/vertical mounting cradle (P.N. 18452-001), the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239), and the cradle support plate (P.N. 18451). 3. Using the terminal cradle (P.N. 18198) for the display, the cradle mounting plate (P.N. 18197) and the keyboard cradle (P.N. 18239). 2.2.4 Connecting The 8255/8260 Antenna Warning:

Operating the terminal without an antenna may damage the radio. The antenna consists of the antenna whip and a magnetic mount with cable. For narrow band radios, screw the antenna on in a clockwise direction. For spread spectrum radios, screw the antenna on in a counter-clockwise direction. The antenna works best when placed vertically and away from metal objects that may interfere with the radio signal. The best location for the magnetic mount on a fork lift truck is on the middle of the roof or cab cover, at least 20 centimeters away from the operator. Warning:

As a safety precaution, USERS ARE NOT PERMITTED TO CHANGE THE ANTENNA. 2.2.5 Installing The Cables Note: Make sure the cables run inside the roll cage. When installing the cables between the terminal and other devices, consider the following:

Ensure the drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring. Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating and physical damage. Protect cables by using grommets when cables pass through metal. Prevent cables and connectors from moving and loosening by using plastic straps. Keep the cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other potential hazards. 24 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Installing The Extension Power Cable Keep the cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may pull on the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle. Leave enough slack on the cables so that the terminal can be removed easily for maintenance. 2.2.6 Installing The Extension Power Cable The terminal has a short power cord and connector. The extension power cable

(P.N. 13985) should be connected from the terminals power cord to a fused power source capable of carrying the additional 3 Amps required by standard terminals or 5 Amps for freezer terminals. Note: For vehicles operating on 24 Volts or above, connections must be made as close to the vehicle battery as possible. If an unfused power source must be used, install the fuse assembly (P.N. 19440) provided with P.N. 13985. To connect the fuse assembly, push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive (red) lead of the power cable. Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery. Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery. Warning:

Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the 10-55 volt range. Note: When installing terminals on vehicles operating on 24 Volts and above, the diode assembly (supplied with the extension power cable 13985) must be used to reduce the AC ripple produced by the SCR traction motor controller on the vehicle. To connect the diode, push the male connector on the diode assembly into the female connector on the positive (red) lead of the power cable. If the fuse assembly is already installed, connect the diode assembly to the fuse assembly as described in the previous sentence. Connect the red wire from the diode assembly to a fused power source on the vehicle. It is recommended that all connections be secured with electrical tape or heat shrink to prevent contaminants from degrading the connection. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 25 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Basic Operation Of The Terminals 2.3 Basic Operation Of The Terminals Important: Any differences in operation between the 7035 hand-held and the 8255/8260 vehicle-mount terminals are explicitly indicated. The Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals are fully functional personal computers (PCs), compatible with the IBM AT (486) architecture. They normally come pre-loaded with DOS. These terminals are intended to be used in terminal emulation mode for real-time wireless data transaction processing. However, they can also be used stand-alone in batch mode. The remainder of this manual describes terminal operation as it applies to normal terminal emulation mode, utilizing wireless communication to a host computer. The operation of these terminals depends on the application software running on the host computer. The terminals interaction with the application depends on both the terminal operating system and the terminal hardware. This chapter outlines the unique features of the hardware. For more information on the terminal operating system, see Chapter 6: Setting Parameters. 2.3.1 Turning The Terminals On And Off 2.3.1.1 Turning On The 7035 The 7035 does not have a dedicated On/Off button. To turn the 7035 on:

7035 Hand-Held Press and hold down the <ENTER/ON> key for at least one second. Turning Off The 7035 Important:

Turning the 7035 off does not result in a complete reboot; rather, the terminal enters a power-saving, suspend mode (assuming that a value other than Disabled has been assigned to the power-saving parameter, Power Down - see page 99). When the terminal is turned on from suspend state, operation resumes within a few seconds. The terminal will emit a few beep sequences while it wakes from suspend state. 26 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation 8255 And 8260 Vehicle-Mounts To turn the 7035 off:

Press the <BLUE> key, and then press the <ENTER/ON> key. Important:

If the <BLUE> key is locked on, the terminal will not turn off. (Look for the word BLUE, displayed in uppercase characters in the status area at the bottom of the screen.) If this key is locked on, press it again to unlock it, and then press <BLUE>

<ENTER/ON> to turn the terminal off. 2.3.1.2 Both types of vehicle-mount terminals have on/off switches at the back of the unit. 8255 And 8260 Vehicle-Mounts Reach around to the back of the terminal toward your right, and press the On/Off switch I represents on and O represents off. 2.3.2 Resetting Terminals Note: Regardless of which type of terminal you are using, a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application. 2.3.2.1 To reset the 7035:

Resetting The 7035 Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds. A reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application. 2.3.2.2 To reset the 8255 or 8260:

Resetting The 8255 And 8260 Using the On/Off switch, turn the terminal off and back on again. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 27 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Display Menu 2.3.3 The Display Menu 01 Display Menu A B C Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt The start up, Display Menu is used to access the Parameters menu, the Tekterm application and the DOS prompt. Bypassing Tekterm At Terminal Bootup 2.3.3.1 Normally, the Tekterm application is launched automatically when the terminal is rebooted. To bypass Tekterm and launch the Display Menu:

As the terminal is rebooting, press the <ESC> key. If youre not quick enough with the <ESC> key and Tekterm is launched, press

<ALT> and type x to exit Tekterm and return to the Display Menu. If youre using a 7035 hand-held, press the <ORANGE> key, and then press

<ALT> and type x. 2.3.3.2 To launch the Parameters menu from the startup Display menu:

Launching And Exiting The Parameters Menu 8255/8260: Type the letter a. 7035: Press <ORANGE>, and then type the letter a. At this point, youll be asked to enter a password either a supervisory or Teklogix level password. Important:

If youre using a 7035 and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key to turn Alpha mode off before typing your password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator ORANGE is no longer displayed. To exit the Parameters menu and return to the Display menu Press <F2> the PREVIOUS key until the Display Menu is visible. 28 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Launching And Exiting Tekterm Launching And Exiting Tekterm 2.3.3.3 Normally, the Tekterm application an emulation is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on. If the Display Menu is on your screen:

8255/8260: Type the letter b to launch Tekterm. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter b. To exit Tekterm and return to the Display Menu:

8255/8260: Press <ALT> and type the letter x. 7035: Press <ORANGE> <ALT>, and type the letter x. Launching And Exiting DOS 2.3.3.4 To launch DOS from the Display Menu:

8255/8260: Type the letter c. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter c. At this point, youll be asked to enter a password either a supervisory or Teklogix level password. Important:

If youre using a 7035 and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key to turn Alpha mode off before typing your password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator ORANGE is no longer displayed. To exit DOS and return to the Display Menu:

8255/8260: Type start at the DOS prompt, and press <ENTER>, and press

<ESC> immediately. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing start, and press <ESC>

immediately. To exit DOS and return to the Emu.lations screen:

8255/8260: Type start at the DOS prompt, and press <ENTER>. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing start. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 29 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Keyboard 2.3.4 The Keyboard Note: Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard, the differences are noted. Refer to Figure 1.1 on page 7 for key locations. In addition, any differences in keyboard operation between the 7035 hand-held and the 8255/60 vehicle-mounts are explicitly indicated. The 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals are equipped with standard keyboard keys along with two colour keys an <ORANGE> key and a <BLUE> key to allow access to additional keys such as the extended function keys and the <CLR> key. Some of the most frequently-used standard keyboard keys along with the keys accessed using the

<ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys are described in this section. The Status Area 7035 Only 2.3.4.1 The 7035 terminal has a status area at the bottom of the terminal screen that indicates which mode keys are currently active. The key or keys pressed are displayed in lowercase letters at the bottom of the screen. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key, it is displayed as ctrl in the status area. The status area also indicates whether or not the function of a mode key has been locked on. Keys that have been locked on are displayed in the status area in uppercase letters. For example, if you press the <CTRL> key twice to lock it on, it is displayed as CTRL in the status area. Refer to Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only on page 40 and 41 for a description of all possible status area messages. 2.3.4.2 <ORANGE> And <BLUE> Keys The <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys provide a means of accessing additional keyboard options such as the CLR function or the alpha keys. On 7035 hand-held terminals, the <ORANGE> key is used primarily to access alphabetic characters, and on 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mounts, the <ORANGE> key is used to access function and macro keys. The <BLUE> key is used primarily for terminal control keys such as LCD contrast and beeper volume control. 30 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Standard Keys Important: When you press the <ORANGE> key only once, it is locked on by default. You need to press the <ORANGE> key a second time to unlock or turn it off. Refer to Key Lock Function on page 34 for a complete description of this function. KEEP IN MIND that you can change the default key lock function of the <ORANGE> key using the One-Shot Mode parameter (see One-Shot Mode on page 100). The functions that are accessed using the <ORANGE> or <BLUE> keys are colour coded in orange or blue print above the standard keys, indicating whether you must rst press the <ORANGE> or the <BLUE> key before accessing a function. As an example, to access the CLR function which is printed in blue characters above the <DEL> key:

Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <DEL> key. To access the alphabetic characters displayed in orange characters above the standard keys on the 7035:

Press the <ORANGE> key and then, press the appropriate alpha key. The Standard Keys 2.3.4.3 The <SHIFT> Key The <SHIFT> key is used to display uppercase letters and to access the punctuation marks displayed on the numeric keys. When this key is pressed, it is only active until the next alphanumeric key is pressed. For example, once you press <SHIFT>

and type the letter q, the letter is displayed in uppercase and the shift function turns off. Note: On 7035 hand-helds, press the <ORANGE> key to activate Alpha mode, and then press the <SHIFT> key to display uppercase alpha characters. Keep in mind that the <ORANGE> key is locked on after being pressed only once. To display all alpha characters in uppercase, lock the <SHIFT> key on by pressing it twice. To unlock the <SHIFT> key, press it a third time. For more details about the lock function, refer to Key Lock Function on page 34. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 31 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Standard Keys The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up, down, left and right. The cursor is the ashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear. Manual Panning Keys (Arrow Keys) If the content of a screen is too large to t in the margins of the terminal window, the contents can be panned or shifted to display information outside the margins. The 7035 and the 8255 and 8260 terminals allow both manual and automatic panning. The Panning parameter species when and how the screen contents should be shifted. Note: For details about Auto Panning, refer to Auto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom Margin on page 93. Manual panning shifting the contents of the screen using the <BLUE> key in combination with the <LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys relies on the values set in the X Increment and Y Increment parameters to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows (lines) to pan or shift. To access the X Increment and Y Increment parameters:

In the Parameters menu, position the cursor on the System option and press <F1>. Move the cursor down to Panning and press <F1>. Important: Only the X Increment and Y Increment parameters are used for manual panning. The remaining parameters in the Panning menu are used to specify auto panning margins. X Increment determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key. Y Increment determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the

<BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key. Type a value in the X Increment and Y Increment parameters. 32 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Standard Keys To pan the screen contents:

Press the <BLUE> key followed by the <RIGHT>, <LEFT>, <UP> or

<DOWN> arrow key to pan the entire screen of information. Note that pressing <BLUE> <LEFT> arrow pans the screen to the right, pressing

<BLUE> <RIGHT> arrow pans the screen to the left, and so on. Note: To more efciently pan the content of the screen, you may want to lock the <BLUE> key on by pressing it twice. You can then press any arrow key in any direction until the necessary information has been brought into view. When you have nished panning the information, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off. The <DEL/CLR> Key The <DEL> key (sometimes referred to as destructive backspace) moves the cursor one character to the left, erasing the incorrectly entered key stroke. This key operation is not consistent with the DELETE key on a PC keyboard. It is consistent with the PC BACKSPACE key. The CLR function clears the entire contents of the eld in which the cursor resides. To access the CLR function, press the <BLUE> key followed by the <DEL> key. There is no PC keyboard equivalent for this key. The <CTRL> Key The <CTRL> key modies the next key pressed and is application dependent. For example, in a macro eld, pressing <CTRL> l followed by the <ENTER>

key inserts the function of the <ENTER> key into the macro. In TESS and ANSI applications, dened <CTRL> key combinations perform specic actions. <CTRL>

key functions for each application are described in the appropriate chapters of this manual. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 33 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Key Lock Function The <ALT> Key This key provides access to alternate commands as dened by the application you are using. The <ESC> Key While in the Parameters menu, pressing the <ESC> key closes the current menu and displays the previous one. In an ANSI session, pressing this key sends an escape character to the host. In a TESS session, the <ESC> key has no effect. The <TAB> Key In a TESS application, pressing the <TAB> key moves the cursor into the next eld to the right. In an ANSI application, pressing the <TAB> key transmits a TAB character to the host. The <SPACE> Key Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters. The <SCAN> Key 7035 Only Pressing the <SCAN> key the yellow key with the star-burst scan symbol on it activates the scanner beam. It is situated in the top-centre of the keyboard for easy right- or left-handed access. Key Lock Function 2.3.4.4 The <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL>, <ORANGE> and <BLUE> keys have a lock function that allows the function of these keys to be locked on until you unlock or turn them off. Locking The <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL> Or <BLUE> Keys To lock the function of any of these keys on:

Press the appropriate key twice. Important:

The <ORANGE> key is the only key that locks on when pressed only once. KEEP IN MIND however that you can change the default key lock function of the <ORANGE> key using the One-Shot Mode parameter (see One-Shot Mode on page 100). 34 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Key Lock Function On 7035 hand-held terminals, an onscreen message is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate that a key is locked on. For example, when the <CTRL> key is locked on, the onscreen message CTRL is displayed in uppercase letters in the status area. For more information about status area indicators, refer to Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only on page 40. On 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals, LEDs are used to indicate the status of a key. When a key is locked on, the corresponding LED stays on until the key is unlocked. If youve only pressed a key once, the corresponding LED blinks until the key is no longer active. Unlocking The <SHIFT>, <ALT>, <CTRL> Or <BLUE> Keys To unlock or turn off any of these keys:

Press the locked key a third time. On 7035s, the onscreen message indicating the locked key e.g., SHIFT is cleared from the status area. On 8255s and 8260s, the corresponding LED turns off. Locking And Unlocking The <ORANGE> Key To lock this key on:

Press the <ORANGE> key once. To unlock or turn off this key:

Press the locked <ORANGE> key a second time. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 35 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Function Keys Softkeys The Function Keys Softkeys 2.3.4.5 The 7035, 8255 and 8260 all offer a total of 36 function keys. The function of each of these keys is dened in the application software. The rst four function keys

<F1> to <F4> on a 7035 and the rst six on a vehicle-mount <F1> to <F6> are referred to as softkeys. They are preprogrammed to perform specic actions in the menus. You dont need to memorize the table below. Softkey labels are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen to identify the function of each key. Function Key Softkey Functions

<F1>

<F2>

<F3>

<F4>

NEXT Displays the next sub-menu PREVIOUS Displays the previous menu. DEFAULT Restores all parameters to the factory settings even after <F4> has been pressed to save the changes made to parameters. SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value. Table 2.1 Softkeys The 7035 Hand-Held Accessing Function Keys 2.3.4.6 The 7035 has 36 function keys, the rst 12 of which are directly accessible on the keyboard. The remaining 24 require key combinations. Accessing Function Keys <F1> To <F12>

Function keys <F1> to <F12> are directly accessible by pressing the appropriate key on the keyboard that is, a key combination is not required to access these function keys. Accessing Ctrl Function Keys <F13> To <F24>

Accessing <F13> to <F24> requires pressing <CTRL> and one of the function keys, <F1> through <F12>. To access function key <F13>:

Press the <CTRL> key followed by <F1>. To access function key <F14>:

Press the <CTRL> key followed by <F2>, and so on. 36 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts Accessing Function Keys Accessing Shift Function Keys <F25> To <F36>

Accessing <F25> to <F36> requires pressing <SHIFT> and one of the function keys, <F1> through <F12>. To access function key <F25>:

Press the <SHIFT> key followed by <F1>. To access function key <F26>:

Press the <SHIFT> key followed by <F2>, and so on. The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts Accessing Function Keys 2.3.4.7 Vehicle-mount terminals have a total of 36 function keys, the rst six of which are directly accessible on the keyboard. The remaining 30 require key combinations. Accessing Function Keys <F1> To <F6>

The rst six function keys on vehicle-mounts are directly accessible from the keyboard. That is, they are dedicated function keys; a key combination is not required. <F1> to <F6> are the bright yellow keys located in the upper-left portion of the keyboard. Accessing Function Keys <F7> To <F12>

Youll nd these keys in orange print just above and to the left of the rst six alpha keys on the keyboard. The actual alpha key varies depending on the type of keyboard youre using QWERTY, ABC or AZERTY. On a QWERTY keyboard,

<F7> is accessible from the Q key, <F8> from the W key, and so on. On an ABC keyboard, <F7> is accessible from the A key, <F8> from the B key, and so on. Accessing these function keys requires that you press the <ORANGE> followed by the appropriate alpha key. For example, on a QWERTY keyboard:

To access <F7>, press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter q. To access <F8>, press the <ORANGE> key, and then type the letter w, and so on. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 37 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mounts Accessing Function Keys Accessing Function Keys <F13> To <F18>

To access these function keys, youll need to press the <CTRL> key in combination with one of <F1> through <F6>. For example:

To access <F13>, press the <CTRL> key, and then press <F1>. To access <F14>, press <CTRL> <F2>, and so on. Accessing Function Keys <F19> To <F24>

To access <F19> to <F24>, youll need to press the <CTRL> key, followed by the

<ORANGE> key and then, the appropriate alpha key. For example, on an ABC keyboard:

To access <F19> , press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and then type the letter a. To access <F20>, press <CTRL><ORANGE> and type the letter b, and so on. Accessing Function Keys <F25> To <F30>

To access these function keys, youll need to press the <SHIFT> key in combination with one of <F1> through <F6>. To access <F25>:

Press <SHIFT> <F1>

To access <F26>:

Press <SHIFT> <F2>, and so on. Accessing Function Keys <F31> To <F36>

Accessing these keys requires that you press the <SHIFT> key in combination with the <ORANGE> key and the appropriate alpha key. For example, on a QWERTY keyboard:

To access <F31>, press <SHIFT> <ORANGE> and then type the letter q. To access <F32>, press <SHIFT> <ORANGE> and then type the letter w, and so on. 38 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Macro Keys Creating Macros The Macro Keys Creating Macros 2.3.4.8 Important: A step-by-step description of how to program macros keys is detailed in Global Macros on page 150. 7035 hand-held terminals are equipped with four macro keys, and 8255/8260 vehicle-mounts with twelve. These keys can be programmed to insert a text string at the cursor position and can also be programmed to execute the function of the following keys: <ENTER>, <DEL>, <CLR> (<BLUE>-<DEL>), any function key including the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> function keys, and the arrow keys. A macro has 19 programmable characters (or positions). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently-used keystrokes, including executable keys. They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard. 2.4 The Indicators Teklogix terminals use LEDs (Light Emitting Diode), onscreen messages and beepers as indicators. 2.4.1 LEDs Transmit And Receive Two LEDs indicate the transmit and receive status of data. On the 7035, they are located on the left and right of the <SCAN> key. On the vehicle-mounts, the LEDs are located to the left on the keyboard and are labelled TX and RX The amber TX (transmit) LED ashes when the terminal transmits data. The green RX (receive) LED ashes momentarily during the boot process. After boot up, it ashes when the terminal receives data. (Note that if a Mobitex WAN radio is installed in your terminal, the Receive LED may occasionally blink even without a Mobitex network connection because the radio modem sometimes generates a Mobitex packet MPAK on its own,) Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 39 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only Key Shift LEDs 8255 And 8260 Only The 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals are equipped with additional LEDs that indicate whether or not a mode key is locked on. Mode keys include <CTRL>,

<ALT>, <SHIFT>, <ORANGE> and <BLUE>. When a key is locked on, the corresponding LED stays on solidly. If a key has been activated but is not locked on, the corresponding LED blinks. 2.4.2 Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only Onscreen indicators appear in the status area at the bottom of the terminal screen to indicate a variety of terminal conditions. Note: Only the 7035 hand-held terminal is equipped with a status area. The vehicle-mount terminals use LEDs to indicate various terminal states. Onscreen Indicator shift SHIFT ctrl CTRL Description A lowercase shift message indicates that the <SHIFT> key was pressed once. The next numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed displays the punctuation mark associated with that key. If both the <SHIFT> and <ORANGE> keys are pressed, the next letter typed appears in uppercase type. Subsequent alpha characters are presented in lowercase type. An uppercase SHIFT message indicates that the <SHIFT> key was pressed twice to lock the key function on. Any numeric key from 0 to 9 that is pressed produces the punctuation mark associated with that numeric key until the <SHIFT> key is unlocked or turned off by pressing it a third time. If the locked <SHIFT> key is used in conjunction with the <ORANGE> key, all subsequent letters typed appear in uppercase until the <SHIFT> key is unlocked by pressing it a third time. A lowercase ctrl message indicates that the <CTRL> key was pressed once. The next alphanumeric key pressed generates an ASCII control character. Sub-

sequent alphanumeric keys are presented as they appear on the keyboard. An uppercase CTRL message indicates that the <CTRL> key was pressed twice to lock the key function on. All alphanumeric keys pressed generate ASCII control characters until the <CTRL> key is pressed a third time to unlock it. 40 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Onscreen Indicators 7035 Only blue BLUE ORANGE orange Battery Gauge link LINK A lowercase blue message indicates that the <BLUE> key was pressed once; it remains active only until the next key is pressed. Any keyboard option coded in blue typeface on the terminal plastic becomes available. (Note: The One-Shot Mode parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behaviour of the

<BLUE> key so that it locks on after being pressed only once.) An uppercase BLUE message indicates that the <BLUE> key was pressed twice to lock this key function on. Keyboard options coded in blue typeface are available until the <BLUE> key is unlocked pressed a third time. (Note:

The One-Shot Mode parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behaviour of the <BLUE> key so that it locks on after being pressed only once.) An uppercase ORANGE message indicates that the <ORANGE> key was pressed once to lock it on. The alpha characters printed in orange typeface on the terminal plastic become available. Because it is assumed that the operator will want to enter a string of alpha characters quickly, this is the only key that is locked on by default after being pressed only once. KEEP IN MIND that you can change the default key lock function of the

<ORANGE> key using the One-Shot Mode parameter (see page 100). A lowercase orange message indicates that the <ORANGE> key was pressed once; it is active only until the next key is pressed. The alpha characters printed in orange typeface on the terminal plastic become available. (Note that the One-Shot Mode parameter (see page 100) can be used to alter the behav-

iour of the <ORANGE> key so that it locks on after being pressed only once.) This horizontal gauge indicates the charge level of the battery. A lowercase link message indicates that a radio link has been established but the link is currently in power-down mode, a mode that lowers the consumption of battery power. Note that the absence of a link indicator message (either uppercase or lowercase) indicates that a radio link has not been established. An uppercase LINK message indicates that the radio link is operational. Note that the absence of a link indicator message (either uppercase or lowercase) indicates that a radio link has not been established. Table 2.2 7035 Onscreen Indicators Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 41 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Softkeys 2.4.3 Softkeys Softkeys are function keys that are programmed to execute specic actions when pressed. Softkey labels are displayed on the terminal screens to identify the function of the softkeys. Table 2.1 on page 36 lists the functions of these softkeys. 2.4.4 The Battery Gauge (7035 Only) A horizontal bar graph, referred to as a battery gauge, is displayed in the status area of the 7035 terminal screen. It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal. The number on the right-hand side of the bar graph indicates the maximum capacity of the battery (in milliampere hours). When the battery capacity is low, the battery gauge blinks and the terminal beeps. Battery life is typically 8 hours minimum. Fast charge time for a Lithium-Ion battery is generally 2.5 hours. Refer to The 7967 Gang Charger on page 167 for battery charging details. 2.4.5 The Beeper The terminal beeper sounds under a variety of conditions. Some examples include:

a key is pressed, a keyboard character is rejected, the terminal is unlocked, bar code input is accepted or rejected, or an operators entry does not match in a match eld. The beeper also emulates the function of the PC speaker when running DOS applications. There are two ways to adjust the beeper volume by pressing the <BLUE>

key in combination with <F3> and <F4> or by assigning a value in the Volume parameter. Both are described in the sections directly following. Note: For instructions on setting beeper duration and frequency, refer to the section titled Sound on page 154. 42 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Beeper Volume <BLUE> <F3> And <F4>

2.4.5.1 Important: When you adjust the beeper volume using the <BLUE> <F3> and Beeper Volume <BLUE> <F3> And <F4>

<F4> key combination, the new setting is not saved to memory. If the terminal is shut off and powered up again, the volume adjustment is lost. When you adjust the volume using the Volume parameter, the change is saved to memory. The beeper volume can be adjusted using the <BLUE> key in combination with function keys <F3> and <F4>. To increase the beeper volume:

Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <F3> key. Repeat this key combination until the volume is sufcient for your needs. To work more efciently with these keys, refer to the note below. To decrease the beeper volume:

Press the <BLUE> key and then, press the <F4> key. Repeat this key combination until the volume is low enough for your needs. To work more efciently with these keys, refer to the note below. Note: To more efciently adjust the beeper volume, lock the <BLUE> key on by pressing it twice. You can then press the <F3> or <F4> function keys until the beeper volume suits your needs. When you have satisfactorily adjusted the beeper volume, press the

<BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off. 2.4.5.2 Important: When you adjust the volume using this parameter, the change is Beeper Volume The Volume Parameter saved to memory. To access the Volume parameter:

In the Parameters menu, position the cursor on the System option, and press <F1>. Position the cursor on the Volume parameter, and enter a value from 0 to 15. The higher the value, the louder the volume. Press <F4> to save the change. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 43 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Display 2.5 The Display Terminals with liquid crystal displays (LCDs) are equipped with backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions. The 7035 and 8260 terminals have LCDs as a standard feature. The 8255 can be ordered with a vacuum uorescent display (VFD) or a LCD. If the ambient light is low, the backlight will turn on after a key is pressed, after a scanner decode, or after data is received from the host. The backlight will remain on for a congurable duration. Refer to Backlight on page 94 for details about specifying how long the backlight will remain on. 2.5.1 Adjusting The Display Contrast Note: Contrast can only be adjusted on terminals with liquid crystal displays. There are two ways to adjust the contrast by pressing the <BLUE> key in combination with <F1> and <F2> or by assigning a contrast value at the Contrast parameter. 2.5.1.1 The LCD (liquid crystal display) contrast is adjustable using the <BLUE> key and function keys <F1> and <F2>. Important: When you adjust the screen contrast using the <BLUE> <F1>

Contrast Adjustment <BLUE> <F1> And <F2>

and <F2> key combination, the new setting is not saved to memory. If the terminal is shut off and powered up again, the contrast adjustment is lost. If you adjust the contrast using the Contrast parameter, the change is saved to memory. To darken the display:

Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F1>. Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efciently with these keys, refer to the note below. 44 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Contrast Adjustment Using The Contrast Parameter To lighten the display:

Press the <BLUE> key, and then press <F2>. Repeat this key combination until the contrast suits your needs. To work more efciently with these keys, refer to the note below. Note: To more efciently adjust the display contrast, lock the <BLUE> key on by pressing it twice. You can then press the <F1> and <F2>

function keys until you can easily read the contents of the terminal screen. When you have satisfactorily adjusted the contrast, press the <BLUE> key a third time to unlock or turn it off. 2.5.1.2 To access the Contrast parameter:

Contrast Adjustment Using The Contrast Parameter In the Parameters menu, position the cursor on the System option, and press <F1>. Position the cursor on the Contrast parameter, and enter a value from

-10 to 10. The greater the value assigned, the darker the screen contrast that is, entering a value of 63 results in a very dark screen. 2.5.2 Panning The 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals support autopanning as a default mode. The screen will pan as necessary to ensure the current cursor position is always visible. Note: Refer to Auto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom Margin on page 93 for a detailed description of setting parameters for autopanning. The terminals also support manual panning. Refer to Manual Panning Keys

(Arrow Keys) on page 32 for a description of manual panning. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 45 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only 2.6 The Integrated Scanner Option 7035 Only 2.6.1 Warnings For your own safety, it is critical that you comply with the following warnings:

1. Do not look into the laser beam. 2. CAUTION Using controls or adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specied herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. 3. CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard. 4. This product contains a laser scanner that emits less than 1.0 mW average radiant power at a wavelength of 650 or 680 nm. This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10, 1040.11 and DIN EN 60825: July 1993, and is classied as a Class 2 laser product. 2.6.2 Operation Of The Integrated Scanner Turn the terminal on.Wait until the unit has booted to Tekterm or a DOS prompt. Test the scanner by pointing it at a light coloured surface and pressing the scan key or the pistol grip trigger. The scanning beam should be energized and the warning indicator (shown in Figure 2.6) should be displayed. Important:

If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the dot will be enabled for a congurable time period, after which normal scanning begins. Refer to Dot Time on page 104 for details. Double-clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan. Note that the aiming dot is standard on long-range internal scanners. Aim at the bar code and press the scan key or the trigger. A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or two seconds have elapsed. For terminals using external scanners, the warning message can be turned off by setting the Scan Indic parameter to N. Refer to Scan Indic 7035 Only on page 104 for details. 46 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Operation Of The Integrated Scanner Note: 7035 terminals with internal scanners always display this warning indicator, even if the Scan Indic parameter is set to N. Figure 2.6 7035 Scanner Warning Indication Successful Decode If the scanner has successfully read the bar code:

The terminal beeps. The warning indicator disappears. Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working, investigate the following:

Is the terminal on?

Check that the bar code symbology being scanned is enabled for the terminal you are using. Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the bar code. Check the bar code to make sure it is not damaged. Try scanning a different bar code to verify that the problem is not with the bar code. Check that the bar code is within the proper range (see page 196). Does the terminal display the warning without scanning? This suggests a hardware problem in the 7035. The terminal can be congured to enable a function (such as <ENTER>) by pressing the trigger twice within a time period which is measured in milliseconds. See Click Time on page 103 for more details. This function is independent of the aiming dot override described earlier in this section, under Operation Of The Integrated Scanner on page 46 and only applies after a successful scan. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 47 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Scanning Techniques 2.6.3 Scanning Techniques The Scanner Angle Hold the scanner at an angle. Do not hold it perpendicular to the bar code. Do not hold the scanner directly over the bar code. In this position, light can reect back into the scanners exit window and prevent a successful decode. Scan Symbol Variations Scan the entire symbol. The scan beam must cross every bar and space on the bar code, including the margins on either end of the symbol. Hold the scanner farther away for larger bar codes. Hold the scanner closer for bar codes with bars that are close together. 2.7 Infrared (IrDA) Port 7035 Only The IrDA port is the small red window at the top of the 7035. This port transmits an infrared signal to:

A personal computer with an IrDA serial adaptor. A printer equipped with an IrDA adaptor. Any other IrDA compatible device. Important:

The IrDA port is connected to the COM1 serial port UART. A serial peripheral connected to COM1 cannot be used while the IrDA port is active. 2.8 Maintenance This section describes the measures that should be added to your equipment maintenance routine. 2.8.1 Cleaning All Terminals Terminals can be cleaned with mild detergent and water. Ink marks on the keyboard can be removed using a cotton ball moistened with isopropyl alcohol. Warning:

Do not immerse the unit in water. Never use strong cleansers. 48 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation 7035 Special Instructions 2.8.2 7035 Special Instructions The 7035 terminal has a plastic case that is susceptible to certain chemicals. It is partially soluble in aromatic or chlorinated hydrocarbons, and slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions. Avoid these solvents. Do not use Loctite brand or other adhesives to secure screws used to attach accessories to the case of the 7035 since the adhesive may damage the plastic (unless the adhesives are specically formulated for plastics). The 7035 scanner, IrDA port and display window should be cleaned with a mild detergent and water, as required. Never apply cleaners directly on the terminal use a cloth dampened with a mild detergent. Warning:

To avoid scratching the display and scan windows, do not use abrasive cleansers. 2.8.3 Maintaining The 7035 Battery Important:

Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions on page 161 outlines additional safety precautions. For detailed battery specications, refer to Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) on page 199. 7035 terminals use Lithium-Ion batteries that do not require conditioning. Each battery pack tracks its own capacity. A horizontal bar graph, referred to as a battery gauge, is displayed in the status area of the terminal screen. It keeps track of the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal. The operator is notied when the battery capacity is low. Battery life is typically 8 hours minimum. Fast charge time for a Lithium-Ion battery is generally 2.5 hours. Refer to The 7967 Gang Charger on page 167 for battery charging details. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 49 Chapter 2: Basic Assembly And Operation Maintaining The 7035 Battery Warning:

BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal. All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix ofces:

Teklogix Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario L5N 7J9 Canada Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf-Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Teklogix Corp. 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd. Suite 500 Erlanger, Kentucky USA 41018 DO NOT DISPOSE OF IN FIRE, mix with other battery types, charge above specied rate, connect improperly, or short circuit the battery. Any of these actions can result in overheating, explosion or leakage of cell contents. DO NOT INCINERATE or subject battery cells to temperatures in excess of 100C (212F). Such treatment can vaporize the liquid electrolyte causing cell rupture. Incineration may result in harmful emissions or explosion. DO NOT charge, use or store batteries below -30 C (-22 F). Batteries must be handled in accordance with all applicable state and federal laws and regulations. 50 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual TEKTERM 33 3.1 Introduction. 53 3.2 Launching Tekterm . 53 3.3 Working With Application Session Windows . 54 3.4 Radio Statistics Screens . 54 3.4.1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen. 54 3.4.2 802.11 Radio Statistics Screen. 55 3.4.3 TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen. 56 3.4.4 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen . 57 3.5 Resetting Radio Statistics . 60 3.6 Exiting Tekterm. 60 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 51 Chapter 3: Tekterm Introduction 3.1 Introduction Tekterm is a Teklogix DOS application resident on the 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals. It provides real-time terminal emulations that are compatible with Teklogix RF/DC systems. The Tekterm application allows the terminal operator to run up to four TESS and/or ANSI sessions. This application accepts input from the terminal keyboard or from a serial device such as a scanner and provides output to a serial device such as a printer. 3.2 Launching Tekterm Note: Normally, the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on If Tekterm is not already running on your terminal, you can launch it from the start-

up Display Menu. 01 Display Menu A B C Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt Tekterm is launched through the Emulations menu. To launch Tekterm:

8255/8260: Type the letter b. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing the letter b. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 53 Chapter 3: Tekterm Working With Application Session Windows 3.3 Working With Application Session Windows The window area in Tekterm contains the active application. It is possible to have one or more application sessions usually TESS or ANSI running at the same time. A TESS or ANSI session window occupies the entire terminal screen with other sessions present in the background. Only one application session window can be active at a time. To cycle through the application session windows:

Press <ALT> <F6>. Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active. 3.4 Radio Statistics Screens A radio statistics screen is automatically created when TekTerm is started and contains appropriate statistics for the installed radio. Depending on the type of radio installed in your terminal, the radios statistics screen may vary. 3.4.1 Viewing A Radio Statistics Screen As described in the previous section, "Working With Application Session Windows", if you are working with multiple sessions, pressing <ALT> <F6> cycles from session to session. The radio statistics screen is always treated as the rst session in your terminal. If youre running only one application session, pressing

<ALT> <F6> toggles back and forth between the application session and the radio statistics screen. If you are running multiple sessions, pressing <ALT> <F6> cycles from session to session; when you reach the last session you created, pressing <ALT> <F6>

displays the radio statistics screen. If you press <ALT> <F6> at the radio statistics screen, the rst application session becomes active once again. 54 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3: Tekterm 802.11 Radio Statistics Screen 3.4.2 802.11 Radio Statistics Screen Statistics CQ inpkts outpkts inbyte outbyte inerrs outerrs droppkt 100 1464 62 217590 5204 62 1 1 The statistics represented in the sample screen above are dened as follows:

CQ communication quality inpkts total number of received packets outpkts total number of sent packets inbyte total number of received bytes outbyte total number of sent bytes inerrs total number of received packets with errors outerrs total number of packet send errors droppkt total number of dropped packets Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 55 Chapter 3: Tekterm TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen 3.4.3 TRX7370 NB & 802.11 SS Radio Statistics Screen Statistics Connection cq 35 xm xi rm rp ch 20 sc 3 1 17 xr 4 xe 0 3 21 ra 106 pt 253 The statistics represented in the sample screen above are dened as follows:

cq communication quality ch operating channel sc scan state - indicates the current channel search state xm total number of transmitted messages xr xi xe total number of retransmissions total number of transmitted initialize messages total number of transmit failures (transmission late for response window) rm total number of received messages ra rp pt total number of received radio link aborts total number of received polls total number of poll timeouts 56 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3: Tekterm TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen 3.4.4 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen Statistics Mobitex Net C4D7 MAN 15100821 State LIVE/NO_TRANSFER (0:17) Chan Ar Bs Rssi(dBm) 41 31

-58

-96 Rx Tx 540 540 865 403 0 0 0 0 0 0 3904 mpak ok disc rejt rack Mobitex Net Example: Mobitex Net C4D7 The value indicated at the top of the radio statistics screen is the network identier of the Mobitex network for which the radio is congured. Possible values are:

Teklogix Mississauga private RAM UK 3B48 MODATA Czech Republic 4321 4BCC Mobicom Turkey 4BCC Massinfo Indonesia A2F7 A2F7 United Wireless Australia B433 C4D7 Cantel Canada C4D7 C4D7 EB90 EB90 EB90 SMTD Singapore Telcel Venezuela RAM Netherlands RAM Belgium Telenor Norway BellSouth Wireless Data US Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 57 Chapter 3: Tekterm TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen MAN Example: MAN 15100821 This number represents the Mobitex Address Number of the mobitex radio. State The values assigned here indicate the state of communication as follows:

Example: State LIVE/NO_TRANSFER (0:17) LIVE/

DIE/

communication between terminal and Mobitex network is allowed terminal is not allowed to communicate with the Mobitex network; contact the network operator

/OK communication between terminal and controller is OK

/NO_TRANSFER Teklogix Controller is not available (e.g. Controller is

/CONGEST

/ERROR

/ILLEGAL down, X.25 connection to Controller is interrupted);

contact person responsible for the Controller if the problem persists the Mobitex network is congested; contact the network operator if the problem persists technical error in the Mobitex network; contact the network operator if the problem persists conguration problem; verify the conguration of the Terminal rst (Controller MAN), if Terminal seems properly congured contact the network operator

(minutes:seconds) This element is present only if element b is not /OK; it indicates the remaining time until the terminal is /OK to communicate again. Ar Bs Rssi (dBm) Chan This string lists the base stations that the terminal can receive currently along with their signal strength; the rst base station in the list is always the current base. (Keep in mind that this entry may be blank if the terminal has no current base station.) The current base is always identied by area and base numbers. Depending on the Mobitex network conguration (frame mode or continuous mode), all other bases are identied by their area and base numbers or by a channel number. 58 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 3: Tekterm TRX7460 Mobitex WAN Radio Statistics Screen Example: Chan Ar Bs Rssi(dBm) Chan Ar Bs Channel number base transmit, mobile receive of a particular base station; the channel number is related to the actual frequency as follows:

400 MHz networks: frequency = 380 MHz + channel number

* 0.0125 MHz 900 MHz networks: frequency = 890 MHz + channel number

* 0.0125 MHz Area number. This value is used by network operators to help identify base stations. A group of base stations share one area number. Base station. This value identies a unique base station in a network. Rssi (dBm) Received signal strength represented in dBm. Receive (Rx) And Transmit (Tx) The values that appear below Rx and Tx indicate the number bytes received and transmitted in the data portion of an Mobitex packet (MPAK). This is an approximation of the number of bytes for which the user will be charged by the Mobitex network operator. Other Communication Indicators Transmit LED The amber Transmit LED to the left of the scan button blinks when a Mobitex packet (MPAK) is successfully transmitted over the radio link that is, the Mobitex base station has acknowledged the packet. Receive LED The green Receive LED to the right blinks when a Mobitex packet (MPAK) is received. (Note that the Receive LED may occasionally blink even without a Mobitex network connection because the radio modem sometimes generates an MPAK on its own. Link Indicator The Link indicator at the bottom-right corner of the display has three states:

Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 59 Chapter 3: Tekterm Resetting Radio Statistics 1. Blank The link onscreen message does not appear. The radio is outside the Mobitex network coverage area. 2. Link (lowercase) The radio is in the Mobitex network coverage area but the Teklogix controller could not be reached as yet; this may indicate problems with the X.25 link to the controller, or there may be problems with the controller itself (e.g., software malfunction). 3. LINK (uppercase) The radio is in the Mobitex network coverage area and the link to the Teklogix controller is operating. 3.5 Resetting Radio Statistics To reset the radio statistics to 0 (zero):

8255/8260: Type z. 7035: Press <ORANGE>, and type z. 3.6 Exiting Tekterm To exit Tekterm:

8255/8260: Press <ALT> and type x. 7035: Press <ALT><ORANGE> x. When you exit Tekterm, the Display Menu described in Launching Tekterm on page 53 appears on the terminal screen. 60 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual TESS OPERATIONS 44 4.1 Conguration . 63 4.2 Working With Multiple Sessions . 63 4.3 The Field Types. 64 4.4 Data Entry . 64 4.4.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement. 65 4.4.2 <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS. 66 4.4.3 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS. 67 4.5 Lock Messages . 69 4.6 Control Commands . 69 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 61 Chapter 4: TESS Operations Conguration TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the normal operating mode of Teklogix terminals. Teklogix protocol emulation software resident on network controllers or a Teklogix Software Development Kit (SDK) installed in the host converts host screens to TESS commands. The 9140 Wireless Gateway and the 9150 Access Point are also equipped with protocol emulation software. Note:

If the message RESET: Press Enter ashes at the bottom of the TESS screen when you turn on the terminal, press the <ENTER> key once. 4.1 Conguration Note: Each TESS session must have a unique name assigned to it. Refer to Applications on page 115 for more details. The process of renaming an existing TESS session and adding a new session is described in the section titled, Applications on page 115. A unique terminal number must be assigned in the Terminal # parameter for each TESS session. Refer to Terminal # in the section titled TESS Settings on page 126 for details. 4.2 Working With Multiple Sessions When Tekterm is launched, the rst congured session will appear in the screen area. To display the next session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running:

Press <ALT> <F6>. Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 63 Chapter 4: TESS Operations The Field Types 4.3 The Field Types Fixed Field displays information that cannot be changed from the keyboard. Entry Field allows the operator to enter data. This type of eld is usually shown as: ........ Match Field the host computer loads data in the format of the expected entry. If the entered data does not match the expected format, the terminal emits a long beep. Auto-tab Field automatically moves the cursor to the next eld when the current eld is lled. Bar code only Field is lled with data from a bar code reader. Keyboard entries are not accepted in this type of eld. Serial I/O Field is lled with data coming from a serial port. Keyboard input is not accepted in this type of eld. 4.4 Data Entry The terminal accepts data until the operator presses a key that sends a transmission to the host computer. The following actions cause the terminal to transmit:

Pressing a function key or the <ENTER> key (which is considered to be

<F0>) causes the terminal to transmit. Completing data entry into a transmit on entry eld also causes the terminal to transmit. There are several ways to congure the terminal to complete a data eld:

Pressing <ENTER> after entering data. Pressing a function key after entering data. Pressing an arrow key after entering data. Filling an auto-tab eld. 64 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 4: TESS Operations TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement 4.4.1 TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement The TESS editing modes and cursor movements in each type of mode are described in Table 4.1. Field mode Fcursor mode Insert mode Replace mode Press <CTRL> f to enter eld mode. In this mode, once data entry into a eld has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire eld. In eld mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys do not perform any functions. Pressing the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key completes the entry eld and then, moves the cursor to the previous or next eld. Press <CTRL> u to enter fcursor mode. In this mode, once data entry into a eld has been completed, the entry cannot be changed without retyping the entire eld. In fcursor mode, the <UP>, <DOWN>, <LEFT> and <RIGHT>

arrow keys move the cursor between elds. Press <CTRL> i to enter insert mode. In this mode, data can be entered between two characters that have been previously entered. In insert mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor right and left within a eld. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys complete the entry eld and move the cursor to the previous or next eld. Press <CTRL> r to enter replace mode. In this mode, data can be entered over previously entered characters. In replace mode, the <RIGHT> and <LEFT> arrow keys move the cursor to the right and left within a eld. The <UP> and <DOWN>

arrow keys complete the entry eld and move the cursor to the previ-

ous or next eld. Table 4.1 Edit Modes Note: When the Enter on Arr parameter is disabled (set to N), the <UP>

and <DOWN> arrow keys do not complete an entry eld. See page 136 for details about this parameter. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 65 Chapter 4: TESS Operations

<CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS 4.4.2 <CLR> Key Behaviour In TESS In a left justied eld, the <CLR> key erases all characters in the eld and places the cursor in the left most position of that eld. In a right justied eld, the <CLR> key erases all characters in the eld and places the cursor in the right most position of that eld. If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a eld that has been pre-lled by the host application, the eld is agged as modied and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. In both left and right justied elds, the <CLR> key erases charac-

ters beginning from the current cursor position to the end of the eld. The cursor remains in the same position in the eld. If the <CLR> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the eld, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a eld that has been pre-lled by the host application, the eld is agged as modied and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. In both left and right justied elds, the <CLR> key erases the characters from one character position to right of the cursor to the end of the eld. If the <CLR> key is pressed while cursor is in the right most position in the eld, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. If the <CLR> key is used to clear data in a eld that has been pre-lled by the host application, the eld is agged as modied and the updated information is sent to the host in the next response message. Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table. The <CLR>

key operates in the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode. Field mode Replace mode Insert mode Fcursor mode 66 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 4.4.3 <DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS Chapter 4: TESS Operations

<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS Field mode Replace mode In a left justied eld, the <DEL> key erases the character directly to the left of the cursor and then moves the cursor on position to the left. When the last character in the eld is deleted, the eld displays the value that it contained before it was modied, and the eld is opened. In a right justied eld, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned and shifts the remaining characters to the right by one position. When the last character in the eld is deleted, the eld displays the value that it contained before it was modied, and the eld is opened. If the <DEL> key is pressed when the eld is empty, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. The <DEL> key does not delete data pre-lled by the host applica-

tion. If the <DEL> key is pressed in a eld that has not been modied, the terminal emits a keyboard error beep. If data is entered into a eld, and it is then deleted before the eld is completed, the eld remains unmodied when the cursor leaves the eld or when the screen is transmitted. In a left justied eld, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned unless it is one position to the right of the last character in the string; in this case, the <DEL> key erases the charac-

ter to the left of the cursor. In a right justied eld, the <DEL> key erases the character on which the cursor is positioned. The remaining characters are then shifted to the left of the cursor, and the cursor is shifted to the right by one posi-

tion. If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of the eld, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right most position in the eld. When the last character in a eld is erased, the eld remains empty that is, any pre-lled data is not displayed. Pressing the <DEL> key in the empty eld results in a keyboard error beep. The <DEL> key can delete data pre-lled by the host application. If data is entered in a eld and is then deleted before the eld is com-

pleted, the eld remains unmodied when the cursor leaves the eld or when the screen is transmitted. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 67 Chapter 4: TESS Operations

<DEL> Key Behaviour In TESS In a left justied eld, the <DEL> function erases the character on which the cursor is positioned, unless it is at the right end of the char-

acter string; in this case, it erases the character to the left of the cursor. When the last character in a eld is erased, the eld remains empty, and any further <DEL> functions in the empty eld result in a key-

board error beep. In a right justied eld, the <DEL> function erases the character that is to the right of the cursor and then shifts the data remaining to the right one position. If the <DEL> key is pressed while the cursor is in the right-most character position of that eld, the cursor does not shift to the left when that character is erased; it remains in the right-most position in the eld. When the last character in a eld is erased, the eld remains empty i.e. any pre-lled data is not displayed. Pressing the DEL key in the empty eld sounds a keyboard error beep. The <DEL> key can delete data pre-lled by the host application. If data is entered into a eld and then deleted before the eld is com-

pleted, the eld remains unmodied when the cursor leaves the eld or when the screen is transmitted. Refer to Field Mode at the beginning of this table. The <DEL> key operates in exactly the same manner in Fcursor mode as it does in Field mode. Insert mode Fcursor mode 68 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 4: TESS Operations Lock Messages 4.5 Lock Messages When information is transmitted to the host computer, the keyboard locks to prevent further data entry until the terminal receives a reply. A locked state is indicated by either LOCK-B (base) or LOCK-H (host) in the lower left corner of the display. When the reply is received by the terminal, the lock message disappears and the keyboard can be used again. 4.6 Control Commands A group of <CTRL> key commands can be used within TESS to dictate how the terminal will operate under a variety of conditions.

<CTRL> p Reprints the last print page sent from the host. This key combination will not print anything if a print page from the host was not previously received at the terminal.

<CTRL> s Displays the terminal status continuously. Below is a sample status line as it might appear at the bottom of your terminals screen:

Lock-B/Lock-H application name fld enh

<CTRL> w Displays the terminal when the terminal is in Lock B or Lock H mode. The status line would be similar to the sample above.

<CTRL> t Displays the terminal status with the terminal number instead of the name. Lock-B/Lock-H terminal nn rep

<CTRL> h Displays a menu of available hosts. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 69 ANSI OPERATIONS 55 5.1 Conguration . 73 5.2 Sending Data To The Host . 73 5.3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys . 74 5.4 Working With Sessions . 75 5.4.1 Establishing A New Session . 75 5.4.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions . 75 5.4.3 Closing A Session . 76 5.4.4 Printing A Screen . 76 5.4.5 Smart Echo Disabling . 76 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 71 Chapter 5: ANSI Operations Conguration The Teklogix terminal in ANSI mode operates like most other ANSI terminals. This means software that supports ANSI terminals requires little or no changes. 5.1 Conguration To congure the terminal for ANSI mode, the Name and Type of session in this case, ANSI must be specied in the Applications menu. This menu is described in the section titled, Applications on page 115. Next, a unique terminal number must be assigned using the Terminal # parameter. This number should be unique across the entire system that is, each terminal and each application session in each terminal across your system must have a unique number assigned. This parameter is described in the section titled ANSI Settings on page 116. When Tekterm is launched, the rst congured session will appear in the application. To display the next session in Tekterm when multiple sessions are running:

Press <ALT> <F6>. Each time this key combination is pressed, the next session window becomes active. 5.2 Sending Data To The Host Teklogix terminals running ANSI transmit characters to the host as soon as they are typed. The terminal also responds immediately to the device attribute requests CSIc, CSI0c and ESCZ. Note: For a more detailed description of the parameter settings for ANSI, refer to ANSI Settings on page 116. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 73 Chapter 5: ANSI Operations Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 5.3 Teklogix Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys The Teklogix keyboard differs from most ANSI terminals. Table 5.1 maps the equivalent VT220 keys. Teklogix Key

<UP> arrow

<DOWN> arrow

<RIGHT> arrow

<LEFT> arrow

<F1>-<F4>

<F5>

<F6>-<F10>

<F11>

<F12>

<F13>

<F14>

<F15>

<F16>

<F17>-<F20>

<F21>

<F22>

<F23>

<F24>

<F25>

<F26>

<F27>-<F36>

Equivalent VT220 Key Up arrow Down arrow Right arrow Left arrow PF1-PF4 None F6-F10 F11 (ESC) F12 (BS) F13 (LF) F14 Help Do F17-F20 Find Insert Here Remove Select Previous Screen Next Screen None Table 5.1 Teklogix Terminal Keyboard And VT220 Equivalent Keys 74 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 5: ANSI Operations Working With Sessions 5.4 Working With Sessions Important: Use only lowercase letters when entering commands at the TCP > prompt. 5.4.1 Establishing A New Session 8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. 7035: Press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt:

Type tel in lowercase letters followed by the Host Name or IP address. Press <ENTER>. Log in as usual to begin working with the new session. 5.4.2 Listing Sessions And Moving To Other Sessions To list the current sessions:

8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. 7035: Press <CTRL><ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt:

Type sess in lowercase letters, and press <ENTER>. To move to another session:

At the TCP> prompt, type sess in lowercase letters followed by the session number to which you want to move. e.g., Type sess 2 to move to session 2. Press <ENTER>. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 75 Chapter 5: ANSI Operations Closing A Session 5.4.3 Closing A Session To close a session:

8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters followed by the session number you want to close. e.g., Type cl 2 to close session 2. Press <ENTER>. 7035: Press <CTRL><ORANGE>, and type a lowercase a. At the TCP> prompt, type cl in lowercase letters. Press <ORANGE> again to turn Alpha mode off, and then type the session number you want to close. e.g., Press <ORANGE>, type cl , press <ORANGE> again, and type 2 to close session 2. Press <ENTER>. 5.4.4 Printing A Screen To print each line of a screen with a CR/LF between each line:

8255/8260: Press <CTRL>, and type p. 7035: Press <CTRL> <ORANGE>, and type p. The screen will be printed using the port congured as Print. 5.4.5 Smart Echo Disabling In some circumstances like entering a password you many want to temporarily disable smart echo, disguising the characters you type with . (periods). 8255/8260: Press <ALT> <ORANGE>, and type a . (period). Type the necessary information using the terminal keyboard, and then press

<ENTER> to return to smart echo mode. 7035: Press <ALT>, and then type a . (period). Type the necessary information, and then press <ENTER> to return to smart echo mode. 76 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual SETTING PARAMETERS 66 6.1 Using The Parameter Manager . 81 6.2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu . 81 6.3 Working With Menus . 83 6.3.1 Softkey Function Keys . 83 6.3.2 Displaying Sub-Menus. 84 6.3.3 Numeric Parameters . 84 6.3.4 Y/N Parameters. 85 6.3.5 Alpha Parameters. 85 6.3.6 String Entry Parameters . 85 6.3.6.1 Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys . 86 6.3.6.2 Adding Additional ASCII Characters . 86 6.3.6.3 Entering Information In A String Entry Field . 86 6.3.7 Saving Changes To Parameters . 87 6.3.8 Resetting The Terminal

. 87 6.3.8.1 Resetting The 7035 . 87 6.3.8.2 Resetting The 8255 And 8260 . 87 6.3.9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values . 87 6.4 Terminal Parameters . 88 6.4.1 Displaying The Parameters Menu . 88 6.5 System . 90

. 90 6.5.1 Volume And Contrast 6.5.2 Key Click. 91 6.5.3 Typematic Rpt . 91 6.5.4 Panning. 92 6.5.5 Backlight . 94 6.5.5.1 7035 Backlight Parameters . 94 6.5.5.2 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters . 95 6.5.6 Code Page . 95 6.5.7 Font Size North American And European . 96 6.5.8 Font Size Chinese And Korean . 97 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 77 6.5.9 Palette Remap. 98 6.5.10 Watchdog Timer . 99 6.5.11 Power 7035 Only . 99 6.5.12 One-Shot Mode . 100 6.6 Scanner . 101 6.6.1 Type . 101 6.6.2 Options . 102 6.6.2.1 Translate. 102 6.6.2.2 Other Options . 103 6.6.3 Barcode . 105 6.6.3.1 Code 39 . 105 6.6.3.2 Code 128 . 107 6.6.3.3 EAN 13 . 108 6.6.3.4 EAN 8 . 110 6.6.3.5 UPC A. 111 6.6.3.6 UPC E . 112 6.6.3.7 Codabar . 113 6.6.3.8 Code 93 . 113 6.6.3.9 Code 11 . 113 6.6.3.10 I 2 of 5 . 114 6.6.3.11 MSI/PLESSY . 114 6.6.3.12 D 2 of 5 . 115 6.7 Applications . 115 6.7.1 ANSI Settings. 116 6.7.1.1 Host Conn . 117 6.7.1.2 Screen . 117 6.7.1.3 Char Set North American And European . 119 6.7.1.4 Char Set Chinese And Korean . 121 6.7.1.5 Video . 122 6.7.1.6 Transmit . 123 6.7.1.7 Keyboard . 124 6.7.2 Serial . 126 6.7.3 TESS Settings. 126 6.7.3.1 Host Conn . 127 6.7.3.2 Screen . 127 6.7.3.3 Characters . 129 6.7.3.4 Char Set . 130 78 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 6.7.3.5 Serial

. 133 6.7.3.6 Tests . 134 6.7.3.7 Scanner . 134 6.7.3.8 Fields . 136 6.7.4 Features . 138 6.8 View Manager . 139 6.9 Ports Serial 1 And Console 2 . 141 6.9.1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options . 141 6.9.2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings. 142 6.9.3 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad . 144 6.9.4 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-See . 144 6.9.4.1 Scan-See Parameters . 144 6.9.4.4 Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport" . 145 6.10 Global Macros . 150 6.10.1 Displaying The Global Macros Menu. 150 6.10.2 Displaying The Global Macros Table . 151 6.10.3 Choosing An ASCII Character . 152 6.10.4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters . 152 6.10.5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros . 153 6.11 Network . 153 6.12 Radio. 154 6.13 Sound . 154 79 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Using The Parameter Manager 6.1 Using The Parameter Manager Warning:

Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difculties. Generally, parameters are congured for each site during installation. The Parameter Manager provides access to the parameter menus. The values assigned to the parameters can be viewed and adjusted to optimize communication at the site in which a terminal is operating. 6.2 Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu Normally, the Tekterm application is automatically launched when the terminal is turned on. To launch the Parameters menu, you rst need to exit the Tekterm application:

8255/8260: Press <ALT>, and type the letter x. 7035: Press <ALT> <ORANGE>, and type the letter x. The start up Display Menu appears on the terminal screen. From this menu, you can launch the Parameters menu, relaunch the Tekterm application, or go to the DOS prompt. 01 Display Menu A B C Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt To access any of these options, type the letter corresponding to the item you want to access. To launch the Parameters menu:

8255/8260: Type the letter a. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing a. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 81 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Exiting Tekterm And Accessing The Display Menu A Password screen is displayed. Password

. Note: A password is not requested when the terminal emulation application is launched. A supervisory or a Teklogix level password is required to display the complete Parameters menu or to go to the DOS prompt. Important:

If youre using a 7035 hand-held and your password consists of numeric rather than alphabetic characters, remember to press the <ORANGE> key a second time to turn it off before entering your numeric password. Check the status area at the bottom of the screen to make sure the onscreen indicator ORANGE is no longer displayed. Type your password, and press <ENTER>. When the correct password is entered, a Change screen is displayed. Change

. Do not enter a value in the Change screen if you do not want to change your password. To display the Parameters menu without changing your password:

Press <ENTER> at the Change screen. 82 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Working With Menus Changing A Password When you type your password correctly in the Password screen, the Change screen is displayed. A password can have up to six alphanumeric characters and is case sensitive. It is set at the factory to 123456. To change your password:

Type the new password in the Change screen, and press <ENTER>. If you change your password, set all the terminals to the same password, write it down, and keep it in a secure place. If the password is lost, the parameters can only be changed by Teklogix personnel. 6.3 Working With Menus All parameters are listed in menus. The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys are used to move the cursor up and down the current menu. The currently selected parameter name is displayed in reverse video. To help you work with the parameters and menus, a set of pre-programmed function keys <F1> through <F4> can be used to move back and forth between menus and save changes made to any parameters. There are four types of parameters: numeric, Y/N, alpha and string entry. In addition, some menus have sub-menus attached to them. This section of the manual describes how to work with all types of parameters and sub-menus. 6.3.1 Softkey Function Keys To speed the process of moving through menus and changing parameters, function keys <F1> to <F4> have been programmed to perform specic actions. Table 6.1 describes these function keys. Function Key

<F1>

<F2>

<F3>

<F4 Softkey Function NEXT Displays the next sub-menu PREV Displays the previous menu. DEFLT Restores parameters to default settings even after pressing <F4> to save the changes. SAVE Saves a change to a parameter value. Table 6.1 Softkeys Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 83 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Displaying Sub-Menus 6.3.2 Displaying Sub-Menus The character appearing to the right of the menu item indicates that it has a sub-menu. Displaying Sub-Menus To display a sub-menu:

Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the menu item with the sub-menu you want to display. Press <F1> the NEXT menu function key. Returning To The Previous Menu Press <F2> the PREV function key, or Press <ESC>. 6.3.3 Numeric Parameters Numeric parameters are displayed in reverse video. To increment or decrement a number:

Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys, or Type the desired number in the eld. Negative values are entered by typing a - (minus) sign and then the number. Press <ENTER>. Each numeric parameter has a preset range of numbers assigned to it for example, a preset range of 1 through 10. If you attempt to enter a number which either exceeds 10 or falls below 1, the incorrect value will be rejected the original value for this parameter, if any, will be displayed. 84 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Y/N Parameters 6.3.4 Y/N Parameters Y/N parameters can only be enabled (Y) or disabled (N). To enable or disable a Y/N parameter:

Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key once, or Type y to enable or n to disable the parameter. If youre using a 7035, remember to press the <ORANGE> key before typing y or n. Some Y/N parameters have sub-menus. For these parameters, a double right arrow () appears next to the Y or N. 6.3.5 Alpha Parameters Alpha characters appear in reverse video in this type of parameter. The allowable values for this type of parameter consist of a predetermined set of acceptable letters or words. To cycle through the set:

Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow keys. 6.3.6 String Entry Parameters Important: For detailed information about using string entry elds to program macro keys, refer to Global Macros on page 150. A sequence or string of characters can be entered in this type of parameter. When a string entry parameter contains data, it is displayed in reverse video. (Empty elds are not displayed in reverse video.) The methods that can be used to enter information in string entry parameters are described in this section. In string entry parameters, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and

<DEL> keys have the following functions:

The <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry elds in the direction of the arrow.

<ENTER> completes the entry eld.

<DEL> deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

<CLR> (key combination <BLUE> <DEL>) clears the entire eld. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 85 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys Choosing An ASCII Character With The Arrow Keys 6.3.6.1 Important: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off!

By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not directly accessible from the keyboard. The ASCII sets differ slightly depending on the type of terminal youre using. 7035: / < > % ^ & ` ~ | [ ] { } " ' ? = + ;

8255/8260: ^ & ~ | [ ] { } "

Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one. Adding Additional ASCII Characters 6.3.6.2 When youve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same eld, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry eld, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If youve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the eld, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right. To add another ASCII character in the string entry eld, next to the one youve already chosen:

Type a numeric character for example, type the number 7. Next, press the <DEL> key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character. Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character. Entering Information In A String Entry Field 6.3.6.3 In addition to using the xed set of ASCII values assigned to this type of parameter, you can also type text in a string entry eld. Type the required text in the string entry eld including letters, numbers and symbols. Press <ENTER> to save the text. 86 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Saving Changes To Parameters 6.3.7 Saving Changes To Parameters Whenever a parameter value is altered, the new value must be saved. To do this:

Press <F4> the SAVE function key. If a parameter value is changed and the menu exited before the change is saved, a dialog box appears asking whether or not the operator wants to save the changes. 6.3.8 Resetting The Terminal Note: Regardless of the type of terminal you are using, a reset will result in a complete reboot of the unit. When the terminal is reset, it reboots to the Tekterm application and parameter changes take effect. 6.3.8.1 To reset a 7035:

Resetting The 7035 Press and hold down the <BLUE> key and the <ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds. 6.3.8.2 To reset an 8255 or 8260:

Resetting The 8255 And 8260 Using the On/Off switch, turn the terminal off and back on again. 6.3.9 Resetting Parameters To Default Values Important: When <F3> the DEFAULT key is pressed, all parameter values revert to the factory defaults, including those values that youve changed and saved. Press <F3> the DEFAULT function key to reinstate the default parameter values. Press <F4> the SAVE function key to save the changes. Reset the terminal. See "Resetting The Terminal" above. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 87 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Terminal Parameters 6.4 Terminal Parameters Warning:

Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difculties. Generally, parameters are congured for each site during installation. The Parameters menus can only be accessed by individuals with the proper security password. Security is divided into two levels: Supervisory and Teklogix Personnel passwords. Important: Only individuals with a supervisory or Teklogix personnel level password can access and change these parameters. 6.4.1 Displaying The Parameters Menu The Parameters application is launched from the start up Display Menu. If your terminal is currently in the Tekterm application:

8255/8260: Press <ALT>, and type the letter x. 7035: Press <ALT><ORANGE>, and type the letter x to exit Tekterm. The Display Menu appears on your screen. 01 Display Menu A B C Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt 88 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Displaying The Parameters Menu To display the Parameters menu from the startup Display menu:

8255/8260: Type the letter a. 7035: Press the <ORANGE> key before typing a. Parameters System Scanner Applications View Manager Ports Global Macros Network Radio Sound The Parameters menu is a rst level menu that contains parameters for the conguration and customization of a terminal. To access sub-menus attached to these parameters:

Use the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys to position the cursor on the appropriate menu item. Press <F1> the NEXT key to display the sub-menu. To display the previous menu:

Press <F2> the PREVIOUS key, or Press the <ESC> key. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 89 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters System 6.5 System The parameters listed under the System menu allow you to customize terminal attributes such as volume, contrast and font size. System 9 Volume

-5 Contrast Key Click Y Typematic Rpt Y Panning Backlight 850 Code Page Font Size Palette Remap Watchdog timer 0 Power One-Shot Mode Range 0..15

-10..10 see text see text see text see text 437-850 see text see text 0..30 see text see text Note: The Code Page parameter is not available in the Chinese and Korean versions of this software. 6.5.1 Volume And Contrast Both the terminal beeper volume and the screen contrast can be adjusted using the

<BLUE> key in combination with function keys <F1> to <F4>. However, these changes are not saved to memory that is, when the terminal is reset, any volume and contrast adjustments are lost. For information on manual beeper volume adjustments, refer to Beeper Volume <BLUE> <F3> And <F4> on page 43. For details on manual contrast adjustments, refer to Contrast Adjustment

<BLUE> <F1> And <F2> on page 44. Adjustments made to the terminal beeper and the display using the Volume and Contrast parameters are saved to memory so that if the terminal is turned off or reset, the adjustments are saved. Volume The Volume parameter is used to adjust the beeper volume of the terminal beeper. The higher the value entered, the louder the beeper volume of the terminal. When a volume adjustment is made using this parameter, it is saved to memory. 90 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Key Click Contrast Note: The Contrast parameter is not available for 8255 terminals equipped with vacuum uorescent displays. This parameter is used to adjust the terminal screen contrast. The higher the value assigned, the darker the screen contrast. 6.5.2 Key Click Key click Tone Duration 2675 75 Range 200-5000 25-150 The parameters provided in the Key Click sub-menu are used to adjust the sound emitted from the terminal when a key is pressed. When Key Click is set to Y, an audible sound is emitted from the terminal with each key pressed. Setting this parameter to N disables the key click sound. Tone The value entered in the Tone parameter determines the frequency of the key clicks and is measured in Hz. The higher the value, the higher the pitch. Duration The value entered in the Duration parameter measures the length of time a sound is emitted when a key is pressed and is measured in milliseconds. 6.5.3 Typematic Rpt Typematic rpt Delay 500 ms Rate 5 cps Test Range see text 1 cps..10 cps see text When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), pressing and holding down an alphanumeric key will cause that character to repeat until the key is released. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 91 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Panning Delay The value assigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters. The allowable values are: 150 ms, 200 ms, 250 ms, 300 ms, 350 ms, 400 ms, 450 ms and 500 ms. Rate The value assigned for the Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second (cps). The allowable values range from 1 cps to 10 cps. Test This parameter is provided as a test eld. Once youve enabled (set to Y) the Typematic rpt parameter and assigned a Delay and Rate value, position your cursor in this eld, press and hold down an alphanumeric key to test the rate of character repeats. 6.5.4 Panning Important:

The Auto Pan feature that is tailored by these parameters is used by the DOS command line or by applications that do not provide auto panning (e.g., the Parameters menus). Tekterm is equipped with its own panning capabilities and does not execute panning as described in this section. Panning y Auto pan 5 Left margin Right margin 1 Bottom margin 1 X increment 1 1 Y increment Range Y/N 0-25 0-25 0-20 1-40 1-12 92 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Panning Auto Pan, Left Margin, Right Margin And Bottom Margin Note: The X increment and Y increment parameters are used for manual panning only. Auto panning relies on the values set in the Left margin, Right margin and Bottom margin parameters. Auto Pan is used to enable and disable auto panning. When it is enabled

(set to Y), the values set in the Left Margin, Right Margin and Bottom Margin are used to determine the number of characters that will always be visible to the left and right of the cursor and the number of lines that will always be visible below the cursor. If the cursor moves beyond the value specied, the entire contents of the screen are panned or shifted to comply with the values set in the margin parameters. Example: The value set in the Left Margin and Right Margin is 2. The value set in the Bottom Margin is 3. This species that 2 characters must always be displayed to the left and right of the cursor, and 3 lines must always be displayed below the cursor (Bottom Margin). The contents of the screen will not auto pan or shift until the cursor is moved past the minimum specied in a margin parameter. If the cursor is moved past the Left Margin setting, the screen pans to the right. If the cursor moves past the Right Margin setting, the screen pans to the left. If the cursor is moved beyond the Bottom Margin setting, the screen contents pan up. X Increment And Y Increment Manual panning shifting the contents of the screen using the <BLUE> key in combination with the <LEFT>, <RIGHT>, <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys relies on the values set in X Increment and Y Increment to determine the number of columns (spaces) and rows (lines) to pan or shift. X Increment determines the number of spaces the screen pans to the left or right when the <BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow key. Y Increment determines the number of lines the screen pans up or down when the

<BLUE> key is pressed followed by the <UP> or <DOWN> arrow key. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 93 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Backlight 6.5.5 Backlight Backlight parameters vary depending on the type of terminal used 7035 hand-held 8255 or 8260 vehicle-mount. 6.5.5.1 7035 Backlight Parameters Backlight Range Threshold On Time Intensity 192 60 sec 0 0..255 see text

-5..5 Threshold The 7035 is equipped with automatic light sensing. The value entered in this parameter determines how dark the ambient light needs to be before the backlight turns on. The higher the value, the darker the ambient light must be before the backlight turns on. On Time The value entered in this parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed, a scan is completed or data is received. On Time is measured in seconds. The allowable values are: Disabled, 5 secs, 10 secs, 15 secs, 20 secs, 30 secs, 60 secs and Always On. Choosing Disabled turns the backlight feature off. Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly, whether or not a key is pressed or data is received. Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the 7035 terminal screen. The higher the value, the greater the screen light intensity. 94 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters 6.5.5.2 8255 And 8260 Backlight Parameters Backlight Screen Keyboard Always On 10 secs Range see text see text Screen Important:

8255 terminals with vacuum uorescent displays do not require a Screen backlighting option. They offer only the Keyboard backlighting option. The value assigned for the Screen parameter determines how long the backlight will stay on after a key is pressed, a scan is completed or data is received. This parameter is measured in minutes. The allowable values are: 10 mins, 15 mins, 20 mins, 30 mins, 60 mins and Always On. Choosing Always On sets the backlight to stay on constantly, whether or not a key is pressed or data is received. Keyboard This parameter determines how long the keyboard backlight stays on after a key is pressed. The Keyboard parameter is measured in seconds and minutes. The allowable values are: Disabled, 5 secs, 10 secs, 20 secs, 30 secs, 1 min, 2 mins, 4 mins and Always On. As you may have guessed, Disabled turns off the keyboard backlight while Always On sets the backlight to stay on at all times. 6.5.6 Code Page The code page les accessible from this parameter contain the entire font library supported by your terminal. It is set to code page 850 by default as this page supports a large variety of characters useful in Canada, the U.S. and Europe. The U.S. code page is 437. Refer to a Microsoft Windows and MS DOS or an IBM DOS code page reference book for code page details. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 95 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Font Size North American And European 6.5.7 Font Size North American And European Important: Because the 8260 vehicle-mount terminal is equipped with a full size, 25 x 80 display, full screens can easily be displayed without reducing the font size. For this reason, the 8260 does not provide a Font menu . This parameter is used to change the font size displayed on the 7035 hand-held terminal and the 8255 vehicle-mount terminals. Font sizes are represented as lines x characters. Font availability varies depending on the type of terminal in use. Each terminal type offers only those font sizes that it supports. Press the <LEFT> or <RIGHT> arrow keys to scroll through the available fonts sizes. 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display Fonts 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) 10x51 10x42 10x32 5x42 5x32 8255 Liquid Crystal Display Fonts 8255 Liquid Crystal Display

(LCD) 25x80 14x80 12x80 96 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7035 Fonts Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Font Size Chinese And Korean 7035 Display 18x32 18x26 18x20 10x26 10x20 9x20 6.5.8 Font Size Chinese And Korean Important: Chinese and Korean characters are double-byte characters one double-byte character occupies two single-width character positions. The font sizes available for the Chinese and Korean character sets are measured in single-width characters. 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) Fonts Chinese Font Sizes 8255 VFD 4x32 Korean Font Sizes 8255 VFD 5x32 8255 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Fonts Chinese Font Sizes 8255 LCD 11x80 Korean Font Sizes 8255 LCD 12x80 8260 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Fonts Chinese Font Sizes 8260 LCD 25x80 Korean Font Sizes 8260 LCD 25x80 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 97 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Palette Remap 7035 Fonts Chinese Font Sizes 7035 8x20 Korean Font Sizes 7035 9x20 6.5.9 Palette Remap A DOS-based application generally uses a VGA colour palette. On Teklogix terminals, these colours are converted to grey scale with varying degrees of success. While grey scale displays well on a 7035 hand-held terminal, it does not display as well on an 8255 LCD or an 8260 vehicle-mount terminal. The Palette Remap parameter allows you to substitute default application colours with colours that will display well on your Teklogix terminal. Note: All built-in Teklogix software uses only intense white (VGA index 15) and black (VGA index 0), both of which display well on Teklogix terminals. The values on the left-hand side of the Palette Remap screen represent the original VGA palette; these values cannot be changed. The values on the right-hand side of this screen can be altered to remap colours as they reach your Teklogix terminal display. For example, suppose that you want your terminal to always replace the colour red with the colour black. You need to change the red colour value of 4 to the black colour value of 0. Palette Remap Black Blue Green Cyan Red Magenta Brown Lt Grey Dark Grey Lt Blue Lt Green Lt Cyan Lt Red Lt Magenta Yellow White

[0]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

[e]

[f]

[0]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

[e]

[f]

98 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Watchdog Timer To remap a colour:

Highlight the colour you want to remap, and press the <RIGHT> or

<LEFT> arrow key until the colour value you want is displayed. Press <F4> to save your changes, and reset the terminal. (See page 87 for terminal reset information.) 6.5.10 Watchdog Timer Setting this parameter to Enabled signals the terminal to reboot automatically whenever control of the terminal is not periodically returned to a system monitor program (running in the background). This allows for recovery from programs that crash or hang the terminal. If Watchdog Timer is set to Disabled, the terminal will not reboot automatically under the circumstances described above. 6.5.11 Power 7035 Only Power Power down Power off 4 mins 1 hour Range see text see text Power Down When the amount of time specied in the Power Down parameter expires without any activity, the terminal goes into suspend mode, a power-saving mode. Pressing any key reinstates full power mode. The possible values for this parameter are: Disabled, 1 min, 2 mins, 4 mins, 8 mins, 16 mins, 32 mins and 60 mins. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 99 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters One-Shot Mode Power Off Important:

The value assigned for this parameter is not recognized until the value in the Power Down parameter has expired. When the time specied for the Power Off parameter has expired, the terminal turns off. A full reboot is required to return the terminal to full operating mode. The allowable values for this parameter are: Disabled, 1 min, 8 mins, 16 mins, 32 mins, 1 hour, 2 hours and 4 hours. This parameter timeout occurs whether the terminal is turned on or off. That is, even if the terminal is switched off, it will return to its last operating state when switched on. If it is left off for the time period specied by this parameter, a full reboot will occur when switched back on. 6.5.12 One-Shot Mode One Shot Mode N Y Orange Key Blue Key Range Y/N Y/N In One Shot mode, a key is only active until the next key is pressed. To lock a key ON, it must be pressed twice. When a key is locked on, it remains active until it is pressed a third time to deactivate it. The One Shot menu allows you to congure the <BLUE> and <ORANGE> keys to operate in one shot mode or to lock ON automatically after being pressed only once. Orange Key By default, the <ORANGE> key automatically locks ON after being pressed once. If you prefer that this key only remain active until the next key is pressed (one shot mode):

Set the Orange Key parameter to Y. To set this key to lock ON automatically after being pressed only once:

Set the Orange Key parameter to N. 100 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scanner Blue Key The <BLUE> key is set to one shot mode by default it is only active until the next key is pressed. To set this key to lock ON automatically after being pressed only once:

Set the Blue Key parameter to N. To set the <BLUE> key to one shot mode:

Set the Blue Key parameter to Y. 6.6 Scanner Scanner Type Options Barcode Range 6.6.1 Type Type Int Ext none none None, Long Range, High Vis, Standard None, Wand, Non-Decoded The Type sub-menu allows the user to identify the type of internal and/or external scanner being used. The 7035 hand-held terminal can support both an internal and an external scanner at the same time. Int 7035 Only The Int (internal) parameter identies the type of internal scanner installed in the 7035 Long Range, High Visibility or Standard range. If an internal scanner has not been installed, set this parameter to None. Ext The Ext (external) parameter identies the type of external scanner attached to the terminal Wand or Non-Decoded. If an external scanner is not being used, set this parameter to None. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 101 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Options 6.6.2 Options Options Translate Verify Security Short Code Click Time Click Data Scan Result Scan Indic Dot Time 0 0 N 250 Y Y 2.0 sec Range see text 0..15 0..99 Y/N 0..1000 0..255 Y/N Y/N 0..3.0 Sec 6.6.2.1 Translate Translate

#1

#1

#8

#8 In Out

. In Out Important: For detailed instructions on inserting characters or special keys

(e.g., <ENTER>, <DEL>, etc.) in these elds, refer to "Global Macros" on page 150 to page 153. In #n This string entry parameter is compared with the decoded bar code reading. If there is a match, the Out string is translated into the decoded bar code. The rst character of the In string species where the rest of the string can occur within the decoded bar code reading. The possible values for this character include:

b Compare with the beginning of decoded bar code. e Compare with the end of decoded bar code. x Compare with the entire decoded bar code. a Compare anywhere within the decoded bar code (default). Note: Translation of the decoded bar code occurs after all other modications 102 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Other Options to the bar code have been done (e.g., prex char, sufx char, strip, etc.). Out #n If there is a match between the decoded bar code and the corresponding In string, the decoded bar code will be translated into the Out string. This string entry parameter can be null, or it may contain any combination of standard and special characters (e.g., function keys, <ENTER>, etc.). Other Options 6.6.2.2 Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode before a bar code is accepted. Higher values signicantly increase the time it takes to decode a bar code. Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge-to-edge bar codes

(Code 93, Code 128, UPC/EAN). Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads, but they also increase the time it takes to decode the bar code. Short Code When enabled (set to Y), this parameter allows scanning of short I 2 of 5 bar codes (2 characters). When Short Code is disabled (set to N), these short bar codes are rejected. Setting this parameter to Y may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the terminal must decode more potential bar codes. For this reason, it is not recommended that Short Code be enabled for general-purpose bar codes with 4 or more characters. Click Time Note: This parameter only effects terminals using long-range scanners. This parameter controls the maximum gap time (in milliseconds) for a double-click. If the time between the rst and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time, it is considered a double-click. A value of zero disables this feature. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 103 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Other Options A double-click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter (see page 104). When a value is not assigned for the Click Data, double-clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep. If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter, double-clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initiating a scan. Click Data For both integrated and external scanners, this parameter determines which character is sent to TESS or ANSI following a double-click. Enter the ASCII value of the character desired. You can also press the <LEFT> and <RIGHT>

arrow keys to scroll through a set of ASCII characters not available from the keyboard. Scan Result 7035 Only When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the type of bar code and the result of the scan appear on the terminal screen. Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and only as long as the scanner trigger is pressed. When the trigger is released, this information is cleared from the screen. Scan Indic 7035 Only When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is activated. For the Teklogix 7035-I integrated terminal, this message is mandatory and appears even if this parameter is disabled

(set to N). Dot Time 7035 Only Important:

Dot Time appears in this menu only when Long Range is selected as the internal scanner option. Internal scanner options are described on page 101 under the heading Int. The value selected for Dot Time determines how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep. This value is measure in 0.5 second intervals from 0 (zero) to 3.0 seconds. 104 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Barcode 6.6.3 Barcode All the available bar code symbologies can be selected from this menu. For each symbology, there are options in a sub-menu. The terminal automatically discriminates between the selected codes. Some restrictions may apply. Important:

To improve the decode speed and performance, enable (set to Y) only those codes that are required by the application. Barcode Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC A UPC E Codabar Code 93 Code 11 I 2 of 5 MSI/PLESSY D 2 of 5 Code 39 Full Ascii Mod 43 Chk Mod 10 Chk Include Chk AIAG Strip Err Accept Size/Chars Y Y Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N N N N N N 6.6.3.1 Code 39 Full Ascii If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the characters +, %, and / are used as escape characters. The combination of an escape character and the next character is converted to an equivalent ASCII character. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 105 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Code 39 Mod 43 Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the Mod 43 check digit is calculated. Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. AIAG Strip If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the AIAG data identier is removed from each decoded Code 39 label. The data identier occurs in the rst position next to the Code 39 start character. It can be a single alphabetic character or some numeric digits followed by an alphabetic character. This identier denes the general category or specic use of the data contained in the rest of the bar code. Err Accept If the Err Accept and AIAG Strip parameters are enabled (set to Y), all label data without an AIAG identier character is accepted. If the Err Accept parameter is disabled (set to N) and the AIAG Strip parameter is enabled

(set to Y), the label data is not accepted. Size/Chars Size/Chars Field Size Prefix Char Suffix Char Strip Leading Strip Trailing 0 0 0 0 0 Range 0-99 0-127 0-127 0-127 0-127 Field Size The eld size is the length of the eld after the rst character is stripped and the prex and sufx characters are added. If the eld size is non-zero, only bar codes of that length are passed through. 106 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Code 128 Prex Char This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no prex is to be added. Sufx Char This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no sufx is to be added. Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prex character is added. Notes:

1. The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <F1> is entered, the usual action for that function key is performed. With ANSI emulation, the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data. 2. For Code 39 bar codes, the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading. Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the sufx character is added. 6.6.3.2 Code 128 Code 128 Standard UCC 128 EAN/UCC 128 Size/Chars Y N N Standard Set Standard to Y if Code 128 is desired. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 107 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters EAN 13 UCC 128 UCC 128 is a variation of Code 128. EAN/UCC 128 Set EAN/UCC 128 to Y to enable this type of bar code. EAN/UCC 128 bar codes include group separators and start codes. This type of bar code has a sub-menu attached to it Include Sym. Include Sym N Enabling (setting to Y) Include Sym causes the group separator(s) and start code contained in this type of bar code to be displayed on the terminal screen. Size/Chars See Size/Chars on page 106. 6.6.3.3 EAN 13 EAN 13 Inc Country Include Chk Size/Chars Addendum Y Y Disabled Inc Country If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the country code is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars Size/Chars Prefix Char Suffix Char Strip Leading Strip Trailing 0 0 0 0 Range 0-127 0-127 0-127 0-127 108 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters EAN 13 Prex Char This character, if non-zero, is added before a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no prex is to be added. Sufx Char This character, if non-zero, is added after a successfully decoded bar code. Enter the ASCII decimal equivalent of this character. Enter a value of 0 (zero) if no sufx is to be added. Strip Leading This parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the beginning of the bar code before the prex character is added. Notes: 1. The appended character is treated as any other keyboard character. For example, if <F1> is entered, the usual action for that Function key is performed. With ANSI emulation, the terminal transmits the escape sequence associated with the function immediately after the bar code data. 2. For Code 39 bar codes, the AIAG Strip is performed before the Strip Leading. Strip Trailing The value entered in this parameter determines the number of characters that will be removed from the end of the bar code before the sufx character is added. Addendum Important: Before Addendum can take effect, the Short Code parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to Y. An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored. When Addendum is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 109 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters EAN 8 6.6.3.4 EAN 8 EAN 8 Include Chk Size/Chars Addendum Y Disable Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 108. Addendum Important: Before Addendum can take effect, the Short Code parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to Y. An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored. When Addendum is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum. 110 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters UPC A 6.6.3.5 UPC A UPC A Inc Num Sys Include Chk Size/Chars Addendum N N Disabled Inc Num Sys If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit will be included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 108. Addendum Important: Before Addendum can take effect, the Short Code parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to Y. An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored. When Addendum is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 111 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters UPC E 6.6.3.6 UPC E UPC E Exp to UPC A Inc Num Sys Include Chk Size/Chars Addendum Y Y Y Disable Exp to UPC A Setting this parameter to Y enables a non-standard decoding that returns 12 digits from the 6 digit UPC E bar code. Inc Num Sys If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the number system digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Include Chk When enabled, the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 108. Addendum Important: Before Addendum can take effect, the Short Code parameter in the Options menu (see page 103) must be set to Y. An addendum is a separate bar code, supplementary to the main bar code. This parameter provides three options: Disabled, Options and Required. Depending on the value chosen for this parameter, an addendum is recognized or ignored. When Addendum is set to Disabled, the scanner does not recognize an addendum. If this parameter is set to Optional, the scanner searches for an addendum and if one exists, appends it to the main bar code. When the parameter is set to Required, the scanner does not accept the main bar code without an addendum. 112 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Codabar 6.6.3.7 Codabar Codabar Size/Chars Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. 6.6.3.8 Code 93 Code 93 Size/Chars Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. 6.6.3.9 Code 11 Code 11 1 Chk Digit 2 Chk Digits Include Chk Size/Chars N Y N 1 Chk Digit If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. 2 Chk Digits If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), it is assumed that the last two digits are check digits. Include Chk If Include Chk is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 113 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters I 2 of 5 6.6.3.10 I 2 of 5 I 2 of 5 Mod 10 Chk ITF Chk Include Chk Size/Chars N N N Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit. ITF Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the ITF-14/16 Mod10 check digit is calculated. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. 6.6.3.11 MSI/PLESSY MSI/PLESSY 1 Chk Digit Include Chk Size/Chars Y N 1 Chk Digit If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), it is assumed that the last digit is a check digit. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. 114 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters D 2 of 5 6.6.3.12 D 2 of 5 D 2 of 5 Mod 10 Chk Include Chk Size/Chars N N Mod 10 Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the Mod 10 check digit is calculated. This calculation is the same as the Code 39 Mod 10 check digit. Include Chk If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the check digit is included with the decoded bar code data. Size/Chars See Size/Chars beginning on page 106. 6.7 Applications TESS and ANSI applications require unique names so that several different sessions of TESS and ANSI can operate simultaneously. The 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals can support up to 4 sessions at one time. Range see text TESS/ANSI see text Applications

#1 Widget

#1 ANSI Name Type Settings #1

#4 Name Type

#4 Settings #4 Important:

These applications will become active only after the changes made in the Application screen are saved by pressing <F4>

the SAVE key. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 115 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters ANSI Settings Name And Type Up to four applications can be entered in this parameter. The Name # parameter must be completed with a name that is meaningful to the operator. The Type #

eld indicates the type of session you will be running. In a Name # eld, type a name that is meaningful to the operator. The available options for the Type # eld are TESS and ANSI. Type the appropriate application type in this eld using either uppercase, lowercase or a combination. To display the Settings menu for your application , position the cursor on Settings, and press <F1> the NEXT key. Note: Before you can access the Settings menu, you must rst complete the Name and Type elds. 6.7.1 ANSI Settings Ansi Terminal #

Host Conn Screen Char Set Video Transmit Keyboard Serial 1 Range 1-1024 see text see text see text see text see text see text see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in Chapter 5: ANSI Operations. Terminal #

For every application session you create, the terminal number assigned in the Terminal # parameter must be non-zero and unique. This parameter denes the terminal number for the ANSI session and uniquely identies all transmissions to and from the terminal. Other applications running in the terminal, such as a TESS session or another ANSI session must each have a different terminal number. In addition, each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number. 116 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Host Conn Host Conn 6.7.1.1 Important:

This parameter is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio. Host Conn Range Conn Type Host Port Telnet 23 TCP Direct/Telnet see text 0-9999 Conn Type This parameter allows the operator to choose one of the following types of connections: TCP Direct if the terminal is communicating through a controller or an SDK, or Telnet if the terminal is communicating directly to the host. Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###

Port Port species the TCP Direct or Telnet port number. By default, the Telnet port is assigned port number 23. The TCP Direct port is assigned the value 9999. 6.7.1.2 Screen Screen Pages Columns Rows Auto Wrap Softkeys 4 80 24 Y Range 0-16 80 or 132 4-60 Y/N see text Pages This parameter denes how many pages are accessible to application programs. The ANSI control functions, Next Page (NP) and Previous page (PP), are used to select another page. These pages are independent of each other, so that if lines of text scroll off a page, the other pages are unaffected. There is no error indication from the terminal if the memory required by the selected number and size of pages exceeds the memory available in the terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 117 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Screen Columns This parameter denes the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Rows This parameter denes the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminals display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Auto Wrap If Auto Wrap is disabled (set to N), characters received when the cursor is at the right edge of the screen replace the previously displayed characters. If Auto Wrap is enabled (set to Y), the cursor wraps to the next line when the current line is lled. The display scrolls up if the cursor is at the bottom margin. Softkeys Note: This menu uses string entry elds. For detailed information about com-

pleting this type of eld, refer to String Entry Parameters on page 85. Softkeys F1 F2 F3 F4 Important:

The sample menu above reects the 7035 hand-held softkey options. The Softkey menu in the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals provides six softkeys <F1> to <F6>. 118 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set North American And European Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specic actions in your application. These keys are identied through softkey labels, reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen. These softkey labels can be recongured using the menu attached to this parameter. To edit a label:

Position the cursor in the appropriate function key eld within the Softkey menu, and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding keys function. Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better t in the available space on your display. Char Set North American And European 6.7.1.3 Important: When a character sent from the host cannot be displayed, a right arrow character is used as a substitute. Char Set ISO IBM DEC N Y N Note: For details on Chinese and Korean character sets, refer to Char Set Chinese And Korean on page 121 for details. This menu contains all the character sets available with your Teklogix terminal. To choose a character set:

Position the cursor on the character set you want to use, and press the

<RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to Y. Once youve chosen and enabled (set to Y) a particular character set, youll need to choose from the sub-menu attached to that character set. Press <F1> to display the character set options. To enable a character set option, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to Y Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 119 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set North American And European ISO Options IBM Options ISO ISO 8859-1 ISO 646 ASCII N N IBM EBCDIC Other N Y Other IBM PC 437 IBM PC 850 N Y EBCDIC 5250 Multinl IBM 037 IBM 256 IBM 237 IBM 871 IBM 875 Belgium Brazil British Danish/Norway Finnish/Swed. French French Cdn. Italian Portugal Spain Spanish N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N 120 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual DEC Options Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set Chinese And Korean DEC VT220 British VT220 Danish VT220 Finnish VT220 French VT220 Fr. Cdn. VT220 German VT220 Italian VT330 Portugal VT330 Spanish VT220 Swedish Graphical Multinational N N N N N N N N N N N N Char Set Chinese And Korean 6.7.1.4 Important:

If you are using a Chinese character set and a character sent from the host cannot be displayed on the terminal screen, a shaded box character is used as a substitute. If you are using a Korean character set, a right arrow character is used as a substitute. Note: Refer to "Char Set North American And European" beginning on page 119 for details about selecting character sets. Chinese Character Sets Char Set ISO IBM Misc N Y N ISO ISO 646 ASCII IBM Chinese Misc Big 5 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 121 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Video Korean Character Sets Char Set ISO IBM Misc N Y N ISO ISO 646 ASCII IBM Korean Korean Int Misc Fujitsu Korean KSC 5601 6.7.1.5 Video Video Bold Blink Reverse Underline NONE BLNK REV ULIN Range see text see text see text see text Bold The value assigned to this parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Bold ANSI attribute that is, BLNK (blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). Blink The value assigned to this parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Blink ANSI attribute that is, BLNK (blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Reverse ANSI attribute that is, BLNK

(blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). Underline The value assigned to this parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Underline ANSI attribute that is, BLNK

(blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). 122 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Transmit 6.7.1.6 Transmit Transmit Xmit Count Xmit Wait Dev Attr Auto-Ans Range 0-99 0-999 see text see text Xmit Count This parameter determines how many characters from the keyboard or scanner are buffered by the terminal before being transmitted to the host. If 0 (zero) is selected, the terminal transmits only according to the Xmit Wait parameter. If the ANSI block mode features are used, this parameter should be set to 99. Note:

If the terminal is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Count parameter setting. Xmit Wait This parameter determines the length of time the terminal collects keystrokes before transmitting them to the host. This value is specied in increments of one 10th of a second (i.e., a value of 10 represents 1 second). If 0 (zero) is selected, the terminal transmits only according to the Xmit Count parameter. Note:

If the terminal is not in local edit mode, the <ENTER>, arrow, <CTRL>, and function keys cause an immediate radio transmission regardless of the Xmit Wait parameter setting. Dev Attr This parameter species a device attribute string. This string can be up to 39 characters long. The terminal sends this string to the host when it receives a DA or DECID control. Whether or not this parameter is set is dependent on the requirements of the host computer. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 123 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Keyboard Auto-Ans This string can be up to 39 characters long and is sent by the terminal as a reply to an ENQ character from the host. The Auto-Answer string is programmable in the same manner as the keyboard macros. For example, this string can be used to automatically send the user name and password when logging into the host. Refer to

"String Entry Parameters" on page 85 to 86 for detailed information. 6.7.1.7 Keyboard Keyboard Range Newline Echo Mode DEL Key Y/N N Smart Smart, Local, Host BS BS, DEL Newline When this parameter is disabled (set to N), a LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move down one line in the same column. In addition, the

<ENTER> key transmits a CR. When enabled (set to Y), an LF character received from the host causes the cursor to move to the rst column of the next line. The

<ENTER> key transmits both a CR and an LF. Echo Mode The available echo modes are:

Smart:

This mode reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host computer. The terminal displays all printable characters on the screen before sending them to the host. The terminal compares the characters echoed by the host to the characters placed on the page and alters the display if the host echoes are different. The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25. Any addi-

tional characters are sent to the host but are not displayed. When the terminal is in insert mode, smart echo is disabled. Important:

To suspend Smart echo mode if, for example, you are entering a password, press <ALT> and type . (period). Characters will be replaced with a series of periods until you press the <ENTER> key. 124 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Keyboard Local:

Host:

In this mode, any character entered using the keyboard is displayed before being sent to the host. Certain keys cause additional action at the terminal, as shown in Table 6.2 on page 125. In this mode, the terminal sends all keyboard entries to the host and displays only data received from the host. Key ENTER Function In Newline mode, this key moves the cursor to the rst column of the next line. In line feed mode, this key moves the cursor to column one of the current line. CTRL-G (Bell) The terminal beeps. CTRL-H (Backspace) The cursor moves back one space. CTRL-I (Tab) The cursor moves to the next horizontal tab stop. CTRL-J (Line Feed) CTRL-L (Form Feed) CTRL-K (Vertical Tab) DEL The cursor moves down one line in the same column. The cursor moves down to the next line with a vertical tab set. This key deletes the character to the left of the cursor and moves the cursor to the left by one position. Table 6.2 Function Of Special Keys In Local Echo Mode DEL Key This parameter determines which character is sent to the host DEL (delete) or BS

(backspace). The host interprets how it will respond to the code. The selection made at this parameter does not affect how the <DEL> key operates at the terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 125 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Serial 6.7.2 Serial Serial Async In Start End N 0 0 Range Y/N 0-255 0-255 Async In When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the serial (async) port is ready to receive input at all times. Start/End The start character is added to the beginning of the data received from the serial

(asynch) port. The end character is added to the end of the data received. 6.7.3 TESS Settings TESS Terminal #

Host Conn Screen Characters Serial Tests Scanner Fields Features 1 Range see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text see text Each session you create has its own Settings parameters. Additional ANSI information is documented in Chapter 4: TESS Operations. Terminal #

For every application session you create, the terminal number assigned in the Terminal # parameter must be non-zero and unique. This parameter denes the terminal number for the TESS session and uniquely identies all transmissions to and from the terminal. Other applications running in the terminal, such as an ANSI session or another TESS session must each have a different terminal number. In addition, each Teklogix terminal using the radio link must have a unique terminal number. 126 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Host Conn Host Conn 6.7.3.1 Important:

This parameter is not available when the terminal is operating with a narrow band radio. Host Conn Host Port 23 Range see text 0-9999 Host This parameter is used to assign a host IP address using the format ###.###.###.###

Port Port species the TCP Direct port number. By default, the TCP Direct port is assigned the value 9999. 6.7.3.2 Screen Screen Columns 80 24 Rows N Origin Scroll N Field Scroll Pages Saved 16 App. Parameter -1 Softkeys Range 20..132 4..100 Y/N Y/N 1..16

-1..79 see text Columns This parameter denes the logical page width (in characters) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this width. This page width cannot be smaller than the width of the terminal display. Display panning is used if the page is wider than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 127 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Screen Rows This parameter denes the logical page length (in lines) used by the host computer application. Emulator systems trim the host application screens to this length. This page length cannot be smaller than the length of the terminals display. Display panning is used if the page is longer than the display. Note: The value in this parameter must be an even number. Origin Scroll When enabled (set to Y), the display window moves to the origin (upper-left corner) after LOCK-H or LOCK-B messages. Field Scroll When enabled (set to Y), the display window moves to the left after entering a new entry eld. Pages Saved This parameter determines the number of pages that can be stored and recalled at the terminal. Storing frequently used page data at the terminal reduces the need for the host to retransmit complete page data over the radio link. Retransmitting data can reduce the system response time. Increasing the number of saved pages decreases the available memory for other functions. App. Parameter The Application parameter is sent to the host system as part of the response to the TESS query command. Enter zero if this parameter is not used. 128 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Characters Softkeys Note: This menu uses string entry elds. For detailed information about com-

pleting this type of eld, refer to String Entry Parameters on page 85. Softkeys F1 F2 F3 F4 Important:

The sample menu above reects the 7035 hand-held softkey options. The Softkey menu in the 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mount terminals provides six softkeys <F1> to <F6>. Softkeys are function keys that have been programmed to perform specic actions in your application. These keys are identied through softkey labels, reverse video labels that are displayed at the bottom of the terminal screen. These softkey labels can be recongured using the menu attached to this parameter. To edit a label:

Position the cursor in the appropriate function key eld within the Softkey menu, and type a new name preferably one that describes the corresponding keys function. Note: Although you can enter up to 8 characters for each softkey label, the text will be shortened to better t in the available space on your display. 6.7.3.3 Characters Characters Invis. NULL Char Set Err Func Key V Match Char H Match Char Upper Case 42 46 0 0 0 N Range 0-255 0-255 see text 0-255 0-255 0-255 Y/N Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 129 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set Invis In TESS applications, some elds may be set as invisible or non-display elds. This parameter determines the character that will mask the actual text typed. For example, this feature is often used in password entry elds where the actual text typed is replaced by asterisks.

* (asterisk) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 42. NULL This parameter species the character that identies empty entry elds. (Note that positions containing spaces are not considered empty.) Enter the ASCII equivalent of this character. The most commonly used characters are:

_ (underline) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 95. (period) The ASCII equivalent for this character is 46. 6.7.3.4 Char Set Char N Y N ISO IBM DEC This menu contains all the character sets available within TESS:

Position the cursor on the character set you want to use, and press the

<RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to Y. Once youve enabled (set to Y) a particular character set, youll need to choose from the sub-menu attached to that character set. Press <F1> to display the character set options. To enable a character set option, press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to set it to Y ISO Options ISO ISO 8859-1 ISO 646 ASCII N N 130 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set IBM Options IBM EBCDIC Other N Y Other IBM PC 437 IBM PC 850 N Y EBCDIC 5250 Multinl IBM 037 IBM 256 IBM 237 IBM 871 IBM 875 Belgium Brazil British Danish/Norway Finnish/Swed. French French Cdn. Italian Portugal Spain Spanish N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N DEC Options DEC VT220 British VT220 Danish VT220 Finnish VT220 French VT220 Fr. Cdn. VT220 German VT220 Italian VT330 Portugal VT330 Spanish VT220 Swedish Graphical Multinational N N N N N N N N N N N N Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 131 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Char Set Err Func key This parameter denes the function key that interrupts the normal sequence of a terminal and causes an Error Reply message to be returned to the host. Enter the number of the function key to be used as the Error function key (e.g., 1 for function key 1). This parameter should be set to zero unless there is a system requirement for Error Reply messages. When the Error function key is entered, the terminal abandons all queued procedures and TESS commands and returns an Error Reply message, with a milestone, to the host. The host must respond with a milestone acknowledge before the terminal accepts further TESS commands. V Match Chr This parameter enables visible eld matching and denes the character that identies visible eld match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry eld that is compared with the users input. The terminal beeps if the entered data does not match. Visible eld matching means that the data to be matched is displayed in the entry eld. Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify visible match eld data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature. Note: Another method of eld matching is available directly through the TESS data stream. H Match Chr This parameter enables hidden eld matching and denes the character that identies hidden eld match data from the host. Field matching allows the host to pre-load data into an entry eld that is compared with the users input. The terminal beeps if the entered data does not match. Hidden eld matching means that the data to be matched is not displayed in the entry eld. Enter the decimal value for the ASCII character that will be used by the host to identify hidden match eld data. Enter 0 (zero) to disable this feature. Note: Another method of eld matching is available directly through the TESS data stream. Upper Case When this parameter is set to Y, lowercase input is converted to uppercase. 132 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Serial 6.7.3.5 Serial Serial In Prefix Suffix Out Prefix Suffix N 10 13 Y 10 13 Range Y/N 0-255 0-255 Y/N 0-255 0-255 Note: This menu uses string entry parameters. For detailed information about entering data in this type of parameter, refer to String Entry Parameters on page 85. In This parameter enables the serial port input elds. If enabled (set to Y), the TESS application has exclusive use of the serial port. Data entered in these elds must begin with a line feed and end with a carriage return. Prex This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial input. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no prex. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the start character. Sufx This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial input. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no sufx. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the end character. Out This parameter enables serial port output elds. Prex This parameter determines the start-of-message character on serial output. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no prex. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the start character. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 133 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Tests Sufx This parameter determines the end-of-message character on serial output. A value of 0 (zero) indicates no sufx. Enter an ASCII numeric equivalent to represent the end character. 6.7.3.6 Tests Tests AutoRep Fn AutoRep T/O 1 0 Range 1-36 0-255 AutoRep Fn This parameter determines which function key is sent to the host in auto reply mode. The value represents the number of the function key not the ASCII decimal equivalent. After sending this key, the terminal locks and waits for the host to unlock the terminal. To disable AutoRep Fn, set the AutoRep T/O parameter to zero. AutoRep T/O This parameter determines the time (in seconds) between the terminal unlocking and the next transmission of the function key specied by the AutoRep Fn parameter. A value of zero disables auto reply mode. 6.7.3.7 Scanner Scanner ContNxtField Append Enter Append F0 Mixed AIAG Rjct if Alpha Beam Lockout Y Y Y N N N Range Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N ContNxtField This parameter only applies to string entry data. When enabled (set to Y), this parameter allows bar codes that are longer than the eld length to continue in the next eld. If ContNxtField is disabled (set to N) OFF data will ow into the next eld. 134 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scanner Append Enter When enabled (set to Y), Append Enter causes an <ENTER> code to be appended to the bar code. The <ENTER> code completes the entry of the bar code and moves the cursor to the next eld. Append F0 When enabled (set to Y), this parameter causes an <F0> code to be appended to the bar code. The <F0> code completes the entry of the bar code data in the eld. Mixed AIAG When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), AIAG labels are always accepted and processed even if mixed with keyboard input. The AIAG label can replace the partially entered keyboard data. If this parameter is disabled, AIAG labels are rejected if eld entry is in progress. Rjct if Alpha When the cursor is in a numeric eld and Rjct if Alpha is enabled (set to Y), bar codes containing alphabetic characters are rejected. Beam Lockout When enabled (set to Y), this parameter disallows scanner use when the current session is in LOCK-H mode. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 135 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Fields 6.7.3.8 Fields Fields Y Y Y field Field Order Enter To F0 Enter On Arr Entry Mode Open Fky Only N Video All Fld Video Y Ign Bcode_fld N Enh Edit Mode N Range Y/N Y/N Y/N see text Y/N see text Y/N Y/N Y/N Field Order This parameter determines the mode of cursor movement between elds. The next eld can be dened by location on the screen or by the assignment of eld numbers. When enabled (set to Y), the cursor moves according to eld location. If disabled

(set to N), the cursor moves according to the numeric order of the elds. Enter To F0 The <ENTER> key normally enters data into a eld and moves the cursor to the next eld. However, some applications require that the <ENTER> key start a transmission from the terminal. When enabled (set to Y), this parameter causes the <ENTER> key to be interpreted as <F0> which starts a transmission. Enter On Arr When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the arrow keys can be used to complete data entry into a eld. Entry Mode Entry Mode parameters allow you to select a data entry mode. The modes are:

insert, replace, eld and fcursor. TESS Edit Modes And Cursor Movement on page 65 describes these modes in detail. Open Fky Only When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the screen is open for function keys only, and the cursor is not positioned. When this parameter is disabled, the screen is open for data entry, and the cursor is placed in the rst eld (if it exists). 136 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Fields Video Video Bold Blink Reverse NONE BLNK REV Range see text see text see text Bold The value assigned to this parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Bold ANSI attribute that is, BLNK (blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). Blink The value assigned to this parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Blink ANSI attribute that is, BLNK (blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). Reverse The value assigned to the Reverse parameter species the actual video attributes to be assigned to elds created with the Reverse ANSI attribute that is, BLNK

(blink), ULIN (underline), REV (reverse) or NONE (normal). All Fld Video Usually, the video attributes apply only to the text that is in an entry eld. When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the entire eld (including blanks) takes on the video attributes. Some systems use this option to identify empty entry elds with reverse video. Ign Bcode_d When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), elds that were dened as bar code only accept data from the keyboard as well as the bar code reader. In effect, they behave as data entry elds. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 137 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Features Enh Edit Mode This mode provides extended (enhanced) functionality to users of Teklogix IBM 5250 terminal emulation. When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the arrow keys move the cursor anywhere on the screen, unrestricted by xed or entry elds. Table 6.3 describes the cursor movement when an arrow key is pressed in conjunction with the <SHIFT> key. Key Function Key Sequence Cursor Movement Field Advance or Tab

<SHIFT> <RIGHT>

arrow key Field Backspace

<SHIFT> <LEFT>

arrow key Cursor moves to the rst position in the next input eld. If already in the last eld, the cursor moves to the rst input eld on the screen. Cursor moves to the beginning of the current eld. If already in the rst position, the cursor moves to beginning of the previous eld. Field Exit Home

<SHIFT> <DOWN>

arrow key Current eld is cleared, and the cursor moves to the next input eld.

<SHIFT> <UP>

arrow key Cursor moves to the rst input eld on the screen. Table 6.3 Enhanced Edit Mode Cursor Key Operation 6.7.4 Features Features Kbd Locked N Range Y/N Kbd Locked This parameter allows you to lock (set to Y) or unlock (set to N) the keyboard for all alphanumeric input in TESS. When the keyboard is locked, the Function keys, arrow keys and the <ENTER> key are still functional. The terminal emits an error beep if a character is rejected because the keyboard is locked. Changes to this parameter take effect only after the terminal is reset. 138 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters View Manager 6.8 View Manager View Manager Anchor View N 1 X-origin Y-origin 1 Use Increment N 5 X-increment Y-increment 5 Display Shift Y Custom Chars Range Y/N 1-80 1-24 Y/N 1-40 1-12 Y/N see text Anchor View When enabled (set to Y), this parameter locks the display at a dened location on the screen, preventing it from shifting when the cursor is moved. The X-origin and Y-origin coordinates specify where the screen origin, the upper-left corner of the screen, will be xed. X-origin And Y-origin The X-origin parameter is used to specify the column to which the upper left corner of the screen will be anchored. The Y-origin parameter is used to specify the row coordinate to which the screen will be anchored. Use increment When Use increment is enabled (set to Y) and the cursor is moved off the display, the screen contents shift by the values specied in the X-increment and Y-increment parameters. X-increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesnt take effect until Use Increment is set to Y. Y-increment This parameter determines the number of spaces the screen shifts once the cursor moves out of view. The value assigned here doesnt take effect until Use Increment is set to Y. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 139 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters View Manager Display Shift If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the display in application screens shifts so that there are no blank columns on the left-most side of the display. Custom Chars Custom Chars nn Range 0-255 Char Char nn 0-255 This parameter is used to create a list of characters (to a maximum of 20 characters) that are not normally available directly from the keyboard. To create a character:

Type the decimal equivalent of the character you want to create. You can look up the decimal value in the code page you selected using the "Code Page" parameter (see page 95). Note:

If the character you select does not exist in the host character set, it cannot be sent to the host application. Once youve created this list of characters, you can access the list from within a TESS or ANSI session as follows:

Press <ALT> a to display your list of custom characters. Use the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to highlight the character you require, and press <ENTER> to select it. 140 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Ports Serial 1 And Console 2 6.9 Ports Serial 1 And Console 2 Ports Serial 1 Parameters Console 2 Parameters Print Disable 6.9.1 Serial 1 And Console 2 Peripheral Options The Serial 1 (COM1) and Console 2 (COM2) options allow you to enable, disable and specify the accessories attached to these ports. For the Serial 1 port, the possible values are: Disable Enable Print Scanner and Output. For the Console 2 port, the possible values for this parameter are: Disable Enable Print Scanner and Scan-See and Nomad. To scroll through the options for each port:

Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key. Important:

If you choose Disable, the corresponding port parameters will not take effect. These ports operate differently depending on the accessories selected. Print all TESS print operations are directed to the port. All ANSI media copy operations to the primary port are directed to this port. Scanner TESS and ANSI accept scanner input from the port. Scan-See TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Scan-See through the Console 2 port. (This option is not available for the Serial 1 port.) Nomad TESS and ANSI accepts input from the Nomad scanner through the Console 2 port. (This option is not available for the Serial 1 port.) Output the TESS pass-through operations and serial output elds are directed to the Serial 1 port. (This option is not available for the Console 2 port.) Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 141 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings 6.9.2 Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings Since the parameters for the Serial 1 and Console 2 ports are identical in most cases, they are discussed in one section. Any differences are clearly indicated. Important:

The most signicant difference between the Serial 1 and Con-

sole 2 port parameters is that the ScanSee menu is only available in the Console 2 Parameters menu. Console 2 Range Speed Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Buffer Retries Input Tmo Test ScanSee 9600 8 None 1 None 512 3 2 Y 1200 2400 4800 9600 7-8 None Odd Even 1-2 None CTS/RTS XON/XOFF 32-2048 1-100 0-100 Y/N see text Speed This parameter determines the bit rate of the port. Data Bits This parameter determines the number of bits for the data going through this port. Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port. The options are Odd, Even and None. Stop Bits This parameter species the number of stop bits 1 or 2 used for asynchronous communication. 142 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Serial 1 And Console 2 Parameter Settings Flow Control Important: Flow Control is not available for Console 2. This parameter selects the type of ow control used in your terminal. The 7035 can perform XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS handshaking. Note that RTS/CTS hardware ow control generally results in faster data throughput. The function of each mode is as follows:

Enable: Used to input and output data. Supports XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS or no handshaking Print: Used to output data only. All input characters except XON and XOFF are ignored. Supports XON/XOFF and/or CTS/RTS or no handshaking. Output: Used to output data only. All input characters are ignored. Supports CTS/RTS or no handshaking Note: To enable the input and/or output, serial in and/or serial out must be enabled in the TESS menu. Buffer The value assigned to this parameter determines the size of the serial buffer used by the application for both input and output. The buffer controls how much data the application can send to or receive from a serial device. Retries Note: Retries is not available if Nomad is chosen as the peripheral device. This parameter determines the number of times the terminal attempts to transmit a byte from the serial port. If the count specied in this parameter is exceeded, the transmission fails. Input Tmo This parameter sets the time in tenths of a second that the terminal waits before passing received data to the TESS or ANSI tasks. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 143 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad Test When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), data is output through the serial port to make certain that it is operating appropriately. 6.9.3 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Nomad To interface the terminal to the Nomad scanner, Console 2 must be congured for Nomad. For detailed information about conguring the Nomad scanner, refer to the LS3070 Wireless Scanner User Manual P.N. 80416.A 6.9.4 Setting The Terminal Console Port For Scan-See Warning:

ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE SCAN-SEE FROM THE TERMINAL BEFORE A TERMINAL RESET! Resetting the terminal with the Scan-See connected to it may cause it to hang and boot up improperly. In order for the terminal to interface to the Scan-See, the console port should be set as follows:

= 9600 baud Speed

# of bits = 7 Parity 2stop bits = Y

= N Test

= none Note:

In order for the terminal to interface to Scan-See units with older rmware (serial numbers lower than 1594120224), set Parity=space;

all other parameters are identical to the newer rmware. Scan-See Parameters 6.9.4.1 Note: Scan-Sees equipped with an LED screen have 10 column displays. The newer Scan-Sees with LCDs have 20 column displays. 144 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Model 7000 Settings Defaults & Allowable Ranges 6.9.4.2 Model 7000 Settings Defaults & Allowable Ranges 04 Scan-See Anchor Line Anchor Column Follow Cursor Line Offset Column Offset Wraparound Panning Line Scrolling Brightness Arrows Version XON/XOFF Default Setting Model 7000 30106-001 Range 1 9 Y 0

-1 N Y N 3 Bright 0 or 1 Y 0...1 0...19 Y/N

-25...25

-80...80 Y/N Y/N Y/N 0 to 5 Bright Horz Vert 0...3 (see pg 149 for details) Y/N 6.9.4.3 Model 7000M Settings Defaults & Allowable Ranges 04 Scan-See Default Setting Model 7000M 30107-001 Range Anchor Line Anchor Column Follow Cursor Line Offset Column Offset Wraparound Panning Line Scrolling Brightness Arrows Version XON/XOFF 1 19 Y 0

-1 N Y N n/a Vert 2 or 3 Y 0...1 0...19 Y/N

-25...25

-80...80 Y/N Y/N Y/N 0 to 5 Bright Horz Vert 0...3 (see pg 149 for details) Y/N Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport"

6.9.4.4 The Scan-See display is mapped to a specic area on the terminal screen called the Scan-See viewport and is continuously updated to reect that portion of the screen. The Scan-See viewport is dened as follows:

Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 145 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport"

Anchor Line/Anchor Column A location on the Scan-See display the anchor is chosen as a reference point. Important:

The range for this parameter varies depending on the type of Scan-See you are using. If you are using a Scan-See with a 10 column LED , the range for this parameter is 0 to 9. If you are using a Scan-See equipped with a 20 column LCD, the range for this parameter is 0 to 19. Line Offset/Column Offset A predened displacement the offset is added to the location of the terminal cursor to give us a point the pivot . This pivot is mapped to the anchor , and whatever is displayed in its vicinity is also displayed on the Scan-See. For example:

The anchor is chosen as (9,0) where 9 is the column and 0 is the line

(on the Scan-See display). The offset is chosen as (4,2). The cursor on the terminal is currently located at (7,5). The pivot would thus be located at (7+4, 5+2) or (11,7). The area displayed on the Scan-See will be:

(119,70) to (119+9,70+1) or (2,7) to (11,8).1 1 These computations assume Wraparound (see page 148) is disabled, and Follow Cursor is enabled. 146 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport"

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 .

(0,0) terminal cursor

(7,5)

+4 offset

+2

(11, 7)

+4

+2 offset

(4,2) pivot =

terminal cursor

+ offset Terminal Display anchor

(9,0)

(0,0) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 Scan-See Display superimposing the anchor on the pivot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 .

(0,0)

(2,7 ) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

. anchor

(11, 7)

(11, 8) pivot Scan-See Viewport Figure 6.1 Scan-See Viewport Note: To enter negative values, press the - (minus) key, and then the number you want to use. The <LEFT> arrow key can also be used to decrement the value in the parameter. Each time the <LEFT> arrow is pressed, the number is decremented by one. For example, to enter a value of 5, start from zero, and press the <LEFT> arrow ve times. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 147 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport"

Follow Cursor When the Follow Cursor parameter is disabled (set to N), it is always assumed that the cursor is located at the origin. Using the previous example:

the area displayed will be (49,20) to (49+9, 20+1), or, after clipping values that are negative or higher than 80: (0,2) to (4,3). Wraparound When Wraparound is enabled (set to Y), the Scan-See display is treated as a 1 line by 20 column display rather than a 2 line by 10 column display. Keep in mind that new Scan-Sees equipped with LCDs have 20 column displays. Panning If Panning is disabled (set to N), when the cursor moves one position to the right and the pivot is still inside the Scan-See display, the Scan-See viewport does not move. The Scan-See display is updated to reect the changes within that viewport. If the pivot goes outside the viewport, or if the terminal display changes without the cursor being moved, the viewport is re-synchronized to coincide the pivot with the anchor. Line Scrolling When Line Scrolling is enabled (set to Y), the Scan-See display is treated as two separate 1 line by 10 column displays. The top line always displays the previous value of the bottom line, so in an application where the cursor skips from one entry eld to another, the eld that was just entered is shown on the top line, and the eld to be entered is shown at the bottom. Note: When this feature is enabled (set to Y), the Panning option should be disabled to prevent updates to both lines after every keystroke Brightness The Brightness parameter controls the backlight brightness of the display. It only has an effect on Model 7000 Scan-Sees scanners equipped with LED (light emitting diode) displays. 148 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Scan-See Display Mapping The "Viewport"

Arrows The Arrows parameter assigns one of three possible functions to the two arrow keys on the Scan-See keyboard:

Value Bright Horiz Vert Function Arrow keys control Scan-See display brightness Arrow keys control Column Offset Arrow keys control Line Offset Table 6.4 Functions Of The Arrows Parameter Note: For Horiz and Vert, changing the offset takes effect only after the terminal display has been updated. Version Scan-See units with serial numbers that read 1594120224 or higher contain rmware that implements a different communication protocol with the terminal than older units. The Version numbers represent the following unit versions:

Value 0 1 2 3 Scan-See Version First LED version up to serial number 1594080275. These are encased in grey plastic. Corresponds to Model 7000 LED units versions after the serial number above. These are also encased in grey plastic. Corresponds to the Metrologic 7000M LCD units. These are encased in grey plastic. Corresponds to the current 7000M LCD units all of which are encased in black plastic. Table 6.5 Scan-See Versions Note: To interface the terminal to the Scan-See units with older rmware

(serial number lower than 1594120224), set Parity = space;

all other parameters are identical to the newer rmware. Refer to the Scan-See User Manual (P.N. 80408.C) for more information about installing and using the Scan-See. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 149 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Global Macros XON/XOFF Important:

IF YOU ARE USING TRANSCEIVERS WITH YOUR SCAN-SEE, this parameter must be set to Y. When set to Y, the XON and XOFF characters are not passed to the TESS or ANSI tasks. A received XOFF character stops the serial port from transmitting. A received XON character starts the serial port transmissions again. 6.10 Global Macros A macro has 19 programmable characters (or positions). The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes, along with the function of executable keys like <ENTER>, <DEL>, function keys and arrow keys. They may also be used to provide characters not normally accessed from the keyboard. The methods used to create macros are described in this section. 6.10.1 Displaying The Global Macros Menu Macros are programmed from within the Global Macros menu. If the Tekterm application is currently active:

8255/8260: Press <ALT> and type x to exit the Tekterm application. 7035: Press <ORANGE> <ALT> before typing x. The Display Menu appears on the terminal screen. 01 Display Menu A B C Parameters Emulations DOS Prompt To display the Parameters menu:

8255/8260: Type the letter a. 7035: Press <ORANGE> before typing a. 150 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Displaying The Global Macros Table Type your password in the Password window, and press <ENTER>. Parameters System Scanner Applications View Manager Ports Global Macros Network Radio Sound 6.10.2 Displaying The Global Macros Table To display the Global Macros table:

From the Parameters menu, position the cursor on the Global Macros option, and press <F1> to display the macro table. Note: This is a sample 7035 macro table. Vehicle-mount terminals displays 12 macro elds rather than 4. Global Macros

#1

#2

#3

#4 Position the cursor in the macro eld corresponding to the macro key to which you want to assign macros #1 corresponds to macro key <M1>,

#2 corresponds to macro key <M2>, and so on. Once the cursor is in a macro eld, you have a number of options when creating a macro. You can type text and numbers, choose from a set of ASCII characters and program the function of special keys into a macro. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 151 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Choosing An ASCII Character In macros, the <UP> arrow, <DOWN> arrow, <ENTER> and <DEL> keys have the following functions:

Pressing the <UP> and <DOWN> arrow keys move the cursor between entry elds. Pressing the <ENTER> key once moves the cursor to the rst position in the entry eld; pressing <ENTER> a second time completes the entry eld, exits the sub-menu and returns the cursor to the parent or previous menu. The <DEL> key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. The <CLR> key <BLUE> <DEL> clears the entire eld. If the last character in a eld is deleted, the previous contents, if any, reappear. 6.10.3 Choosing An ASCII Character Important: Make sure the <CTRL> and <SHIFT> keys are turned off!

By pressing either the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key, you can cycle through a set of printable characters not available on the keyboard. The sample below is a set of ASCII characters not accessible from the keyboard. 7035: / < > % ^ & ` ~ | [ ] { } " ' ? = + ;

8255/8260: ^ & ~ | [ ] { } "

Press the <RIGHT> arrow to display the next character in this sequence, and the <LEFT> arrow to display the previous one. 6.10.4 Adding Additional ASCII Characters When youve chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the same eld, the cursor must be moved to the right of the existing character. Normally, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key moves the cursor to the right, but in a string entry eld, pressing the <RIGHT> arrow key cycles through the available ASCII characters instead. If youve already chosen an ASCII character and want to add another one in the eld, you need to take a few extra steps to move the cursor to the right. To add another ASCII character in the string entry eld, next to the one youve already chosen:

Type a numeric character for example, type the number 7. Next, press the <DEL> key The cursor is now positioned to the right of the previously selected ASCII character. Press the <RIGHT> or <LEFT> arrow key to scroll through the ASCII characters, and select another character. 152 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Programming Special Keys Into Macros 6.10.5 Programming Special Keys Into Macros Macros can contain the function of a subset of terminal keys. The keys that can be programmed into macros include: <ENTER>, <DEL> and <CLR> (<BLUE>-

<DEL>), function keys and arrow keys. To program the function of a key:

With the cursor in the Global Macros table, use the arrow keys to position the cursor in the macro eld corresponding to the macro key you want to program the eld labelled #1 represents <M1>, and so on. Press <CTRL> and then, type the letter l (el) (l represents literal). Press the key you wish to add to the macro. For example: To execute the function of the <ENTER> key in a macro, type <CTRL> l <ENTER>. 6.11 Network Note: This menu is not displayed when a Mobitex TRX7460 radio is installed in the terminal. Network Local IP Net Mask Default Gateway Employ bootp N Range see text see text see text Y/N Local IP This parameter is used to assign a unique terminal IP address so that the terminal can be identied on the network. The format is ###.###.###.###

Net Mask A subnet mask is assigned at this parameter. The 7035 uses the subnet mask, its own IP address and the destination IP address to determine if a packet should be sent on the local network or a remote subnet. If the destination is found to reside on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destination. If the destination resides on a remote subnet, the packet is routed to the appropriate gateway. The accepted values for Net Mask range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 153 Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Radio Default Gateway The Default Gateway IP address assigned at this parameter creates an identiable communication link between the terminal and a remote sub-network that is, a network other than the one in which the terminal is currently operating. The acceptable values for this parameter range from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. Note: Setting the Default Gateway to 0.0.0.0 disables this feature. A communication link will not exist between sub-networks. Employ Bootp When this parameter is set to Y, a request for an IP address is automatically directed to the BOOTP Server. If after 5 attempts, an IP address is not transmitted, the terminal uses the IP address assigned in the Local IP parameter. 6.12 Radio Refer to Appendix D: Radio Parameters for a detailed description of the parameters used to adjust radio communications. 6.13 Sound Sound Beep tone Beep time Error tone Error time Scan tone 1 Scan time 1 Scan tone 2 Scan time 2 Scan tone 3 Scan time 3 2300 600 800 600 1250 150 2300 150 3750 150 Range 500-5000 0-2000 500-5000 0-2000 500-5000 0-2000 500-5000 0-2000 500-5000 0-2000 Beep Tone And Beep Time These parameters regulate the frequency and duration of beeps emitted in a TESS or ANSI session when one of the following is received at the terminal: an advisory, a hey you or a bell character. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. 154 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 6: Setting Parameters Sound Error Tone And Error Time These parameters determine the frequency and duration of each error tone. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 1 And Scan Time 1 Scan tone 1 and Scan time 1 determine the frequency and duration of the rst beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 2 And Scan Time 2 Scan tone 2 and Scan time 2 determine the frequency and duration of the second beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Scan Tone 3 And Scan Time 3 Scan tone 3 and Scan time 3 determine the frequency and duration of the third beep of a multiple beep. Tone is measured in hertz and time in milliseconds. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 155 TERMINAL ACCESSORIES 77 7.1 External Bar Code Readers. 159 7.1.1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader . 159 7.2 The 7035 Battery . 160 7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions . 161 7.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specications . 162 7.3 The 7942 In-Unit Charger . 163 7.3.1 Mounting Bracket . 164 7.3.2 Connecting The Power Source. 164 7.3.3 In-Unit Charger LED Indicators . 164 7.3.4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger . 165 7.3.5 Charging The Battery . 165 7.3.6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions. 165 7.3.7 Charger Fault Conditions . 166 7.3.8 Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit Charger . 166 7.3.9 7942 Charger Specications . 166 7.4 The 7967 Gang Charger . 167 7.4.1 Connecting The Power Source. 167 7.4.2 Inserting And Charging The Battery . 167 7.4.3 Fault Conditions . 168 7.4.3.1 Fault LED Turns On During A Charge . 168 7.4.3.2 Fault LED Turns On At Insertion . 168 7.4.4 7967 Charger Specications . 169 7.5 Important Charger Safety Instructions . 169 7.6 Antenna Types . 170 7.7 The 7035 Picker Cradle. 171 7.7.1 Mounting Hardware . 171 7.7.2 Installation . 171 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 157 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories 7.7.3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting. 172 7.7.4 Mounting The Cradle . 173 7.7.5 Installing The Cables . 173 7.7.6 Connecting A Cable . 173 7.7.7 Connecting The Power Source . 174 7.7.8 Attaching A Port Replicator . 174 7.7.9 Picker Cradle Maintenance . 174 7.7.10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal . 175 7.7.11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator . 176 7.7.12 Specications . 177 7.7.12.1 Physical . 177 7.7.12.2 Environmental

. 177 7.7.12.3 Battery Pack . 177 7.7.12.4 Agency Approvals . 178 7.8 Accessories Part Number List. 179 158 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories External Bar Code Readers 7.1 External Bar Code Readers Warning:

ALWAYS TURN THE TERMINAL OFF before connecting or disconnecting any bar code reader. To connect a bar code reader (either a scanner or a contact wand) to the terminal, attach the device to the 28-pin peripheral port at the bottom of the unit. Before using the bar code reader, you may need to change some parameters. For details, review Barcode on page 105. 7.1.1 Entering Data With A Bar Code Reader The terminal supports two types of bar code readers: contact wands or scanners. To use a scanner, follow the manufacturers instructions. Use the wand as follows:

Hold the wand at less than 30 from the vertical. If there is a switch on the wand, turn it on before starting the scan. Keep the tip in contact with the entire label. Move the wand across the label at a steady rate. Begin the scan on an area of the label with a light background, and move the wand as if drawing a straight line across the label. 0 00 75328 43815 0 Centre Line of Wand 30 30 Centre Line of Wand Vertical Centre Centre Line of Wand Bar Code Surface Figure 7.1 Using A Wand Bar Code Reader If the label is scanned successfully, the scanned data appears on the display. The terminal will also beep if congured appropriately. Occasionally, the bar code labels are poorly printed or damaged and cannot be read with the wand. In this case, use the keyboard to enter data from the label. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 159 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories The 7035 Battery 7.2 The 7035 Battery Warning:

When a battery is removed from the terminal, a backup of the system, application and any work in progress is maintained for up to 10 minutes. A fresh battery must be installed within this 10 minute time frame. THIS BACKUP WILL NOT FUNCTION UNLESS THE TERMINAL IS TURNED OFF BEFORE THE BATTERY IS REMOVED. Removing the battery while the unit is operating will result in a full reboot. Even after the system backup has expired, the date and time are maintained for at least 72 hours without a battery. 7035 Lithium-Ion batteries operate for a minimum of eight hours1 after a charge. These batteries do not require conditioning. Each battery pack tracks its own capacity using an onscreen horizontal bar graph, referred to as the battery gauge. The battery gauge displays the percentage of remaining battery power capacity 0 to 100%, resolution 10% of nominal capacity. The operator is notied when the battery capacity is low. Typical battery life is 750 cycles or 3 years average use. A fast charge is completed in 2.5 hours. The 7035 terminal will notify the user when the battery performance has degraded to the point that it should be discarded. 1 Times are approximate and may vary depending on operating conditions. 160 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions 7.2.1 Lithium-Ion Battery Safety Precautions Important:

It is critical that this safety information be reviewed and that all warnings be strictly followed. Warning:

BATTERIES ARE CONSIDERED HAZARDOUS WASTE and must be returned to Teklogix for proper disposal. All used batteries must be forwarded to one of the following Teklogix ofces:

Warning:

Teklogix Corp. 1810 Airport Exchange Blvd. Suite 500 Erlanger, Kentucky USA 41018 Teklogix Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf-Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France TO PREVENT the battery from leaking acid, generating heat or exploding, adhere to precautions listed below. The battery incorporates built-in safety devices. To ensure their proper function, do not disassemble or alter any parts of the battery. Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting any of the exposed terminals with metal objects such as wire. Do not transport or store the battery together with metal objects such as necklaces, hair pins, etc. Do not dispose of batteries in re. Do not use or leave the battery near a heat source such as a re or heater. Do not immerse the battery in water. When charging, use the battery charger specically designed for the battery. Do not pierce, strike, throw or step on the battery. Do not directly solder the battery. Do not connect the battery to an electrical outlet, vehicle cigarette lighter, etc. Do not put battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container. Do not use the battery in combination with primary batteries (such as dry-cell batteries) or batteries of different capacities or brands. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 161 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specications Immediately remove the battery from the device or battery charger and stop use if the battery gives off an odor, generates heat, becomes discoloured or deformed, or in any way appears abnormal during use. Do not continue charging the battery if it does not recharge within the specied charge time. The battery may burst or ignite if the battery leaks. Always ensure that it is away from any exposed ames. If leaking electrolyte sprays into your eyes, rinse them with clean running water, and immediately seek medical attention. Do not store the battery in extremely high temperatures (e.g., a vehicle, strong direct sunlight, etc.). This may cause the battery to overheat or ignite, and it may also reduce the performance and service life of the battery. Do not use in areas where static electricity is greater than what the manufacturer guarantees. Keep batteries out of reach of children. 7.2.2 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack Specications Battery Pack Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) Technology Supported packs Battery pack P.N. 20605 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-001 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-002 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Life span P.N. 20605 P.N. 20605-001 P.N. 20605-002 0 C to 45 C (32 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). Pack performance does not degrade below 70%

of nominal under typical daily use over 2 years.

(Based on 3 charge/discharge cycles every 2 days and 250 working days/year.) 162 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories The 7942 In-Unit Charger Charge Cycles Charge Time Performance Monitor Voltage Capacity Weight Battery Life Supported Chargers Memory Battery Gauge Graceful Power Fail Minimum of 750 charge cycles. Fast charge typically in 2.5 hours. Identies the need for pack replacement. 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum) 1350 mAh at 7.2 V nominal 115 g nominal 8 hours minimum at 23 C (73.4 F) with back-

light on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation. Model #7967 6-gang custom charger Model #7942 In-unit charger No memory effect. Indicates remaining capacity, 0 to 100%, resolution 10%. Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference. Operator is notied when battery capacity is low. 7.3 The 7942 In-Unit Charger Important:

The 7035 cannot be switched on while it is inserted in the 7942 in-

unit charger. In fact, if the terminal is on when it is inserted in the charger, it is automatically switched off. The 7942 In-Unit Charger is a single site, fast charger. This unit can charge Lithium-

Ion or Nickel-Metal Hydride batteries. Note: To ensure that air ow through the base of the charger is unimpeded, the charger should be placed on a hard, at surface, free of possible obstructions. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 163 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Mounting Bracket 7.3.1 Mounting Bracket The optional mounting bracket allows the 7942 charger to be permanently secured to a table or bench, permitting one-handed removal of the 7035 terminal from the unit. Charging temperature is restricted to from 10 to 30 C (50 to 86 F). To attach the mounting bracket:

Remove the two rubber feet closest to the front of the charger. Retain the screws. Secure the mounting bracket to the charger using the screws removed from the rubber feet. Use two #8 wood screws to secure the bracket to the appropriate surface 7.3.2 Connecting The Power Source Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger. Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source. When the charger is plugged in, all the LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self-test. The Power LED then remains on, indicating a power connection. 7.3.3 In-Unit Charger LED Indicators LED Power Green Charge Yellow Fault Red Indicator Denition Always on when the charger is plugged in. On during charge process. Off once battery is fully charged. Blinking if a battery charge fails. On solid when battery is rejected.

(See Battery Charge Fault Conditions on page 165 and Charger Fault Conditions on page 166 for details.) Ready Green On when charge is completed successfully. Table 7.1 Charger LEDs 164 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger 7.3.4 Inserting The 7035 With Battery In The Charger The 7942 Charger has a Power LED along with three additional LEDs Ready, Charge and Fault. Ensure that the green Power LED at the front of the charger is on. The in-unit battery charge pocket is moulded, making it easy to slide the terminal into the charger well. Grasp the terminal just below the display with the keyboard facing you, and slide the lower portion of the terminal with battery into the charger. Apply steady, gentle downward pressure to properly mate the charger connector with the battery in the terminal. 7.3.5 Charging The Battery When the terminal with battery is inserted in the charger, all LEDs light up. After a few seconds, the Ready and Fault LEDs turn off. The Charge LED remains on, indicating the fast charge is in progress. The Power LED should always be on. Note:

If the 7035 is powered up when it is inserted in the charger, it will be turned off automatically. Battery Charged And Ready Typically, a fast charge takes 2.5 to 3.5 hours. When the Charge LED turns off and the green Ready LED turns on, the fast charge cycle is complete and the terminal is ready for use. 7.3.6 Battery Charge Fault Conditions The Fault LED remains on under one of the following circumstances:

The charger cannot read valid data from the battery pack. The battery is not compatible with the 7942 charger. The battery pack is set to inhibit charge. The battery is defective (cell damage). The battery temperature is outside the acceptable charge range. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 165 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Charger Fault Conditions The Fault LED blinks when a charge process has failed. Some possible causes are listed below:

The battery temperature has gone outside of the acceptable charge range. The charger cannot communicate with the battery pack. The battery is defective. The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period. When the terminal is removed from the charger, the Fault LED should turn off. If this LED remains on after the terminal is removed, refer to Charger Fault Conditions on page 166. 7.3.7 Charger Fault Conditions An internal charger fault is indicated if:

The Fault LED remains illuminated after the terminal is removed. All LEDs turn on and remain illuminated when the charger is powered up. All LEDs turn on during normal operation. Power should be cycled to the charger to correct these problems. If any of these symptoms occur persistently, the charger unit should be repaired by a qualied service technician. 7.3.8 Removing The Terminal From The In-Unit Charger To remove the terminal from the charger:

Apply steady downward pressure to the front of the charger with one hand while pulling up on the terminal. If necessary, you may need to use a gentle, side-to-side rocking motion to slide the terminal out of the charger well. 7.3.9 7942 Charger Specications Charge Sites Charge Time Compatibility Connection 1 dedicated for in-unit charging 2.5 to 3.5 hours Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion), Nickel-Metal Hydride (NiMH). Via contacts at base of battery pack (battery must be installed in terminal). 166 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories The 7967 Gang Charger Charge Operation Lifetime:

Reliability Power Supply Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention. Indicators display charge status. Minimum 5000 pack insertions, typical 10,000 insertions. Self-cleaning contacts. Autoranging (100-240 VAC 10%, 50/60 Hz 7.4 The 7967 Gang Charger The 7967 Gang Charger can charge up to six Lithium-Ion batteries at one time. 7.4.1 Connecting The Power Source The 7967 Gang Charger is powered using a universal AC input. It accepts voltages ranging from 100-230 volts AC, 50/60 Hz. The AC receptacle, an IEC 320 type connector, is located at the back of the charger. Plug the female end of the AC line cord into the IEC connector at the back of the charger. Plug the other end of the AC line cord into an appropriate power source. All front panel LEDs turn on for a few seconds during a self-test mode. The Power On LED then remains on, indicating a power connection. Check to make sure that the fan is running. 7.4.2 Inserting And Charging The Battery The 7967 Gang Charger has a Power On LED and each charge pocket has three LEDs Charge, Fault and Ready. Ensure that the green Power On LED at the front left side of the charger is on. The battery charge pockets are moulded, making it easy to snap the batteries into the pockets. With the four electrical contacts facing down and textured plastic battery surface facing the front of the charger, insert the battery into a charger pocket. It should click into place. Charging will begin immediately. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 167 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Fault Conditions Battery Charged And Ready When the Charge LED turns off and the green Ready LED turns on, the fast charge cycle is complete, and the battery is ready for use. Typically, a fast charge takes 2.5 hours. Note that for Lithium-Ion batteries, 70% of the charge occurs within the rst hour. 7.4.3 Fault Conditions The red Fault LED turns on to indicate that the battery pack has been rejected or the charge process has failed. 7.4.3.1 Fault LED Turns On During A Charge The battery temperature has changed such that it is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is halted. Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge. The battery is defective for example, the battery may have a weak cell, an open cell or a short. The battery did not complete the charge cycle within the maximum timeout period. Clean the battery contacts and try inserting the battery for charging. Check the battery parameter performance using the utility provided in the 7035. Try another recharge cycle. 7.4.3.2 Fault LED Turns On At Insertion The charger cannot read valid data from the battery. Clean the battery contacts and try charging the battery again. In some cases, foreign matter may block the battery receptacle interface. Check the charger receptacle for debris and clear if required. The hand-held terminal has set the pack to inhibit the charge. In this case, the battery is no longer useful and the battery should be returned to Teklogix Inc. for proper disposal. Return addresses are listed on page 161. The battery is not compatible with this charger. The battery temperature is outside of the acceptable range and the fast charge is inhibited. Remove the battery and permit it to warm or cool to room temperature before reinserting and restarting the charge. 168 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories 7967 Charger Specications 7.4.4 7967 Charger Specications Charge Sites Compatibility Connection Charge Operation Limitations 6 Lithium-Ion batteries only. Via contacts at top of battery pack. Charging occurs automatically upon insertion without user intervention. Indicators display charge status. Will not charge NiMH batteries. However, if a NiMH battery is inserted in this charger, neither the battery nor the charger will be damaged. 7.5 Important Charger Safety Instructions SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS This manual contains important safety and operating instructions for battery charger Model 7967 and 7942. Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary markings on (1) battery charger, (2) battery, and (3) product using battery. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by the battery charger manufacturer may result in re, electric shock, or personal injury. To reduce risk of damage to the electric plug and cord when unplugging the charger, pull the plug rather than the cord. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it is not stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise subjected to damage or stress. Do not operate the charger with a damaged cord or plug. Replace immediately. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way; it should be inspected by qualied service personnel. Do not disassemble the charger; it should be repaired by qualied service personnel. Incorrect reassembly may result in electric shock or re. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 169 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Antenna Types An extension cord should not be used unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in re or electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure:

The plug pins on the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the charger. The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition and that the wire size is larger than 16 AWG. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow. Do not place batteries in the charger if they are cold from extended exposure to a freezer or outside temperatures below 10C (50F). Allow them to warm up to room temperature for at least two hours. Do not use the charger if, after an overnight charge, any of the batteries feel warmer than the charger housing. The charger should be inspected by qualied service personnel. Do not use the charger if any of the batteries or the charger get more than lukewarm. The equipment should be inspected by qualied personnel. 7.6 Antenna Types Available external whip antennas include a 3 inch 2.4 GHz dipole whip and a 4 inch VHF whip. Antenna Type Internal External Reverse gender Model Description Connector Type Antenna Whip Plastic Cap SMA N/A 2.4 GHz Dipole P.N. 20667 VHF Whip P.N. 20668 N/A 7035-SS

(Spread Spectrum) 7035-NB

(Narrowband) External Standard SMA Table 7.2 7035 Antennas 170 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories The 7035 Picker Cradle 7.7 The 7035 Picker Cradle Picker cradles provide physical support for terminals, allowing hands-free operation. Teklogix offers three types of picker cradles:

Model number 7937A an unpowered picker cradle. Model number 7937B a powered picker cradle with 11-16VDC input. Model number 7937C a powered picker cradle with 10-55 VDC input. 7.7.1 Mounting Hardware The 7035 Picker Cradle can be mounted on its own or with one of the following:

Pedestal mount with locking joint (PN 18447-001) Heavy-duty pedestal mount (PN 30082) Vertical mounting plate (PN 18440-001) Horizontal mount plate (PN 18448-001) Scanner mounting plate (PN 18449-001) Scanner holder (PN 92892) Port replicator (PN 21658) 7.7.2 Installation Note: Where applicable, the unit should be mounted inside the roll cage. Installation requirements vary depending on the type of application used mobile

(e.g., a fork lift truck) or xed (e.g., a work table). For a typical installation:

1. Choose a suitable mounting location. 2. 3. Connect the power source. If necessary, connect the pass-through cable to an accessory. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 171 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting 7.7.3 Disassembling The Cradle Before Mounting Note:

If the cradle is attached from behind to a plate or pedestal mount using the four threaded holes (#8-32) in the rear bracket, it does not need to be disassembled. Ensure that the screws used are the correct length. The rear bracket of the cradle also has four through holes that allow the cradle to be attached directly to a surface. Prior to mounting, the plastic cradle must be removed. To disassemble the cradle:

Unscrew the two hex bolts (one per side), and pull away the plastic cradle. The diagram below includes the disassembly of the pedestal mount. Figure 7.2 Disassembling The Cradle For Mounting 172 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Mounting The Cradle 7.7.4 Mounting The Cradle Mount the main chassis using four #8-32 machine screws and four #8-32 KEPS nuts. Note:

If mounting directly to wood, use four #8 wood screws. Replace the plastic cradle, securing it with two hex bolts (one per side). If a pedestal mount is used, adjust the angle of the cradle to the optimum viewing angle, and securely tighten the hex and wing screws. 7.7.5 Installing The Cables Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices, consider the following:

Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring. Protect cable runs from pinching, overheating, and physical damage. Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal. Use plastic straps to prevent cables and connectors from loosening. Keep cables away from heat sources, grease, battery acid, and other potential hazards. Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle. Leave enough extra cable so that the terminal can be easily removed. Note: Where applicable, ensure that the unit is mounted inside the roll cage. 7.7.6 Connecting A Cable When a picker cradle is ordered with a peripheral cable:

Connect one end of the cable to the accessory. Connect the other end to the 7035 itself. Secure the cable to avoid physical injury or damage to the cable. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 173 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Connecting The Power Source 7.7.7 Connecting The Power Source Model 7937A does not require a power connection. Model 7937B and 7937C have short power cords and connectors. The extension power cable (P.N. 13985) joins the cradles to a power source. If an unfused power source must be used, install the fuse assembly (P.N. 19440) provided with P.N. 13985. To connect the fuse assembly, Push the male connector of the fuse assembly into the female connector at the positive (red) lead of the power cable. Connect the red lead to the positive side of the battery. Connect the black lead to the negative side of the battery. Warning:

Do not reverse the polarity or connect to a voltage outside the specied range. Note also that the fuse should be UL approved. 7.7.8 Attaching A Port Replicator A port replicator, P.N. 21658, is an accessory which extends the 28-pin peripheral port connection for the 7035 terminal to an identical 28-pin xed connector. The port replicator mounts on the underside of any of the 7035 picker cradles with 2 screws. A dsub9 COM port is also included. It is equipped with transmit, receive, ground, CTS and RTS signals. When a port replicator is attached to a cradle, you can, for example, attach a scanner to the 28-pin connector and a serial printer to the dsub9 connector. 7.7.9 Picker Cradle Maintenance Picker cradles requires little maintenance. Ensure that the inside of the plastic cradle is clear of any debris. Avoid using strong solvents. 174 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal 7.7.10 Inserting And Removing The 7035 Terminal The picker cradle is comprised of two parts a xed outer metal chassis that is secured to the vehicle or work surface, and a moveable plastic cradle in which the 7035 terminal is placed. The plastic cradle tilts forward so that the terminal can be inserted or removed, and it tilts back to lock the terminal. Figure 7.3 Unpowered Picker Cradle 7937A To insert the 7035 in the plastic cradle, Using your thumb and rst nger, depress the two raised plastic buttons located on the top of the cradle. Pull the plastic carrier forward until a stop is felt to ensure that the locking tabs are fully withdrawn from the plastic cradle. Push the 7035 terminal into the plastic cradle. Push the plastic cradle back, snapping it into place. To remove the 7035 from the plastic cradle, Reverse the above procedure. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 175 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Picker Cradle LED Indicator 7.7.11 Picker Cradle LED Indicator LED Colour Green/Orange Green Orange Red Flashing Green Flashing Orange Flashing Red Conditions Cradle is unlocked. Cradle is locked. Terminal is ON, and battery pack PN 20605-002 is installed. Battery cells are disconnected within the battery pack, and the terminal is powered from cradle (indenite usage). Cradle is locked. Terminal is OFF. Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. Battery is charging and capacity is less than 80% charged. Cradle is locked. Terminal is OFF, and battery pack PN 20605, 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. Battery not charging because of incorrect data (charge fault). Terminal is not inserted in cradle. Cradle is locked. Terminal is OFF. Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. Battery is charging and capacity is more than 80% charged. The unit is ready for mobile use. Note: If the terminal is turned on while charging, the terminal will signal the cradle to immediately stop the charge process. Cradle is locked. Terminal is OFF. Battery pack PN 20605 or 20605-001 or 20605-002 is installed. Battery temperature is lower than 10 C or higher than 45 C. Charging will begin when battery within correct temperature range. Cradle is locked. Terminal is ON and 20605 or 20605-001 battery is installed. Terminal running off battery pack, not cradle. Table 7.3 Charger Indicators 176 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7.7.12 Specications 7.7.12.1 Physical Dimensions (W x H x D) Plastic cradle Metal chassis Weight 7.7.12.2 Environmental Operating temperature Storage temperature Charge mode Charge pump mode Discharge mode Relative humidity Shock Vibration 7.7.12.3 Battery Pack Supported chemistry Supported cell type Supported packs Battery pack P.N. 20605 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-001 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-002 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Specications 115 x 203 x 115 mm (4.5" x 8.0" x 4.5") Jet Black, Bayer Makroblend EL-700 16 AWG cold rolled steel black enamel over yellow chromate plate 1.4 kg (3.09 lbs.)

-20 C to 45 C (-4 F to 113 F)

-40 C to 60 C (-40 F to 140 F) 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F) 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F)

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F) 10 to 90% (non-condensing) 25 G with an 11 ms rise-time on all axes Random, 3-axis, 1.5g RMS, 4-500 Hz, 60 minutes. Lithium-Ion special version with internal cell disconnect. 4.1V or 4.2V (Varta LGR 18650P) P.N. 20605 P.N. 20605-001 P.N. 20605-002 0 C to 45 C (32 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 177 Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Agency Approvals Charge temperature Discharge temperature Target pack types Charge sites Charge mode Operation under charge Input power Input connector Electrical interface Agency Approvals Pin-out 7.7.12.4 USA Canada Europe 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). Proprietary, 2S, 7.2V 1600 mAh (Li-Ion) 1 site for in-unit charging. Fast charge CCCV Not permitted. Charging will stop when terminal is turned ON. Model 7937B 11 - 16 VDC 36 W max. Model 7937C 10 - 55 VDC 36 W max. AMP type CPC #206153-1 on ying lead. 4 spring-loaded heavy-duty pogo type pins in base of unit.

+BAT, -BAT. TEMP, DATA FCC Part 15 (EMI) UL 1950 (electrical safety) or CSA/NRTL equivalent ICES-003/CSA C108.8-M1983 (EMI) CSA - C22.2 No. 950-M89 (electrical safety) European CE mark: 72/73/EEC Low Voltage Directive 89/336/EEC EMC Directive 178 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 7.8 Accessories Part Number List Chapter 7: Terminal Accessories Accessories Part Number List Part #/Model #

20639 30584 20610-001 Accessory Pistol Grip Kit Holster Hand Strap Kit Wrist Strap Belt &

Belt Loop Shoulder Strap Protective Case Cradle 30020 30138 20636 30585 30586 30600 Table 7.4 Accessory Part Numbers Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 179 SPECIFICATIONS 88 8.1 Radio Specications . 183 8.2 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specications . 186 8.3 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications . 188 8.4 Peripheral Ports. 191 8.4.1 Serial Port 1 (COM 1) . 191 8.4.2 Serial Port 2 (COM 2) . 191 8.5 Memory Expansion Board . 192 8.6 IrDA Port (7035 Only) . 192 8.7 Wireless Communication Options . 192 8.8 Bar Code Scanning . 193 8.8.1 Internal Scanners (7035 Only) . 193 8.8.2 External Scanners . 193 8.8.3 Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only) . 193 8.9 Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) . 194 8.10 Power Management (7035 Only) . 197 8.10.1 Power Save States. 197 8.11 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) . 199 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 181 Chapter 8: Specications Radio Specications Note: Performance specications are nominal and subject to change without notice. 8.1 Radio Specications Important:

Sites in Canada using Teklogix TRX7430 and TRX7440 802.11 radios require a radio licence unless they are installed totally within a building (user must obtain licence from Industry Canada). TRX7370 Narrow Band Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates 0.5, 1.0, 2.0 Watts 403-512 MHz 20 4800, 9600, 19.2 kbps TRX7440 (RangeLAN 802 8400) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates 100mW (ETSI), 400mW (FCC/IC) 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHz 79 (FCC, ETSI) 35 (FR) 23 (JP) 27 (SP) 1, 2 Mbps TRX7410 & TRX7410A TekLan 902 MHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum TRX7410=1 Watt, TRX7410A=250 mW 902-928 MHz 7 121 kbps Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 183 Chapter 8: Specications Radio Specications

*TRX7430 (WaveLAN/IEEE) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates 32 mW 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHz 11 (FCC) 13 (ETSI) 4 (FR) 1 (JP) 2 (SP) 1, 2 Mbps

* Refer to Regulatory Information TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS on page 185 for installation and usage information.

*TRX7431 (WaveLAN/IEEE) PC Card IEEE 802.11 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels Data Rates 32 mW 2.4 GHz - 2.5 GHz 11 (FCC) 13 (ETSI) 4 (FR) 1 (JP) 2 (SP) 1, 2, 5.5, 11 Mbps

* Refer to Regulatory Information TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS on page 185 for installation and usage information. 184 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications Radio Specications This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Regulatory Information TRX7430/31 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card 802.11 DS SS The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Canada Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Europe EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the specications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:

ETS 300-826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment.

ETS 300-328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment. USA Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions:

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products, a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. Refer to the Regulatory Statements as identied in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information. Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modication of the devices included with this IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specied by Lucent Technologies. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modication, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. For country-specic approvals, please consult Radio Certication Sheet Lucent WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card Radio part number 80450. Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 185 Chapter 8: Specications 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specications TRX7460 Mobitex Radio Transmit Power Frequency Range & Channels 2 Watt max Frequency range and number of channels is dependent on the radio module. Refer to the table below:

Radio Type Transmitter Frequencies Receiver Frequencies Number of Channels M2150

(Two RX & TX bands) 425.5 - 426.1 MHz 440.0 - 440.6 MHz 459.6 - 459.9 MHz 453.1 - 453.4 MHz M2160 M2190 410.0 - 420.0 MHz 420.0 - 430.0 MHz 896.0 - 902.0 MHz 935.0 - 941.0 MHz 48 24 800 480 Data Rates 8 kbps 8.2 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specications Physical Size 69 mm (2.73") W x 40 mm (1.60") D, 203 mm (8") circumference, at keyboard 93 mm (3.68") W x 63 mm (2.50") D x 241 mm (9.5") H (max. overall) without integrated scanner 93 mm (3.68") W x 73 mm (2.90") D x 241 mm (9.5") H (max. overall) with integrated scanner Weight 7035 Spread Spectrum 7035 Narrow Band With integrated scanner, add With pistol grip, add With hand strap, add 633 g (22.3 oz.) including battery and radio 763 g (26.9 oz.) including battery and radio 48 g (1.7 oz.) 110 g (3.9 oz.) 17 g (0.6 oz.) 186 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications 7035 Hand-Held Terminal Specications Environmental Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Rain/Dust Shock 0 to 50C (32 to 122F)

-20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing) IEC 529, classication IP54 5 ft. drop to concrete (5 times) Warning:

The battery electrolyte freezes below -30 C (-22 F). Frozen electrolyte will damage the battery life and capacity. CPU Am486 DX-33 derivative with 8k cache 4 MB Flash ROM (BIOS, DOS, applications) 8 MB RAM. Memory Expansion Proprietary plug-in card Electrical Conguration (battery pack) Power supply (battery pack) Charge time Capacity Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery storage temperature Battery life Charge cycles Performance monitor 4 MB Flash ROM, expandable to 8 MB 8 MB RAM, expandable to 16 MB RAM, depot upgradeable. 1P2S 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum) Fast charge typically 2.5 hours. 1350 mAh @ 0.2C discharge to 5.5V terminal 0 C to 40 C (32 F to 104 F)

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F)

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F) 8 hours minimum at 23 C (73.4 F) with backlight on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation. Minimum of 750 charge cycles. Identies the need for pack replacement. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 187 Chapter 8: Specications 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications Display Active Area Backlight Control Text Mode Screen Formats:

62 x 62 mm (2.44" x 2.44"), 0.38 mm dot pitch. Automated function. Character Cell Character Height (mm) Lines x Column 6x8 8 x 8 8 x 14 8 x 16 3.04 3.04 5.32 6.08 18x26 18x20 10x20 9x20 Approvals Safety (applies to chargers) EMC Laser UL 1950, CSA C22.2 No950, LVD EN 60950 FCC Part 15 Class B, EMC Directive Class B CDRH/IEC Class II 8.3 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications 8255 Physical Size And Weight Enclosure: 16 gauge steel 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel nish Size: 287 mm (11.3") W x 102 mm (4.0") D x 229 mm (9.0") H Weight: 3.8 kg (8.4 lbs) 8260 Display Physical Size And Weight Enclosure: 16 gauge steel 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel nish Size: 287 mm (11.3") W x 64 mm (2.5") D x 229 mm (9.0") H Weight: 3.4 kg (7.5 lbs) 8260 Keyboard Physical Size And Weight Enclosure: 16 gauge steel 1.5 mm (0.060") with baked enamel nish Size: 287 mm (11.3") W x 64 mm (2.5") D x 229 mm (9.0") H Weight: 1.1 kg (2.4 lbs) 188 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications 8255 VFD Environmental Operating temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Shock Random Vibration Rain/Dust

-10 to 50 C (-14 to 122 F)

-40 to 60 C (-40 to 140 F) 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing) 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse, 11 ms duration on each axis 1.5 g RMS, 4 Hz to 500 Hz, 60 min duration on each axis IEC 529, IP66 rating 8255 LCD And 8260 LCD Environmental Operating temperature Storage Temperature Relative Humidity Shock Random Vibration Rain/Dust Memory Expansion Proprietary plug-in card 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)

-20 to 60 C (-4 to 140 F) 10 to 90% (RH non-condensing) 30 g peak sawtooth shock pulse, 11 ms duration on each axis 1.5 g RMS, 4 Hz to 500 Hz, 60 min duration on each axis IEC 529, IP66 rating 8 MB RAM, expandable to 16 MB. 4 MB Flash ROM, expandable to 8 MB. Display 8255 Vacuum Fluorescent Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes (line x character) Resolution Attributes 52 x 166 mm (2.0" x 6.5") Not required 5x32, 10x32 256 W x 80 H Normal, reverse video, blink and underline. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 189 Chapter 8: Specications 8255/8260 Vehicle-Mount Terminal Specications Display 8255 Liquid Crystal Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes (line x character) Resolution Attributes Display 8260 Liquid Crystal Active Area Backlight Control Font Sizes (line x character) Resolution Attributes Approvals EMC 68 x 175 mm (2.7" x 6.9") Cold cathode uorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff. 12x80, 14x80, 25x80 640 W x 200 H Normal, reverse video, blink and underline. 148 x 196 mm (5.8" x 7.7") Cold cathode uorescent tube with programmable auto shutoff. 25x80 640 W x 480 H Normal, reverse video, blink and underline. FCC Part 15 Class B, CE mark for Europe Conforms with Council Directive 89/336/EEC Complies with standards EN 55022 class B and EN 50082.1 190 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications Peripheral Ports 8.4 Peripheral Ports External 28-pin PCR male connector Type Type (8255/8260 Only) External 36-pin PCR male connector 8.4.1 Serial Port 1 (COM 1) Type Electrical Signal Lines Supported Modes Application Interface Transfer Rates Compatibility Protocols Limitations DTE, 16550A equivalent (with 16 byte data FIFO) RS-232D signalling, maximum cable length 50 ft.

(typical 6 ft.) RTS, CTS, TxD, RxD Standard UART with RTS/CTS handshaking Via standard 16550 h/w registers or BIOS serial device 2400 - 115,000 bps User assigned. Application dependent. For the 7035 only, COM1 is shared with the IrDA port; only one peripheral can be active at one time. No hardware handshake support for DTR, DSR, DCD, RI. 8.4.2 Serial Port 2 (COM 2) Type Electrical Signal Lines Supported Modes Application Interface Transfer Rates Compatibility Protocols Limitations DTE, proprietary double-buffered (similar to 8251A) RS-232D signalling, maximum cable length 50 ft.

(typical 6 ft.) TxD, RxD Basic UART (no hardware handshaking) Only through BIOS serial device. 2400 - 57,600 bps Decoded Scanners, Scan-See, download cable

(serves as the monitor port). Application dependent. Not intended for general use with user applications. No hardware handshake support. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 191 Chapter 8: Specications Memory Expansion Board 8.5 Memory Expansion Board Type Access Compatibility DRAM Flash ROM Internal, plug-in printed circuit module Not customer upgradeable. Proprietary 8 MB 4 MB 8.6 IrDA Port (7035 Only) Function Compatibility Supported Transfer Rates Supported Modes Limitations Intended for application download and possible batch data transfer. IrDA Specication Version 1.1 (physical and link layer) All UART rates (2400 bps 115,000 bps) UART (Async) Shared with serial port COM 1. Only one peripheral active at a time. 8.7 Wireless Communication Options Refer to Radio Specications on page 183 for a description of the radio types available for Teklogix 7035, 8255 and 8260 terminals. Descriptions also include transmission power, data rates and channel information for each radio. 192 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 8.8 Bar Code Scanning Chapter 8: Specications Bar Code Scanning Decoded and non-decoded. Scanner Types Non-Decoded Codes Supported Code 39, code 128, EAN 13, EAN 8, EAN 128, UPC-A, UPC-E, Codabar, Code 93, Code 11, Interleaved 2-of-5, MSI/PLESSY, Discrete 2-of-5. Dependent on external scanner choice. Automatic for all selected codes, Non-

Decoded input. Decoded input is external scanner dependent. Decoded Codes Supported Code Discrimination 8.8.1 Internal Scanners (7035 Only) Base Options Scan Triggering 8.8.2 External Scanners Supported Types Interface Standard, Standard High Visibility or Long Range, factory installed. If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner, the aiming dot will be enabled for a congurable time period after which normal scanning begins. Double-clicking trigger will override aiming delay and initiate immediate scan. Decoded and Non-Decoded 5V only. Via peripheral port. Pinout compatible with all 7030 and 8055 scanners. 8.8.3 Internal Scanner Port (7035 Only) Refer to Table B.4 Internal Scanner Connector, in Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams for a detailed connector table. Compatibility Symbol SE1200, SE1200LR, SE1200HV Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 193 Chapter 8: Specications Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) 8.9 Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) Parameter Light Source Laser Class Laser Power 7035 Standard Range

(SE 1200) Visible Laser Diode, 675nm 5nm CDRH Class II DIN EN 60825: July 1993, Class 2 1.0 mW Max. Average Radiant Power Pulse Power Duration Continuous Scan Angle Scan Repetition Skew Tolerance Pitch Angle Roll Tolerance Specular Dead Zone Decode Depth of Field Print Contrast Minimum Ambient Light Immunity 42 2 36 3 scans/second

(bidirectional) 65 from normal 55 from normal 20 from vertical 2 from normal See Figure 8.2 on page 196. Minimum bar width is 5.0 mil

(0.127 mm) 20% absolute dark/light reec-

tive measured at 675 nm. Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles Articial Light: 450 ft. candles 7035 Long Range

(SE 1200LR) Visible Laser Diode, 650nm 5nm CDRH Class II DIN EN 60825: July 1993, Class 2 1.0 mW Max. Average Radiant Power Continuous 23 2 36 3 scans/second

(bidirectional) 60 from normal 65 from normal 10 from vertical 2 from normal See Figure 8.3 on page 197. Minimum bar width is 10.0 mil (0.254 mm) 40% absolute dark/light reec-

tance measured at 675 nm. Sunlight: 8000 ft. candles Articial Light: 450 ft. candles Table 8.1 Scanner Specications 194 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) Pitch Scanner Pitch Angle Side View Scan Beam Barcode Surface Skew Scanner Top View Scan Pattern Skew Angle Barcode Surface Specular Dead Zone

< 2 Scanner Side View Scan Beam Barcode Surface Roll Scanner Side View Scan Beam Barcode Surface Figure 8.1 Pitch, Skew And Specular Dead Zone Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 195 Chapter 8: Specications Internal Scanner Specications (7035 Only) In. cm. 15.59 39.6 10 25.4 5 0 5 12.7 0 12.7 10 25.4 15.59 39.6 12 18 20 i W d t h O f F i e l d SE 1200 Front of terminal 3.0 3.0 3.0 5 mil 7.5 mil 4.5 8 10 mil 15 mil 20 mil

40 mil 55 mil 29 35 In. cm. 0 0 5 12.7 10 25.4 15 38.1 20 50.8 25 63.5 30 76.2 35 88.9 Depth Of Field

* Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle. Note: Typical performance at 20 C (68 F) on high quality symbols. Figure 8.2 Decode Zone, Standard Range 196 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications Power Management (7035 Only) i W d t h O f F i e l d In. cm. 43.2 109.7 30 76.2 50.8 20 10 25.4 0 25.4 10 50.8 20 76.2 30 43.2 109.7 0 209 200 508 220 558.8 SE 1200LR Front of terminal 12 9 10 10 In. cm. 0 0 10 mil 17 15 mil 20 mil 33 79 38 40 mil 55 mil 70 84 89 70 mil reflective 100 mil reflective 161 40 20 100 50.8 101.6 152.4 203.2 254 80 60 140 120 180 304.8 355.6 406.4 457.2 160 Note: Typical performance at 20C (68 F) on high quality symbols. Depth Of Field Figure 8.3 Decode Zone, Long Range 8.10 Power Management (7035 Only) BIOS Compatibility Advanced Power Management (APM) BIOS Interface Specication, Rev 1.2. 8.10.1 Power Save States System power states are based on the APM denitions. APM Enabled The terminal is in full power state. All functions are active and system power is managed. The link indicator is displayed in uppercase letters, showing that the radio is running at full power. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 197 Chapter 8: Specications Power Save States APM Standby APM Suspend Off The terminal is in low power state with most devices in low power mode. The link indicator is displayed in lowercase letters, showing that the radio is in low power state. The CPU clock is slowed or stopped. The system state is fully retained, and the terminal returns to APM Enabled (full power) state quickly when, for example, the operator presses a key or scans a bar code. This state is not evident to the operator. The terminal enters Suspend state from APM Standby state after a congurable period of inactivity. The terminal also enters Suspend state when the <BLUE>

<ENTER> key combination is pressed to turn the terminal off. In this state, the 7035 appears to be off. While the system context and memory are saved, the communication link is down and the terminal display is blank. To return to APM Enable state, the

<ENTER/ON> key must be pressed. Returning to full power state takes approximately 4 seconds. The terminal enters the Off state from APM Suspend state after a congurable timeout. The terminal is completely powered off with no CPU context or memory contents saved. Only the real-time clock is maintained. To return to the APM Enabled state, the

<ENTER/ON> key must be pressed. The system runs through a complete reset/reboot sequence. 198 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Chapter 8: Specications Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) 8.11 Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) Technology Supported packs Battery pack P.N. 20605 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-001 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Battery pack P.N. 20605-002 Charge temperature Discharge temperature Lifespan Charge Cycles Charge Time Performance Monitor Voltage Capacity Weight Temperature Range Battery Life Supported Chargers Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) P.N. 20605 P.N. 20605-001 P.N. 20605-002 0 C to 45 C (32 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). 10 C to 45 C (50 F to 113 F).

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F). Pack performance does not degrade below 70%

of nominal under typical daily use over 2 years.

(Based on 3 charge/discharge cycles every 2 days and 250 working days/year.) Minimum of 750 charge cycles. Fast charge typically in 2.5 hours. Identies the need for pack replacement. 7.2 V nominal (6.0 V to 8.4 V maximum) 1350 mAh at 7.2 V nominal 115 g nominal

-20 C to 60 C (-4 F to 140 F) 8 hours minimum at 23 C (73.4 F) with back-

light on 5%, 5 scan transactions per minute, TESS emulation, TRX7370 radio. Based on typical 1 year cell degradation. Model #7967 6-gang custom charger Model #7942 In-unit charger Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual 199 Chapter 8: Specications Lithium-Ion Battery Pack (7035 Only) Memory Battery Gauge Graceful Power Fail No memory effect. Indicates remaining capacity, 0 to 100%, resolution 10%. Nominal capacity of battery pack is displayed as a reference. Operator is notied when battery capacity is low. 200 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX AA SUPPORT SERVICES AND WORLDWIDE OFFICES A.1 Support Services Teklogix provides a complete range of product support services to its customers. In North America, these services can be accessed through the Teklogix Helpdesk. The Helpdesk coordinates repairs and training, helps you to troubleshoot problems over the phone and arranges for technicians or engineers to come to your site. These ser-

vices are also available through our Worldwide Ofces. A.1.1 North American Helpdesk Technical Support Voice:

Fax:

1 800 387-8898 1 905 812-6304 E-mail:

Repair Services Voice:

helpdesk@teklogix.com 1 800 387-8898 Fax:

1 905 812-6304 E-mail:

rma@teklogix.com Web Site:

http://service.teklogix.com A.1.2 International Support For support outside of North America, please contact your local Teklogix ofce. See page 3 for a current listing of worldwide Teklogix ofces. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual A-1 A.2 WORLDWIDE OFFICES WORLD HEADQUARTERS AND CANADIAN SERVICE CENTRE Teklogix Inc. 2100 Meadowvale Boulevard Mississauga Ontario Canada L5N 7J9 Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+1 905 813 9900

+1 905 812 6300 salescdn@teklogix.com NORTH AMERICAN HEADQUARTERS AND U.S. SERVICE CENTRE Teklogix Corp. 1810 Airport Exchange Boulevard Suite 500 Erlanger, Kentucky USA 41018 Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+1 606 371 6006

+1 606 371 6422 salesusa@teklogix.com INTERNATIONAL SUBSIDIARIES Teklogix GmbH Jakob Kaiser Strae 3 D-47877 Willich Mnchheide Deutschland Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+49 2154 9282 0

+49 2154 9282 59 info@teklogix.de Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf Btiment 1 13856 Aix-en-Provence Cedex 3, France Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+33 4 4224 5740

+33 4 4239 4632 tekeuro@teklogix.com Teklogix LTD. 3, Lancaster Court Coronation Road High Wycombe Bucks HP123TD England

+44 1494 450666 Tel:

Fax:

+44 1494 450155 WWW: www.teklogix.co.uk Email:

tekuk@teklogix.com Teklogix AB Stora Badhusgatan 18-20 411 21 Gthenburg Sweden Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+46 31 13 15 50

+46 31 13 57 80 info@teklogix.se Teklogix Finland Metsnneidonkuja 8 02130 Espoo Finland Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+358 9 4307 8390

+358 9 4307 8395 tekeuro@teklogix.com Teklogix Danmark Vesterballevej 4-6 7000 Fredericia Danmark Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+45 76 24 0133

+45 75 94 4679 tedk@teklogix.com Teklogix Italia S.r.I Via Galilei, 47 20092 Cinisello Balsamo Milan, Italy Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+39 2 6604 5410

+39 2 6604 5412 tkxitalia@teklogix.com Teklogix Inc. (Singapore) 583 Orchard Road

# 15-01 Forum Singapore 238884 Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+65 735 8108

+65 733 5990 intl@teklogix.com Teklogix de Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Sierra Mojada 626, 2 Piso Col. Lomas Barrilaco, C.P. 11010 Mexico, D.F., Mexico Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+52 5 327 1124

+52 5 327 1123 salesusa@teklogix.com Teklogix do Brasil, Ltda. Al. Casa Branca, 851 - conj. 101 e 102 So Paulo - SP - 01408-001 Brasil Tel:

Fax:

WWW: www.teklogixbrasil.com.br Email:

+55 11 3064 0868

+55 11 3068 8198 tekbr@teklogix.com Chile Teklogix International Inc. Avenida Vitacura 2909, Ocina 703 Las Condes Santiago, Chile Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+56 2 334 9344

+56 2 233 3868 ventas@teklogix.com Teklogix de Argentina, S.A. Avenida Morceau de Justo 1180 Piso 1, Ocina C-105 Buenos Aires 1107 Argentina Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+54 11 4343 0193

+54 11 4343 6310 tekar@teklogix.com Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual A-3 Teklogix Espaa, S.L. Cityparc Ronda de Dalt Ctra. Hospitalet 147-149 Edicio Atenas 2 3 08940 Cornell de Llobregat (Barcelona) Espaa Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+34 9 3475 0220

+34 9 3475 0230 teklogix@apdo.com Teklogix Systems India Pvt. Ltd. M-74, 1st Floor, M Block Market Greater Kailash-Il New Delhi - 110048 India Tel:

Fax:

Email:

+91 11 621 9257

+91 11 621 9076 tekind@teklogix.com A.3 WORLD WIDE WEB www.teklogix.com A-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX BB PORT PINOUTS AND CABLE DIAGRAMS Signal Name B.1 7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) Function Pin 1 GND 2 GND 3 MIC 4 5 Digital ground. Digital ground. Microphone input. Line level audio output External beeper output. LINE_OUT BEEP Description Ground Audio Alarm EMI Shield Diagnos-

tic Mode Non-

Decoded Scanner Serial Port 2 COM 2 Power 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SHIELD DIAG SCNR_ENABLE SCNR_ACK SCNR_TRIG SCNR_DATA SCNR_SOS SERIAL2_RXD Digital ground. Input. If grounded at power up, causes terminal to enter diagnostic mode. Menu allows ash-ROM upgrade and other test modes. Output enable to initiate external scan engine. Output scan acknowledge. Currently drives decode LED on external scanner. Scanner trigger input. Scanner undecoded serial data input. Not used Serial data input RS-232D. SERIAL2_TXD Serial data output RS-232D. P7_2V P7_2V Switched +7.2V battery power. Switched +7.2V battery power. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-1 Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) Function Pin 17 Scanner Signal Name 5V_SCAN_PWR Power 18 5V_SCAN_PWR/TX_KEY 19 EXP0 20 CV_OUT 21 EXP1 22 EXP2 23 EXP3 24 EXP4 25 RTS1 26 CTS1 27 SERIAL1_TX Radio Test Serial Port 1 Description 5 V scanner power (duplicate of pin 18). 5 V scanner power/transmit monitor signal for radio test. Expansion 0. Control voltage output. Expansion 1. Expansion 2. Expansion 3. Expansion 4. Request-to-send (output) RS-232D. Clear-to-send (input) RS-232D. Serial transmit data RS-232D.

(COM1) 28 SERIAL1_RX Serial receive data RS-232D. A.1 7035 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-pin PCR) Signal Name B.2 8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) Function Pin GND 1 2 GND 3 MIC 4 5 Digital ground. Digital ground. Microphone input. Line level audio output External beeper output. LINE_OUT BEEP Description Ground Audio Alarm EMI Shield Diagnos-

tic Mode 6 7 SHIELD DIAG Digital ground. Input. If grounded at power up, causes terminal to enter diagnostic mode. Menu allows ash-ROM upgrade and other test modes. B-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255/60 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) Function Pin Signal Name Description SCNR_ENABLE SCNR_ACK SCNR_TRIG SCNR_DATA SCNR_SOS SERIAL2_RXD Output enable to initiate external scan engine. Output scan acknowledge. Currently drives decode LED on external scanner. Scanner trigger input. Scanner undecoded serial data input. Not used Serial data input RS-232D. SERIAL2_TXD Serial data output RS-232D. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Non-

Decoded Scanner Serial Port 2 COM 2 Power Scanner Power 12V 12V 12V_SCAN_PWR 5V_SCAN_PWR 5V_Ext 19 NC 20 CV_OUT 21 22 BXT_Data 23 NC 24 BXT_CLK 25 RTS1 26 CTS1 27 SERIAL1_TX Serial Port 1

(COM1) 28 SERIAL1_RX Unswitched 12VDC, 500 mA fuse. Unswitched 12VDC ,500 mA fuse. 12 V switched scanner power. 5 V switched scanner power. NC Control voltage output. 5V unswitched, 500 mA fuse. For Teklogix use only. NC For Teklogix use only. Request-to-send (output) RS-232D. Clear-to-send (input) RS-232D. Serial transmit data RS-232D. Serial receive data RS-232D. A.2 8255/8260 Peripheral Port I/O Connector (28-Pin PCR) Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-3 Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR) B.3 8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR) Function Pin 1 System ground. Signal Name Description GND Battery Voice Ground Ground Ground 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 GND 3 MIC SPKR SHIELD System ground. Microphone input. Speaker output. System ground. EXP_PORT 0 Reserved for future expansion. GND System ground. EXP_PORT 1 Reserved for future expansion. GND System ground. 10 EXP_PORT 2 Reserved for future expansion. Ground 11 GND System ground. 12 EXP_PORT 3 Reserved for future expansion. Ground 13 GND System ground. 14 EXP_PORT 4 Reserved for future expansion. 15 EXP_PORT 5 Reserved for future expansion. Ground 16 GND System ground. 17 EXP_PORT 6 Reserved for future expansion. Power 18 RTS_2 19 CTS_2 20 TXD_2 21 RXD_2 22 23 8.0V 8.0V Alarm 24 BEEP EXP_PORT_COM1 EXP_PORT_COM1 EXP_PORT_COM1 EXP_PORT_COM1 8V output. 500 mA fuse. 8V output. 500 mA fuse. External beeper output. B-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 8255/60 - Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR) Signal Name Description Function Pin EMI Shield 25 SHIELD System ground. 26 EXP_PORT 7 Reserved for future expansion. 27 EXP_PORT 8 Reserved for future expansion. 28 EXP_PORT 9 Reserved for future expansion. 29 Keyboard GND For Teklogix use only. 30 Keyboard 5 V For Teklogix use only. 31 Keyboard CLK For Teklogix use only. 32 Keyboard Data 33 RTS_B 34 CTS_B 35 TX_DATA_B For Teklogix use only. Output handshake signal for RS-232 port 1 to processor. Input handshake signal for RS-232 port 1 to processor. Output data for RS-232 port 1 to processor. 36 RX_DATA_B Input data for RS-232 port 1 to processor. RS-232 Port 1 A.3 8255/8260 Expansion Port I/O Connector (36-Pin PCR) Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-5 Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Internal Scanner Connector B.4 Internal Scanner Connector Pin 1 2 SHIELD 5V_SCAN_PWR Signal Name Description Chassis ground. 5 V scanner power, software switched. Enables range limiter function to improve bar code discrimination at short distances (out-

put, active low) for standard range 7035. Enables aim dot for 7035 LR (long range). Enables scanner laser (output, active low) generates aim dot. Scanner enable (output, active low) enables scan motor. Scanner data (input). Start-of-Scan (input). Digital ground. Digital ground. Chassis ground. 3 RANGE_LIMIT/TARGET DOT 4 5 LASER_ENABLE SCAN_ENABLE SCAN_DATA SCAN_SOS 6 7 8 GROUND 9 GROUND 10 SHIELD A.4 Internal Scanner Connector B.5 Flash Serial Download Cable Pin 1 GND 2 KEY_CONFIG. 0 6 Signal Name SHIELD 7 BOOT_MON_EXT 13 SCNR_SERIAL_IN 14 SCNR_SERIAL_OUT Description System ground. System ground. Shield ground. If held low at Power ON, terminal enters BOOT menu. Serial data receive signal. Serial data transmit signal. A.5 Download Cable B-6 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams 28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector P.N. 19726 B.6 28-Pin PCR To 8-Pin DIN Connector P.N. 19726 28-Pin PCR Ground Shield (CASE) Enable Ack 5V Trigger Scanner Data Serial In Serial Out Scanner Power 5V 1 6 8 9 10 11 13 14 18 Female TERMINAL 8-Pin DIN 3 TAB 6 5 4 2 1 8 7 Ground Shield Enable Ack Trigger Scanner Data Serial In Serial Out 5V Output Female SCANNER CABLE B.7 28-Pin PCR To 7-Pin DIN Connector P.N. 19727 28-Pin PCR 7-Pin DIN Ground Shield (CASE) Enable Ack 5V Trigger Scanner Data Scanner Power to 5V Scanner Power*

1 6 8 9 10 11 18 17 3 TAB 6 5 4 2 1 8 7 Ground Shield Enable Ack Trigger Scanner Data

+5V Output Power Output*

X Female TERMINAL

* 7.2V for 7030 12V for 8055/8060 Female SCANNER CABLE Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual B-7 Appendix B: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Flash Serial Download Cable P.N. 20075 B.8 Flash Serial Download Cable P.N. 20075 DE9 28-Pin PCR Ground Ground Shield BOOT_MON_EXT Scanner Serial In Scanner Serial Out 1 2 6 7 13 14 X 5 3 2 Ground Transmit Receive Female 7030/8055/8060 TERMINAL Female PC SERIAL PORT B.9 Scanner Wand Adaptor Cable P.N. 30092 Honda 28-Pin PCR Ground Shield (CASE) Scanner Data 5V Scanner Power Ground Ground 1 6 11 18 2 10 Female TERMINAL 8-Pin DIN Ground Shield Scanner Data

+5V 3 TAB 2 1 7 Female SCANNER CABLE B-8 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual ASCII CHARACTER TABLE BINARY 0000 0000 0000 0001 0000 0010 0000 0011 0000 0100 0000 0101 0000 0110 0000 0111 0000 1000 0000 1001 0000 1010 0000 1011 0000 1100 0000 1101 0000 1110 0000 1111 0001 0000 0001 0001 0001 0010 0001 0011 0001 0100 0001 0101 0001 0110 0001 0111 0001 1000 0001 1001 0001 1010 0001 1011 0001 1100 0001 1101 DEC 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BELL BS TAB LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS HEX 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D APPENDIX CC BINARY 0001 1110 0001 1111 0010 0000 0010 0001 0010 0010 0010 0011 0010 0100 0010 0101 0010 0110 0010 0111 0010 1000 0010 1001 0010 1010 0010 1011 0010 1100 0010 1101 0010 1110 0010 1111 0011 0000 0011 0001 0011 0010 0011 0011 0011 0100 0011 0101 0011 0110 0011 0111 0011 1000 0011 1001 0011 1010 0011 1011 DEC 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 ASCII RS US Space

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HEX 1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual C-1 Appendix C: ASCII Character Table BINARY 0011 1100 0011 1101 0011 1110 0011 1111 0101 0000 0101 0001 0101 0010 0101 0011 0101 0100 0101 0101 0101 0110 0101 0111 0101 1000 0101 1001 0101 1010 0101 1011 0101 1100 0101 1101 0101 1110 0101 1111 0101 0000 0101 0001 0101 0010 0101 0011 0101 0100 0101 0101 0101 0110 0101 0111 0101 1000 0101 1001 0101 1010 0101 1011 0101 1100 0101 1101 0101 1110 0101 1111 0110 0000 0110 0001 0110 0010 DEC 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 ASCII

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

_ a b HEX 3C 3D 3E 3F 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 BINARY 0110 0011 0110 0100 0110 0101 0110 0110 0110 0111 0110 1000 0110 1001 0110 1010 0110 1011 0110 1100 0110 1101 0110 1110 0110 1111 0111 0000 0111 0001 0111 0010 0111 0011 0111 0100 0111 0101 0111 0111 0111 0111 0111 1000 0111 1001 0111 1010 0111 1011 0111 1100 0111 1101 0111 1110 0111 1111 1000 0000 1000 0001 1000 0010 1000 0011 1000 0100 1000 0101 1000 0110 1000 0111 1000 1000 1000 1001 DEC 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 ASCII c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z

HEX 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 C-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix C: ASCII Character Table ASCII BINARY 1000 1010 1000 1011 1000 1100 1000 1101 1000 1110 1000 1111 1001 0000 1001 0001 1001 0010 1001 0011 1001 0100 1001 0101 1001 0110 1001 0111 1001 1000 1001 1001 1001 1010 1001 1011 1001 1100 1001 1101 1001 1110 1001 1111 1010 0000 1010 0001 1010 0010 1010 0011 1010 0100 1010 0101 1010 0110 1010 0111 1010 1000 1010 1010 1010 1010 1010 1011 1010 1100 1010 1101 1010 1110 1010 1111 1011 0000 DEC 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 ASCII P _ HEX 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 BINARY 1011 0001 1011 0010 1011 0011 1011 0100 1011 0101 1011 0110 1011 0111 1011 1000 1011 1001 1011 1010 1011 1011 1011 1100 1011 1101 1011 1110 1011 1111 1100 0000 1100 0001 1100 0010 1100 0011 1100 0100 1100 0101 1100 0110 1100 0111 1100 1000 1100 1001 1100 1010 1100 1011 1100 1100 1100 1101 1100 1110 1100 1111 1101 0000 1101 0001 1101 0010 1101 0011 1101 0100 1101 0101 1101 0110 1101 0111 DEC 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 HEX B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual C-3 BINARY: 128 | 64 | 32 | 16 | 8 | 4 | 2 | 1 OCTAL: 512 | 64 | 8 | 1 HEX: 256 | 16 | 1 Appendix C: ASCII Character Table ASCII BINARY 1101 1000 1101 1001 1101 1010 1101 1011 1101 1100 1101 1101 1101 1110 1101 1111 1110 0000 1110 0001 1110 0010 1110 0011 1110 0100 1110 0101 1110 0110 1110 0111 1110 1000 1110 1001 1110 1010 1110 1011 1110 1100 1110 1101 1110 1110 1110 1111 1111 0000 1111 0001 1111 0010 1111 0011 1111 0100 1111 0101 1111 0110 1111 0111 1111 1000 1111 1001 1111 1010 1111 1011 1111 1100 1111 1101 1111 1110 1111 1111 DEC 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 HEX D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF C-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual APPENDIX DD RADIO PARAMETERS Important: Radio parameters should not be changed from their factory settings without a clear understanding of your system. D.1 TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio Parameters 802.11 DS SS ESSID Station AP Density Data Rate Reservation Pwr Saving Network Channel CIS Data TEKLOGIX Low Auto 2347 Y Infra 1 Range see text see text see text see text 0-2347 see text Infra, Adhoc 1-14 see text Important: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the

<ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds. ESSID The ESSID (Extended Service Set Identier) is a string of characters, to a maximum of 32, that the terminal uses to determine with which access points it can communi-

cate. The terminal will only communicate with access points congured with the same ESSID. If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if ANY is entered, the terminal will communicate with any available access point. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-1 Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio Parameters Station The value entered in this parameter, to a maximum of 32 characters, is used to identify the terminal (an 802.11 station) for diagnostic purposes. AP Density This parameter determines the density of access points in a network. The density can be set to one of the following: Low, Medium or High. Data Rate The value entered in this parameter species the data rate to be used for message transmission. The data rate can be set to one of the following: 1Mbit, 2Mbit or Auto. Reservation Reservation species the medium reservation setting to be used. The medium reservation species the number of octets in a message or fragment above which a RTS/CTS handshake is performed to reserve the medium for the message or fragment transmission. Setting this parameter to the maximum allowable value, 2347, disables medium reservation. Pwr Saving When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the radio operates in power saving mode, utilizing the parameters listed in this sub-menu. Pwr Saving Range RX Multicasts Sleep Duration N 100 Y/N 1-65535 Rx Multicasts When this parameter is set to Y, the terminal wakes from a sleep or suspend state each time a multicast a broadcast sent to multiple recipients from a single packet is sent over the network. Rx Multicast should be left disabled (set to N). D-2 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7430 WaveLAN/IEEE 802.11 DS SS Radio Parameters Sleep Duration The value assigned for this parameter determines how many milliseconds must pass before the terminal enters a full power state from a suspend state in order to check for messages. If none exist, the terminal returns to suspend state. Important:

If this parameter is set at too high a value, you risk missing mes-

sages sent over the network. Network The value assigned for this parameter Infra or Adhoc congures the radio to operate in either an Ad Hoc (Adhoc) or Infrastructure (Infra) network. In an Ad Hoc network, terminals pass data directly to other terminals an access point is not required. In an Infrastructure network, terminals must pass data through an access point terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network. Channel Important:

The Channel parameter takes effect only when the Network parameter is set to Adhoc. The channel number you choose must be the same for all terminals on the network that are set to Adhoc. CIS Data CIS Data Lucent Technologies WaveLAN/IEEE Version 01.01 00:60:1D:03:79:E5 10 - FCC-USA 20 - Industry Canada This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-3 Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio Parameters D.2 TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio Parameters 802.11 FH SS ESSID Hop Set Hop Pattern Pwr Saving Network Roaming CIS Data TEKLOGIX 1 1 Y Infra Y Range see text 1-3 1-26 Y/N Infra, Adhoc Y/N see text Important: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the

<ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds. ESSID The ESSID (Extended Service Set Identier) is a string of characters, to a maximum of 32, that the terminal uses to determine with which access points it can communi-

cate. The terminal will only communicate with access points congured with the same ESSID. If a value is not assigned for this parameter or if ANY is entered, the terminal will communicate with any available access point. Hop Set This parameter only takes effect when the terminal is congured for Adhoc operation. The Hop Set value must be consistent for all stations in the Ad Hoc network. Hop Pattern Like the Hop Set parameter, this parameter only takes effect when the terminal is congured for Adhoc operation. The value assigned for this parameter must be consistent for all stations in the Ad Hoc network. D-4 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7440 RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS Radio Parameters Pwr Saving When this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the radio operates in power saving mode by default. Network The value assigned for this parameter Infra or Adhoc congures the radio to operate in either an Ad Hoc (Adhoc) or Infrastructure (Infra) network. In an Ad Hoc network, terminals pass data directly to other terminals an access point is not required. In an Infrastructure network, terminals must pass data through an access point terminals cannot communicate directly with other terminals in the network. Roaming When Roaming is set to Y, the terminal (802.11 station) can roam from one access point to another. This parameter should only be enabled (set to Y) when the radio is congured for Infrastructure network operation. CIS Data CIS Data PROXIM 802.11 PC CARD RANGELAN802 STATION This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-5 Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters D.3 TRX7370 Narrow Band Radio Parameters Range TRX7370 Cellular Channel Poll Timing Power Saving CIS Data Y Y see text see text see text see text Important: Changes to these parameters will not take effect until the terminal is reset by pressing and holding down the <BLUE> key and the

<ENTER/ON> key for a minimum of six seconds. D.3.1 Cellular Cellular Range Radio Address 0 0-3840 Radio Address Important:

Radio Address only takes effect when Cellular is enabled (set to Y). The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link. A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal. D-6 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters Channel D.3.2 Channel Channel Channel #

1 Power-up chan Y Channel Enable Switch speed Manual table Slow N Range 1-20 Y/N see text Fast/Slow see text Channel #

This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to Channel Enable on page C-7 for details about enabling channels. Power-Up Chan If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the terminal will start communicating on the channel specied in the Channel # parameter when the terminal is powered up. This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites. If this parameter is disabled (set to N), the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off. Channel Enable Chan enable CH 1 enable CH 20 enable Y Y Range Y/N Y/N These parameters are used to enable (Y) or disable (N) up to 20 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the TRX7370 radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (Channel #) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, the terminal may roam through all 20 channels. Note that the Channel Enable menu only displays channels that have been congured with frequencies. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-7 Appendix D: Radio Parameters Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the terminal uses to determine when commu-

nication quality with a base station is unacceptable. When this threshold is exceeded, the terminal starts channel searching for a new base station. Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the terminal is more tol-

erant of poor communication quality. When the communication quality of the termi-

nal radio drops below 46%, the terminal monitors the channel quality for 15 time-

out periods before searching for a new channel. If Switch speed is set to Fast, the current channel is monitored for only up to 2 time-out periods before channel switching begins. Important:

Fast Switch is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping. If the coverage areas barely overlap, have dead spots, or if the terminal frequently operates on the fringe of cover-

age, this parameter should be set to Slow. Manual Table Manual Table CH 1 list CH 20 list 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 This parameter can be used to set the channel search order the terminal will use if communication quality drops and channel switching is required. If this parameter is left at the default setting of N, the terminal uses a standard algorithm to decide which channel it should switch to in the event of poor channel quality. If Manual Table is set to Y, the terminal uses the channel switching lists specied in the Manual Table. Each channel list consists of up to 8 channels, with all channels enabled before they are entered into the Manual Table. If communication quality falls below 46%, only the channels entered in the Manual Table are considered for channel switching. The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were entered in the table. D-8 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters Poll Timing To move the cursor to the right to the next channel in a channel list:

Press the <TAB> key. To move the cursor to the left in a channel list:

Press <SHIFT><TAB>. Warning:

It is not recommended that the Manual table parameter be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance. D.3.3 Poll Timing Poll Timing Sync Delay Window Delay Poll Timeout Late Tx Limit 17 19 20 2 Range 1-40 1-40 1-40 1-10 Sync Delay Important:

This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing. Sync delay species the delay between the time of the base station transmission and the rst response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system. The default setting of 17 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-9 Appendix D: Radio Parameters Poll Timing Window Delay Important:

The value assigned to this parameter should not be changed from the factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. This parameter species the amount of time (in milliseconds) the terminal should add to each response window in order to accommodate the receive/transmit switching characteristics of the radio. The value assigned must be compatible with other terminals and base stations in the system. The default setting of 19 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud. Poll Timeout This parameter (in units of 16.6 ms) sets the time-out value used for automatic channel switching. Poll Timeout is the time during which the terminal should hear at least one poll from a base station. As each Poll Timeout passes without a successful poll from the base station, the terminal channel quality decreases. If the channel quality falls to below 46%, the terminal begins searching for a new channel. Late Tx Limit The value entered for this parameter (measured in milliseconds) sets the maximum allowable deviation time from the start of a response window during which a terminal can make a transmission. After this threshold, the transmission will not be attempted and the terminal will try again at the next opportunity. For example, suppose this parameter is set to 5. From the beginning of the response window, the terminal can be up to 5 milliseconds late sending a transmission. Beyond this threshold, the transmission is not attempted. The terminal waits for the next opportunity. D-10 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters Power Saving D.3.4 Power Saving Power Saving Range Idle Poll Limit Pwr Off Time 10 10 1-200 1-60 Idle Poll Limit This parameter determines how many transmit opportunities base station polls with available response windows must be consecutively skipped for the terminal to put the radio into power-down mode for power saving. Lower values cause the terminal to go into power saving mode quickly, extending battery life but reducing terminal responsiveness. Higher values increase responsiveness but decrease battery life. Idle Poll Limit is only used when Power Saving is enabled

(set to Y). Pwr Off Time This parameter determines the amount of time (in seconds) the terminal will keep the radio in power-down mode when a power down period has been initiated. Pwr Off Time is only used when Power Saving is enabled (set to Y). D.3.5 CIS Data This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in the terminal. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-11 Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters D.4 TRX7410/10A WLAN 902 Spread Spec Radio Parameters WLAN 902 SS Radio Address 0 Channel Wlan Timing Power Saving CIS Data Y Range 0-3840 see text see text see text Radio Address The value entered in the Radio address parameter is used to identify the terminal over the radio link. A unique value from 0 to 3840 must be assigned for each terminal. D.4.1 Channel Channel Channel #

1 Power-up chan Y Channel Enable Channel Auto Range 1-7 Y/N see text see text Channel #

This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the terminal. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to Channel Enable on page D-7 for details about enabling channels. Power-Up Chan If this parameter is enabled (set to Y), the terminal will start communicating on the channel specied in the Channel # parameter when the terminal is powered up. This setting may prevent the migration of terminals to the same channel due to uneven coverage in some sites. If this parameter is disabled (set to N), the terminal will continue communicating on the same channel that it was on before it was turned off. D-12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters Channel Channel Enable Chan enable CH 1 enable CH 7 enable Y Y Range Y/N Y/N These parameters are used to enable (Y) or disable (N) up to 7 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the 902 spread spectrum radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel

(Channel #) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, the terminal may roam through all 7 channels. Note that the Channel Enable menu only displays channels that have been congured with frequencies. Channel Auto Chan Auto Next ch-auto Next ch-auto 1 7 Range 0-7 0-7 These parameters are available in the Chan-auto sub-menu. Next ch-auto determines the order of the auto-switched channels. In the rst Next ch-auto parameter, enter the number of the rst channel to which you want the terminal to consider switching. In the next parameter, enter the next channel, and so on. Enter 0 (zero) for no channel. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-13 Appendix D: Radio Parameters WLAN Timing D.4.2 WLAN Timing WLAN Timing Range Reinit tmo 10 5-20 Reinit tmo Reinit tmo controls how soon a terminal sends a warm initialize message to the controller when a cellular acknowledgement is not received for a previously sent message. This parameter operates in units of seconds and is set to 10 by default. D.4.3 Power Saving Power Saving Range PwrON time PwrOFF time PwrON xmit 0 0 0 0-20 0-20 1-20 PwrON time This parameter is used in conjunction with PwrOFF time to control the duration of time the radio stays on after a message is sent (twice this period if application data is sent). PwrON time is in units of 1/2 seconds. The range is 0 to 20 and increases the radio on time in increments of 0.5 seconds. PwrON time should be set from 8 to 20 for 902 MHz radios. Important: Using power saving in Wireless LAN will affect system perfor-

mance since terminals cannot receive routing information when the radio is turned off, and will thus be slower to hop to new routes. Therefore, the PwrON time parameter should not be set lower than 5. D-14 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Appendix D: Radio Parameters CIS Data PwrOFF time This parameter is used in conjunction with PwrON time to reduce the power consumption of the radio. The terminal turns off for this period of time, and following the power off time, turns on for a very short period of time to determine if the terminal is still on-line. If the terminal is on-line, it is turned off for the PwrOFF time. If the terminal is off-line, it is re-initialized and stays on for the PwrON time. In cellular mode, the radio turns off for twice this period after all channels have been checked and no suitable channel is found. This parameter is in units of 1/2 seconds. To disable this parameter, set it to zero. PwrON xmit This parameter determines the amount of time the radio stays on after a transmission, waiting for a response from the base station. Important:

If the value in the PwrON Xmit is set too low, the terminal may miss the response from the base station, resulting in a lock-up for the user. This parameter needs to be set between 2 and 20 depend-

ing on the response time of the system. For example, if the host responds slowly, the value in this parameter should be set to a higher value. D.4.4 CIS Data This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data that is manufac-

turer information describing the radio installed in your terminal. D.5 TRX7460 Mobitex Radio Mobitex Range Controller MAN 5000735 see text see text CIS Data Radio Mode see text Normal Controller MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number) This is the Mobitex Subscription Number (MAN) the address of the 9450 Network Controller with which your terminal communicates. It is a factory assigned value. Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual D-15 Appendix D: Radio Parameters TRX7460 Mobitex Radio CIS Data CIS Data ERICSSON Mobidem MASC/4 R6A This sub-menu displays Card Information Structure (CIS) data, manufacturer information describing the radio installed in your terminal. Radio Mode This parameter offers two options Normal and Battery Saving. When Normal is selected, Power Saving is turned off. When Battery Saving is selected, the terminal radio is powered down while not in use to slow battery consumption. It will periodically wake up to check for incoming information. Keep in mind, however, that choosing this option results in slower response times. D-16 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual INDEX Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal A aborts, radio link (ra) 56 accessories antenna types 170 bar code readers, connecting 159 part numbers 179 picker cradle (7035) 171 7942 in-unit charger 163 7967 battery pack charger 167 Addendum 109, 110, 111, 112 addresses, network See also Network addresses 153 Adhoc and Infra networks D-3, D-5 AIAG Mixed AIAG 135 AIAG Strip 106 All Fld Video 137 Alpha parameters 85 Anchor Column 146 Anchor Line 146 Anchor View x origin 139 y origin 139 ANSI Applications menu 115 Auto Wrap 118 Auto-Answer 124 Columns 118 conguration 73 Conn Type (connection type) 117 CR character 124 Dev Attr 123 device attribute requests 73 Echo Mode 124 ENTER key 125 Function key equivalents 74 Host (Connection Type) 117 LF character 124 multiple sessions 115 Newline 124 Pages 117 Port 117 Rows 118 sessions, closing 76 sessions, establishing new 75 sessions, listing 75 sessions, moving between 75 settings 116125 TCP Direct connection 117 Telnet connection 117 Terminal # 116 transmitting data 107, 109 ANSI Settings Async In (Serial) 126 character sets, choosing 119 Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct 117 keyboard settings 124 Screen settings 117 Start and End (Serial) 126 transmission strings, settings 123 Transmit parameters 123 antenna installing on 8255 or 8260 24 installing 7035 17 AP Density D-2 App. parameter 128 Append Enter 135 Append F0 135 appending to bar codes characters 104, 107, 109 Applications ANSI Settings 116125 Async In (ANSI) 126 character attributes (TESS) 129 Character Sets (ANSI) 119 Character Sets (TESS) 130 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual I Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Features parameters (TESS) 138 Fields parameters (TESS) 136 Host Conn (ANSI) 117 Host Conn (TESS) 127 Keyboard parameters (ANSI) 124 menu (Applications) 115 Name and Type 116 Scanner parameters (TESS) 134 Screen parameters (ANSI) 117 Screen parameters (TESS) 127 Serial parameters (TESS) 133 Start and End (ANSI) 126 TESS Settings 126134 Test parameters (TESS) 134 Transmit parameters (ANSI) 123 approvals 7035 (including scanner) 188 8255 190 8260 190 Ar (area number-Wan) 58 arrow keys completing a data eld 64, 136 cycling through special characters 86, 152 Enh Mode, using 138 in macros 153 moving the cursor 32 Arrows (Scan-See) 149 ASCII Full Ascii 105 matching elds 132 table C-1 Async In 126 attributes, video 122, 137 Auto Pan 93 auto tab elds 64 Auto Wrap 118 Auto-Answer 124 AutoRep Fn 134 AutoRep T/O 134 B Backlight settings 7035 hand-held 94 8255 & 8260 LCD vehicle-mounts 95 II Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual backspace (CTRL H) 125 bar code AIAG 135 appending to 104, 107, 109 comparing entry string with decoded bar code 102 connecting bar code reader 159 decodes required 103 decoding edge-to-edge 103 displaying type of bar code 104 I 2 of 5 decodes 103 parameters 105115 prex character 107, 109 scanner port 159 Security 103 Short Code 103 stripping characters 107, 109 sufx character 107, 109 symbologies Codabar 113 Code 11 113 Code 128 107 Code 39 105106 Code 93 113 D 2 of 5 115 EAN 13 108 EAN 8 110 I 2 of 5 114 MSI/Plessy 114 UPC A 111 UPC E 112 translating 102 bar code reader external (specs) 193 external scanner, operation of 159 integrated scanner, operation of 46 internal or integrated (specs) 193 bar-code-only elds 64 battery charger 163170 fault charge indicator (7942) 165 fault charge indicator (7967) 168 mounting bracket (7942) 164 safety instructions (7967 & 7942) 169170 specications for 7942 166 specications for 7967 169 Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index 7942 in-unit charger 163167 7967 gang charger 167169 battery charger (7967) charge complete indicators 165 battery pack 160163 a description of 160 bar graph (indicating capacity) 42, 49 battery specs 162 battery specs (specic to picker cradle) 177 capacity of 42, 49 charge time 165, 166 charging 165 conditioning 49 description of 50 full recharge 166 gauge (bar graph) 42, 49 installing 18 Lithium-Ion safety precautions 160 maintaining 49 removing 17 safety precautions (Lithium-Ion) 161 time (full charge) 166 battery See also battery pack. 160 Beam Lockout 135 Beep Tone and Beep Time 154 beeper adjusting volume 43 adjusting volume using Volume parameter 43 description of beep conditions 42 volume adjustment using the BLUE key 43 bell (CTRL G) 125 blinking video attribute 122, 137 BLUE and ORANGE keys, how to use 30 bold video attribute 122, 137 Bootp, request for See Employ Bootp 153 bootp, request for See Employ Bootp 154 Bottom Margin (auto panning) 93 Brightness (Scan-See) 148 Bs (base identier) 58 Buffer 143 bytes received (inbyte) 55 bytes sent (outbyte) 55 C cables extension power cables, installing 25 installing for 8255 and 8260 24 capacity of battery 42, 49 Card Information Structure - CIS D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16 Cellular (NB Radio Address) D-6 cellular mode D-15 ch (operating channel) 56 Chan (channel number-WAN) 58 changing softkey labels 118, 129 Channel # D-7, D-12 Channel (802.11 DS radio) D-3 Channel Auto (Next ch-auto) D-13 Channel Enable D-7, D-13 channel quality (cq), displaying 55 channel quality, displaying 54, 56 channels (Narrow Band) Channel # D-7 Channel Enable D-7, D-13 Manual Table D-8 Power-up chan D-7 Switch Speed D-8 switching using Manual Table D-8 channels (902 spread spectrum) Channel # D-12 Channel Auto (Next ch-auto) D-13 Channel Enable D-13 Next ch-auto (Channel Auto) D-13 Power-up chan D-12 Char Set (ANSI) 119 Char Set (TESS) 130 Character parameters (TESS) 129 character sets Chinese Options 121 choosing in ANSI 119 choosing in TESS 130 Code Page 95 DEC Options 121, 131 IBM Options 120, 131 ISO Options 120, 130 Korean Options 122 characters Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual III Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal appending to bar codes 107, 109 ASCII table C-1 Char Set, choosing (ANSI) 119 Char Set, choosing (TESS) 130 Chinese options 121 Code Page 95 Custom Chars (ASCII characters-TESS) 140 cycling through 86, 152 DEC options, choosing 121, 131 IBM options, choosing 120, 131 Invis (TESS) 130 ISO options, choosing 120, 130 Korean options 122 NULL (TESS) 130 prex 107, 109 stripping 107, 109 sufx 107, 109 charge time required 166 charger charge ready indicator 165 charge time 165 failed charge (7942) 165 failed charge (7967) 168 full recharge 165 gang charger (7967) 167169 in-unit charger (7942) 163167 mounting bracket (7942) 164 safety instructions (7967 & 7942) 169170 specications for 7942 166 specications for 7967 169 time (full charge) 165 charging batteries 165 check digit 108, 112, 113, 114, 115 Chinese char sets 121 Chinese font sizes 97 Chk Digit, 1 113, 114 Chk Digit, 2 113 CIS Data (Card Information Structure) D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16 Click Data (scanner double-click) 104 Click Time (scanner double-click) 103 CLR/DEL Key description of 33 IV Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual in Local Echo mode (ANSI) 125 TESS sessions, CLR key behaviour in 66 Codabar 113 Code Page 95 Code 11 113 Code 128 107 Code 39 105106 Code 93 113 colours, remapping 98 Column Offset 146 columns Column Offset 146 number of in ANSI screen 118 number of in TESS screen 127 Columns (ANSI) 118 Columns (TESS) 127 conguring softkey labels 118, 129 Conn Type (connection type) 117 connection, host 117, 127 console port Scan-See settings 144 console port settings 142 Console Settings 141150 Console 2 Port Settings Buffer 143 Data Bits 142 disabling 141 enabling 141 Input Tmo 143 Nomad option 141 Parity 142 peripheral devices 141 Print option 141 Retries 143 Scanner option 141 Scan-See option 141 Speed 142 Stop Bits 142 Test 144 ContNxtField 134 contrast, adjusting 44, 90 Controller MAN (Mobitex) D-15 country code 108 cq (channel quality), displaying 54, 55, 56 Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index CR/LF LF character 124 Line Offset 146 Line Scrolling 148 Newline 124 CR/LF, CTRL J 125 cradle See also Picker cradle 171177 CTRL commands CTRL a 75 CTRL f 65 CTRL G (Bell) 125 CTRL H (Backspace) 125 CTRL h (host select) 69 CTRL i 65 CTRL I (Tab) 125 CTRL J (Line Feed) 125 CTRL K (Vertical Tab) 125 CTRL L 153 CTRL L (Form Feed) 125 CTRL p (reprint) 69 CTRL r 65 CTRL s (status,displaying continuously) 69 CTRL t (status, display with terminal

#) 69 CTRL u 65 CTRL w (status, display in Lock B & H mode) 69 CTRL Key 33 cursor Anchor Column (Scan-See) 146 Arrows (Scan-See) 149 Brightness (Scan-See) 148 Column Offset (Scan-See) 146 Enh Edit mode 138 Field Order 136 Follow Cursor (Scan-See) 148 Line Offset (Scan-See) 146 Line Scrolling (Scan-See) 148 linefeed mode (ANSI) 125 moving between elds 136 Newline mode (ANSI) 125 Panning (Scan-See) 148 Custom Chars (ASCII characters-TESS) 140 D D 2 of 5 115 data entering 64, 136 Ign Bcode_d 137 with a bar code reader 159 transmitting from the terminal 64, 123, 136 Data Bits 142 Data Rate D-2 dead zone 195 DEC char sets 121, 131 decoding bar codes comparing entry string 102 decode zone 197 decodes required 103 Security 103 Short Code 103 decrementing parameters 84 Default Gateway 154 Default Gateway (Gateway IP address) 154 DEFAULT key (F4) 83 DEFLT key (F4) 87 DEL Key (ANSI parameter) 125 DEL/CLR Key description of 33 in Local Echo mode (ANSI) 125 TESS sessions, DEL key behaviour in 67 Dev Attri 123 device attribute requests 73 digit check digit 108, 112, 113, 114, 115 number system 111, 112 disabling/enabling Y/N parameters 85 display Anchor View 139 Display ShiftDisplay Shift 140 Field Scroll 128 font sizes, Chinese and Korean 97 font sizes, North American and European 96 moving 139 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual V Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Origin Scroll 128 positioning 128 Use Increment 139 video attributes 122, 137 X-Increment 139 X-origin 139 Y-Increment 139 Y-origin 139 display contrast, adjusting 44 Display menu 81 Display Menu, accessing and using 28 DOS, launching and exiting 29 Dot Time 104 double-click appending characters to a decoded bar code 104 scanner trigger 103 dropped packets (drppkt) 55 drppkt (dropped packets) 55 Duration (key click) 91 E EAN 13 108 EAN 8 110 EAN/UCC 128 108 Echo Mode Host echo 125 Local echo 125 Smart echo 124 edit modes, TESS 65 Employ Bootp 154 enabling/disabling Y/N parameters 85 End (ANSI) 126 Enh Edit Mode (TESS) 138 ENTER key completing a data eld 64 CR/LF character 124 Enter on Arrows 136 Local Echo mode (ANSI) 125 Newline mode (ANSI) 125 Enter On Arr 136 Enter To F0 136 entry elds 64 Function keys 136 hidden match 132 Ign Bcode_d 137 video attributes 122, 137 visible match 132 entry mode 136 Err Accept 106 Err Func key 132 error reply message in TESS 132 Error Tone and Error Time 155 ESC Key 34 ESSID D-1, D-4 European font sizes 96 Exp to UPC A 112 Ext (external scanner types) 101 F failed battery charge (7942) 165 failed battery charge (7967) 168 Fast Switch, using Switch Speed parameter D-8 fault condition (battery charging with 7942) 165 fault condition (battery charging with 7967) 168 Fcursor mode 65 Features parameters (for TESS Settings) 138 Field mode 65 Field Order 136 elds auto-tab elds 64 bar-code-only elds 64 completing a data eld 64, 136 Enh Edit mode 138 entry elds 64 Field Order 136 Field Scroll 128 Field Size 106 xed elds 64 hidden match 132 Ign Bcode_d 137 insert mode 136 match elds 64 replace mode 136 serial I/O elds 64 size 106 VI Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index transmit on 64 video attributes 122, 137 visible match 132 Fields parameters (for TESS Settings) 136 xed elds 64 Flow Control 143 Follow Cursor 148 Font Size, changing 96 Font Size, Chinese and Korean 97 fonts Chinese 97 European 96 Korean 97 North American 96 form feed (CTRL L) 125 Full Ascii 105 Function keys 36 accessing F1 to F12 36 accessing F13 to F24 36 accessing F25 to F36 37 ANSI equivalents 74 completing a data eld 64 entering data 136 error reply 132 Open Fky Only 136 softkey labels, changing 118, 129 softkeys 36 G gang charger (7967) 167169 Gateway See Default Gateway 154 Gateway, Default 154 gauge, battery 42, 49 Global Macros 150153 adding special characters 152 displaying special characters (ASCII) 152 programming special keys 153 grey scale, adusting 98 H H Match Chr 132 handstrap, installing on 7035 19 helpdesk A-1 hidden elds match 132 Hop Pattern D-4 Hop Set D-4 Host (ANSI Connection Type) 117 Host (TESS Connection Type) 127 Host Connection ANSI 117 TESS 127 Host Echo 125 host select (CTRL h) 69 I I 2 of 5 114 I/O elds 64 IBM char sets 120, 131 Idle Poll Limit D-11 Ign Bcode_d 137 In #n 102 In (Serial In) 133 inbyte (received bytes) 55 Inc Country 108 Inc Num Sys 111, 112 Include Chk 106, 108, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114 Include Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 115 Include Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 114 incrementing parameters 84 indicators 40 LED functions 39 onscreen messages 40 scanner message 46 inerrs (received packets w errors) 55 Infra and Adhoc networks D-3, D-5 Infrared (IrDA) port, using 48 initialized messages, transmitted (xi) 56 inpkts (received packets) 55 input bar code reader 159 bar-code-only elds 64 Input tmo 143 insert mode 136 Open Fky Only 136 replace mode 136 serial I/O elds 64 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual VII Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Input Tmo 143 Insert mode 65 insert mode 136 installation antenna, 7035 17 antenna, 8255 and 8260 24 battery pack 1718 handstrap 19 pistol grip 19 8255 and 8260 vehicle-mounts 20 Int (internal scanner types) 101 integrated scanner option 46 Intensity (7035 backlighting) 94 in-unit charger (7942) 163167 Invis characters (TESS) 130 IP addresses bootp, requesting 153, 154 Default Gateway (Gateway IP address) 154 Employ Bootp (bootp request) 154 Local IP (terminal IP address) 153 Net Mask (subnet mask) 153 IrDA (Infrared) port, using 48 ISO char sets 120, 130 ITF Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 114 K Kbd Locked 138 Key Click, adjusting Tone and Duration 91 key lock function locking and unlocking 34 One Shot Mode 34 keyboard compatibility with VT220 ANSI terminal keyboard 74 lock 138 lock messages 69 locking and unlocking keys 34 One Shot Mode 34 Keyboard (vehicle-mounts) 95 Keyboard mode Host Echo 125 Local Echo 125 Newline 124 Smart Echo 124 Keyboard parameters (ANSI) 124 keys error reply 132 keys, locking and unlocking 34 Korean char sets 122 Korean font sizes 97 L labels, softkey 118, 129 laser beam 46 launching DOS 81 Parameters menu 81 Tekterm 81 LCD Scan-See parameter settings, default 145 LED link indicator 59 picker cradle indicators 176 receive 39, 59 transmit 39, 59 7035 indicators 59 7967 Gang Charger 167 LED Scan-See parameter settings (default) 145 Left Margin (auto panning) 93 LF/CR LF character 124 Line Offset 146 Line Scrolling 148 Newline 124 LF/CR, CTRL J 125 Line Offset 146 Line Scrolling 148 Lithium-Ion batteries charging 165 description of 160 installing 18 maintaining 49 removing 17 safety precautions 50, 160 Local Echo 125 Local Echo See Echo Mode 124 Local IP 153 LOCKB message 69, 128 VIII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index locked keyboard 138 LOCKH message 69, 128 locking and unlocking keys 34, 100 Lucent WaveLAN 802.11 PC card (TRX7430) parameters (radio) D-1 specs 184 Lucent WaveLAN 802.11 PC card (TRX7431) specs 184 M Macro keys See also Global Macros 39 maintenance See terminal maintenance 48 Manual Table D-8 match elds 64 memory, resetting 87 messages error reply in TESS 132 LOCKB 69, 128 LOCKH 69, 128 onscreen indicators 40 RESET: Press Enter 63 Scan Indication 104 Scan Result 104 scanner warning message 47, 104 messages received (rm) 56 Mixed AIAG 135 Mobitex WAN radio (TRX7460) D-15 Address (Subscription) Number

(MAN) 58 Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 Chan (channel number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number) 58 Mobitex Net 57 parameters D-15D-16 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 specs 186 State 58 statistics 57 Subscription Number (MAN) 58 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 Mod 10 Chk 106 Mod 10 Chk (D 2 of 5 symbology) 115 Mod 10 Chk (I 2 of 5 symbology) 114 Mod 43 Chk 106 Model 7000 parameter settings, default 145 Model 7000M parameter settings, default 145 mounting cradle for 8255 terminal 2022 for 8260 terminal 2324 moving the display 128, 139 MSI/Plessy 114 multiple ANSI sessions 115 applications 115 TESS sessions 63, 115 N narrow band (TRX7370) radio parameters D-6D-11 narrow band radio (TRX7370) 183, D-6 Net Mask 153 Network (Adhoc or Infra) D-3, D-5 Network addresses 153 bootp, requesting 153, 154 Default Gateway (Gateway IP address) 154 Employ Bootp 153 Employ Bootp (bootp request) 154 Local IP (terminal IP address) 153 Net Mask (subnet mask) 153 Newline 124 Newline 124 Next ch-auto (Channel Auto) D-13 NEXT key (F1) 83 Nomad console port settings 141, 144 North American font sizes 96 NULL characters (TESS) 130 number of columns (ANSI) 118 of columns (TESS) 127 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual IX Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal of pages (ANSI) 117 of rows (ANSI) 118 of rows (TESS) 128 Terminal # (ANSI) 73, 116 Terminal # (TESS) 63 number system digit 111, 112 numeric elds (Rjct if Alpha) 135 numeric parameters 84 numeric parameters, minimum/maximum limits to 84 Rows (ANSI) 118 Rows (TESS) 128 size/shape 118 Pages (ANSI) 117 Pages Saved (TESS) 128 Palette Remap 98 Panning (Scan-See) 148 panning, auto and manual parameters 9293 parameters O ofces list A-3 off-line terminal Power Off Time D-11 PwrOFF time D-15 On Time (7035 backlight) 94 On/Off button 26 onscreen indicators 4041 Open Fky Only 136 Options parameters (for scanning) 102 ORANGE and BLUE keys, how to use 30 order of elds in TESS screen 136 Origin Scroll 128 Out #n 103 Out (Serial Out) 133 outbyte (sent bytes) 55 outerrs (packet send errors) 55 outpkts (sent packets) 55 P Pack 177 packet errors, send (outerrs) 55 packet send errors (outerrs) 55 packets dropped (drppkt) 55 packets received (inpkts) 55 packets sent (outpkts) 55 packets w errors, received (inerrs) 55 pages Columns (ANSI) 118 Columns (TESS) 127 Pages (ANSI) 117 positioning 128 reprinting 69 Alpha parameters 85 main menu, displaying 88 numeric 84 saving changes to 87 string entry 85, 86, 152 Y/N (boolean) 85 Parameters menu, launching and exiting 28 Parity 142 parity (Scan-See) 144 PASSTHRU command 141 PC card, specications for 183, 184 peripheral (serial) port 9 peripheral port I/O connector 159 peripherals, dening serial connections 141 picker cradle 171 cable, connecting 173 disassembling before mounting 172 installation 171 installing cable 173 LED indicators 176 maintenance 174 mounting 173 port replicator, attaching 174 power source, connecting 174 powered 10-55 VDC (model #7937C) 171 powered 11-16 VDC (model # 7937B) 171 specications 177 unpowered (model # 7937A) 171 pistol grip, installing on 7035 19 pitch, scanning 195 pmenu, displaying 88 X Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index Poll Timeout D-10 poll timeouts (pt) 56 Poll Timing parameters D-9D-10 polls received (rp) 56 Port (ANSI Connection Type) 117 Port (TESS Connection Type) 127 port replicator (picker cradle) 174 ports ANSI Connection Type 117 Buffer 143 console settings 141 Console 2 settings 141 Data Bits 142 Flow Control 143 Input tmo 143 Parity 142 Retries 143 Scan-See settings 144 serial settings 141 Serial 1 settings 141 settings 141 Speed 142 Stop Bits 142 TESS Connection Type 127 Test 144 XON & XOFF (Scan-See) 150 7035 terminal 9 position of screen 128 power Idle Poll Limit D-11 Power Down 99 Power Off 100 Power Off Time D-11 power save states 197 Pwr Saving D-5 PwrOFF time D-15 PwrOFF Xmit D-15 PwrON time D-14 Rx Multicasts D-2 Sleep Duration D-3 Watchdog Timer 99 Power Down (7035) 99 Power Off (7035) 100 Power Off Time D-11 power saving parameters narrow band D-11 Power Down (7035) 99 Power Off (7035) 100 spread spectrum 902 MHz D-12 Watchdog Timer 99 802.11 direct sequence D-2 802.11 frequency hopping D-5 Power-up chan D-7, D-12 Prex (Serial In) 133 Prex (Serial Out) 133 Prex Char 107, 109 PREV key (F2) 84 PREVIOUS key (F2) 83 printing pages 69 pass-through 141 Proxim RangeLAN 802 FHSS 2.4GHz PC card parameters (radio) D-4 specs 183 pt (poll timeouts) 56 punctuation marks, accessing (SHIFT Key) 31 Pwr Saving D-5 Pwr Saving (802.11 DS) D-2 PwrOFF time D-15 PwrOFF Xmit D-15 PwrON time D-14 R ra (received radio link aborts) 56 radio Address (Subscription) Number

(MAN) 58 AP Density D-2 Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 cellular mode D-15 Chan (channel number) 58 Channel (802.11 DS radio) D-3 CIS Data (Card Information Structure) D-3, D-5, D-11, D-15, D-16 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XI Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Controller MAN (Mobitex) D-15 Data Rate D-2 ESSID D-1, D-4 Hop Pattern D-4 Hop Set D-4 MAN (Mobitex Address Number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number) 58 Mobitex Net 57 Mobitex statistics screen 57 Network (Adhoc or Infra) D-3, D-5 parameters D-1D-16 power saving parameters D-14D-15 Pwr Saving D-5 Pwr Saving (802.11 DS) D-2 Radio Mode (Mobitex) D-16 Reservation D-2 resetting statistics 60 Roaming D-5 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 spread spectrum (902) D-12 State 58 Station D-2 statistics screen (Mobitex) 57 statistics screen (narrow band) 56 statistics screen (802.11 SS) 56 statistics screen (802.11) 55 statistics screen, resetting 60 statistics screen, viewing 54 statistics, resetting 60 TRX7370 narrow band 183 TRX7370 statistics screen 56 TRX7410 TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio 183, D-12 TRX7410A TekLan DS SS 902 MHz radio 183, D-12 TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802 FHSS 2.4GHz PC card 183 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN radio D-15 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 WLAN 902 spread spectrum D-12 802.11 SS statistics screen 56 802.11 statistics screen 55 Radio Address (narrow band) D-6 Radio Address (902 spread spectrum) D-12 radio link aborts received (ra) 56 Radio Mode (WAN) D-16 radio statistics screen 54 Address Number (MAN) 58 Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 Chan (channel number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Address Number) 58 Mobitex 57 Mobitex Net 57 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 State 58 TRX7370 56 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 802.11 55 802.11 SS 56 radio statistics screen, resetting 60 RangeLAN 802 PC card (TRX7440 Proxim) parameters D-4 specs 183 received bytes (inbyte) 55 received messages (rm) 56 received packets (inpkts) 55 received packets w errors (inerrs) 55 received polls (rp) 56 received radio link aborts (ra) 56 Reinit tmo (902 wireless LAN) D-14 Replace mode 65 replace mode 136 replicator, port (picker cradle) 174 reprinting a page 69 Reservation D-2 RESET: Press Enter message 63 resetting default parameter values 87 terminal memory 87 retransmissions (xr) 56 Retries 143 reverse video attribute 122, 137 Right Margin (auto panning) 93 Rjct if Alpha 135 XII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index rm (received messages) 56 Roaming D-5 rows number of in ANSI screen 118 number of in TESS screen 128 Rows (ANSI) 118 Rows (TESS) 128 rp (received polls) 56 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 RS-232 port 6 Rx (Receive radio stats-Wan) 59 Rx Multicasts (Pwr Saving) D-2 S safety instructions battery charger (7967 & 7942) 169170 general xi scanner 46 safety warning, scanner 46 SAVE key (F3) 83 Save key (F3) 36 sc (scan state) 56 SCAN Key 34 scan state (sc) 56 Scan Tone and Scan Time 155 scanner Append Enter 135 Append F0 135 appending data 104 bar code, appending data to 104 Click Data (appending data) 104 Click Time (double-click) 103 ContNxtField 134 Dot Time 104 double-click 103 laser beam 46 operating 46 parameters (for TESS Settings) 134 safety warnings 46 Scan-See 144 specications 194 target dot duration 104 TESS Scanner parameters 134 Type (of scanner) 101 warning message 47, 104 scanning AIAG 135 Append Enter 135 Append F0 135 appending characters 104, 107, 109 check digit 108, 112, 113, 114, 115 Click Data (appending data) 104 Click Time 103 console port labelling 141 ContNxtField 134 country code 108 decode zone 197 Dot Time 104 double-click 103 Ext (external)scanner Ext (external scanner types) 101 identifying the type of scanner used 101 In (translate) 102 Int (internal)scanner Int (internal scanner types) 101 locked terminal 135 Nomad 141, 144 number system digit 111, 112 operating the scanner 46 Out (translate) 103 pitch 195 prex character 107, 109 removing characters 107, 109 Rjct if Alpha 135 safety instructions 46 Scan Indication 104 Scan Result 104 Scan-See 141, 144149 Scan-See, conguring port for 144 Security 103 serial port labelling 141 Short Code 103 skew 195 specular dead zone 195 sufx character 107, 109 symbologies 105 target dot duration 104 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XIII Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal techniques 46, 48 TESS Scanner parameters 134 Translate bar code 102 trouble-shooting tips 47 Type (of scanner) 101 Verify 103 warning message 46 Scan-See conguring port for 144 console port settings 141, 144 display, mapping to viewport 145 parameters 144149 port, conguring 144 serial number 144, 149 version 144 viewport, mapping display to 145 Screen (8255 & 8260 LCD backlighting) 95 Screen parameters ANSI 117 TESS 127 screens Anchor View 139 Columns (ANSI) 118 Columns (TESS) 127 Display Shift 140 Field Scroll 128 moving between elds 136 Origin Scroll 128 page size/shape 118, 127 positioning 128 Rows (ANSI) 118 Rows (TESS) 128 Use Increment 139 X- and Y-origin 139 X-Increment 139 Y-Increment 139 scrolling Field Scroll 128 Origin Scroll 128 Scan-See 148 Security 103 select host (CTRL h) 69 sent bytes (outbytes) 55 sent packets (outpkts) 55 serial (peripheral) port 9 serial I/O elds 64 serial number (Scan-See) 144, 149 Serial parameters (for TESS Settings) 133 serial port 6 In (Serial In) 133 Out (Serial Out) 133 pass-through 141 Prex (Serial In) 133 Prex (Serial Out) 133 Sufx (Serial In) 133 Sufx (Serial Out) 134 serial port settings 142 Serial Settings 141150 Serial 1 Port Settings Buffer 143 Data Bits 142 disabling 141 enabling 141 Flow Control 143 Input Tmo 143 Output option 141 Parity 142 peripheral devices 141 Print option 141 Retries 143 Scanner option 141 Speed 142 Stop Bits 142 Test 144 service information A-1 sessions windows, cycling through 54 setting the terminal number 63 SHIFT Key 31 Short Code (bar code option) 103 size of elds 106 Size/Chars (bar code scanning) 106 skew, scanning 195 Sled See picker cradle. 171 Sleep Duration (Pwr Saving) D-3 Smart Echo 124 softkeys (Function keys) 83 F1 - Next key 36 XIV Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index F2 - Previous key 36 F3 - Save key 36 F4 - Default key 36 softkey labels, changing 118, 129 Sound parameters (error and scan beeps) 154 SPACE Key 34 special keys, programming into macros 153 specications battery 187, 199 battery pack (Li-Ion) 162 battery pack (specic to picker cradle) 177 COM 1 191 COM 2 191 CPU 187 cradle, picker 177 for 7035 terminal 186 memory expansion 187, 189, 192 picker cradle 177 radio specs 183186 scanner 194 specular dead zone 195 Speed 142 spread spectrum (902) radio parameters D-12D-15 spread spectrum radio (902) D-12 Standard 107 Start and End (ANSI) 126 start up menu 81 State (Wan) 58 Station D-2 statistics (radio) 54 statistics (radio), resetting 60 statistics screen Address Number (MAN) 58 Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 Chan (channel number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Address Number) 58 Mobitex Net 57 Mobitex radio 57 Mobitex WAN radio (TRX7460) 57 narrow band radio (TRX7370) 56 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 spread spectrum radio (TRX7370) 56 State 58 TRX7370 narrow band radio 56 TRX7370 radio 56 TRX7370 spread spectrum radio 56 TRX7460 Mobitex WAN radio 57 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 802.11 radio 55 802.11 SS radio 56 status, displaying continuously 69 status, displaying in Lock B & Lock H mode 69 status, displaying terminal # 69 Stop Bits 142 string entry parameters 85, 86, 152 adding special characters to 86 cycling through special characters 86 key function description 85 Strip Leading 107, 109 Strip Trailing 107, 109 sub-menus, accessing 84 subnet mask (Net Mask) 153 Sufx (Serial In) 133 Sufx (Serial Out) 134 Sufx Char 107, 109 support services A-1 Switch Speed D-8 symbologies, bar code 105 displaying type of bar code 104 Sync Delay D-9 System menu 90 T tab (CTRL I) 125 TAB Key 34 tab, vertical (CTRL K) 125 TCP Direct connection 117, 127 TekLan (TRX7410) 183, D-12 TekLan (TRX7410A) 183, D-12 TekLan 902 MHz DS SS (TRX7410) 183, D-12 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XV Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal TekLan 902 MHz DS SS (TRX7410A) 183, D-12 Tekterm exiting 60 launching 53 radio statistics screen, displaying 54 radio statistics, resetting 60 statistics (radio) 54 statistics (radio), resetting 60 working with application session windows 54 Tekterm, bypassing to Display Menu 28 Tekterm, launching and exiting 29 Telnet connection 117, 127 terminal off-line terminal D-15 Terminal # (ANSI) 116 Terminal # (ANSI) 116 Terminal # (TESS) 126 terminal maintenance battery (7035) 49 cleaning 48 7035 (special instructions) 49 TESS All Fld Video 137 Append Enter 135 Append F0 135 Applications menu 115 AutoRep Fn 134 AutoRep T/O 134 Blink (video attrib.) 137 Bold (video attrib.) 137 CLR key behaviour 66 Columns 127 conguration 63 ContNxtField 134 CTRL commands 65 cursor movement (in edit modes) 65 Custom Chars (ASCII characters) 140 DEL key behaviour 67 edit modes 65 Enh Edit Mode 138 Enter On Arr 136 Enter To F0 136 Entry ModeEntry Mode 136 error reply message 132 Fcursor mode 65 Features parameters 138 Field mode 65 Field Order 136 Field parameters 136 Host (Connection Type) 127 Ign Bcode_d 137 In (Serial In) 133 Insert mode 65 Invis characters 130 Kbd Locked 138 keyboard lock 138 matching elds via data stream 132 modes (edit) 65 multiple sessions 115 NULL characters 130 number of columns in screen 127 number of rows in screen 128 Out (Serial Out) 133 Pages Saved 128 pass-through 141 Port 127 Prex (Serial In) 133 Prex (Serial Out) 133 query command 128 Replace mode 65 Reverse (video attrib.) 137 Rows 128 running multiple sessions 63 selecting a session 63 settings 126134 Sufx (Serial In) 133 Sufx (Serial Out) 134 Terminal # 126 video attributes 137 TESS Settings character attributes 129 character sets, choosing 130 Connection Type - Telnet & TCP Direct 127 Features parameters 138 Fields parameters 136 Scanner parameters 134 XVI Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index screen settings 127 serial parameters 133 test parameters 134 Test 144 Test parameters (for TESS Settings) 134 Threshold (7035 backlight) 94 timeout (902 Wlan) D-14 timeouts, poll (pt) 56 Timing parameters D-9D-10 Tone (key click) 91 Translate, bar code 102 transmit failures (xe) 56 Transmit parameters (ANSI) 123 transmitted messages (xm) 56 transmitting data 123, 136 transmit on entry eld 64 trigger, double-click 103 trouble-shooting tips (scanning) 47 TRX7370 narrow band radio parameters D-6 specs 183 TRX7410/10A TekLan 902 DS SS radio parameters D-12 specs 183 TRX7430 Lucent 802.11 DS SS radio parameters D-1 specs 184 TRX7431 Lucent 802.11 DS SS radio specs 184 TRX7440 Proxim RangeLAN 802.11 FH SS radio parameters D-4 specs 183 TRX7460 Mobitex radio specs 186 Tx (transmit radio stats-Wan) 59 Type (of scanner) 101 typing in upper case 132 U UCC 128 108 underline video attribute 122 unlocking keys 34, 100 UPC A 111 UPC E 112 Upper Case 132 Use Increment X-Increment 139 Y-Increment 139 Use increment 139 V V Match Chr 132 Verify 103 Version (Scan-See) 144, 149 vertical tab (CTRL K) 125 VGA palette, remapping 98 video attributes 122, 137 All Fld Video 137 Blink 122, 137 Bold 122, 137 Reverse 122, 137 Underline 122 viewport (Scan-See display), mapping 145 visible elds match 132 Volume 43 volume, adjusting 90 VT220 Function keys equivalent Teklogix keyboard Function keys 74 W WAN Address (Subscription) Number

(MAN) 58 Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 Chan (channel number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number) 58 Mobitex Net 57 Mobitex radio parameters D-15 Mobitex radio statistics screen 57 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 State 58 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XVII Index Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal WAN radio (Mobitex) parameters D-15D-16 warnings 104 Watchdog Timer 99 WaveLAN 802 PC card (Lucent TRX7430) parameters D-1 specs 184 WaveLAN 802 PC card (Lucent TRX7431) specs 184 website address A-4 Wide Area Network Ar (Area number) 58 Bs (base identier) 58 Chan (channel number) 58 MAN (Mobitex Subscription Number) 58 Mobitex Net 57 radio parameters D-15 radio statistics screen 57 Rssi (received signal strength) 58 Rx (Receive radio stats) 59 State 58 Subscription (Address) Number

(MAN) 58 Tx (transmit radio stats) 59 Window Delay D-10 wireless LAN (Wlan) timeout D-14 WLAN Timing (Reinit Tmo or 902) D-14 WLAN 902 spread spectrum radio D-12 Working 54 worldwide ofces A-3 Wraparound 148 wrapping characters, automatically 118 X X Increment (manual panning) 93 x origin 139 xe (transmit failures) 56 xi (transmitted initialize messages) 56 X-Increment 139 xm (transmitted messages) 56 Xmit Count 123 Xmit Wait 123 XON/XOFF (Scan-See) 150 X-origin 139 xr (retransmissions) 56 Y Y Increment (manual panning) 93 y origin 139 Y/N parameters, enabling and disabling 85 Y-Increment 139 Y-origin 139 1 Chk Digit 113, 114 2 Chk Digit 113 7035 picker cradle See also Picker Cradle 171177 7035 terminal antenna, attaching 17 approvals 188 battery, installing 17 display 188 font sizes (LCD), Chinese and Korean 98 font sizes, North American and European 97 hand-strap, attaching 19 pistol grip, attaching 19 ports 9 specications 186 7937A, unpowered picker cradle 171 7937B, powered picker cradle

(11-16 VDC) 171 7937C, powered picker cradle

(10-55 VDC) 171 7942 in-unit charger 163167 7967 battery charger 167169 8255 antenna, attaching 24 approvals 190 cables, installing 24 display 189, 190 extension power cables, installing 25 font sizes (LCD), Chinese and Korean 97 XVIII Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual Boldface indicates a parameter name, as it appears on the terminal Index font sizes (LCD), North American and European 96 font sizes (VFD), Chinese and Korean 97 font sizes (VFD), North American and European 96 mounting cradle, attaching terminal to 2022 8260 antenna, attaching 24 approvals 190 cables, installing 24 extension power cables, installing 25 font size (for all 8260 terminals) 97 mounting cradle, attaching terminal to 23 902 spread spectrum radio parameters D-12D-15 Teklogix 7035, 8255 & 8260 Terminals User Manual XIX

 

 

9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual March 17, 2000 Part No. 80440.D Copyright 2000 by Teklogix Inc., Mississauga, Ontario This document and the information it contains is the property of Teklogix Inc., is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, man-

ufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Teklogix Inc. All trademarks are the property of their respective holders. Return-To-Factory Warranty Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of 90 days from shipment or 120 days from shipment where Teklogix installs the equipment. The warranty on Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Teklogix service organization. See Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details. Service When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred. Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any products for a Return Authorization number. This will help us to service your product more efficiently. For a listing of worldwide offices, please refer to the last page of this manual. Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-

date. Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to typographical errors. the Customer Services Group factory, call the to

,A?=H=JEB+BHEJO Product:

9150 Wireless Gateway Application of Council Directives:

Conformity Declared to Standards:

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC EN 55022: 1994; Class B; ETS 300 328: 1996 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4kV CD; 8kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3V/m, 80-1000 MHz EN 61000-4-4; 1kV Signal lines; 2kV Power lines EN 61000-4-5; 1kV Common; 0.5kV Differential mode EN 61000-4-6; 3VRMS, 150kHz-80 MHz EN 61000-4-11; AC Mains Ports EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario; Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1998 Manufacturers Address in the European Community:

Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial 6)*-.+6-65

+=KJE67IAHI . vii

+D=FJAH1JH@K?JE

1.1 About This Manual . 3 1.2 Text Conventions . 4 1.3 About The 9150 . 4 1.3.1 Base Station Functions . 6 1.3.2 Mini-Controller Functions. 6 1.3.3 Access Point Functions . 6 1.4 Radio Options . 7 1.5 Radio Protocols . 7 1.5.1 Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol. 8 1.5.2 Wlan Protocol . 8 IEEE 802.11 Protocol . 10 1.5.3 Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) . 11 1.5.3.1

+D=FJAH 1IJ==JE4AGKEHAAJI 2.1 Choosing The Right Location. 15 2.1.1 Environment . 15 2.1.2 Maintenance . 16 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables . 16 2.2 Connecting To External Devices . 17 2.2.1 Ports . 17 2.2.2 Status Indicators (LEDs)

. 18 2.2.3 Preparing For LAN Installation . 18 2.2.3.1 Ethernet . 19 2.2.3.2 Token Ring . 19 2.2.4 Preparing For Serial Installation. 20 2.2.5 Connecting A Video Display Terminal . 21 2.3 Changing The Configuration With A Web Browser . 21 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual i Contents

+D=FJAH!'#=E+BECKH=JE

3.4.1 3.4.1.1 Onboard Ethernet 3.4.1.2 3.4.1.3 3.1 Configuration Main Menu . 25 3.2 Configuring The IP Address . 25 3.3 Accessing The Menus . 27 3.4 General Configuration Options . 29 Interfaces . 30

. 30 Slot n: Token-Ring . 32 Slot n: PC Card Radio . 34 3.4.2 Users . 34 3.4.3 SNMP . 35 System Parameters . 36 3.4.3.1 SNMP Communities . 36 3.4.3.2 3.4.3.3 Trap Receivers . 36 3.4.4 TCP/IP Parameters . 36 3.4.4.1 Host Table . 37 3.4.4.2 Bootp . 38 3.4.4.3 DNS . 39 3.4.5 Serial Ports Parameters. 40 3.4.5.1 Console Port . 40 3.4.5.2

. 40 3.5 Access Point/Base Station Configurations. 41 3.6 Miscellaneous Commands . 42 3.6.1 System Info. 42 3.6.2 Reboot Unit. 43 Serial Port

+D=FJAH"*=IA5J=JE+BECKH=JE

4.1 Overview . 47 Interfaces . 49 4.2 4.2.1 TekLAN Parameters . 49 4.2.1.1 Radio . 50 4.2.1.2 Wireless LAN Parameters . 52 4.2.2 Narrow Band Radio Parameters . 53 4.2.2.1 Polling Protocol Parameters . 56 4.2.2.2 Radio Parameters. 59 4.2.2.3 Radio Channels. 60 4.2.2.4 TRX7370 Radio Card Parameters . 60 ii Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Contents 4.4.2.1 Emulation Options 4.4.2.2 4.3 Hosts. 63 4.4 Main Host Menu . 65 4.4.1 General Host Options . 66 9010 / TCP/IP . 67 4.4.2

. 67 Protocol Options And Function Key Mappings. 68 9010 / Serial . 68

. 69 Protocol Options: Serial Line . 69 Protocol Options: 9010 Protocol

. 70 Function Key Mappings . 70 4.5 Base Stations . 71 4.6 Radio Link Features . 72 4.4.3.1 Emulation Options 4.4.3.2 4.4.3.3 4.4.3.4 4.4.3

+D=FJAH#EE+JHAH+BECKH=JE

5.1 Overview . 77 5.2 Hosts. 80 5.3 Main Host Menu . 82 5.3.1 General Options . 83 9010 Emulations. 84 5.3.2 5.3.3 3274/Telnet . 84 5.3.3.1 Emulation Options. 84 Protocol Options. 95 5.3.3.2 Function Key Mappings . 98 5.3.3.3

. 99 5.3.4.1 Emulation Options. 99 Protocol Options. 110 5.3.4.2 5.3.4.3 Function Key Mappings . 112 5.3.5 ANSI/Telnet . 113 5.3.5.1 Emulation Options. 113 Protocol Options. 116 5.3.5.2 5.3.5.3 Function Key Mappings . 121 5250/Telnet 5.3.4

+D=FJAH$)??AII2EJ+BECKH=JE

6.1 Overview . 125 6.2 Interfaces . 126 IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) . 126 6.2.1 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual iii Contents 6.2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) . 128 6.3 MAC Bridge Parameters . 129 6.3.1 General Configuration . 131 6.3.2 Address Filters: MAC Address. 132 6.3.3 Protocol Filters . 133 6.3.3.1 Ethernet II Filters. 136 6.3.3.2 LLC Filters . 137 SNAP Filters . 138 6.3.3.3 6.3.3.4 Storm Detection . 139 6.4 Mobility Configuration . 140 IAPP Parameters . 142 6.4.1

+D=FJAH%5FA?EBE?=JEI 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway . 145 7.1.1 PC Card Radios . 145 7.1.2 Power Requirements . 146 7.1.3 Physical Description . 146 7.1.4 Processor And Memory . 147 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements . 147 7.1.6 Network Interfaces . 147 7.1.7 SLIM Cards . 147 7.1.8 Approvals. 147

)FFA@E?AI

)FFA@EN)2HJ2EKJI)@+=>A,E=CH=I A.1 Console Port . A.2 RS-232 Plus Port (SLIM Card) . A.3 RS-232/Current Loop Port (SLIM Card) . A.4 DA15 Connector Pinout (10Base5 Ethernet) . A.5 RJ-45 Connector Pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) . A.6 Token Ring Dsub9 Connector . A.7 Serial Cable Descriptions . A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6

)FFA@EN*)+*HE@CA2HJ?.EJAHI=@71I B.1 Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) . B-1 iv Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Contents B.1.1 Listing by Description . B-1 B.1.2 Listing By Type (Hexadecimal) . B-8 B.2 DSAP/SSAP Types . B-14 B.3 OUI Values . B-15 1@AN . I Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual v CAUTION TO USERS This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-

tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user is required to correct the interference at personal expense. The transmitters supplied are not to be operated within the frequency band 406 - 406.1 MHz. RF EXPOSURE Warning:

To satisfy FCC RF exposure requirements for mobile transmitting devices, a separation distance of 20 cm or more should be main-

tained between the antenna of this device and persons during device operation. To ensure compliance, operations at closer than this distance is not recommended. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Teklogix Inc. can void the users authority to operate the equipment. An unshielded plug or cable may cause radiation interference. All peripheral devices must be used with properly shielded interface cables and external filters as required. The shield must be connected directly to the chassis of the peripheral device. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual vii Safety Summary 1246)65).-6;15647+615 This safety information is for the protection of both operating and service personnel.

,62-4)6-1)-:2518-)6520-4-

Operating Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion.

,64-8-+8-4542--+574-5 To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment with-

out the covers and enclosures properly installed.

,60,)6-) To avoid discomfort due to the local heating effect of radio frequency energy, do not touch the antenna when a 9150 is transmitting.

+-+61676,4)6-) Outdoor antenna to be earthed in accordance with International Standard EN 50083-1 (1993), Cabled Distribution Systems for Television and Sound Signals - Safety Requirements.

)5+07<))6--))/-

Auenantennennanlagen mssen nach nationalen oder internationalen Normen (z.B. EN50083-1(1993) geerdet werden. viii Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 164,7+61

1

. 1.3.1 Base Station Functions. 1.3.2 Mini-Controller Functions . 1.3.3 Access Point Functions . 3 1.1 About This Manual 1.2 Text Conventions. 4 1.3 About The 9150 . 4

.6

.6

.6 1.4 Radio Options . 7 1.5 Radio Protocols . 7

.8

. 8

. 10

. 11

. 1.5.3.1 Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) . 1.5.1 Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol . 1.5.2 Wlan Protocol . 1.5.3 IEEE 802.11 Protocol . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 1 Chapter 1:

Introduction About This Manual

)>KJ6DEI=K=

This manual contains information about the installation, basic operation, and configuration of the 9150 Wireless Gateway. Chapter 1: Introduction describes the 9150 and the radio protocols it supports. Chapter 2: Installation Requirements describes the physical installation of the Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway and how to connect to the 9150 for configuration and diagnostics. Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration describes the options available from the main configuration menus. Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as a base station linked to a network controller. Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as a mini-controller. Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as an access point device between wired and wireless networks. Chapter 7: Specifications outlines the performance specifications for the 9150. Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables for the 9150. Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs presents tables of values for Ethernet II and DSAP/SSAP types, and OUI. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 3 Chapter 1:

Text Conventions Introduction

 6ANJ+LAJEI Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information. Important:

These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the computer and other equipment. Warning:

These statements provide important information that may prevent injury, damage to the equipment, or loss of data.

!)>KJ6DA'#

The 9150 Wireless Gateway is designed to support a wide variety of system config-

urations. Using the IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Standard, the 9150 is capable of operating as a transparent bridge (access point) between wireless and wired networks. This allows wireless clients to access the network and also move seamlessly between the 9150s in the network. The 9150 can also operate as a Teklogix base station or a mini-controller. The 9150 supports Type II PCMCIA cards so that multiple radio interfaces are pos-

sible. The 9150 also has dual-radio functionality. It can support several combina-

tions of radio types to function as both a mini-controller and base station, access point and base station, or access point and mini-controller. For details, see Radio Options on page 7. The 9150 Flash memory holds the boot code, configuration parameters and firm-

ware. The 9150 Configuration program allows various parameter settings to be changed, added or deleted. The Flash can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a standard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape or MS Internet Explorer

(for instructions, see Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration). 4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction About The 9150

.ECKHA6DA'#9EHAAII/=JAM=O.HJ8EAM

.ECKHA 6DA'#9EHAAII/=JAM=O*JJ8EAM Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 5 Chapter 1:

Introduction Base Station Functions

!*=IA5J=JE.K?JEI As a base station, the 9150 provides a link between the local area network and the wireless network consisting of Teklogix mobile terminals, and base stations such as the 9140 Wireless Gateway. The 9150 and 9400/9300 Network Controller (or host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit) communicate using the 9010 propri-

etary protocol with TCP/IP over Ethernet, Token Ring or serial connectivity. Wlan protocol enables the 9150 to communicate with 9140s without cable attachments

(see Figure 4.1 on page 47). For information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. For details on Wlan, see Wlan Protocol on page 8.

! EE+JHAH.K?JEI The 9150 is equipped with some emulation capabilities, allowing it to act as a mini-

controller. When a 9150 is configured as a mini-controller, Teklogix terminals can emulate an ANSI, 5250 or 3274 terminal via a 9150 rather than through a 9400/9300 Network Controller. To configure the 9150 as a mini-controller, see Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Config-

uration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 5.1 on page 78.

!!)??AII2EJ.K?JEI As an access point, the 9150 Wireless Gateway forms a communication link between Teklogix RF terminals or wireless access point clients and a Teklogix Network Controller or a host computer. It communicates over an IEEE 802.11 RF data link with terminals and over a cable with a network controller or a host com-

puter. The 9150 can be connected to the network through an Ethernet or Token Ring connection. The diagram in Figure 6.1 on page 125 illustrates a 9150 access point connection between a Teklogix 9400 Network Controller on Ethernet and IEEE 802.11 wireless devices. Figure 1.4 on page 12 shows a generalized Token Ring configuration. For information on the 9150 as an access point, see IEEE 802.11 Protocol on page 10 and Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. 6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction Radio Options

"4=@EFJEI The 9150 supports Type II PCMCIA cards so that multiple radio interfaces are possible. There is one internal and one external PC card slot available. The type of PCMCIA radio card installed in the 9150 is dependent on your wireless network. Currently supported radios are:

TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP. TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7410). TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7425). Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7440). Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7430). The 9150 has dual-radio functionality. It can support several combinations of radio types to function as both a mini-controller and base station, access point and base sta-

tion, or access point and mini-controller. The 902 MHz, 2.4 GHz (802.11 and TekLAN) and Narrow Band radios can be used in any combination, with the exception of dual TekLAN or dual Narrow Band radios. Important:

The radio in the terminal must match the radio in the 9150 Wireless Gateway. If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: Turn the 9150 off before changing the radio.

#4=@E2HJ?I RF protocols allow terminals to communicate with a base station by sharing the use of a radio channel in an efficient way. Teklogix systems use one of three types of RF protocols: the Teklogix Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol, the Teklogix Wireless LAN (Wlan) protocol, or the non-proprietary IEEE 802.11 protocol. When used as a base station, the 9150 uses either the Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol or the Wlan protocol. These two protocol types cannot be mixed on a single system. When used as an access point device, the 9150 employs the IEEE 802.11 protocol. These protocols are described in the following sections. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 7

Chapter 1:

Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol Introduction

#)@=FJELA2EC+JAJE2HJ?

The Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol is always used on Narrow Band radio systems with baud rates of up to 19.2 kbps, and may also be used on Spread Spec-

trum systems at higher rates. Terminals operating with this protocol do not transmit unless they receive polls from the 9150. Terminals are generally polled en masse. Following each poll, groups of terminals are assigned response windows in which they may respond to the poll. If a collision occurs more than one terminal attempts to respond in a particular window the 9150 that is polling divides and reassigns that group until the colliding terminals can respond without a collision. Adaptive features of this protocol allow the response windows to be adjusted to accommodate high or low RF traffic conditions, and to prevent data from being queued too long when a particular terminal has a burst of data to send or receive. Systems using adaptive polling/contention can use the cellular option so that terminal operators can roam the site, maintaining uninterrupted communication as they pass between coverage areas. If cellular base is not enabled, a RESET: Press Enter message appears on the terminal screen each time an operator moves from one base station coverage area to another. (Pressing <ENTER> restores communication, but some data may be lost.)

# 9=2HJ?

The Wlan (Wireless LAN) protocol is used only on Spread Spectrum radio systems at baud rates of 122 kbps and higher. The Wlan protocol allows base stations to be added to a system without cable connections. A Wlan system consists of a minimum of one wired base station and zero or more wireless base stations. It can operate on either one channel usually the case or on multiple channels. When a Wlan system is operating, base stations do not send out polls. Instead, both wired and wireless base stations regularly broadcast routing information, indicating the available routes back to the controller. Both terminals and wireless base stations receive these broadcasts, determine the best communication route, and send their messages. If a better route becomes available, the terminal or wireless base will change communication paths. 8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction Wlan Protocol Only one base station or terminal may transmit at one time. When the channel is clear, a combination of preset priorities and random choices determines who goes next. Even if two transmitters attempt to send at the same time, message acknowledgements and retransmissions prevent any data from being lost. Terminals moving through the Wlan communicate with the base stations that provide the best communication path to a wired base station. If multiple channels are used, the terminal looks for a better channel only if it cannot find an acceptable path back on its current channel. Note: For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 1.3, below.

&##8ADE?AKJ 4.6AHE=

056

9EHAAII/=JAM=O ETHERNET TCP/IP SERIAL

AJMH+JHAH

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

%!0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

.ECKHA!'#))@5AHE=+BECKH=JE

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 9 Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol

#!1---& 2HJ?

The IEEE 802.11 protocol is an OSI standard for Wireless Local Area Networks

(WLANs). With this standard, any IEEE 802.11 radio can communicate with any other similarly-equipped device. However, IEEE 802.11 does not provide a standard for a total WLAN system. IEEE 802.11 solely standardizes two communications layers: Physical (PHY) and Medium Access Control (MAC). Three different PHY layer media are covered: 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio, 2.4 GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum radio, and infrared. Each station in a WLAN system has its own unique MAC address. Important:

Equipment using one physical medium (e.g. Frequency Hopping versus Direct Sequence) will not interoperate with equipment using a different physical medium. IEEE 802.11 uses 2.4 GHz radios of relatively low power. The range is limited to no more than a hundred feet or so, depending on the conditions, and is usually restricted to line of sight operation. Therefore, most wireless networks need more than one coverage area, with terminals moving between the areas. To integrate those areas, systems using IEEE 802.11 protocol for their wireless networks require an IEEE 802.11-equipped bridge device (or access point), such as the 9150 Wireless Gateway. Using bridging software, the 9150 Wireless Gateway enables communication between any wireless IEEE 802.11-equipped stations and LAN stations operating on Ethernet or Token Ring. The 9150 itself is resident on the LAN and functions as a MAC bridge, providing transparent integration between the stations on the wire-

less and wired networks. Each terminal is associated with one 9150. A frame from an RF terminal is sent to the 9150 that the terminal is associated with. The terminal puts a destination MAC address in the frame, which specifies a hardware address on the wired LAN side. Because the receiving 9150 is connected to an Ethernet or Token Ring network, it encapsulates the data in an Ethernet or Token Ring frame, respectively, including the destination MAC address specified by the terminal. The 9150 then sends the frame onto the physical network; the frame is picked up by whichever device is at the des-

tination hardware address. 10 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol When sending frames from the LAN side, the sending device puts the MAC address of the terminal in the frame header. Whichever 9150 has that terminal associated with it, takes the frame and passes it over the RF to the terminal. By passing frames in this way, the 9150 is acting as a MAC bridge. 1JAH)??AII2EJ2HJ?1)22

The Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) is an extension to the IEEE 802.11 protocol. IAPP facilitates roaming of mobile stations across different Basic Service Sets

(groups of stations and their access points), and specifies how access points commu-

nicate with each other. In a multiple-9150 system, IAPP informs the other 9150 Wireless Gateways when a new 9150 becomes active, and enables the awareness of the 9150s of each other. With IAPP, an IEEE 802.11 system can operate on one or more channels, with terminals moving between the 9150s. Although each terminal is associated with one 9150, it can reassociate with another 9150 to maintain uninterrupted communica-

tions. The newly-associated 9150 will receive the terminals data frames and pass them onto the LAN. Returning frames are no longer accepted by the original 9150, which has disassociated from that terminal. The returning frames are now accepted by the newly-associated 9150 and passed over the RF to the terminal. Note: For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as an access point, please see Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 1.4 on page 12. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 11 Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol

%"0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

056

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

%!#0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

AJMH+JHAH

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

.ECKHA"'#)??AII2EJ+BECKH=JE

%"0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

%!#0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

12 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 156))614-3714--65 2

. 2.1.1 Environment . 2.1.2 Maintenance . 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables . 2.1 Choosing The Right Location . 15

. 15

. 16

. 16 2.2 Connecting To External Devices. 17

. 17

. 18

. 18

. 19

. 19

. 20

. 21 2.3 Changing The Configuration With A Web Browser. 21

. 2.2.1 Ports . 2.2.2 Status Indicators (LEDs) . 2.2.3 Preparing For LAN Installation . 2.2.4 Preparing For Serial Installation . 2.2.5 Connecting A Video Display Terminal 2.2.3.1 Ethernet . 2.2.3.2 Token Ring. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 13 Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Choosing The Right Location The 9150 must be installed by qualified Teklogix personnel. Warning:

+DIEC6DA4ECDJ?=JE

Typically, Teklogix conducts a site survey in the plant and then recommends the preferred locations for the 9150s. These locations provide good radio coverage, minimize the distance to the host computer or network controller, and meet the environmental requirements.

-LEHAJ The 9150 should be located in a well-ventilated area and should be protected from extreme temperature fluctuations (i.e. direct heater output, shipping doors or direct sunlight). If a protective cover is required, it must have enough ventilation to maintain the 9150s surface at or near room temperature. The 9150 should be situated away from the path of vehicles and free from water or dust spray. The 9150 should only be mounted in the upright position, as shown in Figure 2.1, below. This orientation minimizes the risk of water entering the 9150, should the unit accidentally be sprayed. The 9150 is attached to a vertical surface using four fasteners on the rear plate (type of fasteners are dependent on mounting surface). The top two holes in the rear plate are slots, allowing the unit to be hung in position before the remaining bolts are installed, thus easing installation. The bolts used for installation are SAE 1/4-20.

KJEC5J

+=>A6EAKJ

KJEC0A

.ECKHA '#1IJ==JE2IEJE

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 15 Chapter 2:

Maintenance Installation Requirements Refer to Chapter 7: Specifications for a more detailed description of environmen-

tal requirements. Keep in mind that the long term stability of this equipment will be enhanced if the environmental conditions are less severe than those listed in this manual.

 =EJA=?A The 9150 has no internal option switches and does not require physical access;

all configuration settings are done remotely (see Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configura-

tion). Environmental and radio communication considerations do, however, still apply.

!2MAH)@)JA=+=>AI To prevent accidental disconnection and stress on the 9150, antenna and power cables should be secured within 30 cm of the unit. Secure the cables with ties to the cable tie mounts on the 9150 (see Figure 2.1 on page 15). A single phase power outlet (range 100 to 240 VAC rated 1.0A minimum) should be installed within one metre (3.1 feet) of the 9150. The 9150 automatically adjusts to input within that power range. The power cable is removable and is available in the power type spe-

cific to your location. Warning:

To avoid electric shock, the power cord protective grounding conductor must always be connected to ground. There are several omnidirectional antennas available from Teklogix. The type of antenna required for each installation depends on the coverage requirements and the frequencies used. Generally, a site survey determines the appropriate antenna. Teklogix can also provide special, directional antennas. Consult Teklogix service personnel for more information. Warning:

Never operate the 9150 without a suitable antenna or a dummy load. Connection to Outdoor Antenna: Outdoor antenna to be earthed in accordance with International Standard EN 50083-1 (1993), Cabled Distribution Systems for Television and Sound Signals -

Safety Requirements. The antenna must be installed by a qualified service person and installed according to local electrical installation codes. 16 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Connecting To External Devices Teklogix supplies the coaxial cable required to connect the 9150 to the antenna. When determining the location of the antenna, the coverage requirements of the antenna are considered in conjunction with the environmental requirements of the 9150. The coaxial cable must be routed and secured using wire anchors and/or coaxial nail clips. A few extra inches of cable are required near the antenna and the 9150 to make disconnection easier.

 +A?JEC6-NJAH=,ALE?AI This section contains general guidelines for connecting the 9150 to external devices such as network controllers, base stations, host computers, PCs and video display terminals.

 2HJI Figure 2.2 below shows the locations of the port and power connectors on the under-

side of the 9150. The port pinouts are described in Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams.

)+2MAH5?AJ

*=IA6

*=IA

*=H@-JDAHAJ)@=FJHI

*=IA#

+IA2HJ

*=IA6

*=IA#

*=IA

+IA

7?

6A 4EC 6A 4EC )@=FJH

.ECKHA  *=IAB6DA'#EIAJFJE=6A4EC=@=FJH

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 17 Chapter 2:

Status Indicators (LEDs) Installation Requirements

  5J=JKI1@E?=JHI-,I

The 9150 has six status indicators on the front of the enclosure. These numbered and coloured LEDs indicate the operating status for each port:

K>AH

=A

.K?JE

1 2 3 4 5 6 Ethernet link1 Link indicator for 10base-T:

ON = good link; OFF = no link Ethernet activity Ethernet LAN activity (Rx/Tx) PC Card A status2 PC Card A activity (Rx/Tx) PC Card B status2,3 PC Card B activity (Rx/Tx; Token Ring) SLIM Power SLIM card activity LED flashing = BIST4 running/error detected LED On solid = BIST4 Passed LED Off = no power to unit

+KH yellow green yellow green yellow green 1 For 10Base2 and 10Base5: LED 1 is always OFF when these connections are used. 2 When a TekLAN 902 MHz radio is installed, the PC Card status LEDs blink only when data is received from or transmitted to a terminal. When a TRX7370 narrow band radio is installed, these LEDs blink for all received and transmitted data traffic. 3 When a Token Ring PC card is installed, LED #4 shows Token Ring activity. 4 Built-in Self-Test. 6=>A -,.K?JEI

 !2HAF=HEC.H)1IJ==JE

Because the 9150 provides Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity, it can be added to an existing LAN. Generally, LAN installations are handled with the help of the network administrators, as they are familiar with their network and its configuration. Once the 9150 is installed, connected and powered on, the system administrator can access the unit to check the configuration and to assign the 9150 its unique IP address. This may be done through the Console port or through the network (see Connecting A Video Display Terminal on page 21 and Changing The Configura-

18 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Preparing For LAN Installation tion With A Web Browser on page 21). Subsequent changes in the network, such as the addition of stations or users, would also require that the 9150 configuration be changed. Important: Once the 9150 is configured and rebooted the first time, the Employ bootp parameter should be disabled (see page 38), unless the 9150 obtains its IP address from a bootp server or the system administrator intends to update the software through bootp.

-JDAHAJ

The 9150 is equipped with three variations of Ethernet connection: 10Base-T

(RJ-45), 10Base2 (BNC coax), and 10Base5 (Dsub 15). See Figure 2.2 on page 17 for an illustration of the connector locations. Since these ports are auto-selecting, jumper or configuration settings are not required. The maximum packet size sup-

ported over the network is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. For a description of port pinouts, please refer to Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. Note:

10Base2 termination is not required if the port is not used. 6A4EC

To connect a 9150 to a Token Ring network, a Madge Token Ring Smart 16/4 Ring-

node Adapter Type II PC card, 4 or 16 Mbps, is pre-installed in the internal PC card slot. The connector plate shown in the inset in Figure 2.2 on page 17 is fixed to the base of the 9150 to accommodate the Token Ring Dsub9 cable. This connection supports Shielded Twisted Pair (IBM STP) cables Type 1 or 6. The maximum packet size supported over the network is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. For a description of port pinouts, please refer to Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 19 Chapter 2:

Preparing For Serial Installation Installation Requirements

 "2HAF=HEC.H5AHE=1IJ==JE

The 9150 offers serial connection as an option when a local area network is not used. Data cables are generally prepared after the site survey report is available and should be in place before the equipment arrives so that Teklogix can install them. The type of data cable used depends on the type of port required at the site. The type of port depends on the location of the 9150 and whether it is to be connected to a host computer or a network controller. Modems can be used to better accommodate long distances between the 9150 and the host computer or network controller. Port options include RS-232 Plus and Current Loop. Connector pinouts are listed in Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. The baud rate and the maximum length of the cable for each type of port is tabulated in Table 2.2, below. The cable lengths are based on a quality, 2-pair shielded cable (Belden #8723). The default baud rate for the 9150 serial connection is 19.2k. Each method of connection has different advantages and capabilities:

RS-232/Current Loop This is a standard RS-232 asynchronous port with extra lines for synchronous communication. Cable length is limited by the RS-232 specification of 2500pF on the capacitance of the receiving stations. An optional current loop is available to extend the limits of this connection. Optically isolated RS-232-Plus This is a standard RS-232 asynchronous port with an RS-423 driver. Cables connected to this port can span longer distances at higher baud rates than the RS-232/Current Loop option. 2HJFJEI

+=>A2=HJ

*=K@4=JA

=NACJD RS-232 Plus

(asynchronous communications only) 16590, 16598, 19387 Current Loop 20 mA

(asynchronous communications only) 16599 up to 19.2k 2250 ft. 38.4k 2400 9600 19.2k 38.4k 2000 ft. 6250 ft. 3250 ft. 1500 ft. 1000 ft. 6=>A  =NEK+=>AACJDI.H45 ! 2KI)@+KHHAJF 20 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Connecting A Video Display Terminal Warning:

Installation using an outdoor data cable between two buildings requires that transient protection (a lightning arrestor) be added to the data cable. The RS-232 Plus port is recommended in this situation because it provides optical isolation between the cable and the controller. To avoid ground problems (on the data cables), the 9150 should be connected to the same transformer/voltage distribution system as the network controller. If this is not possible, use Current Loop ports or a pair of modems.

 #+A?JEC)8E@A,EIF=O6AHE=

An ANSI compatible video display terminal (e.g., DEC VT220 or higher), or a PC running terminal emulation, is used for diagnostic purposes and to configure the IP address for the first time before the 9150 can be accessed using a Web Browser (see Configuring The IP Address on page 25). The terminal is connected to the port labelled Console on the 9150 (see Figure 2.2 on page 17). This port is normally set to operate at 19,200 baud, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. To comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules for a Class B computing device, only the cable supplied (Part no. 19387) should be used.

!+D=CEC6DA+BECKH=JE9EJD)9A>*HMIAH The 9150 Flash memory can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a stan-

dard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape Navigator (version 4.05 or later) or MS Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or later). See Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration for instructions on changing the parameters. When setting up the 9150 as an access point device, refer to Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration for additional information. When setting up the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration for additional information. When setting up the 9150 as a mini-controller, please refer to Chapter 5: Mini-

Controller Configuration for additional information. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 21

'#)1+.1/74)61 3

. 3.4.1 Interfaces . 3.4.2 Users . 3.4.3 SNMP . 3.1 Configuration Main Menu . 25 3.2 Configuring The IP Address . 25 3.3 Accessing The Menus . 27 3.4 General Configuration Options . 29

. 30

. 30

. 32

. 34

. 34

. 35

. 36

. 36

. 36

. 36

. 37

. 38

. 39

. 40

. 40

. 40 3.5 Access Point/Base Station Configurations. 41 3.6 Miscellaneous Commands . 42

. 42

. 43

. 3.4.1.1 Onboard Ethernet

. 3.4.1.2 Slot n: Token-Ring. 3.4.1.3 Slot n: PC Card Radio . 3.4.3.1 System Parameters. 3.4.3.2 SNMP Communities. 3.4.3.3 Trap Receivers . 3.4.4 TCP/IP Parameters . 3.4.5 Serial Ports Parameters. 3.4.4.1 Host Table . 3.4.4.2 Bootp . 3.4.4.3 DNS . 3.4.5.1 Console Port . 3.4.5.2 Serial Port . 3.6.1 System Info . 3.6.2 Reboot Unit

. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 23 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Configuration Main Menu

!+BECKH=JE=EAK The 9150 Flash memory can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a standard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape Navigator (version 4.05 or later) or MS Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or later). The 9150 Configuration program allows various configuration parameter settings to be changed, added or deleted. Important:

The 9150 must be warm rebooted after parameter changes are made , including configuring the IP address (see below), in order for the changes to take effect. For details, see Reboot Unit on page 43.

! +BECKHEC6DA12)@@HAII Before the configuration menus can be accessed using your Web Browser, the 9150 must be assigned an IP address using a PC console connection. Virtually any PC can be connected to the console port of the 9150, provided that the PC has a terminal communication program such as the Windows HyperTerminal utility or Procomm Plus for Windows. These programs emulate an ANSI terminal such as VT220 or higher. Cable no. 19387 should be used to connect the PC to the 9150. Make sure the communications settings on your PC are set to 8 bits, 1 stop, no parity, and that the baud rate of the serial port matches that of the 9150 console port

(19,200 baud). After the PC is attached and turned on, press the <RETURN> key several times until the > prompt appears. The commands used to configure IP addresses are described here. If your system uses a bootp server to assign IP addresses, make sure that bootp is enabled. Once enabled, and the 9150 is rebooted, you will be able to access the 9150 configuration menus through the Web Browser, using the IP address identified in the server's bootp table. If you do not use a bootp server, make sure that bootp is disabled and continue with the configuration commands to manually assign an IP address. Important: When your configuration is completed, the changes should be saved to flash by entering the following command (commands are case-sensitive):

>cfg commitCache Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 25 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Configuring The IP Address To display the bootp setting:

>cfg get system.dobootp To enable bootp:

>cfg put system.dobootp 1 To disable bootp:

>cfg put system.dobootp 0 To display the default IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address):

>cfg get interface.1.defaultipaddress To configure the default IP address

>cfg put interface.1.defaultipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx To display the default gateway:

>cfg get system.defaultgateway To configure the default gateway:

>cfg put system.defaultgateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx To display the default subnetmask:

>cfg get interface.1.defaultsubnetmask To configure the default subnetmask:

>cfg put interface.1.defaultsubnetmask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 26 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Accessing The Menus

!!)??AIIEC6DAAKI When the Web Browser is pointed to the 9150s IP address, a name and password dialog box appears. The password is comprised of alphanumeric characters and is case-sensitive. If you change the password (see Users on page 34), set all 9150s to the same password, and write it down in a secure place. A default user name user and the password 123456 are created on 9150 system startup if no users are already configured. You can use the default to enter the Configuration Main Menu for the first time. For security, change this default name and password immediately after entering the configuration menus. Should you acci-

dentally delete your user names, re-booting the 9150 will re-create the default name and password so that you can get back in to the unit. After the password is accepted, the Configuration Main Menu appears. The 9150 software automatically detects the system information of the unit, and most of the parameters have already been properly configured for each site. Warning:

Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. To highlight and move through the different options, use the <TAB> key or mouse pointer. To view and select the items in the listboxes, either press the <UP> or

<DOWN> arrow keys or click on the arrow at the side of the menu and highlight the item. To enter the related configuration sub-menu dialog box, highlight Configure and either press <ENTER> or click on the Configure button.

Where string entry parameters are given in the menus, changes are keyed in. Numerical parameters can be entered as hexadecimal values. Precede hexa-

decimal values with 0x. To leave a menu page, select either the <OK> or <Cancel> button at the bottom of the page. Selecting <OK> will save your changes and exit the page, while selecting <Cancel> will exit the page without saving the changes. Important: Do not use the Web Browsers <Back> button to leave a page. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 27

Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Accessing The Menus

.ECKHA!'#+BECKH=JE=EAK8EAM.H*HMIAH 28 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration General Configuration Options

!"/AAH=+BECKH=JEFJEI The General Configuration menu on the Configuration Main Menu page presents five options of sub-menus: Interfaces , Users, SNMP, TCP/IP Parameters, and Serial Ports Parameters. ECKHA! LAHLEAMB/AAH=+BECKH=JEAKI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 29 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces

!"1JAHB=?AI The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option indicates which interfaces have been detected in use by the 9150.

>=H@-JDAHAJ

For the selection Onboard Ethernet, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters page for the Ethernet connection, which shows the 9150s physical

(hardware) address and IP address parameters. 2DOIE?=)@@HAII A unique Physical Address is assigned by Teklogix personnel for each 9150. The values entered for this parameter are presented in hexadecimal in descending order beginning with the MSB (Most Significant Byte), the highest value, and ending with the LSB (Least Significant Byte), the lowest value. The allowable value for each field ranges from 00 to FF. Warning:

It is not advisable to modify the Physical Address. However, if these values are changed, the Network Administrator must assign a unique address to each Ethernet station on the network, including all 9150s. 30 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces 122=H=AJAHI Each 9150 that is connected to a local network has a unique IP address designated for it. The IP Parameters used to assign the IP address are accessed by entering the Configure dialog box.

)?JK=12)@@HAII The Actual IP Address is the IP address currently set on the 9150.

,AB=KJ12)@@HAII This parameter allows you to change the value of the IP address. The IP address must be a unique value on the network, including any Token Ring IP addresses being used, so that each 9150 in your system can be identified. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note: The value 255.255.255.255 is reserved for the broadcast address.

)?JK=5K>AJ=I

The Actual Subnet Mask is the subnet mask currently set on the 9150.

,AB=KJ5K>AJ=I

This parameter allows you to change the value of the subnet mask. The 9150 uses the Default Subnet Mask, its own IP address, and the destination IP address to deter-

mine if a packet should be sent on the local network or to a remote segment. If the destination is found on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destina-

tion. If the destination resides on a remote network, the packet is routed to the gate-

way. Enter your subnet mask in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx notation. Important:

The maximum packet size supported is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 31 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces 5J6A4EC

For the selection Slot n: Token-Ring, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters page for the Token Ring connection, which shows the 9150s physi-

cal (hardware) address, ring speed, and IP address parameters. 2DOIE?=)@@HAII Each Madge Token Ring PC card has a unique MAC address (Physical Address), which is displayed here in the 9150 parameters. The MAC address is presented in standard hexadecimal format. 4EC5FAA@

This parameter indicates the Token Ring network speed. The ring speed must be set through the console, prior to installation, using the configuration command line:

>cfg put interface.#.tokenring.datarate 16

(or 4 if the network is running at 4 Mbps) The # depends on which slot the PC card occupies. Usually this is slot B, inside the 9150, so the # would be 3. The default ring speed is 16 Mbps. 32 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces 122=H=AJAHI Each 9150 that is connected to a local network has a unique IP address designated for it. The IP Parameters used to assign the IP address are accessed by entering the Configure dialog box.

)?JK=12)@@HAII The Actual IP Address is the IP address currently set on the 9150.

,AB=KJ12)@@HAII This parameter allows you to change the value of the IP address. The IP address must be a unique value on the network, including any Ethernet IP addresses being used, so that each 9150 in your system can be identified. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note: The value 255.255.255.255 is reserved for the broadcast address.

)?JK=5K>AJ=I

The Actual Subnet Mask is the subnet mask currently set on the 9150.

,AB=KJ5K>AJ=I

This parameter allows you to change the value of the subnet mask. The 9150 uses the Default Subnet Mask, its own IP address, and the destination IP address to deter-

mine if a packet should be sent on the local network or to a remote segment. If the destination is found on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destina-

tion. If the destination resides on a remote network, the packet is routed to the gate-

way. Enter your subnet mask in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx notation. Important:

The maximum packet size supported is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 33 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Users 5J2++=H@4=@E

Each PC (PCMCIA) card radio resident in the 9150 will be located in one of two Slots: A or B. Selecting a PC card will open the sub-menu for that radio. IEEE 802.11 FH or DS: See IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parame-

ters) on page 126, or IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) on page 128 for details on setting the radio parameters for the PC card. TekLAN Card: See TekLAN Parameters on page 49 for details on setting the radio and Wlan parameters. Teklogix Narrowband: See Narrow Band Radio Parameters on page 53 for details on setting the radio and polling parameters.

!" 7IAHI The Users option provides security for access to the 9150 Configuration menus. New individuals can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the listbox before entering the Configure dialog box. Individual names and their assigned passwords may be changed or deleted in the Configure dialog box for this option by selecting the name in the listbox and then opening the Configure dialog box. The password can be comprised of alphanumeric characters and is case-sensitive. 34 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration SNMP

!"!52 The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Configure page allows various network management parameters to be set or changed. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 35 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters 5OIJA2=H=AJAHI

The entries in these parameters set the name, contact and location identifiers for this specific 9150 Wireless Gateway. The name and location are then shown as the sub-heading of each Configuration page. In this example the identifier appears as Unit 12 [Warehouse A: Pillar 32B].

These parameter settings allow the network administrator to define the network environment and determine the type of access allowed (read-only, or read-write) for each area name and IP address.

These IP addresses determine which SNMP managers stations will receive SNMP Traps from the 9150. The 9150 sends the Cold Start Trap on reboot or power up. 52+KEJEAI 6H=F4A?AELAHI

!""6+2122=H=AJAHI The 9150 is situated on a wired network which uses TCP/IP. Both Bootp and DNS options are available to resolve IP addressing issues. 36 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters 0IJ6=>A

If no external DNS server is available, the 9150 may resolve host names to IP addresses using its internal host table. Hosts are added to the table by selecting Configure beside [#} Add Entry in the listbox. This will open the New Host Table Entry menu. An existing hosts name and IP address may be edited in the Host Table Entry menu by selecting Configure beside the host name in the listbox. The host may also be deleted from the table.

=A

This is the designated name of the host. 12)@@HAII

This is the assigned IP address for the host. Note: The name must not contain space characters. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 37 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters

*JF

The 9150 has designated default IP addresses for itself and the Gateway. Alterna-

tively, the IP address of the 9150 can be assigned using a BOOTP Server. The primary purpose of the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is to assign a designated IP address to the appropriate 9150 on the network. When Employ bootp is enabled, a request for address is automatically broadcast to all hosts on the local network. BOOTP Servers search the bootptab files for a hardware address which matches that of the 9150 that initiated the request for address. (Bootptab files list each hardware address with a corresponding IP address.) The host with a matching hard-

ware address in its bootp table replies to the request, sending the appropriate IP address to the 9150.

-FO>JF Enable Employ bootp (), to automatically broadcast a request for address to all hosts on the local network. Important: Once the 9150 is configured and rebooted the first time, the Employ bootp parameter should be disabled, unless the 9150 obtains its IP address from a bootp server or the system administrator intends to update the software through bootp.

)?JK=,AB=KJ/=JAM=O)@@HAII This parameter shows the Default Gateway address currently set for the 9150. 38 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters

,AB=KJ/=JAM=O)@@HAII The Default Gateway Address is assigned by the network administrator. This address creates an identifiable communication link between the 9150 and a network other than the one to which the 9150 is directly wired. The acceptable values for the Gateway IP address range from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note:

Setting the Gateway IP Address to 0.0.0.0 disables this feature. A communication link will not exist between sub-networks.

,5

Domain Name System allows users to locate destinations on the TCP/IP network by domain (host) name. The DNS server maintains a database of host names and their corresponding IP addresses. For example, if the server was presented with the name www.teklogix.com, it would return the IP address: 207.219.2.3.

,54AILAH-=>A@

When this parameter is enabled (), the 9150 will use the DNS Name Server identi-

fied by the IP address entered in the DNS Name Server parameter.

,5,AB=KJ,=E

This is the default domain name for this 9150.

,5=A5AHLAH

This is the IP address of the designated DNS Name Server. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 39 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Serial Ports Parameters

!"#5AHE=2HJI2=H=AJAHI

The default baud rate for the console port is 19.2k.

+IA2HJ

The default baud rate for the serial port is 19.2k. 5AHE=2HJ 40 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Access Point/Base Station Configurations

!#)??AII2EJ*=IA5J=JE+BECKH=JEI The 9150 is capable of operating as a transparent bridge (access point) between the wireless and wired networks, and also as a mini-controller or base station. For these operations, the parameters in these pages must be set appropriately. For detailed information on the sub-menus and to set up the 9150 as a base station, see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. To configure an access point device, see Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. To configure the 9150 as a mini-

controller, see Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 41 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Miscellaneous Commands

!$EI?A=AKI+=@I There are two miscellaneous commands: System Info and Reboot Unit.

!$5OIJA1B

The System Information, hardware and software, for the 9150 Wireless Gateway unit is detected automatically and summarized in this page. The screen is shown on page 43. 42 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Reboot Unit

!$ 4A>J7EJ This option opens a dialog box which allows you to remotely warm reboot the 9150. If the OK button is chosen, the 9150 will be rebooted, the LEDs will turn off momentarily, and the following message will be received:

Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, and therefore changing the Radio Type parameter (see page 50), the unit must be powered OFF and ON again (cold rebooted). Rebooting with the Reboot Unit option will not implement the radio parameter change. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 43

*)5-56)61+.1/74)61 4

. 4.2.1 TekLAN Parameters . 4.2.1.1 Radio. 4.2.1.2 Wireless LAN Parameters . 4.2.2 Narrow Band Radio Parameters . 4.2.2.1 Polling Protocol Parameters . 4.2.2.2 Radio Parameters . 4.2.2.3 Radio Channels . 4.2.2.4 TRX7370 Radio Card Parameters . 4.1 Overview . 47 4.2 Interfaces . 49

.49

.50

.52

.53

.56

.59

.60

.60 4.3 Hosts . 63 4.4 Main Host Menu . 65

.66

.67

.67

.68

.68

.69

.69

.70

.70 4.5 Base Stations . 71 4.6 Radio Link Features . 72

. 4.4.2.1 Emulation Options. 4.4.2.2 Protocol Options And Function Key Mappings . 4.4.3.1 Emulation Options. 4.4.3.2 Protocol Options: Serial Line . 4.4.3.3 Protocol Options: 9010 Protocol 4.4.3.4 Function Key Mappings . 4.4.1 General Host Options . 4.4.2 9010 / TCP/IP . 4.4.3 9010 / Serial . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 45 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Overview

"LAHLEAM The 9150 Wireless Gateway can operate as a base station, facilitating communica-

tions between terminals and wireless base stations and a Teklogix 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or 9140 Wireless Gateway (as a mini-controller) with a range of host platforms. Alternatively, the network controller can be a host running a Teklogix SDK (handler). The 9150 can also act as a slave base station to a 9140 on the network. As a base station, the 9150 uses the Wireless LAN (Wlan) or Adaptive Polling/Contention RF protocols. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3:

9150 Main Configuration. For details on the RF protocols, see page 8.

&##8ADE?AKJ 4.6AHE=

056

9EHAAII/=JAM=O ETHERNET TCP/IP SERIAL

AJMH+JHAH

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

%!0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

.ECKHA"'#*=IA5J=JE+BECKH=JE

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 47 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Overview For operation as a base station, the parameters in the Base Station Configuration pages on the Configuration Main Menu screen should be set appropriately, as described in the sections that follow. In addition, the appropriate radio parameters must be applied. These are found in the Interfaces pages for TekLAN and Narrow Band radios. See pages 49and 53, respectively. ECKHA" LAHLEAMB*=IA5J=JE+BECKH=JEAKI 48 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Interfaces

" 1JAHB=?AI

" 6A)2=H=AJAHI The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option in the 9150 Configuration Main Menu page indicates which interfaces have been detected in use. Entering the Configure dialog box for Slot A: TekLAN Card, opens the parameters page for TekLAN, which presents both the radio and Wlan parameters. ECKHA"!LAHLEAMB6A)AKI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 49 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters

4=@E

4=@E6OFA The type of PC radio card installed on the 9150 is dependent on your wireless net-

work. This parameter should be set to the installed radio. The radios for TekLAN are the TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum, and the TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum. Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: turn the 9150 off before changing the radio. Following this, when changing the Radio Type parameter, the unit must be powered OFF and ON again (cold rebooted). Rebooting with the Reboot Unit option will not implement the radio parameter change.

,=J=4=JA This parameter determines the data (baud) rate for the radio channel. This is a decimal value in bits per second. The acceptable value for the Data Rate parameter differs depending on the type of radio installed in the 9150. TekLAN 902 MHz DS SS: 122 kbps. TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS SS: 1 Mbps. 50 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters

+D=A-=>A@

These parameters are used to enable ( ) or disable a channel. The number of chan-

nels available is determined by the type of radio installed. See PC Card Radios on page 145 for the number of available channels for each radio type.

)?JELA+D=A

This parameter determines the current default radio channel. 4=CA

The federal agencies, Industry Canada and the Federal Communications Commis-

sion in the United States, as well as other country-specific agencies world-wide, regulate the use of radio frequencies to ensure that communication conflicts are avoided. See PC Card Radios on page 145 for the assigned frequencies for each radio type. The Range parameter determines which channels can be enabled and is set accord-

ing to the approved frequency range in the country where the system is installed. The TekLAN 902 MHz radio is only assigned the 902 MHz frequency. For the TekLAN 2.4 GHz radio, the frequency range and the associated channels and countries are assigned as follows:

+KJHO 4=CA

+D=AI)L=E=>A For testing purposes only. Canada, U.S., U.K. Australia 2412-2462 2422-2462 2422-2442 1 to 6 2 to 6 2 to 4 6=>A".HAGKA?O4=CA`6A) "/05FHA=@5FA?JHK64:%" #

-=>A+=H@

This parameter enables the PC card ( ). The card may be disabled temporarily when, for testing purposes, it is required that there be no radio interference.

)KJ5J=HJKF This parameter enables ( ) polling immediately when the 9150 is rebooted. If Auto Startup is disabled, the 9150 will wait until polling is initialized from the network controller. When the 9150 is operating as a Wlan base station under a network con-

troller, this parameter should be disabled. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 51 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters

The Wlan protocol can only be used with spread spectrum radios. 9EHAAII)2=H=AJAHI Important:

If your system is using the Wlan protocol, make sure that Operate in Cellular Mode is enabled (see page 72) in the Radio Link Features sub-menu and that cellular mode is also set on the 9400/9300 Network Controller.

*=IAK>AH This parameter is used to assign a unique address to each base station. As the termi-

nals move from one base station to another, this address is transmitted by the base stations to the terminals, identifying each 9150 on a multiple base station system. The allowable range of base station numbers is 1 to 64. 6EAKJ This value is used to adjust Wlan performance and should be set to 10.

=N2HEHEJO This value is used to adjust Wlan performance and should be set to 20. 52 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

*=IA2HEHEJO6A) "/0

The Base Priority parameter determines the number of priority transmit slots reserved for each base station. The allowable range for this parameter is 0 to 100. For optimal performance, this parameter should be set to a value of 2.

AII=CA,KH=JE6A) "/0

This parameter controls the duration of transmit slots to optimize communications and decrease the likelihood of collisions. A Message Duration value of 1 translates into a slot duration of 130 micro seconds. The allowable range for this parameter is 2 to 200. For optimal performance, this parameter should be set to 15.

BBEA6EAKJ This parameter determines the time in minutes that a terminal is allowed to be inac-

tive before the 9150 declares it offline. An offline terminal is still considered part of the system. Messages to offline terminals are queued at the 9150. The terminal remains offline until it transmits any message. Values for this parameter range from 0 to 100. If the parameter is set to 0, terminals are never declared offline.

"  =HHM*=@4=@E2=H=AJAHI The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option on the 9150 Configuration Main Menu page indicates which interfaces have been detected in use. For the selec-

tion Slot A: Teklogix Narrowband, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters pages for the TRX7370 Narrow Band PC card radio. These pages list the polling protocol and radio parameters, and show the radio cards permanent communications settings. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 53 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

.ECKHA""LAHLEAMB6ACEN=HHM*=@AKI 54 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

-=>A+=H@

This parameter enables the PC card ( ). The card may be disabled temporarily when, for testing purposes, it is required that there be no radio interference. Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: turn the 9150 off before changing the radio.

)KJ5J=HJKF This parameter enables ( ) polling immediately when the 9150 is rebooted. If Auto Startup is disabled, the 9150 will wait until polling is initialized from the network controller. 5D=HA@+D=A

Shared Channel is only used in Holland to accommodate government requirements. When enabled ( ), it imposes timing restrictions for polling. Every 2 seconds of polling is followed by 0.5 seconds of silenceno polling occurs. Further, if another carrier is detected on the channel, the 9150 will cease radio trans-

missions on that channel until the path is clear. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 55 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

2EC2HJ?2=H=AJAHI

K>AHB29E@MI This parameter defines the number of poll windows the 9150 will use. The value assigned to this parameter is dependent on the number of terminals and the radio link protocol used. Table 4.2 indicates how the value assigned to the Number of Poll Windows parame-

ter is determined.

K>AHB6AHE=I

EEKB9E@MI 1-16 17-81 82-256 2 3 4 6=>A" K>AHB29E@MI`+AK=H2HJ?

5EAB29E@MI The value assigned to this parameter determines the largest message that can be passed between the 9150 and the terminal in a normal poll window. The window size can be adjusted to accommodate anywhere from 4 to 32 characters. 56 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Larger windows increase the polling period and can increase the response time. Smaller windows increase the number of message and long message polls, and can also increase the response time. Important:

In Cellular mode, the minimum value for this parameter is 8.

=NEKAII=CA5ACAJ5EA This parameter determines the largest single message that can be passed to a terminal in message mode or from a terminal in long message mode. In a 9150 base station, the value entered in this parameter must be greater than or equal to the value entered in the network controller or 9150 mini-controller. The range of this parame-

ter is between 32 and 116 characters. (Longer messages are broken into several packets.) The default value is 100.

K>AHB4AJHEAI This parameter determines how many times the 9150 attempts to resend a message if an acknowledgement is not received from the terminal. (These retries do not necessarily occur in consecutive polls because incomplete messages are returned to the bottom of the message queue.) After all retries have been exhausted, the terminal is declared offline. The 9150 does not transmit any messages to the terminal until the terminal declares itself online. The allowable values range from 1 to 7.

+EIE5EA This parameter reduces the probability that random noise on the radio link will be interpreted as a collision between terminals. Response time increases when the 9150 resolves collisions unnecessarily. Collision Size places an upper limit on the number of characters that are received prior to the receipt of an error message (CRC, CD lost, etc.). If eight is the value of this parameter, eight or less characters followed by an error message appearing over the radio link are considered noise. If there are more than eight characters, it is con-

sidered a collision. Acceptable values range from 3 to 15. HAA9E@M.=?JH The value entered in this parameter determines if free window mode will be used. In free window mode, all terminals transmit in the free poll window instead of the window to which they are normally assigned. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 57 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Entering a value of 0 (zero) in this parameter disables free window mode. Increas-

ing the value of this parameter increases the likelihood of a message being transmit-

ted in the free window.

AII=CA@AEEJ This parameter defines an upper limit to the number of messages that must be queued for transmission before message mode polling starts. Accepted values range from 0 to 7, where 0 disables message mode. Note: The number of terminals and past events are also part of the algorithm that determines whether or not to start message mode.

+=IEC2AHE@

A call sign is periodically transmitted as an audible Morse code signal. This parameter specifies the interval in minutes between call sign transmissions. Acceptable values range from 0 to 60. The federal agencies, Industry Canada and the Federal Communications Commission in the United States, require that each system transmit its own identification call sign every 15 minutes. In countries where a call sign is not required, setting this parameter to 0 prevents the transmission of any call signs, allowing for shorter poll time-outs in terminals and faster channel switching.

+=IEC5JHEC This string can be a maximum of 10 characters long. All characters are either numbers or letters. The prefix DE (from) is added to the beginning of the transmit-

ted call sign. 58 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

4=@E2=H=AJAHI Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters 5O?,A=O Important:

This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. Sync Delay specifies the delay between the time of the base station transmission and the first response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other base stations and terminals in the system. The default setting of 22 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud. 4AJA6N

Remote Txon accommodates the turn on time of the radio in the base station. It specifies the number of fill characters sent to the radio before real data is output. Since this parameter is based on character times, the number is dependent on the radio link baud rate. When the baud rate is changed, this parameter automatically changes to the correct value. The value assigned to the Remote Txon parameter must be consistent across all terminals and base station equipment. Important:

This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without an understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 59 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

4=@E+D=AI

)?JELA+D=A

This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 9150. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to Enabled Channels, below, for details.

-=>A@+D=AI This parameter is used to enable ( ) or disable up to 20 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the TRX7370 radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (Active Channel) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, terminals may roam through all 20 channels. Note that the Enabled Channels menu only displays channels that have been config-

ured with frequencies. See page 62 for the list of associated frequencies.

64:%!%4=@E+=H@2=H=AJAHI Entering the Get Card Parameters dialog box will open the list of General, Fre-

quencies, and Tuning Values parameters for the TRX7370 Narrow Band PC card radio. These manufacturers settings are not configurable. The settings are shown on pages 62 and 63. 60 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 61 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters

/AAH=2=H=AJAHI

.HAGKA?EAI 62 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 6KEC8=KAI Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Hosts

"!0IJI The drop-down menu in this option shows the host names present on the system. Up to six hosts can be supported. A host must be configured for each master network controller, TSDK host, or master base station that communicates with the 9150. Opening the Configure dialog box for a selected host lists the parameters that can be modified or deleted for that host. New hosts can be added by selecting [#]

Create New in the drop-down menu before entering the Configure dialog box. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 63 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Hosts

=A This parameter indicates the assigned host name. The host name also appears on the RF terminal when switching between hosts in a multiple-host environment. Note: The name must not contain space characters.

-=>A@

The Enabled option must be turned on ( ) for terminals to communicate with this host.

-K=JE=@2HJ?

This drop-down menu provides a list of host emulations and communication proto-

cols supported by the 9150. The supported emulations with their respective protocols are:

9010/ TCP/IP (See page 67 for configuration parameters). 9010/ Serial (See pages 68 to 70 for configuration parameters). 3274/Telnet (See pages 84 to 98 for Configuration Parameters). 5250/Telnet (See pages 99 to 112 for Configuration Parameters). ANSI/Telnet (See pages 113 to 121 for Configuration Parameters). When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 protocol (a proprietary protocol developed by Teklogix) with either a TCP/IP or serial connection to com-

municate with a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). This protocol uses TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) or ANSI data streams to communicate with terminals. For detailed information, please refer to the appropriate Teklogix User Manual for: 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, TSDK, TESS or ANSI. When the 9150 acts as a mini-controller, it uses the 3274 and 5250 emulation protocols to communicate with IBM hosts, or the ANSI emulation protocol to com-

municate with ANSI hosts. For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a mini-controller, please refer to Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration. Protocols are the methods by which terminals communicate with host computers over various physical media such as Ethernet, Token Ring, and serial connections, as well as radio-link connections. The 9150 supports the TCP/IP protocol. 64 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Main Host Menu 6AHE=4=CA The values entered in this parameter designate the first and last terminals in the range of terminals that will communicate with the host. These terminal numbers are mapped to this particular host.

""=E0IJAK When you choose an existing host from the Hosts listbox and then select the Config-

ure button, the 9150 displays the Host Menu. ECKHA"#LAHLEAMB0IJAKI.H'6+212 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 65 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration General Host Options The Host Menu has four configuration sub-menus:

General Host Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the General Options page for the host. Emulation Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Emulation Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. Protocol Options (not applicable to 9010/TCP/IP emulation) When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Protocol Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and pro-

tocol selected for the host. Function Key Mappings (3274, 5250, ANSI emulations only) When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Function Key Mapping page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. There is also a Main Menu button. When you select this button, the 9150 displays the Configuration Main Menu (see page 48).

""/AAH=0IJFJEI In this screen, you can select general options for the host connection. The host con-

nection may also be deleted.

=A

This parameter allows you to enter a name for the new host. 66 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / TCP/IP

-K=JE=@2HJ?

This parameter allows you to select the emulation and protocol to be used for the connection to this host. As a base station, the 9150 can use either 9010/ TCP/IP or 9010/SERIAL, depending on the connection to the network controller or host. 6AHE=4=CA

This parameter allows you to specify the range of terminals which will communi-

cate with this host. The left-hand textbox contains the lowest terminal number which is allowed to communicate with the host; the right-hand textbox contains the highest terminal number. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 3840.

"" '6+212

-K=JEFJEI

4ABH=EBHIA@ECEABBEAAII=CAI If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station does not notify the host if the status of a terminal changes between offline and online. If this parameter is disabled, the 9150 does notify the host regarding any terminal status changes. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 67 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial 2HJ?FJEI)@.K?JEAO=FFECI

These parameters are not applicable to the 9010 / TCP/IP emulation.

""!'5AHE=

.ECKHA"$LAHLEAMB0IJAKI.H'5AHE=

68 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

-K=JEFJEI

Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial 4ABH=EBHIA@ECEABBEAAII=CAI If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station does not notify the host if the status of a terminal changes between offline and online. If this parameter is disabled, the 9150 does notify the host regarding any terminal status changes.

2HJ?FJEI5AHE=EA

EA2HJ?

This listbox specifies the serial line protocol used on this host connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 69 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial The three available choices are STX/ETB, LF/CR, and DEL/LF. Each of these three choices specifies the start and end characters that delimit the start and end of data on the serial link to the host. These characters are:

+D=H=?JAH+@A

A=EC 0AN8=KA STX ETB LF CR DEL Start of Text End of Text Block Line Feed Carriage Return Delete 01 17 0A 0D 7F 6=>A"!5AHE=EA2HJ?+D=H=?JAH+@AI Note: For communication to Teklogix handlers or SDKs, always use STX/ETB. LF/CR and DEL/LF are used in third-party handlers. The default setting is STX/ETB. 7IA+O?E?4A@K@=?O+DA?+4+

If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses a CRC checksum on the data sent over the serial line to the host.

2HJ?FJEI'2HJ?

7IA54 If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses NS/NR protocol for this serial host connection. Note: Only use NS/NR with the STX/ETB protocol. Teklogix recommends that this be enabled when possible. K,KFAN@A If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses full-duplex communica-

tion on this serial host connection.

These parameters are not applicable to the 9010/Serial emulation. K?JEAO=FFECI 70 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Base Stations

"#*=IA5J=JEI These options and parameters allow you to configure the 9150 as a master base station connected to up to 32 slave 9150 and 9140 base stations over an Ethernet or Token Ring network. The master 9150 is connected to a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or up to six hosts running TSDK (Teklogix Software Development Kit). From the Base Stations option under Base Station Configuration (see Figure 4.2 on page 48), entering Configure will open the Configure New Base Station page, which will enable you to add a new slave base station to the system or change the parameters on an existing slave base station.

=A The name entered in this parameter is used as an alternate way of identifying the IP address of a slave base station. 12)@@HAII This parameter provides the corresponding IP address for the slave base station. The IP Address must be a unique value so that each slave base station can be iden-

tified on the network. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default value for the IP port is 16100. 2HJ?

IAC/EOR (TCP/IP) is the default protocol for the Ethernet or Token Ring connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 71 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Radio Link Features

AII=CA5EA Message Size determines the largest single message that can be passed to a terminal. The range of this parameter is between 32 and 380 characters. (Longer messages are broken into several packets.) For polling protocol base stations, the upper limit is 116.

)KJ5J=HJKF When this parameter is enabled ( ), the slave base stations will start polling when the master 9150 boots up. When Auto-Startup is disabled, the base stations will not start polling until they receive a start polling command from the host.

"$4=@EE.A=JKHAI From the Radio Link Features option under Base Station Configuration (see Figure 4.2 on page 48), entering Configure will open the Radio Link Features page for the polling and cellular parameters.

FAH=JAE+AK=H @A To operate as a Wlan base station, this parameter should be enabled ( ). For further information see Wlan Protocol on page 8. Note: The 9400 or 9300 Network Controller must also be set to cellular mode. 72 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Radio Link Features 21,

In Wlan protocol, this is a unique identifying number set only in a 9150 master base station, 9150 mini-controller or a network controller, which is used in the poll header when polling terminals. Poll ID is set by Teklogix personnel. In Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol for narrow band radios, Poll ID is used to assign a unique address to each base station. As the terminals move from one base station to another, this address is transmitted by the base stations to the terminals, identifying each 9150 in a multiple base station system. 2EC2HJ?6AHE=6EAKJ

This parameter determines the time in minutes that a terminal can be inactive before the 9150 declares it offline. Before this happens, the terminal will be declared offline by the Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout parameter (see below). After the terminal is removed from the system, it will need to re-initialize in order to communicate with the 9150. This parameter reduces the overhead on the radio link caused when terminals which are not communicating are supported. The allowable values range from 1 to 240. Note: This parameter is not relevant for Wlan. 2AH?AJ2EC2HJ?6AHE=6EAKJ

This parameter determines the time that a terminal is allowed to be inactive before the 9150 declares it offline. This time is expressed as a percentage of the Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout parameter, above. For example, if the Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout is 60, and this parameter is set to 75%, then the timeout would be 60 min x 75% = 45 minutes. An offline terminal is still considered part of the system. Messages to offline terminals are queued at the 9150. The terminal remains offline until it transmits an online message. Values for this parameter range from 50 to 90.

,EHA?J6+2+A?JEIBH6A6AH

Enabling this parameter allows the TekTerm program resident in Teklogix terminals to connect directly to the 9150, when it is acting as a base station to a host via TCP/IP. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 73

11+64-4+.1/74)61 5

. 5.3.1 General Options . 5.3.2 9010 Emulations . 5.3.3 3274/Telnet. 5.1 Overview . 77 5.2 Hosts . 80 5.3 Main Host Menu . 82

. 83

. 84

. 84

. 84

. 95

. 98

. 99

. 99

. 110

. 112

. 113

. 113

. 116

. 121

. 5.3.3.1 Emulation Options. 5.3.3.2 Protocol Options . 5.3.3.3 Function Key Mappings . 5.3.4.1 Emulation Options. 5.3.4.2 Protocol Options . 5.3.4.3 Function Key Mappings . 5.3.5.1 Emulation Options. 5.3.5.2 Protocol Options . 5.3.5.3 Function Key Mappings . 5.3.5 ANSI/Telnet . 5.3.4 5250/Telnet. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 75 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview

#LAHLEAM The network controller in a Teklogix system performs a number of important tasks. One of these tasks is emulation: the translation of data between the protocol of the host computer and the protocol used by Teklogix terminals. The data which is sent from a host computer to a terminal to provide its display, and returned to the host as a result of operations at the terminal, is called a data stream. Host computers can provide data streams of various types to their terminals. Teklogix terminals can directly accept only two types of data stream: TESS and ANSI. TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the proprietary data stream used by Teklogix terminals. ANSI data streams are a standard type of data stream used by wired ANSI terminals. Other types of data stream provided by the host must be converted into TESS or ANSI before Teklogix terminals can work with them. This translation is done by emulation software in a network controller. The 9150 is equipped with emulation capabilities, allowing it to act as a mini-

controller. When a 9150 is configured as a mini-controller, Teklogix terminals can emulate an ANSI, 5250 or 3274 terminal via a 9150 rather than through a 9400/9300 Network Controller. Important:

9150s acting as mini-controllers are designed for small, low-

transaction sites. A 9400/9300 Network Controller is required for systems that support more than 50 terminals. Acting as a mini-controller, the 9150 can support up to 32 additional networked base stations and up to 50 terminals. A 9150 mini-controller can also manage wireless LAN configurations. A 9150 configured as a mini-controller can support the following emulations:

5250 emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN. 3274 emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN. ANSI emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3:

9150 Main Configuration. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 77

Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview

0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

9EHAAII/=JAM=O

'#9EHAAII/=JAM=O

EE+JHAH

&##8ADE?AKJ 4.6AHE=

802.11 / 2.4 G Hz 056 ETHERNET TCP/IP 9 0 2 M H z

%!0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

'#9EHAAII/=JAM=O

*=IA5J=JE=@)??AII2EJ

0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

.ECKHA#'#EE+JHAH+BECKH=JE

78 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview For operation as a mini-controller, the parameters in the Hosts pages under Base Station Configuration should be set appropriately. The Hosts options are found on the Configuration Main Menu page. For information on configuring radio protocol parameters, please refer to Radio Link Features on page 72. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 79 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Hosts

# 0IJI The drop-down menu in this option shows the host names present on the system. Up to six hosts can be supported. A host must be configured for each host that com-

municates with the 9150 mini-controller. Opening the Configure dialog box for a selected host lists the parameters that can be modified or deleted for that host. New hosts can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the drop-down menu before entering the Configure dialog box.

=A This parameter indicates the assigned host name. The host name also appears on the RF terminal when switching between hosts in a multiple-host environment.

-=>A@

The Enabled option must be turned on ( ) for terminals to communicate with this host.

-K=JE=@2HJ?

This drop-down menu provides a list of host emulations and communication proto-

cols supported by the 9150. Working with Teklogix terminals and base stations, the 9150 can emulate IBM 3278-2, 5251-11, and 5555-B01 terminals, as well as ANSI terminals. Protocols are the methods by which terminals communicate with host computers over various physical media such as Ethernet, Token Ring, and serial connections, as well as radio-link connections. The 9150 supports the TCP/IP protocol. 80 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Hosts The supported emulations with their respective protocols are:

9010/ TCP/IP or Serial (See page 84 for Configuration Parameters). 3274/Telnet (See pages 84 to 98 for Configuration Parameters). 5250/Telnet (See pages 99 to 112 for Configuration Parameters). ANSI/Telnet (See pages 113 to 121 for Configuration Parameters). When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 emulation (a proprietary asyn-

chronous protocol developed by Teklogix) to communicate with a 9300 Network Controller or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. When the 9150 acts as a mini-controller, it uses the 3274 and 5250 emulation protocols to communicate with IBM hosts, or the ANSI emulation protocol to com-

municate with ANSI terminals. 6AHE=4=CA The values entered in this parameter designate the first and last terminals in the range of terminals that will communicate with the host. These terminal numbers are mapped to this particular host. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 50. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 81

Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Main Host Menu

#!=E0IJAK When you choose an existing host name from the Hosts listbox and then select the Configure button, the 9150 displays the Host Menu. The Host Menu presents the options for four sub-menus: General Host Options, Emulation Options, Protocol Options, and Function Key Mappings. There is also a Main Menu button. When you select this button, the 9150 displays the Configuration Main Menu page

(see page 79 for an enlarged illustration). ECKHA# LAHLEAMB0IJAKI 82 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration General Options As illustrated in Figure 5.2 on page 82, the four configuration sub-menus display the following options:

General Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the General Options page for the host. Emulation Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Emulation Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and proto-

col selected for the host. Protocol Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Protocol Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and proto-

col selected for the host. Function Key Mappings When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Function Key Mappings page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. Note: The Function Key Mappings parameters are not applicable to either of the 9010 emulations; the Protocol Options parameters do not apply to the 9010/TCP/IP emulation.

#!/AAH=FJEI In this page, you can select general options for this host connection. The host con-

nection may also be deleted. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 83 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 9010 Emulations Emulation Options

=A

This parameter allows you to enter a name for the new host.

-K=JE=@2HJ?

This parameter allows you to select the emulation and protocol to be used for the connection to this host. Available combinations of emulation and protocol are:

3274/Telnet, 5250/Telnet, ANSI/Telnet. 6AHE=4=CA

This parameter allows you to specify the range of terminals which will communi-

cate with this host. The left-hand textbox contains the lowest terminal number which is allowed to communicate with the host; the right-hand textbox contains the highest terminal number. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 50.

#! '-K=JEI When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 protocol (a proprietary asyn-

chronous protocol developed by Teklogix) to communicate with a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration.

#!!! %"6AAJ

The 9150 mini-controller displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the 3274/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection.

-K=JEFJEI With IBM 3274, or IBM 5250 emulation, the 9150 mini-controller converts the application data stream from the host to TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) commands. Some of the parameters in this page govern the conversion of the host screens to TESS. 84 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 85 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options 1I0IJ.KEJIK

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller sends its data in Fujitsu format. Enabling this parameter causes the standard IBM formatting codes (for start of field, setting buffers, etc.) to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers. 7IA1JAH=JE=-*+,1+

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller uses the International EBCDIC character set, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters.

)=H

When this parameter is enabled, terminals beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen in the location specified by the Command Region parame-

ter (see page 95). The word ALARM should be a display-only field. Note: The Command Region parameter must be enabled for this parameter to work.

+A=H

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller creates an empty entry field for an entry field that is filled with spaces. Some host applications rely on the video attributes of displayed characters to high-

light fields, particularly entry fields. For example, the application screen may define all entry fields with reverse video and fill the field with spaces. This is effective on terminals that support reverse video, but on terminals that do not, it can make the field invisible since it is made up entirely of spaces. By default, all empty entry fields displayed at the Teklogix terminal are highlighted by the entry character chosen in the terminals configuration (not all Teklogix ter-

minals support video attributes). Note: This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent to the host remains unaffected. 2=IIJDHK

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to send data directly to the RF terminals serial port. This is most commonly used for printing. 86 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options 2HAF=HEC0IJ5?HAAIBH2=II6DHKCD On the screen to be sent through the terminal serial port, the word PASSTHRU (in capital letters) must appear on the first line, starting on the second column. The actual data to be sent to the terminal may start anywhere below the first line. With 5250 or 3274 emulations, attributes occupy a position in the screen buffer. An attribute placed between column 2 and the end of the word PASSTHRU will push all following characters one position to the right. Therefore, any required attributes should occupy column 1 of the first line (just preceding the word PASSTHRU).

-N=FA

column: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 line 1: @ P A S S T H R U @

line 2: @ P A R T : 1 2 3 4 5 where @ is an attribute. When the 9150 is finished sending the data to the terminals printer, it will send an ENTER key to the host. The host must wait for the ENTER key before sending any more screens (including other PASSTHRU screens) to this terminal. Note: Refer to the Terminals User Manual for information about setting parameters on the terminal for pass-through. 2H?A@KHAI

If this parameter is enabled, the host may send TESS procedures through the 9150 to the terminals. A TESS procedure is a group of TESS commands that can be exe-

cuted by the TESS execute procedure command.

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to provide pages to be loaded as local TESS procedures in the terminals. The local procedures are selected from a menu at the terminal. The terminals can perform these procedures when they are offline. Later when the terminals are online, they send the results of these functions to the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 87 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Note: The Procedures parameter must also be enabled for Local to work. 0IJ2HEJ

When this parameter is enabled, the host can send extra data to the terminals screens, and instruct the terminal to print it. This is in contrast to the Local Print fea-

ture, where the terminal makes the initial print request. The text that is passed to the printer is formatted into the 24 x 80 application screen. If the host can initiate the print operation, the text is printed. The 9150 identifies the additional text as a print page by the presence of the word PRINT (in capital let-

ters) beginning in the 2nd column of line 13 on the 24 x 80 screen. The word PRINT should be defined as display-only text. The print page is positioned below the terminals display page (see the following figure). The size of the print page is always the same as the terminals display page

(assuming that in the terminals configuration, the page length is less than 12 lines). When Host Print is enabled, the 9150 passes the print page to the terminal after receiving the application screen from the host. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Display Page (8 x 40) PRINT Print Page (8 x 40)

.ECKHA#!)FFE?=JE5?HAA9EJD2HEJ2=CA 88 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Notes:

1. Unlike the Passthru option, when using Host Print no escape commands can be sent to the printer. 2. Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal in its Printer command under the TESS Features menu; refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. 4AJA2HEJ When this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the print page to a terminal when-

ever the terminal requests it (by sending the F17 function key from the terminal, or the PRINT key on older terminals). The 9150 sends the function response back to the host. This is in contrast to Host Print, where the host makes the initial print request. Note:

Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal. Refer to the Terminals User Manual or the Parameter Guide for more information. 2=CAI

This parameter determines the number of host screens (or pages) stored at the terminal, to a maximum of 16. The 9150 reduces data transmitted to the terminals by using the terminals capability to store a page of data for each screen it displays. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If a similar page is already in the terminals memory, the 9150 instructs the terminal to redisplay its copy of the page; only the necessary changes are sent from the controller. If no match is found, the complete page is sent to the terminal over the radio link. Note: There is a corresponding parameter on the terminal itself, and the actual number of saved pages will be the smaller of the two values. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 89 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options 6H=IEJEA

When this feature is enabled, all modified data at the terminal is automatically transmitted when the operator enters data into a transmit-upon-entry field. The value in this textbox specifies the line on the screen which is designated the transmit line. The last entry field above or on the transmit line on the screen will be identified as the transmit-upon-entry field. If any entry fields exist on lines below the transmit line, no entry field will be designated as the transmit-upon-entry field. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. A value of 24 designates the last entry field on each application screen as transmit-upon-entry.

)1)/

This parameter provides auto-locate and fill for input coming from bar code readers. When bar code data is entered at a terminal, the terminal searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data. The data preloaded into the AIAG field by the application program determines whether or not the bar code data is accepted. At the 9150 mini-controller, a decimal value of an ASCII character from 0 to 127 is set to match the AIAG Field Identifier set at the host. A value of 0 disables this feature. The format of the preloaded data is as follows:

<mode> <AIAG prefix(data)>

The mode character used with the command allows for different operating modes to suit various application operations. The automatic locate and fill operation applies only to data received from a bar code reader. Descriptions of the modes and AIAG prefix are listed in Table 5.1 on page 91. These modes are set at the host. 90 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options

@A

.K?JE

Display prefix, send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, send prefix to host. Display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Add 4 to above values to cause transmit to host when all AIAG fields with 4 set are filled. Function 0 is pressed if there are any fields with this bit set, and all fields with this bit set have been filled by operator input. Add 8 to above values to allow overwrite of previously entered data. Add 16 to above values to indicate cursor position priority for search and fill.

)1)/2HABEN

@=J=

The text to be matched in the AIAG field. 6=>A#@A.K?JEI)@)1)/2HABEN,AI?HEFJE

-N=FA

The information in the sample screen below is defined at and sent from the host. It includes the AIAG Identifier the tag identifying this as an AIAG field followed by the mode, in this case Mode 0, and finally, the AIAG Prefix I.

)1)/1BH=JE.H0IJ AIAG Field Identifier AIAG Prefix (data) Item No. @ 0 I Mode

.ECKHA#")1)/.EA@5AJ.H6DA0IJ Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 91 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options When the information arrives at the terminal screen, the appropriate AIAG field for the scanned information is located using the AIAG Identifier. Because Mode 0 was set at the host, the AIAG Prefix I is displayed on the terminal screen, and when this screen is completed, the prefix will be sent back to the host.

)1)/1BH=JE.H0IJ66AHE=5?HAA

AIAG Field Identifier Item No.

I AIAG Prefix (data)

.ECKHA##)1)/.EA@5AJ66DA6AHE=

8EIE>A=J?D+D=H=?JAH By inserting a special ASCII character directly before an entry field, the application program distinguishes a match field from an entry field. For example, suppose an angle bracket > is defined for visible match fields. Inserting > immediately preceding the entry field identifies it as a match field, as illustrated below. Part #> ___________ The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. To use the Visible Match feature, the host computer preloads data into a match entry field; the data is visible on the terminal screen. The preloaded data sent to a terminal can consist of exact characters, special match characters or a combination of the two. Refer to Table 5.2 on page 93 for match characters recognized by Teklogix terminals. If an entry does not match the preloaded data, the entry is displayed, the terminal beeps, and the cursor moves to the first position in the match field. The operator can either make another entry in the match field, or move the cursor to a new field. 92 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options When an entry (even one that doesnt match the preloaded data) is made in a match field, the entry is sent to the host as part of the terminals modified data during the next transmission.

+D=H=?JAH

,AI?HEFJE

Match a number. Match a letter (either case). Match an uppercase letter. Match a lowercase letter. Match an alphanumeric character. Match a letter, number or space. Match a punctuation character. Match any character. Match all character positions in the field with the preceding character. Match any remaining characters, but not necessarily the remainder of the field, with the preceding character. 6=>A# =J?D+D=H=?JAHI

-N=FA

Suppose you want to preload an entry field with a part number. If the part number is known, you can preload the field with that part number. If more flexibility is needed, and the part number always begins with two alphabetic characters followed by a hyphen and four digits, the match string for the field would be: &&#### . 0E@@A=J?D+D=H=?JAH Unlike data in a visible match field, the preloaded data in a hidden match field is not displayed at the terminal. Note: Refer to Visible Match Character on page 92 for detailed information about field matching. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 93 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options 5AHE=1

Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by pre-

ceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field, the data will be sent to the terminals serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the field accepts data from the terminals serial port. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. 2HEJEA

This parameter allows you to enter the starting line number of the print page in the application screen. A value of 1 causes the display page to be printed; a value of 0

(zero) disables this feature. 2HEJ.HACJD This parameter sets the printers form length in lines. The range is 0 to 24.

*=H?@A

Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader. The application program distinguishes an entry field as barcode-input-

only by preceding the field with a special character. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature.

-JHOEA

This parameter contains the number of the first line displayed if there is no entry field in the upper-left portion of the screen, and if an entry field is at or below this line. The Entry Line parameter allows an automatic offset within the host screen, so that the area displayed by the terminal includes an entry field that would normally be out of bounds. Normally, Teklogix terminals only display the upper-left corner of the application screen because of their smaller display size. 94 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options

.EA@LAHDA=@

This parameter contains the maximum number of characters allowed between two fixed fields which still allows the 9150 to join them into one field. Sometimes the 9150 will join two adjacent fixed fields and then send them as one field. This reduces the overhead on the radio link. For example, if two fields were 4 characters apart and this parameter was 5, then these fields would be joined into one.

+=@4ACE

This parameter defines a region of the host screen which the 9150 will examine for the presence of reserved commands. The four numbers in the Command Region textboxes represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region. The first textbox of each pair contains the row number; the second contains the column number. The range of row values is 0 to 24; column values are 0 to 80. To define the last two lines of the host screen as the command region, for example, enter the values 23, 1 and 24, 80. Currently, the only command supported is ALARM (refer to page 86 for details on this command). When the word ALARM is placed anywhere within the command region, the 9150 will send a TESS beep command to the terminal. 2HJ?FJEI

This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of 3274/Telnet for this host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 95 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options 6AHE=6OFA

This parameter allows you to choose the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150 for this host. At present there is only one choice of terminal for 3274/Telnet:

the IBM 3278-2. 0IJ2HJ

This parameter allows you to enter a host port value for the selected 3274/Telnet host connection. The default value is 23.

=NEK5AIIEIFAH6AHE=

This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. 96 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options

.EHIJ?=6AHE=2HJ

This parameter contains the port number from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. The default value is 0.

?=12)@@HAIIJ*E@

This parameter contains the IP address of the network adaptor in the 9150 from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. EHIJ6AHE=EIJA2HJ

This parameter specifies the first port number at which the 9150 will listen for telnet connection requests to the terminals. The default value is 10000.

)?JELAOACJE=JAMEJD0IJ

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 negotiates with the host during setup of the telnet connection. 5A@1)+1JAHHKFJ2H?AII=I=5OIJA4AGKAIJ

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the IAC Interrupt Process request to the host as a 3274 System Request. 5A@1)+*HA==I=)JJAJEAO

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the IAC Break request to the host as a 3274 Attention key. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 97 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Function Key Mappings

.K?JEAO=FFECI

This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page when you select 3274 emulation for this host. K?JEAO

The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on this page. 98 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options

#!"# #6AAJ

-K=JEFJEI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 99 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The 9150 displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the 5250/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. With IBM 5250, or IBM 3274 emulation, the 9150 mini-controller converts the application data stream from the host to TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) commands. Some of the parameters in this page govern the conversion of the host screens to TESS. 9HEJA-HHH+@A

If advisory text is selected here, the 9150 sends error codes to the terminal screen as advisory text, which is written at the bottom of the screen. If screen text is chosen, the 9150 sends the error codes as regular screen text. 7IA1JAH=JE=-*+,1+

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 will swap the positions of the ! and ] charac-

ters in the EBCDIC character table.

)=H

If this parameter is enabled, terminals will beep when the word ALARM

(in capital letters) appears on the application screen, in the location specified by the Command Region parameter (see page 109). The word ALARM should be a display-only field. Note: The Command Region parameter must be enabled for this parameter to work.

+A=H

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller creates an empty entry field for an entry field that is filled with spaces. Some host applications rely on the video attributes of displayed characters to high-

light fields, particularly entry fields. For example, the application screen may define all entry fields with reverse video and fill the field with spaces. This is effective on terminals that support reverse video, but on terminals that do not, it can make the field invisible since it is made up entirely of spaces. 100 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options By default, all empty entry fields displayed at the Teklogix terminal are highlighted by the entry character chosen in the terminals configuration (not all Teklogix ter-

minals support video attributes). The Clear feature creates an empty entry field in place of an entry field filled with spaces. Note: This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent to the host remains unaffected. 2=IIJDHK

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to send data directly to the RF terminals serial port. This is most commonly used for printing. 2HAF=HEC0IJ5?HAAIBH2=II6DHKCD On the screen to be sent through the terminal serial port, the word PASSTHRU

(in capital letters) must appear on the first line, starting on the second column. The actual data to be sent to the terminal may start anywhere below the first line. With 5250 or 3274 emulations, attributes occupy a position in the screen buffer. An attribute placed between column 2 and the end of the word PASSTHRU will push all following characters one position to the right. Therefore, any required attributes should occupy column 1 of the first line (just preceding the word PASSTHRU).

-N=FA

column: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 line 1: @ P A S S T H R U @

line 2: @ P A R T : 1 2 3 4 5 where @ is an attribute. When the 9150 is finished sending the data to the terminals printer, it will send an ENTER key to the host. The host must wait for the ENTER key before sending any more screens (including other PASSTHRU screens) to this terminal. Note: Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for information about setting parameters on the terminal for pass-through. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 101 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options 2H?A@KHAI

If this parameter is enabled, the host may send TESS procedures through the 9150 to the terminals. A TESS procedure is a group of TESS commands that can be exe-

cuted by the TESS execute procedure command.

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to provide pages to be loaded as local TESS procedures in the terminals. The local procedures are selected from a menu at the terminal. The terminals can perform these procedures when they are offline. Later when the terminals are online, they send the results of these functions to the host. Note: The Procedures parameter must also be enabled for Local to work. 0IJ2HEJ

When this parameter is enabled, the host can send extra data to the terminals screens, and instruct the terminal to print it. This is in contrast to the Local Print fea-

ture, where the terminal makes the initial print request. The text that is passed to the printer is formatted into the 24 x 80 application screen. If the host can initiate the print operation, the text is printed. The 9150 identifies the additional text as a print page by the presence of the word PRINT (in capital let-

ters) beginning in the 2nd column of line 13 on the 24 x 80 screen. The word PRINT should be defined as display-only text. The print page is positioned below the terminals display page (see Figure 5.6 on page 103). The size of the print page is always the same as the terminals display page (assuming that in the terminals configuration, the page length is less than 12 lines). When Host Print is enabled, the 9150 passes the print page to the terminal after receiving the application screen from the host. 102 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Notes:

Display Page (8 x 40) PRINT Print Page (8 x 40)

.ECKHA#$)FFE?=JE5?HAA9EJD2HEJ2=CA 1. Unlike the Passthru option, when using Host Print no escape com-

mands can be sent to the printer. 2. Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal in its Printer command under the TESS Features menu; refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. 4AJA2HEJ

When this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the print page to a terminal when-

ever the terminal requests it (by sending the F17 function key from the terminal, or the PRINT key on older terminals). The 9150 sends the function response back to the host. This is in contrast to Host Print, where the host makes the initial print request. Note:

Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal level. Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 103 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options 2=CAI

This parameter determines the number of host screens (or pages) stored at the terminal, to a maximum of 16. The 9150 reduces data transmitted to the terminals by using the terminals capability to store a page of data for each screen it displays. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If a similar page is already in the terminals memory, the 9150 instructs the terminal to re-display its copy of the page; only the necessary changes are sent from the con-

troller. If no match is found, the complete page is sent to the terminal over the radio link. Note: There is a corresponding parameter on the terminal itself, and the actual number of saved pages will be the smaller of the two values. 6H=IEJEA

When this feature is enabled, all modified data at the terminal will be automatically transmitted when the operator enters data into a transmit-upon-entry field. The value in this textbox specifies the line on the screen which is designated the transmit line. The last entry field above or on the transmit line on the screen will be identified as the transmit-upon-entry field. If any entry fields exist on lines below the transmit line, no entry field will be designated as the transmit-upon-entry field. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. A value of 24 will cause the last entry field on each application screen to be defined as transmit-upon-entry.

)1)/

This parameter provides auto-locate and fill for input coming from bar code readers. When bar code data is entered at a terminal, the terminal searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data. The data preloaded into the AIAG field by the application program determines whether or not the bar code data is accepted. At the 9150 mini-controller, a decimal value of an ASCII character from 0 to 127 is set to match the AIAG Field Identifier set at the host. A value of 0 disables this feature. 104 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The format of the preloaded data is as follows:

<mode> <AIAG prefix(data)>

The mode character used with the command allows for different operating modes to suit various application operations. The automatic locate and fill operation applies only to data received from a bar code reader. Descriptions of the modes and AIAG prefix are listed in the table below. These modes are set at the host.

@A

.K?JE

Display prefix, send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, send prefix to host. Display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Add 4 to above values to cause transmit to host when all AIAG fields with 4 set are filled. Function 0 is pressed if there are any fields with this bit set, and all fields with this bit set have been filled by operator input. Add 8 to above values to allow overwrite of previously entered data. Add 16 to above values to indicate cursor position priority for search and fill.

)1)/2HABEN

@=J=

The text to be matched in the AIAG field. 6=>A#!@A.K?JEI)@)1)/2HABEN,AI?HEFJE

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 105 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options

-N=FA

The information in the sample screen below is defined at and sent from the host. It includes the AIAG Identifier the tag identifying this as an AIAG field followed by the mode, in this case Mode 0, and finally, the AIAG Prefix I.

)1)/1BH=JE.H0IJ AIAG Field Identifier AIAG Prefix (data) Item No. @ 0 I Mode

.ECKHA#%)1)/.EA@5AJ.H6DA0IJ When the information arrives at the terminal screen, the appropriate AIAG field for the scanned information is located using the AIAG Identifier. Because Mode 0 was set at the host, the AIAG Prefix I is displayed on the terminal screen, and when this screen is completed, the prefix will be sent back to the host.

)1)/1BH=JE.H0IJ66AHE=5?HAA

AIAG Field Identifier Item No.

I AIAG Prefix (data)

.ECKHA#&)1)/.EA@5AJ66DA6AHE=

8EIE>A=J?D+D=H=?JAH

By inserting a special ASCII character directly before an entry field, the application program distinguishes a match field from an entry field. For example, suppose an angle bracket > is defined for visible match fields. Inserting > immediately preceding the entry field identifies it as a match field, as illustrated below. Part #> ___________ 106 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. To use the Visible Match feature, the host computer preloads data into a match entry field; the data is visible on the terminal screen. The preloaded data sent to a terminal can consist of exact characters, special match characters or a combination of the two. Refer to the table below for match characters recognized by Teklogix terminals. If an entry does not match the preloaded data, the entry is displayed, the terminal beeps, and the cursor moves to the first position in the match field. The operator can either make another entry in the match field, or move the cursor to a new field. When an entry (even one that doesnt match the preloaded data) is made in a match field, the entry is sent to the host as part of the terminals modified data during the next transmission.

+D=H=?JAH

,AI?HEFJE

Match a number. Match a letter (either case). Match an uppercase letter. Match a lowercase letter. Match an alphanumeric character. Match a letter, number or space. Match a punctuation character. Match any character. Match all character positions in the field with the preceding character. Match any remaining characters, but not necessarily the remainder of the field, with the preceding character. 6=>A#"=J?D+D=H=?JAHI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 107 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options

-N=FA

Suppose you want to preload an entry field with a part number. If the part number is known, you can preload the field with that part number. If more flexibility is needed, and the part number always begins with two alphabetic characters followed by a hyphen and four digits, the match string for the field would be: &&#### . 0E@@A=J?D+D=H=?JAH

Unlike data in a visible match field, the preloaded data in a hidden match field is not displayed at the terminal. Note: Refer to Visible Match Character on page 106 for detailed information about field matching. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. 5AHE=1

Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by pre-

ceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field, the data will be sent to the terminals serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the field accepts data from the terminals serial port. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. 2HEJEA

This parameter allows you to enter the starting line number of the print page in the application screen. A value of 1 causes the display page to be printed; a value of 0

(zero) disables this feature. 2HEJ.HACJD This parameter sets the printers form length in lines. The range is 0 to 24. 108 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options

*=H?@A

Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader. The application program distinguishes an entry field as barcode-input-

only by preceding the field with a special character. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature.

-JHOEA

This parameter contains the number of the first line displayed if there is no entry field in the upper-left portion of the screen, and if an entry field is at or below this line. The Entry Line parameter allows an automatic offset within the host screen, so that the area displayed by the terminal includes an entry field that would normally be out of bounds. Normally, Teklogix terminals only display the upper-left corner of the application screen because of their smaller display size. EA@LAHDA=@

This parameter contains the maximum number of characters allowed between two fixed fields which still allows the 9150 to join them into one field. Sometimes the 9150 will join two adjacent fixed fields and then send them as one field. This reduces the overhead on the radio link. For example, if two fields were 4 characters apart and this parameter was 5, then these fields would be joined into one.

+=@4ACE

This parameter defines a region of the host screen which the 9150 will examine for the presence of reserved commands. The four numbers in the Command Region textboxes represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region. The first textbox of each pair contains the row number; the second contains the column number. The range of row values is 0 to 24; column values are 0 to 80. To define the last two lines of the host screen as the command region, for example, enter the values 23, 1 and 24, 80. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 109 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Protocol Options Currently, the only command supported is ALARM (refer to page 100 for details on this command). When the word ALARM is placed anywhere within the command region, the 9150 will send a TESS beep command to the terminal. 2HJ?FJEI

This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of 5250/Telnet for this host. 6AHE=6OFA

This parameter allows you to choose the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150 for this host. At present there are two choices of terminal for 5250/Telnet:

the IBM 5251-11 and IBM 5555-B01. 0IJ2HJ

This parameter allows you to enter a host port value for the selected 5250/Telnet host connection. The default value is 23. 110 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Protocol Options

=NEK5AIIEIFAH6AHE=

This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. EHIJ?=6AHE=2HJ

This parameter contains the port number from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. The default value is 0.

?=12)@@HAIIJ*E@

This parameter contains the IP address of the network adaptor from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. EHIJ6AHE=EIJA2HJ

This parameter specifies the first port number at which the 9150 will listen for telnet connection requests to the terminals. The default value is 0.

)?JELAOACJE=JAMEJD0IJ

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 negotiates with the host during setup of the telnet connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 111 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Function Key Mappings

.K?JEAO=FFECI

This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page when you select 5250 emulation for this host. K?JEAO

The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on this page. 112 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options

#!#)516AAJ

The 9150 displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the ANSI/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection.

-K=JEFJEI 0IJ6EAKJ

The Host Timeout is the interval (in ticks, or 60ths of a second) between bursts of data received from the host. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 15. If the 9150 does not receive any characters from the host after this timeout has elapsed, it assumes that the host has finished sending data and is waiting for user input (in other words, it assumes that a screen of data has been completed). Important:

The Page parameter (page 115) must be enabled in order to change the value in the Host Timeout parameter. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 113 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options

-I?=FA6EAKJ

The Escape Timeout is the length of time (in ticks, or 60ths of a second) that the 9150 will hold an ESC received from the host, and consider the next received byte to be part of an escape sequence. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 12. When this timeout has elapsed, the host will have to send another ESC character to start an escape sequence. Note: This is especially important when an ESC is at the end of a data packet. 6DHAID@

The Threshold is the minimum number of bytes of update data for the terminal screen which must be received from the host before the 9150 will store the screen as a new saved page. The range is 0 to 999, with a default value of 200. Important:

The Page parameter (page 115) must be enabled in order to change the value in the Threshold parameter.

-?D

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses Smart Echo. This mode reduces the amount of data sent to the terminal by decreasing the number of radio transmissions. Ordinarily, when a character mode application is being used, each keystroke is sent to the host in one transmission, and the character is echoed by the host in another transmission. When Smart Echo is enabled, the 9150 will not send the host echo to the terminals if it matches the data sent from the terminal. Thus, the number of radio transmissions is reduced. This mode also reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host. The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25. Any additional characters will be sent to the host but not displayed. Notes:

1. This parameter also determines whether an ANSI parameter query is sent to the terminal. 2. Smart Echo also needs to be enabled at the terminal (refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual). 114 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options

)51

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses ANSI escape code filtering. When escape-code filtering is enabled, ANSI escape codes not supported by the terminals will be filtered out of the data stream to reduce radio traffic. The terminals currently support most, if not all, standard ANSI escape sequences, so this parame-

ter should be disabled in most cases. K?JEAO4A=FFEC

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 remaps the function keys for this host connection as defined in the Function Key Remapping page (page 121). 2=CA

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses page saving, reducing data transmitted to the terminals. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If the page is already in the terminal, the 9150 instructs the terminal to redisplay its stored copy of the page; no data need be sent across the radio link for that page. If the 9150 finds no match for the page, the complete page is sent to the terminal. Note: When page saving is enabled, the number of saved pages is that which is set on the terminal. Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for details. 4-

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses run-length encoding (RLE) on the data it sends across the radio link. RLE compresses repeated characters going from the host to the terminal. If repeated characters are found in the data stream, the first one is sent, followed by a short escape sequence (3 or 4 characters) which tells the terminal how many times to repeat this character. In this way RLE compresses the data and decreases the total amount of radio-link traffic.

+LAHJ%J&*EJI

If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 converts 7-bit control sequences to their 8-bit equivalents in ANSI data streams going to the terminals. This replaces two-charac-

ter escape sequences with a single equivalent character, compressing the data. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 115 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options

This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of ANSI/Telnet for this host. 2HJ?FJEI 116 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options 6AHE=6OFA

This parameter specifies the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150, either a VT100 or VT200. 0IJ2HJ

This parameter specifies the value for the host port for the selected ANSI host con-

nection. The default value is 23.

=NEK5AIIEIFAH6AHE=

This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. EHIJ?=6AHE=2HJ

This parameter specifies the port number from which the 9150 attempts a telnet con-

nection for the first terminal. The default value is 0. Additional telnet sessions are assigned higher port numbers.

?=12)@@HAIIJ*E@

This parameter specifies the IP address of the 9150 interface that connects to this host. It is used along with the local port numbers to create a unique socket for each terminal session. EHIJ6AHE=EIJA2HJ

This parameter specifies the lowest port number at which the 9150 listens for telnet connections initiated by the host. The default value is 10000. 6+25AIIE4AGKAIJAO

This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to request a new ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 1. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 117 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options 5AIIE+O?AAO

This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to display the next ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 2.

=IJ)?JELA5AIIEAO

This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to display the last ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 5.

)KJJAAJCE-=>A

This parameter enables you to disable or enable automatic connection of telnet ses-

sions from terminals to this host. The choices provided are: Disable; Enable Auto-

telnet; Enable Auto-telnet/login. The default value is Disable. When Auto-telnet is disabled, telnet sessions from the terminals to the host must be initiated manually from the terminals. When Auto-telnet is enabled, the 9150 initiates one telnet session from each termi-

nal whose terminal number is mapped to this host. Additional telnet sessions may be initiated from each terminal to the host, but they must be initiated manually. Note: Auto-telnet sessions are only initiated for terminals which are online

(turned on and operating properly on the Teklogix RF network). When Auto-telnet and Auto-login are enabled, the 9150 initiates one telnet session from each terminal whose terminal number is mapped to this host. It then logs each session in to the host using the User ID and Password provided in this page. Note: The User ID and Password is identical for all Auto-telnet sessions automatically logged in to this host. 118 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options

)KJJAAJ0IJ

This parameter contains the host name or IP address for the host to which the 9150 connects Auto-telnet sessions. Note: A host name placed in this textbox must be resolvable by the 9150:

the 9150 must be able to obtain an IP address for it. For example, the host name may correspond to an entry in the 9150s host table, or the 9150 may be able to query a domain-name server. Any host name which can be used at the terminals TCP> prompt may be used here.

)KJJAAJ6AHE=2HFJ

This parameter contains the text presented to the user to request a login. The charac-

ters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 32 characters. The default is no text, just press <ENTER> to login.

)KJCE7IAH1,

This parameter contains the user ID presented by the 9150 to the host for the Auto-login sessions. The characters can be any ASCII string acceptable to the host, with a maximum of 15 characters.

)KJCE2=IIMH@

This parameter contains the password presented by the 9150 to the host for the Auto-login sessions. The characters can be any ASCII string acceptable to the host, with a maximum of 15 characters.

)KJCE7IAH1,FHFJ

The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent its request for a user name, and it sends the user ID specified in the Auto-Login User ID parameter to the host. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is gin: . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the user-ID prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 119 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options

)KJCE2=IIMH@FHFJ

The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent its request for a pass-

word, and it sends the password specified in the Auto-Login Password parameter to the host. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is word: . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the password prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen.

)KJCEB=EA@CE

The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent a string informing the terminal of a failed login attempt. The 9150 then presents the Auto-telnet Terminal Prompt on the terminals screen to request the user to login manually. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is incorrect . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the failed-login prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen. 120 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Function Key Mappings

.K?JEAO=FFECI

This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page after you have selected the ANSI/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 121 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Function Key Mappings

.K?JEAO

The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on the screen on page 121. 122 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

)++-55216+.1/74)61 6 6.2.1 IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) . 6.2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) . 6.1 Overview . 125 6.2 Interfaces . 126

. 126

. 128 6.3 MAC Bridge Parameters . 129

. 131

. 132

. 133

. 136

. 137

. 138

. 139 6.4 Mobility Configuration . 140

. 142 6.3.1 General Configuration . 6.3.2 Address Filters: MAC Address . 6.3.3 Protocol Filters . 6.3.3.1 Ethernet II Filters . 6.3.3.2 LLC Filters . 6.3.3.3 SNAP Filters . 6.3.3.4 Storm Detection . 6.4.1 IAPP Parameters . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 123 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Overview

$LAHLEAM The 9150 can operate as an access point device between IEEE 802.11 wireless and wired networks. Using IEEE 802.11 protocol, the 9150 provides a transparent bridge between Teklogix or client terminals and a network controller or host. For an overview of IEEE 802.11, please refer to IEEE 802.11 Protocol on page 10. For operation as an access point, the parameters in the following pages must be set appropriately. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration.

9EHAAII/=JAM=O ETHERNET TCP/IP

0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

0=@0A@

4.6AHE=

AJMH+JHAH

.ECKHA$'#)??AII2EJ+BECKH=JE

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 125 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Interfaces

$ 1JAHB=?AI The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option indicates which interfaces have been detected in use by the 9150, including one of two 802.11 PCMCIA radios:

IEEE 802.11 FH: Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz. IEEE 802.11 DS: Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz. Selecting a radio type from the drop-down list and entering Configure will open the radio parameters page for that radio.

$ 1---& .HAGKA?O0FFEC4=@E2=H=AJAHI

When the Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz PCMCIA card is installed in the 9150, the following radio parameters page is opened:

126 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) 2DOIE?=)@@HAII This parameter shows the hardware address (MAC address) of the radio card. A globally unique MAC address is assigned to each card by the card manufacturer. The value cannot be changed. 4ACK=JHO,=E

The regulatory domain value identifies the regulatory bodys country code for the RF regulations with which the radio complies. For the USA, the regulatory body is the FCC, for Canada it's Industry Canada, and for Europe it's ETSI. The hex value in brackets beside the name is the code (as specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard) for that domain. The country codes that are decoded into a name are listed below. For other country codes the name portion will be replaced with "Unknown". 4ACK=JHO*@O

,=E+@A

+KJHO FCC-USA Industry Canada ETSI-Europe Spain France MKK-Japan 0x10 0x20 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x40 USA (for DS radios this is also the code used for Canada) Canada (currently only for FH radios, this may change in the future) Most of Europe Spain France Japan

-551, This is the Extended Service Set Identifier parameter. The ESSID is an alphanumeric character string of up to 32 characters and is case-sensitive. If your network includes devices that use the DOS ODI Driver, select alphabetical charac-

ters in uppercase only to allow the DOS ODI devices to connect to the network as well. The ESSID should be the same for all devices in a system. 0FFEC2=JJAH

The combined settings for the Hopping Pattern and Hopping Set parameters deter-

mine the operating channel for a radio using frequency hopping. Please refer to your network administrator for details. 0FFEC5AJ The combined settings for the Hopping Set and Hopping Pattern parameters deter-

mine the operating channel for a radio using frequency hopping. Please refer to your system administrator for details. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 127 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters)

$  1---& ,EHA?J5AGKA?A4=@E2=H=AJAHI

When the Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz PCMCIA card is installed in the 9150, the following radio parameters page is opened:

2DOIE?=)@@HAII This parameter shows the hardware address (MAC address) of the radio card. A globally unique MAC address is assigned to each card by the card manufacturer. The value cannot be changed. 4ACK=JHO,=E

The regulatory domain value identifies the regulatory bodys country code for the RF regulations with which the radio complies. For the USA, the regulatory body is the FCC, for Canada it's Industry Canada, and for Europe it's ETSI. The hex value in brackets beside the name is the code (as specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard) for that domain. The country codes that are decoded into a name are listed on page 127. For other country codes the name portion will be replaced with "Unknown".

-551, This is the Extended Service Set Identifier parameter. The ESSID is an alphanumeric character string of up to 32 characters and is case-sensitive. If your network includes devices that use the DOS ODI Driver, select alphabetical charac-

ters in uppercase only to allow the DOS ODI devices to connect to the network as well. The ESSID should be the same for all devices in a system.

+D=A

This parameter sets the operating channel for this radio, as determined by the system administrator. For a listing of the allowable channels for each country, please see PC Card Radios on page 145. 128 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration MAC Bridge Parameters

$!)+*HE@CA2=H=AJAHI The MAC Bridge parameters consist of protocol filters which direct the 9150 to forward or discard frames that contain a known protocol type. This enables the 9150 to be selective of what type of frames will be bridged over the radio, in order to limit the amount of data on busy networks. Filtering frames is based on the protocol infor-

mation in the frame. This is discussed in detail in Protocol Filters on page 133. The MAC Bridge Parameters page is entered from the Access Point Configuration menu on the first page. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 129 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration MAC Bridge Parameters Figure 6.2 below charts the pages for the MAC bridge filters. Entering OK or Cancel in the individual Filter pages will return you to the Bridge Parameters page. ECKHA$ LAHLEAMB)+*HE@CA+BECKH=JEAKI 130 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

$!/AAH=+BECKH=JE

Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration General Configuration

)@@HAII.EJAHI-=>A@

The checkbox in this parameter enables or disables the Address Filters function. If filtering is enabled ( ), the 9150 can filter out frames based on destination MAC addresses. The list of MAC addresses for filtering is set by the Address Filters option on page 132. Frames are filtered and either forwarded or discarded, depending on the rest of the settings in this configuration. If filtering is disabled, no filtering will be done based on MAC addresses. 2HJ?.EJAHI-=>A@

The checkbox in this parameter enables or disables the Protocol Filters function. If filtering is enabled ( ), frames are filtered and either forwarded or discarded, depending on the rest of the settings in this configuration. If filtering is disabled, no filtering will be done based on protocol frames. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 131 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Address Filters: MAC Address 2HJ?,AB=KJ)?JE

This parameter determines which Protocol Default Action (discard or forward) will be performed when the Protocol Filters are enabled. Each Protocol Filter (see page 133) also has a forward/discard action associated with it. If a frame does not match any of the filters set in the Protocol Filters configuration, then it will take the Protocol Default Action selected in this parameter. For example, the Protocol Default Action may be to discard all frames. If a type field is matched in the configuration database, and the Filters action is forward, the frame will be passed on. If the field is not matched, then the frame will be dis-

carded. Therefore if you want only IP frames forwarded, after selecting the appro-

priate IP Type in the Ethernet II Filters (see page 136) the discard setting here will drop all frames containing other protocol types. Important:

If Protocol Filters Enabled is checked, and the Protocol Default Action is discard, an HTTP browser will not be able to access the 9150s configuration pages unless an ARP filter is defined to forward ARP packets. To do this, configure Ethernet II Filters to forward pro-

tocol type 0x0806 (ARP) packets (see page 136). Alternatively, you can create a static entry in the ARP table on the computer that is running the browser.

$! )@@HAII.EJAHI)+)@@HAII The 9150 can use a list of destination MAC addresses to filter out frames. The MAC addresses are those of any terminals associating with the 9150. If Address Filters on page 131 is enabled, then any frame destined for any address in the list will be for-

warded. If an address is not on the list when Address Filters is enabled, the frame will be discarded. Addresses are added to the filter list by entering the Configure dialogue box from the Bridge Parameters menu.

=A This is any name you wish to use to describe this terminal.

)@@HAII This parameter provides the corresponding MAC address for the terminal. 132 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

$!!2HJ?.EJAHI Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters When the 9150 receives frames, it can forward or discard the messages by filtering the protocol Type fields encapsulated in the frame. The filtering is done on three types of Ethernet headers: Ethernet II, LLC and SNAP. Figure 6.3 on page 134 illustrates the Ethernet header formats. The parameters to configure these filters are described in the sections which follow. Notes:

1. Although both LLC and SNAP headers are filtered on Ethernet and Token Ring networks, Ethernet headers are not filtered on Token Ring. 2. Throughout these menus, the values for all the protocol types are, by convention, entered in hexadecimal, preceded by 0x. The fields for a basic IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame consist of a six-byte destination MAC address, followed by a six-byte source MAC address, and a two-byte protocol Type. The final fields in a frame are the Data field and the FCS field (Frame Check Sequence, or CRC). If the Type field contains a value that is greater than or equal to Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 133 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 0x0600, it is assumed to be the protocol identifier for an Ethernet II header. This field is used to determine which protocol is being used in the frame, and this is what can be filtered (see Ethernet II Filters on page 136). If the protocol Type is less than 0x05DC, then the value is interpreted as a Length field instead. It is assumed that an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is to follow the Length. This header consists of the Destination Service/Source Service Access Point (DSAP/SSAP) and Control fields (see LLC Filters on page 137). If the DSAP and SSAP are both 0xAA, and the Control field has a value of 0x03, the LLC header will be followed by an extension which is a SNAP header. The SNAP header includes the Organizational Unit Identifier (OUI) and the protocol type (see SNAP Filters on page 138). ECKHA$!-JDAHAJ.H=A6OFAI The listboxes in the Protocol Filters option show the protocol filters already set in the configuration database. Selecting a protocol name and then opening the Config-

ure dialog box gives a list of parameter settings that can be modified or deleted for that protocol. 134 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters

.ECKHA$"2HJ?.EJAHI=EAK)@5K>AKI New filters can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the listbox before enter-

ing the Configure dialog box. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 135 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters If a hexadecimal number is entered that is outside the minimum or maximum allow-

able value for these parameters, you will receive an alert that the Type value is invalid for the specified protocol.

-JDAHAJ11.EJAHI Note: This parameter is only valid for Ethernet networks. Ethernet II headers are not filtered on Token Ring networks.

=A This is any name you wish to use to describe this Ethernet II filter.

)?JE

This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter. 136 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 6OFA The value entered in this parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0x0600 to 0xFFFF, which represents the Ethernet II protocol type you wish to filter. For example, if you only use TCP/IP, create two protocol filters, one to forward IP (Type 0x0800) and the other to forward ARP (Type 0x0806). For a listing of Ethernet II types, see Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) on page B-1.

+.EJAHI

=A This is any name you wish to use to describe this LLC filter.

)?JE

This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter.

,5)255)2 The value entered in the Destination Service/Source Service Access Point

(DSAP/SSAP) parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFF, where the first pair of digits is the DSAP and the last pair is the SSAP. For a listing of DSAP/SSAP types, see DSAP/SSAP Types on page B-14. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 137 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters

5)2.EJAHI

=A This is any name you wish to use to describe this SNAP (SubNet Access Protocol) filter.

)?JE

This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter.

71 The value entered in this parameter must be a six-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFFFF, which is the Organization Unique Identifier. When this parameter is enabled ( ), the OUI will be filtered. 6OFA The value entered in this parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFF, which represents the SNAP type you wish to filter. When this parameter is enabled ( ), this Type will be filtered. For a short listing of OUI values, see OUI Values on page B-15. 138 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 5JH,AJA?JE

This filter parameter can prevent broadcast/multicast storms from spreading throughout the network. Network storms can burden radio traffic with unnecessary data transmissions.

-=>A@

This parameter enables ( ) or disables the Storm Detection filters. 6DHAID@

The maximum number of broadcast/multicast frames that should be received in one second is defined in this parameter. When that threshold is exceeded, a broadcast storm is declared. Every broadcast/multicast frame received will be discarded until it is determined that the storm is over (see Restart, below). Setting the value for Threshold is determined by the characteristics of your network. 4AIJ=HJ The broadcast storm is determined to be over when the number of broadcast frames received for a one second period is less than or equal to the value entered in this parameter. Setting the value for Restart is determined by the characteristics of your network. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 139 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Mobility Configuration

$">EEJO+BECKH=JE

The Mobility Configuration page is entered from the Access Point Configuration menu on the first page. Going to the Mobility Configuration page opens the IAPP Parameters options. 140 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Mobility Configuration The Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) is an extension to the IEEE 802.11 protocol. In a multiple-9150 system, IAPP facilitates roaming of mobile stations among the 9150s, and enables communication and awareness between the 9150s. Every termi-

nal is associated with one 9150, but it can reassociate with another 9150 to maintain uninterrupted communications. The association is handed over from one 9150 to the next. The newly-associated 9150 will receive the terminals data frames and pass them onto the LAN. Returning frames are no longer accepted by the original 9150, which has disassociated from that terminal. Returning frames are now accepted by the newly-associated 9150 and passed over the RF to the terminal. To implement these procedures and coordinate the 9150s, IAPP specifies two message types:

Announce and Handover. In IAPP Announce procedures, when the 9150 is initialized, it sends an IP multicast message to inform the other 9150s in the network that it has become active. It also informs the other 9150s of its continued operation (alive status) by periodically multicasting the Announce beacon. The Handover protocol is intended to inform the old 9150 that a terminal has been associated with a new 9150, and to update the filter tables of intermediate MAC-

bridges to correctly forward frames destined for the terminal. The newly-associated 9150 sends a Handover request to the old 9150, which disassociates itself and acknowledges the request. Important:

These parameters are set with optimum default values. Do not adjust these values without discussing the effects with your Teklogix representative. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 141 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IAPP Parameters

$"1)222=H=AJAHI

)K?A2AHE@

The Announce Period parameter indicates the number of seconds between Announce broadcasts. For further information, see Mobility Configuration on page 140. 0=@LAH6EAKJ If there is no response to the Handover request by the 9150 within the time specified in the Handover Timeout parameter, the request is retransmitted. If no response is received after a number of retries (set in the Handover Retries parameter, below), the 9150 will complete the reassociation procedure itself. For further information, see Mobility Configuration on page 140. 0=@LAH4AJHEAI This parameter sets the number of times the 9150 will transmit a Handover request to the disassociated 9150, before it completes the association transfer itself. See also Handover Timeout, above.

,A=O,K>A The Delay Double parameter doubles the amount of Handover Timeout between Handover Retries. For example, if the first retry is after 500 milliseconds, the next Handover request is sent after 1 second, followed by a retry after 2 seconds, etc. 142 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual SPECIFICATIONS 7

. 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway . 145

. 145

. 147

. 147

. 147

. 147

. 147

. 148

. 148

. 7.1.1 PC Card Radios . 7.1.2 Power Requirements . 7.1.3 Physical Description . 7.1.4 Processor And Memory . 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements . 7.1.6 Network Interfaces . 7.1.7 SLIM Cards . 7.1.8 Approvals . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 143 Chapter 7: Specifications Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice. 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway 7.1.1 PC Card Radios Important:

For sites in Canada, Lucent WaveLAN 802.11 and Proxim Range-

LAN 802.11 radios require a radio licence, unless they are installed totally within a building. (The user shall obtain this licence from Industry Canada.) TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 2.0 Watts (North America) 0.5 to 2.0 Watts (International) 403 to 512 MHz 9600 bps 20 TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7410) Transmit Power Frequency Data Rate No. of Channels 0.25 Watts (United States) 1.0 Watts (Canada and Australia) 902 MHz 122 kbps 7 TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7425) Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 0.1 Watt 2.412 to 2.462 GHz 1 Mbps 7 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 145 Chapter 7: Specifications PC Card Radios Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7440) 100 mW, 400 mW (XR) 2.4 GHz 2 Mbps 79 (FCC, ETSI) 23 (JP) Transmit Power Frequency Data Rate No. of Channels 35 (FR) 27 (SP) Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7430)*

Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 32 mW 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz 2 Mbps 11 (FCC) 4 (FR) 2 (SP) 13 (ETSI) 1 (JP) Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 2.4 GHz (TRX7431)*

Transmitter Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 32 mW 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz 11 Mbps 11 (FCC) 4 (FR) 2 (SP) 13 (ETSI) 1 (JP)

* For regulatory information concerning the Lucent WaveLAN PC Card, please see page 149. 146 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 7: Specifications Power Requirements 7.1.2 Power Requirements Input voltage Frequency Current 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz 1.0 A 7.1.3 Physical Description Enclosure Dimensions Weight Bayer Makroblend EL-700 (PC/PET blend), jet black in colour, texture to MT-11030 or equivalent Nominal 36.3 x 26.2 x 7.4 cm (14.3 x 10.3 x 2.9 in.) Maximum 36.8 x 26.7 x 7.6 cm (14.5 x 10.5 x 3.0 in.) 2.9 kg (6.5 pounds) Nominal Maximum 3.2 kg (7.0 pounds) 7.1.4 Processor And Memory Power PC 860DC, 40 MHz Processor 16 MB DRAM 2 MB Flash ROM 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature Operating Rel. Humidity Storage Temperature Dust and Rain 0C to 50C (32F to 122F) 10% to 90% (Non-condensing)

-40C to 70C (-40F to 158F) IEC 529 IP42 7.1.6 Network Interfaces On-Board Ethernet 10Base5 10Base2 10Base-T Token Ring Madge Token Ring Smart 16/4 Ringnode Adapter Type II PC card, 4 or 16 Mbps Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 147 Chapter 7: Specifications SLIM Cards 7.1.7 SLIM Cards Options 7.1.8 Approvals RS-232/20 mA Current Loop Optically isolated RS-232 Plus FCC Part 15, subpart B, Class B Electrical Safety: CSA/NRTL, TV, CB Scheme CE Mark ETS 300 113 ETS 300 086 ETS 300 220 ETS 300 328 148 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 7: Specifications Approvals Lucent WaveLAN PC Card Regulatory Information The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accor-

dance with the manufacturers instructions. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:

ETS 300-826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment. ETS 300-328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment. USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Important:

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products, a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. Refer to the Regulatory State-

ments as identified in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 149 Chapter 7: Specifications Approvals Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-

aged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver.

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equip-

ment other than specified by Lucent Technologies. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitu-

tion or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. For country-specific approvals, please consult the flyer Radio Certification Infor-

mation that is included with the 9150 Wireless Gateway. 150 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

)22-,1: A 24621765),+)*-,1)/4)5

)+IA2HJ 2E

=A

.K?JE

,EHA?JE

3 2 5 4*

7*

TD RD SG DTR RTS Transmit Data Receive Data Signal Ground Data Terminal Ready Request to Send Out In Out Out

* always pulled high

) 45 ! 2KI2HJ51+=H@

2E

=A

.K?JE

,EHA?JE

1 2 3 7 FG TD RD SG Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Signal Ground Out In Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-1 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams RS-232/Current Loop Port (SLIM Card)

)!45 ! +KHHAJF2HJ51+=H@

2E

=A

.K?JE

,EHA?JE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 19 20 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect 20 mA Current Loop 20 mA Current Loop 20 mA Out Loop Enable DTR Data Terminal Ready Out In Out In In In In In Out Out Out A-2 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams DA15 Connector Pinout (10Base5 Ethernet)

)",)#+A?JH2EKJ*=IA#-JDAHAJ

2E

.K?JE

,EHA?JE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal Ground Collision +

Transmit +

Signal Ground Receive +

Signal Ground No Connection Signal Ground Collision -

Transmit -

Signal Ground Receive -

+12 Volt Supply Signal Ground No Connection In Out In In Out In Out Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-3 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams RJ-45 Connector Pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet)

)#4"#+A?JH2EKJI*=IA6-JDAHAJ

+J=?J 5EC=

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TD+

TD RD+

Not used Not used RD Not used Not used Note: Usually, a straight-through connection is needed to connect Twisted-Pair

(10Base-T) to the hub. A-4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Token Ring Dsub9 Connector

)$6A4EC,IK>'+A?JH 2E

.K?JE

,EHA?JE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring Input (A) Frame Ground

+5 Volt Supply Frame Ground Ring Output (B) Ring Input (B) Frame Ground Frame Ground In Out Out In Ring Output (A) Out

* This connection supports Shielded Twisted Pair (IBM STP) cable Type 1 or 6. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-5 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions

)%5AHE=+=>A,AI?HEFJEI

+=>A

.K?JE

+A?JE

5J=@=H@

ACJD 16590 9400/9300 to 9150 Direct RS-232 15 feet 16598 9400/9300 to 9150 Modem RS-232 8 feet 16599 9400/9300 to 9150 Current Loop 15 feet 19387 9150 to Console Direct 6 feet

,6-J,6-+=>A$#'

A-6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions

,6-J,+-+=>A$#'&

+KHHAJF+=>A$#''

Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-7 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions

+IA2HJ+=>A'!&%

A-8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

)22-,1: B

)+*41,/-246+.16-45),715

*-JDAHAJ116OFAI4.+%

*EIJEC>O,AI?HEFJE

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

3Com Corporation 0x6010-0x6014 3Com(Bridge) loop detect 3Com(Bridge) TCP-IP Sys 3Com(Bridge) XNS Sys Mgmt 0x9003 0x9002 0x9001 Advanced Encryption System 0x823E-0x8240 Aeonic Systems Allen-Bradley Alpha Micro Apollo Computer Apollo Computers Appletalk AppleTalk AARP (Kinetics) Applitek Corporation Apricot Computers ARAI Bunkichi ARP Artisoft Ascom Banking Systems 0x8036 0x80E0-0x80E3 0x814A 0x80F7 0x8019 0x809B 0x80F3 0x80C7 0x81CC-0x81D5 0x81A4 0x0806 0x81D6-0x81DD 0x8221-0x8222 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-1 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T 0x8008 0x8046 0x8047 0x8069 Athena Programming 0x827F-0x8282 ATOMIC Autophon Banyan Systems Banyan Systems Banyan Systems BBN Simnet BBN VITAL-LanBridge cache 0x86DF 0x806A 0x0BAD 0x80C4 0x80C5 0x5208 0xFF00 Berkeley Trailer encap/IP 0x1001-0x100F Berkeley Trailer nego BIIN BIIN 0x1000 0x814D 0x814E Bridge Communications 0x8132-0x8136 Cabletron Chaosnet Charles River Data System Charles River Data System ComDesign Computer Network Tech Computer Protocol Pty Ltd. Computgraphic Corp. Comsat Labs 0x7034 0x0804 0x8164-0x8166 0x8263-0x826A 0x806C 0x869E-0x86A1 0x815C-0x815E 0x806D 0x81F0-0x81F2 B-2 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

Counterpoint Computers Counterpoint Computers Cronus Direct Cronus VLN Dansk Data Elektronik Datability Datability DCA Data Exchange Cluster DEC Customer Protocol DEC DECNET Phase IV Route DEC Diagnostic Protocol DEC Ethernet Encryption DEC LAN Traffic Monitor DEC LANBridge DEC LAT DEC LAVC, SCA DEC MOP Dump/Load DEC MOP Remote Console DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned (Exp.) Delta Controls DLOG DLOG 0x8062 0x8081-0x8083 0x8004 0x8003 0x807B 0x809C-0x809E 0x80E4-0x80F0 0x80C0-0x80C3 0x6006 0x6003 0x6005 0x803D 0x803F 0x8038 0x6004 0x6007 0x6001 0x6002 0x6008-0x6009 0x8039-0x803C 0x803E 0x8040-0x8042 0x6000 0x86DE 0x0660 0x0661 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-3 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

ECMA Internet Evans & Sutherland Excelan ExperData 0x0803 0x805D 0x8010 0x8049 Gateway Communications 0x86A3-0x86AC General Dynamics Harris Corporation Hayes Microcomputers HP Probe IBM SNA Service on Ether Idea Courier Inst Ind Info Tech Integrated Solutions TRFS Intergraph Corporation Internet IP (IPv4) Invisible Software ISC Bunker Ramo Kinetics KTI Landis & Gyr Powers Landmark Graphics Corp. Little Machines Logicraft Loopback LRT Matra 0x8068 0x80CD-0x80CE 0x8130 0x8005 0x80D5 0x8694-0x869D 0x829A-0x829B 0x80DE-0x80DF 0x80C8-0x80CC 0x0800 0x8A96-0x8A97 0xFF00-0xFF0F 0x80F4-0x80F5 0x8139-0x813D 0x86E0-0x86EF 0x806E-0x8077 0x8060 0x8148 0x9000 0x7020-0x7029 0x807A B-4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

Merit Internodal Motorola Motorola Computer NBS Internet Nestar Network Computing Devices Nixdorf Computers Novell, Inc. Pacer Software PCS Basic Block Protocol Planning Research Corp. Polygon Proteon Protocol Engines PUP Addr Trans Qualcomm Qualcomm Quantum Software RAD Network Devices Rational Corp Retix Reverse ARP Rosemount Corporation SAIC SECTRA SGI bounce server 0x807C 0x8700-0x8710 0x818D 0x0802 0x8006 0x8149 0x80A3 0x8137-0x8138 0x80C6 0x4242 0x8044 0x81E6-0x81EF 0x7030 0x817D-0x818C 0x0A01 0x8151-0x8153 0x819A-0x81A3 0x8203-0x8205 0x81A5-0x81AE 0x8150 0x80F2 0x8035 0x80D3-0x80D4 0x81F3-0x81F5 0x86DB 0x8016 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-5 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

SGI diagnostics SGI network games SGI reserved 0x8013 0x8014 0x8015 Siemens Gammasonics Inc. 0x80A4-0x80B3 SNMP Spider Systems Ltd. Stanford V Kernel exp. Stanford V Kernel prod. Symbolics Private Symbolics Private Taurus Controls Taylor Instrument Technically Elite Concept Tigan, Inc. Tymshare Ungermann-Bass dia/loop Ungermann-Bass download Ungermann-Bass net debugr Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Valid Systems Varian Associates Veeco Integrated Auto. VG Analytical 0x814C 0x809F 0x805B 0x805C 0x081C 0x8107-0x8109 0x829C-0x82AB 0x80CF-0x80D2 0x814F 0x802F 0x802E 0x7002 0x7000 0x0900 0x8065 0x8066 0x1600 0x80DD 0x8067 0x81F6-0x81F8 VG Laboratory Systems 0x8131 Vitalink Communications 0x807D-0x807F B-6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

,-5+41261

6;2-0-:8)7-5

Vitalink TransLAN III Walker Richer & Quinn Wellfleet Communications X.25 Level 3 X.75 Internet Xerox IEEE802.3 PUP XEROX NS IDP XNS Compatibility Xyplex Xyplex 0x8080 0x82AC-0x8693 0x80FF-0x8103 0x0805 0x0801 0x0A00 0x0600 0x0807 0x0888-0x088A 0x81B7-0x81B9 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-7 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700)

* EIJEC*O6OFA0AN=@A?E=

6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x0600 0x0660 0x0661 0x0800 0x0801 0x0802 0x0803 0x0804 0x0805 0x0806 0x0807 0x081C XEROX NS IDP DLOG DLOG Internet IP (IPv4) X.75 Internet NBS Internet ECMA Internet Chaosnet X.25 Level 3 ARP XNS Compatibility Symbolics Private 0x0888-0x088A Xyplex 0x0900 0x0A00 0x0A01 0x0BAD 0x1000 Ungermann-Bass net debugr Xerox IEEE802.3 PUP PUP Addr Trans Banyan Systems Berkeley Trailer nego 0x1001-0x100F Berkeley Trailer encap/IP 0x1600 0x4242 0x5208 0x6000 0x6001 0x6002 Valid Systems PCS Basic Block Protocol BBN Simnet DEC Unassigned (Exp.) DEC MOP Dump/Load DEC MOP Remote Console B-8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x6003 0x6004 0x6005 0x6006 0x6007 0x6008-

0x6009 DEC DECNET Phase IV Route DEC LAT DEC Diagnostic Protocol DEC Customer Protocol DEC LAVC, SCA DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned 0x6010-0x6014 3Com Corporation 0x7000 0x7002 0x7020-0x7029 0x7030 0x7034 0x8003 0x8004 0x8005 0x8006 0x8008 0x8010 0x8013 0x8014 0x8015 0x8016 0x8019 0x802E 0x802F Ungermann-Bass download Ungermann-Bass dia/loop LRT Proteon Cabletron Cronus VLN Cronus Direct HP Probe Nestar AT&T Excelan SGI diagnostics SGI network games SGI reserved SGI bounce server Apollo Computers Tymshare Tigan, Inc. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-9 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x8035 0x8036 0x8038 Reverse ARP Aeonic Systems DEC LANBridge 0x8039-0x803C DEC Unassigned 0x803D 0x803E 0x803F DEC Ethernet Encryption DEC Unassigned DEC LAN Traffic Monitor 0x8040-0x8042 DEC Unassigned 0x8044 0x8046 0x8047 0x8049 0x805B 0x805C 0x805D 0x8060 0x8062 0x8065 0x8066 0x8067 0x8068 0x8069 0x806A 0x806C 0x806D Planning Research Corp. AT&T AT&T ExperData Stanford V Kernel exp. Stanford V Kernel prod. Evans & Sutherland Little Machines Counterpoint Computers Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Veeco Integrated Auto. General Dynamics AT&T Autophon ComDesign Computgraphic Corp. 0x806E-0x8077 Landmark Graphics Corp. B-10 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x807A 0x807B 0x807C Matra Dansk Data Elektronik Merit Internodal 0x807D-0x807F Vitalink Communications 0x8080 Vitalink TransLAN III 0x8081-0x8083 Counterpoint Computers 0x809B 0x809C-0x809E Appletalk Datability 0x809F 0x80A3 Spider Systems Ltd. Nixdorf Computers 0x80A4-0x80B3 Siemens Gammasonics Inc. 0x80C0-0x80C3 DCA Data Exchange Cluster 0x80C4 0x80C5 0x80C6 0x80C7 Banyan Systems Banyan Systems Pacer Software Applitek Corporation 0x80C8-0x80CC Intergraph Corporation 0x80CD-0x80CE Harris Corporation 0x80CF-0x80D2 Taylor Instrument 0x80D3-0x80D4 Rosemount Corporation 0x80D5 0x80DD IBM SNA Service on Ether Varian Associates 0x80DE-0x80DF Integrated Solutions TRFS 0x80E0-0x80E3 Allen-Bradley 0x80E4-0x80F0 Datability 0x80F2 Retix Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-11 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x80F3 AppleTalk AARP (Kinetics) 0x80F4-0x80F5 Kinetics 0x80F7 0x80FF-0x8103 0x8107-0x8109 0x8130 0x8131 0x8132-0x8136 0x8137-0x8138 Apollo Computer Wellfleet Communications Symbolics Private Hayes Microcomputers VG Laboratory Systems Bridge Communications Novell, Inc. 0x8139-0x813D KTI 0x8148 0x8149 0x814A 0x814C 0x814D 0x814E 0x814F 0x8150 Logicraft Network Computing Devices Alpha Micro SNMP BIIN BIIN Technically Elite Concept Rational Corp 0x8151-0x8153 Qualcomm 0x815C-0x815E Computer Protocol Pty Ltd 0x8164-0x8166 Charles River Data System 0x817D-0x818C Protocol Engines 0x818D Motorola Computer 0x819A-0x81A3 Qualcomm 0x81A4 ARAI Bunkichi 0x81A5-0x81AE RAD Network Devices B-12 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x81B7-0x81B9 Xyplex 0x81CC-0x81D5 Apricot Computers 0x81D6-0x81DD 0x81E6-0x81EF Artisoft Polygon 0x81F0-0x81F2 0x81F3-0x81F5 0x81F6-0x81F8 0x8203-0x8205 0x8221-0x8222 0x823E-0x8240 0x827F-0x8282 Comsat Labs SAIC VG Analytical Quantum Software Ascom Banking Systems Advanced Encryption System Athena Programming 0x8263-0x826A Charles River Data System 0x829A-0x829B Inst Ind Info Tech 0x829C-0x82AB Taurus Controls 0x82AC-0x8693 Walker Richer & Quinn 0x8694-0x869D Idea Courier 0x869E-0x86A1 Computer Network Tech 0x86A3-0x86AC Gateway Communications 0x86DB 0x86DE 0x86DF SECTRA Delta Controls ATOMIC 0x86E0-0x86EF Landis & Gyr Powers 0x8700-0x8710 Motorola 0x8A96-0x8A97 Invisible Software 0x9000 0x9001 Loopback 3Com(Bridge) XNS Sys Mgmt Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-13 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs DSAP/SSAP Types 6;2-0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x9002 0x9003 0xFF00 3Com(Bridge) TCP-IP Sys 3Com(Bridge) loop detect BBN VITAL-LanBridge cache 0xFF00-0xFF0F ISC Bunker Ramo

* ,5)255)26OFAI

,5)255)2

0-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x0404 0x0505 0x0606 0x0808 0x0C0C 0x0E0E 0x4242 0x4E4E 0x5E5E 0x8E8E SNA Path Control SNA reserved (DOD IP) SNA SNA PROWAY-LAN network management and initialization (ISA-S72) MAC Bridge Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D-1993) MAP messaging service (EIA RS-511) ISI IP PROWAY-LAN active station list maintenance (ISA-S72) 0xAAAA Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) 0xE0E0 0xF0F0 0xFEFE Novell Netware NetBIOS ISO network layer protocol (ISO CLNS DIS 8473) B-14 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs OUI Values

*!718=KAI A few important OUI values:

710-:8)7-5

,-5+41261

0x000000 0x0000F8 0x0020A6 0x00601D 0x00C0AF RFC 1042 encapsulation Bridge-Tunnel encapsulation Proxim Inc. Lucent Technologies Teklogix Inc. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-15 1,-:

BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. A ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION MAC Bridge Parameters 129139 ANSI/Telnet 113115 antenna requirements 16, 17 approvals 147 Auto-login, ANSI Telnet Address Filters 132 General Configuration 131 Protocol Filters 133 Mobility Configuration 140142 access point configuration 10, 41, 125142 Action Ethernet II filters 136 LLC filters 137 SNAP filters 138 Active Channel TekLAN 51 TRX7370 parameters 60 Actively Negotiate with Host 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Actual IP Address Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Actual Subnet Mask Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Adaptive polling/contention protocol 8 addresses, network 3637 Address Filters 132 Address Filters Enabled, MAC Bridge parameters 131 AIAG Alarm 3274 Emulation 90 5250 Emulation 104 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Announce (IAPP message) 141 Announce Period 142 ANSI compatible terminals, connecting 21 parameter 115 Auto-telnet/login Enable 118 failed login 120 Password 119 User ID 119 Auto Startup Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 TekLAN 51 Auto-Startup 72 Auto-telnet, ANSI Telnet Auto-telnet/login Enable 118 Host 119 Terminal Prompt 119 B Barcode 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 109 Base Number, Wlan 52 Priority, Wlan 53 base station configuration 41, 4553 IP Address 71 Name 71 wireless 47 BASE STATIONS 71 baud rate ports 20 baud rates console port 40 serial port 40 baud rate See Data Rate BOOTP, TCP/IP 38 bootptab file 38 Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) 38 broadcast storm 139 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual I Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. C cables commands (IP) 25 connecting 21 port coaxial 17 console port No. 19387 A-8 Current Loop No. 16599 A-7 diagrams A-6, A-7 DTE to DTE #16590 A-6 DTE to DTE #16598 A-7 ground problems 21 maximum length RS-232 Plus, Current Loop 20 outdoor data cable 21 part numbers 20 serial descriptions A-6 Callsign Period, narrow band radio 58 Callsign String, narrow band radio 58 cellular base 8, 72 Channel, IEEE 802.11 DS 128 Channel n Enabled, TekLAN 51 channels (Narrow Band) 60 Clear 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Cold Start Trap 36 Collision Size, narrow band radio 57 Command Region 3274 Emulation 95 5250 Emulation 109 configuration access point 10, 41, 125142 base station 41, 4553 general options 29 IEEE 802.11 DS 34, 128 FH 34, 126 main menu 25 mini-controller 41, 75122 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU 25 connecting ANSI compatible terminals 21 Ethernet 19 Token Ring 19 video display terminal 21 connectors DA15 A-3 RJ-45 A-4 Token Ring A-5 console cable No. 19387 A-8 pinouts A-1 Console Port, baud rate 40 Convert 7 to 8 Bits ANSI Emulation 115 Current Loop port 20 port pinouts A-2 Current Loop cable no. 16599 A-7 D data rate serial 21, 25 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 50 902 MHz 50 Data Rate, TekLAN radio 50 DA15 connector pinout A-3 DEC VT220, connecting 21 Default Actual Gateway Address, bootp 38 Gateway Address, bootp 39 IP Address Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Subnet Mask Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Delay Double 142 directional antenna 16 Direct Sequence (DS) radios all 7, 34 IEEE 802.11 10, 126, 128 specifications IEEE 802.11 146 TekLAN 145 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 50, 51, 53 902 MHz 18, 50, 51 73 DNS 3739 Default Domain 39 Name Server 39 Resolver Enabled 39 Domain Name System See DNS Direct TCP Connections for TekTerm II Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index DRAM 147 DSAP/SSAP 137 DSAP/SSAP types (table) B-14, B-15 DTE to DCE cable No. 16598 A-7 DTE to DTE cable No. 16590 A-6 E Echo ANSI Emulation 114 electrical safety approvals 147 Employ bootp 19, 38 Emulation and Protocol 64 General Host menu 84 General Host menu, 9010 emulation mini-controller configuration 80 67 emulations ANSI/Telnet 113115 overview 77 3274/Telnet 8495 5250/Telnet 95110 9010/Serial 6970 9010/TCP/IP 67 Enable Card Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 TekLAN 51 Enabled Channels TRX7370 parameters 60 Entry Line 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 109 environmental requirements 15 operating relative humidity 147 operating temperature 147 overview 16 storage temperature 147 Escape Timeout ANSI Emulation 114 ESSID IEEE 802.11 DS 128 IEEE 802.11 FH 127 Ethernet adaptor cards 147 base station 71 connections 19 Frame Types (diagram) 134 IP Parameters 31 packet size 19, 31 Physical Address 30 port pinout A-3 status indicator LED 18 10Base-T 19, A-4 10Base2 19 10Base5 19, A-3 Ethernet II header 134 types (tables) B-1B-14 Ethernet II Filters 136 external devices 17 F Field Overhead 3274 Emulation 95 5250 Emulation 109 filters 131, 132 broadcast storm 139 Ethernet II 136 LLC 137 MAC bridge 133 PROTOCOL FILTERS 133 SNAP 138 First Local Terminal Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 First Terminal Listen Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Free Window Factor, narrow band radio Frequencies, narrow band radio 62 Frequency Hopping (FH) radio 7, 34, 126, 57 146 frequency See Range Full Duplex Mode 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 Function Key n Function Key Mapping screens ANSI 122 3274 98 5250 112 Function Key Remapping ANSI Emulation 115 G General Host Options base stations 66 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual III Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. General Parameters, narrow band radio Channel 128 mini-controller 83 62 ground problems, cables 21 H Handover Retries 142 Timeout 142 Handover (IAPP message) 141 header types Ethernet II 134 LLC 134 SNAP 134 Hidden Match Character 3274 Emulation 93 5250 Emulation 108 Hopping Pattern 127 Set 127 Host Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 110 Print 3274 Emulation 88 5250 Emulation 102 Table, DNS 37 Timeout, ANSI Emulation 113 HOST MENU base station 6570 mini-controller 82 Hosts I IAPP 11, 140 messages Announce 141 Handover 141 IAPP PARAMETERS Announce Period 142 Delay Double 142 Handover Retries 142 Handover Timeout 142 IEEE 802.11 configurations 34, 126, 128 IV Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual DS FH Hopping Pattern 127 Hopping Set 127 protocol description 10 radios Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 7, 126, 128, 146 Proxim RangeLAN802 7, 126, 128, 146 IEEE 802.11 (DIRECT SEQUENCE RADIO PARAMETERS) 128 IEEE 802.11 (FREQUENCY HOPPING RADIO PARAMETERS) 126 input voltage (power requirements) 16, 146 installation environmental requirements 16, 147 LAN 18 Inter-Access Point Protocol See IAPP INTERFACES Ethernet 30 IEEE 802.11 126 main menu 30 narrow band 5363 TekLAN 4953 Token Ring 32 interfaces, network 147 Internet Explorer 21, 25 IP Address base station 71 Host Table 37 IP address IP Parameters Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Is Host Fujitsu 3274 Emulation 86 L LAN installations 18 Last Active Session Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 118 LEDs Ethernet 18 PC card status 18 base station configuration 63 mini-controller configuration 80 configuring with console 25 9150 18 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index 9010 Serial Protocol Options 69 MOBILITY CONFIGURATION SLIM card 18 TekLAN 18 Token Ring 18 TRX7370 18 Line Protocol LLC FILTERS 137 LLC header 134 Local 3274 Emulation 87 5250 Emulation 102 Local IP Address to Bind ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 LSB (Least Significant Byte) 30 Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz 128, 146 PC Card regulatory information 148 M MAC address 127, 128 Bridge Configuration menus (chart) 130 bridge parameters 129139 layer 10 MAC Address 132 MAC BRIDGE PARAMETERS 129139 Madge Token Ring PC card specifications 147 maintenance requirements 16 Maximum Message Segment Size, narrow band radio 57 ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Max Priority, Wlan 52 Medium Access Control See MAC memory 147 menus, accessing 27 Message Duration, Wlan 53 Mode Limit, narrow band radio 58 Size 72 Microsoft Internet Explorer 21, 25 mini-controller configuration 41, 75122 emulations 77 networks 77 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 4243 140142 MSB (Most Significant Byte) 30 multicast storm 139 N Name DNS Host Table 37 Ethernet II filters 136 General Host menu base stations 66 mini-controller 84 LLC filters 137 SNAP filters 138 narrow band radio 7 Active Channel parameter 60 configuration 34 Enabled Channels parameter 60 overview of menus 54 parameters 5363 POLLING PROTOCOL PARAMETERS 56 RADIO CHANNELS parameter 60 RADIO PARAMETERS 59 specifications 145 TRX7370 5363 Netscape Navigator 21, 25 network addresses 3637 interfaces 147 radio 56 Number of Retries, narrow band radio 57 O Offline Timeout, Wlan 53 omnidirectional antenna 16 Onboard Ethernet 30 pinout (10Base-T) A-4 pinout (10Base5) A-3 online/offline messages 67, 69 Operate in Cellular Mode 72 operating relative humidity 147 Maximum Sessions per Terminal Number of Poll Windows, narrow band Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual V Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. temperature 147 OUI 138 OUI values (table) B-15 P packet size Ethernet 31 Token ring 33 packet size, Ethernet 19 packet size, Token ring 19 Page ANSI Emulation 115 Pages 3274 Emulation 89 5250 Emulation 104 parameters changing configurations 25 changing with a web browser 21 MAC Bridge 129139 radio 126128 System Parameters 36 Passthru 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 101 password, default 27 PCMCIA cards radio configurations 34 specifications 145146 status indicator LEDs 18 802.11 DS 128 802.11 FH 126 Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 PHY layer 10 physical description 146 Physical Address 30, 127, 128 specifications 146 pinouts See port pinouts Poll ID 73 POLLING PROTOCOL PARAME-

TERS TRX7370 parameters 56 Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 port location 17 options 20 pinouts console port A-1 VI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Ethernet (10Base5) A-3 RJ-45 connector (10Base-T) A-4 RS-232/Current Loop port A-2 RS-232 Plus port A-1 Token Ring A-5 power requirements 16, 146 Print Form Length 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Print Line 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Procedures 3274 Emulation 87 5250 Emulation 102 processor 147 protocol adaptive polling/contention 8 BOOTP 38 Protocol, base station Ethernet connection 71 radio adaptive polling/contention 8 IEEE 802.11 10 Wireless LAN (Wlan) 8 Protocol Default Action, MAC Bridge parameters 132 PROTOCOL FILTERS 133 Ethernet II 136 LLC 137 SNAP 138 Storm Detection 139 Protocol Filters Enabled, MAC Bridge parameters 131 Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz 7, 146 R radio Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 7, 146 options 7 parameters 126128 PCMCIA cards 7, 145 Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 Poll ID 73 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 802.11) 7 Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 protocols (Wlan, adaptive polling, IEEE RS-232 Current Loop port pinouts A-2 ports 20 connectivity 20 specifications 147 RS-232 Plus connectivity 20 specifications 147 S safety approvals 147 instructions viii FHSS 7, 146 Range, TekLAN 51 specifications 145 IEEE 802.11 145 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 146 902 MHz 145 spread spectrum 7, 126, 128 TekLAN 145 2.4 GHz 7, 50 902 MHz 7, 50 TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP 7, 145 RADIO CHANNELS TRX7370 parameters 60 RADIO LINK FEATURES 7273 RADIO PARAMETERS, TRX7370 59 Radio Type, TekLAN 50 RAM 147 Range, TekLAN 51 RangeLAN 802 PCMCIA with Proxim FHSS 2.4GHz Radio 7, 126, 146 Reboot Unit, Miscellaneous Commands 43 Refrain from sending On-line & Off-line messages 9010/Serial emulation 69 9010/TCP/IP emulation 67 Regulatory Domain IEEE 802.11 DS 128 IEEE 802.11 FH 127 Remote Print 3274 Emulation 89 5250 Emulation 103 Remote Txon, narrow band radio 59 Restart, Storm Detection 139 Retries, Number of 57 Ring Speed, Token Ring 32 RJ-45 connector pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) A-4 RLE, ANSI Emulation 115 ROM 147 RS-232/RS-232 Plus port pinouts A-1 Send IAC Break as an Attention Key 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 Send IAC Interrupt Process as a System Request 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 serial base stations 6 connectivity 20 Line Protocol character codes 70 port pinouts A-1, A-2 specifications 147 status indicator LED 18 Serial I/O 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Serial Port, baud rate 40 SERIAL PORTS PARAMETERS 40 Session Cycle Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 118 Shared Channel Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 Size of Poll Windows, narrow band radio 56 SLIM card See serial Slot n PC card 34 Token-Ring 32 SNAP, header 134 SNAP Filters 138 SNMP menu 35 SNMP Communities 36 System Parameters 36 Trap Receivers 36 specifications PCMCIA card radios 145146 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual VII Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. physical 146 spread spectrum radios 7 IEEE 802.11 (2.4 GHz) 126, 128, 146 TekLAN 145, 146 status indicators (LEDs) 18 Storm Detection 139 Subnet Mask See Default Subnet Mask Sync Delay, narrow band radio 59 System Info, Miscellaneous Commands 42 System Parameters, SNMP 36 T TCP/IP PARAMETERS 36 TCP Session Request Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 TekLAN card 34 overview of menus 49 parameters 4953 radio parameters 5051 specifications 145 Wlan parameters 5253 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum 7, 50 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum 7, 50 TekTerm 73 terminal associating with 9150 140 connecting a video display 21 Terminal Range 65 General Host menu 84 General Host menu, 9010 emulation 67 mini-controller configuration 81 Terminal Type ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 110 text conventions 4 Threshold ANSI Emulation 114 Storm Detection 139 Timeout, Wlan 52 Token Ring 32 adaptor PC card specifications 19, 147 base station 6, 71 connections 19 IP Parameters 33 packet size 19, 33 VIII Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual port pinout A-5 Ring Speed 32 status indicator LED 18 Transmit Line 3274 Emulation 90 5250 Emulation 104 Trap Receivers, SNMP 36 TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP radio See also narrow band radio 7, 145 TRX7370 RADIO CARD PARAMETERS 60 TRX7410 TekLAN radio 7, 145 TRX7425 TekLAN radio 7, 145 TRX7430 WaveLAN radio 7, 146 TRX7440 RangeLAN radio 7, 146 Tuning Values, narrow band radio 63 Type Ethernet II filters 137 SNAP filters 138 U Use Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 Use International EBCDIC 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Use NS/NR 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 user name, default 27 USERS 34 V video display terminal, connecting 21 Visible Match Character 3274 Emulation 92 5250 Emulation 106 voltage, input 16, 146 W web browser 21, 25 WIRELESS LAN (Wlan) PARAMETERS 5253 Wireless LAN (Wlan) protocol cellular base considerations 72 description 8 Write Error Code 5250 Emulation 100 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index 10Base-T Ethernet 19, A-4 10Base2 Ethernet 19 10Base5 Ethernet 19, A-3 2.4 GHz radios 145 3274/Telnet 8495 5250/Telnet 95110 9010 / Serial 6870 9010 / TCP/IP 67 9010 Emulation Options serial 69 TCP/IP 67 9010 Emulation Parameters 84 902 MHz radio 145 9400/9300 Network Controllers, cellular mode 52, 72 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual IX 94, 0-),37)46-45

), +)),1) 5-481+- +-64-

460 )-41+) 0-),37)46-45

), 75 5-481+- +-64-

-742-) 0-),37)46-45

6ACEN 1?

 A=@ML=A *KAL=H@

EIIEII=KC=

J=HE # %'

6A  '# &! ''

.=N  '# & $!

6ACEN +HF

& )EHFHJ -N?D=CA *L@

5KEJA #

-H=CAH AJK?O 75) "&

6A  $$ !% $$

.=N  $$ !% $"

6ACEN -KHFA= FAH=JEI

=>=EIAH5JH=A 

,"%&%% 9EE?D ?DDAE@A

/AH=O 6A "' #" "''""

.=N "' #" "''""''

16-4)61) 57*51,1)41-5

6ACEN />0

=>=EIAH5JH=A !

,"%&%% 9EE?D ?DDAE@A

/AH=O 6A "' #" ' & 

.=N "' #" ' & #'

6ACEN 5)

2=H? +K> ,K /B

*=JEAJ 

!&#$ )ENA2HLA?A

+A@AN !

.H=?A 6A !! " " " #%"

.=N !! " " !' "$!

6ACEN J@

=?=IJAH +KHJ +H=JE 4=@

0ECD 9O?>A

*K?ECD=IDEHA 7EJA@ EC@ 02 !6, 6A "" "'" "#$$$

.=N "" "'" "###

6ACEN )*

5@H= /K>>AHC=J= &

"$ $! /JDA>KHC 5MA@A

6A "$ ! # % !

.=N "$ ! # # %&

6ACEN .E=@

AJIAE@K= $

 ! -IF

.E=@

6A !#& ' % ## " 

.=N !#& ' % ## " #

6ACEN ,A=H

8AIJAH>=ALA "$

,% .HA@AHE?E=

,A=H

6A "# %$ "  !!

.=N "# %# '" "$ %'

6ACEN 1J=E= 5H1

/=AHE= /=@DE  #

% = ,E 4D

E=

1J=O 6A !' '!'""%

.=N !' '!'""$'

6ACEN 1? 5EC=FHA

#&! H?D=H@ 4=@

 # .HK

5EC=FHA !&&&"

6A $# %!# &&

.=N $# %!! #''

6ACEN 5) @A +8

5EAHH= =@= $ $ 2EI

+ =I *=HHE=? +2 

ANE? ,.

ANE?

6A # # ! %  "#

.=N # # ! %  !

6ACEN @ *H=IE J@=

) +=I= *H=?=

5= 2=K  52 "&

*H=IE

6A ##  !$" &$&

.=N ##  !$" &$&

6ACEN 1? )CA?E=

8EJ=?KH=  '' BE?E= %!

=I +@AI 5=JE=C

+DEA 6A #$ !!" '!""

.=N #$ !! !&$&

6ACEN @A )HCAJE= 5)

)L )E?E= HA=K @A KIJ &

2EI  BE?E= +#

% *KAI )EHAI

)HCAJE=

6A #"  !"! '!"

.=N #"  !"! $!

94, 91,- 9-*

MMMJACEN?

 

 

Technical Support You can find the most recent software and user documentation for all WaveLAN products on our internet site. Software and Documentation World Wide Web FTP Server http://www.wavelan.com ftp://ftp.wavelan.com/pub If you encounter problems when installing or using this product, or would like information about our other WaveLAN products, please contact your local Authorized WaveLAN Reseller or regional Lucent Technologies Sales Office. You can find their address and phone numbers on the WaveLAN website. In case no local or regional support is available, you can reach us at the addresses or telephone numbers listed below. WaveLAN Regional Support U.S.A / Canada Caribbean/ Latin America Europe/ Middle-East/ Africa Asia/ Pacific WaveLAN Global Support U.S.A / Canada Caribbean/ Latin America usasupport@wavelan.com calasupport@wavelan.com emeasupport@wavelan.com apasupport@wavelan.com Voice:

+1 800 WAVELAN-3 When contacting WaveLAN Support, please complete the WaveLAN Problem Report form and include it with your email or fax. The form

(report.txt) is available on the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM, and on the WaveLAN Support pages of the WaveLAN website. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card i Information to the User Wireless Interoperability The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN products are designed to be inter-operable with any wireless LAN product that is based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) radio technology, and is compliant to the IEEE 802.11 Standard on Wireless LANs

(Revision B), as defined and approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. WaveLAN and your Health WaveLAN, like other radio devices, emits radio frequency electromagnetic energy. The level of energy emitted by WaveLAN devices however is far much less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices like for example mobile phones. Because WaveLAN operates within the guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, Lucent Technologies believes WaveLAN is safe for use by consumers. These standards and recommendations reflect the consensus of the scientific community and result from deliberations of panels and committees of scientists who continually review and interpret the extensive research literature. In some situations or environments, the use of WaveLAN may be restricted by the proprietor of the building or responsible representatives of the organization. These situations may for example include:

Using the WaveLAN equipment on board of airplanes, or In any other environment where the risk of interference to other devices or services is perceived or identified as harmful. If you are uncertain of the policy that applies on the use of wireless devices in a specific organization or environment (e.g. airports), you are encouraged to ask for authorization to use the WaveLAN device prior to turning on the equipment. ii WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Regulatory Information The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:

ETS 300-826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment. ETS 300-328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment. USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products, a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. Refer to the Regulatory Statements as identified in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card iii Regulatory Information Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than specified by Lucent Technologies. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. For country-specific approvals, please consult the flyer Radio Certification Information that was inserted into this kit. iv WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Table of Contents Technical Support Information to the User Regulatory Information Table of Contents 1 About WaveLAN/IEEE Kit Contents WaveLAN Network Scenarios Its Easy n WaveLAN PC Card Features n WaveLAN PC Card Types n Can I Upgrade WaveLAN Cards?

About the Software CD-ROM Optionally Available n WaveLAN IEEE Adapter Cards n External Antennas Connecting to a Network n Connect to Any IEEE 802.11 LAN n Connect to a Specific IEEE 802.11 LAN 2 Hardware Installation Installing your WaveLAN Kit n Preparation n Card Removal and Re-insertion i ii iii i 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-9 1-10 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-17 1-18 1-19 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card i Table of Contents Table of Contents 3 Installation for Windows Introduction n Before You Start the Installation n What You Need to Know Getting Started in Windows 95/98 n Starting Installation Getting Started in Windows NT n Starting Installation Installing the Miniport Driver n Network Installation Setting the WaveLAN Parameters n Which Parameters Do You Need?

n Basic WaveLAN Parameters n WaveLAN Encryption Parameters Finishing the WaveLAN Installation n After Restarting Your Computer Working with WaveLAN & Windows n View Other WaveLAN Stations n Selecting the Networking Protocol n Verifying the Current Protocol Setting n Display or Modify WaveLAN Parameters 4 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Introduction MAC Address AP Density Transmit Rate n n The Auto Transmit Rate Select Mechanism The User-defined Transmit Rate ii WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-1 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-5 3-6 3-9 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-18 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 Table of Contents Medium Reservation Power Management n Enable Power Management:

5 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance About WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Installing WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT n Monitoring Options n What to Monitor n Choosing your WaveMANAGER Tool WaveLAN Status/Function Window WaveLAN Link Test n Testing Radio Communications Quality Testing Data Throughput Efficiency n WaveLAN Card Diagnostics Advanced User Options n Basic Mode versus Enhanced Mode n Logging Measurement Data 6 WaveLAN Security Options Introduction n Closing the Infrastructure n Wireless Access Control n Wireless Data Encryption 4-8 4-13 4-14 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-13 5-14 5-14 5-15 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card iii Table of Contents Table of Contents A Card Specifications Physical Specifications Networking Characteristics Radio Characteristics n Supported Frequency Sub-bands WaveLAN PC Card Types n About Previously Purchased Cards n Can I Upgrade WaveLAN Cards?

B Troubleshooting LED Activity Windows Operating Systems n Generic Problems n Hardware Conflict Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver n Removing the WaveLAN Miniport Driver MS-DOS Systems n Error Messages n Can Not Connect To The Network C Installing in Windows CE Introduction Installing the WaveLAN Driver n n Using WaveLAN with Windows CE n Modifying Configuration Parameters A-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-7 A-9 A-9 A-12 B-1 B-1 B-4 B-4 B-6 B-14 B-20 B-23 B-23 B-23 C-1 C-1 C-2 C-4 C-5 iv WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Table of Contents D Installation for MS-DOS Intel 82365 PCIC Installation Overview Introduction n What You Need to Know n Driver Types n Copy the WaveLAN Software Setup the WaveCAD Program n Card & Socket Services n Install the Network Client Software Setup the WaveLAN Parameters n DOS ODI Driver Configuration n Packet Driver Configuration Finishing Installation Advanced Options n Dual Card Configuration n Start-up Menu Configuration E Installing in Apple Macintosh Introduction Installing the WaveLAN Driver Installing Networking Protocols n n Enabling your WaveLAN Card Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks n Basic Parameters n Advanced Parameters n Monitoring Wireless Performance n Modifying Configuration Parameters D-1 D-1 D-1 D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-4 D-5 D-9 D-10 D-10 D-19 D-25 D-27 D-27 D-27 E-1 E-1 E-2 E-2 E-3 E-5 E-6 E-7 E-9 E-9 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card v Table of Contents Table of Contents Removing the WaveLAN Driver Index W Warranty Repair Card About Warranty and Repair Limited Warranty List of Figures List of Tables Index E-10 IX-1 Warranty-1 Warranty-1 Warranty-2 LOF-1 LOT-1 IX-1 vi WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE Contents Kit Contents WaveLAN Network Scenarios Its Easy WaveLAN PC Card Features WaveLAN PC Card Types n Silver Label Cards n Gold Label Cards n About Using Different Card Types n About the Fixed Wireless PC Card Can I Upgrade WaveLAN Cards?

About the Software CD-ROM Optionally Available WaveLAN IEEE Adapter Cards External Antennas n WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna n WaveLAN Vehicle-Mount Antenna Connecting to a Network Connect to Any IEEE 802.11 LAN Connect to a Specific IEEE 802.11 LAN 1 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-13 1-13 1-13 1-14 1-15 1-17 1-18 1-19 About WaveLAN/IEEE Kit Contents 1 1 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card kit includes the following items as pictured in Figure 1-1:

a. A WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card. b. The Quick Installation Guide (this document). c. WaveLAN Software CD-ROM. Figure 1-1 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Kit Contents The printed Quick Installation Guide is an abstract of the electronic Installation Guide included on the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM. For detailed information you may wish to consult the electronic version that is available in Adobes Acrobat Portable Document File (*.pdf) format. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-1 About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN Network Scenarios WaveLAN Network Scenarios 1 This WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Kit enables you to:

n Connect your computer to an ad-hoc workgroup of wireless computing devices, or n Connect your computer to a Local Area Network (LAN) Infrastructure that includes Lucent Technologies WavePOINT-

II access points, or other IEEE 802.11 compliant Local Area Network (LAN) systems n Expand the capabilities of your WavePOINT-II access points, to support wireless devices that have been equipped with IEEE 802.11 adapter cards. Figure 1-2 Ad-hoc Wireless Workgroup The ad-hoc workgroup configuration enables you to quickly set up a small wireless workgroup, where the workgroup participants can exchange files using features like Files and Printer Sharing as supported by Microsoft Networking. You can use this type of wireless peer-to-peer networks on the road, or in Small Office Home Office (SOHO) environments. As long as the station are within range of one another, this is the easiest and least expensive way to set up a wireless network. 1-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN Network Scenarios Figure 1-3 Stand Alone Wireless LAN Local Area Network (LAN) Infrastructures may either be:

n Stand-alone wireless LANs as pictured in Figure 1-3. n Wireless network infrastructures connected to an existing Ethernet network as pictured in Figure 1-4 on page 1-4. n Wireless network infrastructures that may include previously marketed WaveLAN products such as:

Standard WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Cards WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo PC Cards Previous generation WaveLAN Legacy cards. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-3 About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN Network Scenarios Figure 1-4 LAN Infrastructure Its Easy 1 The WaveLAN PC Card functions like any standard wired Ethernet card, but WaveLAN does not need any wires!

Where an Ethernet card requires a cable connection to a hub and/

or patch panel, the cable physically ties you down to the location of the wired connection. WaveLAN allows you to connect your computer to a Local Area Network (LAN) system from anywhere within the wireless coverage area. Expanding or re-designing your network is easy:

Add or relocate WavePOINT-II access points, power-up your (new) WaveLAN computers, and youre done!

Unlike Ethernet, WaveLAN will enable you to roam throughout the network while remaining connected to the LAN. 1-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN PC Card Features WaveLAN PC Card Features 1 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card is a standard PC Card that fits into any PC Card Type II slot. The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card has two LED indicators and two integrated antennas. Optionally you can use the WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card in combination with an external antenna (see page 1-13). Figure 1-5 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Integrated Antennas a. b. Transmit/ Receive LED n Off - No wireless activity n Blinking - Sensing/transmitting wireless data c. Power ON/OFF LED n Solid Green - standard operational mode n Blinking Green - Power Management mode d. Connector for optional External Antenna (see page 1-13). For a more detailed overview of the LED activity, please consult Table B-1 on page B-2 of Appendix B. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-5 About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN PC Card Features WaveLAN PC Card Types 1 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card is a wireless network adapter card that complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard on wireless LANs Rev. B. This card that supports data rates up to 11 Mbit/s is available in two variants:

n WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Silver Label, and n WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Gold Label Both types of WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Cards are:

n Fully compatible with any other wireless LAN system based on Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) radio technology that complies with the IEEE 802.11 standard on wireless LANs (Revision B). n Backwards compatible with any other previously released model of the WaveLAN/IEEE product family. Silver Label Cards 1 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Silver PC Cards supports the following wireless LAN features:

n Automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism in the range of

"High, Medium, Standard and Low". Frequency Channel Selection (2.4 GHz). n n Roaming over multiple channels. n Power Management. n Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based on the 64 bit RC4 encryption algorithm as defined in the IEEE 802.11 standard on wireless LANs. These features are described in more detail in Chapter 4 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters 1-6 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN PC Card Features Gold Label Cards 1 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Gold PC Cards supports the same functionality as the WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Silver cards. The Gold card however provides an enhanced type of data encryption, based on the 128 bit RC4 algorithm. NOTE:

The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Gold PC Card may not be marketed in all parts of the world, subject to national legislation or local regulations. For availability in your country, please consult your local Lucent Technologies Sales Office. About Using Different Card Types 1 When using WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Cards in networks that include different types and/or versions of WaveLAN/IEEE products carefully read the items listed below. Different Transmit Rates When using different types of WaveLAN/IEEE PC Cards, your WaveLAN cards will always revert to higest compatible transmit rate as supported by both cards. 1 For example your 11 Mb PC Card will switch to the Standard Transmit Rate (2 Mbit/s) when communicating with a wireless device that has been equipped with:

A Standard IEEE PC Cards (identified by either a white, Bronze or Silver label). WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo PC Cards (identified by a Bronze or Silver label that does not include the designator "11 Mb).1 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-7 About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN PC Card Features Different Types of Data Encryption When using the encryption feature, please note that encrypted messages can only be deciphered by cards that will also have encryption enabled and are using an identical encryption key. 1 When using the WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Gold PC Card in combination with Silver cards, your Gold card should be configured with a WEP compatible (64-bit) encryption key. Are you upgrading to 11 Mb/s PC Cards?

Transmissions at higher data rates, may not travel as far as communications at Standard or Low Tranmit rate. 1 When you consider upgrading your wireless network to WaveLAN/

IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Cards, you may need to perform a site survey again to verify that the entire coverage area allows for data transmissions at the highest transmit rates. You can use the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE tool described in Chapter 5 of this Quick Installation Guide to perform such a site survey. About the Fixed Wireless PC Card 1 This card is a special WaveLAN PC Card for outdoor antenna installations that is marketed in Europe and Japan only. It is typically used in combination with WavePOINT-II access points and/or the WaveLAN Vehicle-Mount Antenna to connect a wireless LAN device to an outdoor antenna installation (see Chapter 1of ). 1 The High and Medium Transmit rates, supported by these cards, are not compatible with the high-speed rates as deifned by the IEEE 802.11 standard Revision B. 1-8 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE WaveLAN PC Card Features The Fixed Wireless PC Card can be recognized from the distinct red color of the extended part of the PC Card. It supports the same networking capabilities as the other WaveLAN cards, but has different radio specifications, to comply with radio regulations for outdoor antenna installations as defined by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). For more details about this card, please consult Appendix A Card Specifications and/or the WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide that can be downloaded from the WaveLAN website. Can I Upgrade WaveLAN Cards?

1 To enhance (wireless) performance of your WaveLAN/IEEE cards, updates are made available via the WaveLAN website at regular intervals. Updates typically enhance existing features supported by the specific waveLAN/IEEE PC Card, or resolve minor bugs. You can not use the updates to "upgrade" a WaveLAN/IEEE Silver card to a WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb Gold PC Card. Updates for WaveLAN/IEEE PC Cards are managed via a dedicated tool, called the WaveLAN Station Update tool (WSU). This tool will update the embedded software of the card (also referred to as the Station Firmware). Whenever an update becomes available, you will be able to download the latest WSU tool from the WaveLAN website. You are advised to visit the WaveLAN website at regular intervals to check if newer versions are available for your product. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-9 About WaveLAN/IEEE About the Software CD-ROM About the Software CD-ROM 1 The WaveLAN software CD-ROM contains both software and documentation for all WaveLAN products that support roaming functionality in indoor environments. If you wish to install WaveLAN driver software, turn to Chapter 2 Hardware Installation and follow the instructions as described for installing your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card. If you would like to explore the contents of the CD-ROM, the contents map as pictured in Figure 1-6 on page 1-11, may help you find the items you are looking for:

n WaveLAN User Guides and other reference documents are located in the folder docs. n Software for WaveLAN client stations and/or infrastructure products, such as the WavePOINT-II access points, are located in the folder software. Both the docs and software folder have been divided into dedicated subfolders, related to the type of WaveLAN device. For example:

n n The folder "software\adapter\pc_card" contains all the software avaialble for your WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card. The folder software\bridge\accesspt contains the software &

tools for the WavePOINT-II Access Point. NOTE:

Prior to copying or installing the software, you are advised to read the Software License Agreement "license.txt", located in the root folder of the CD-ROM. By installing, copying or using the WaveLAN software, you are consenting to be bound by this agreement. If you do not agree to all of the terms of the Software License Agreement, do not download, copy or install the WaveLAN software. 1-10 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE About the Software CD-ROM Figure 1-6 Contents of the Software CD-ROM NOTE:

It is the policy of Lucent Technologies to improve products as new technology, components, software and firmware become available. Before you proceed with the installation of this product, we recommend you to consult the WaveLAN website to:

n Verify if newer versions of the software that was shipped with your product are available. n Download and install the latest software with your purchased product. You can download the latest software and documentation from the WaveLAN website at: http://www.wavelan.com. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-11 About WaveLAN/IEEE About the Software CD-ROM Looking again at Figure 1-6 on page 1-11 you will see that the CD-

ROM also includes a folder named xtras. This folder contains additional tools, that may help you install and manage your WaveLAN Network. n n The folder Acrobat includes a copy of the Adobe Acrobat Reader , required to view and/or print the WaveLAN user documentation included on this CD-ROM. The folder CopyFile includes a set of batch files that allow you to quickly create or copy sets of driver software to:

a floppy diskette hard-disk drive, and/or a network drive. These files can not be executed independently, but will be started automatically if you run the file CopyFile.bat that is located in the root of the CD-ROM. NOTE:

The Adobe Acrobat Reader is owned by and licensed from Adobe Systems Incorporated. This software is provided as is. Lucent makes no warranty or representation, express or implied, relating to the completeness, reliability, effectiveness, accuracy, performance, or operation of the Adobe software, or as to its suitability, merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose or against infringement of intellectual property rights of any party. For more information about Adobe Acrobat software, please consult the Adobe Website at:

Http:\\www.adobe.com\acrobat 1-12 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE Optionally Available Optionally Available 1 WaveLAN IEEE Adapter Cards 1 The Lucent Technologies WaveLAN IEEE solution has been based upon a single wireless PC Card that can be used in a variety of computing systems. Optionally available are the following adapters for computer systems that do not have a PC Card slot:

n WaveLAN/ISA an ISA to PC Card-bus adapter card. n WaveLAN/PCI a PCI to PC Card-bus adapter card. n WaveLAN/EC (Ethernet Converter) A dedicated WaveLAN device that can be used to connect a computer with a standard 10Base-T interface to your WaveLAN network n WaveLAN/EC-S (Ethernet & Serial Converter) A dedicated WaveLAN device that can be used to connect a computer with a standard 10Base-T or serial interface to your WaveLAN network. External Antennas 1 The WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card has been provided with two integrated antennas (see Figure 1-5), which perform best in an open environment with as few obstacles as possible. Optionally available are the following types of external antennas:

n WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna. n WaveLAN Vehicle-Mount Antenna. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-13 About WaveLAN/IEEE Optionally Available These antennas have a Lucent Technologies proprietary connector, that allows you to connect the card directly to the socket on the extended side of the your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card

(pictured in Figure 1-5 on page 1-5). WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna 1 Use the WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna to ensure optimal transmission and receiving quality for situations in which the integrated antennas are shielded, for example when:

n n The WaveLAN PC Card is close to metal surfaces. The WaveLAN PC Card is inserted into a WavePOINT-II device or computer that is installed in a hidden location, e.g. under a desk or inside a cabinet. n Objects like thick stacks of books shield the antenna. In most situations the WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna may provide a performance increase of up to 50%. Figure 1-7 Range Extender Antenna You can connect the Range Extender Antenna to the WaveLAN PC Card by inserting the connector into the socket on the 1-14 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE Optionally Available extended side of the PC Card. To protect the socket from dust, it is shielded with a little cap, that should be removed prior to connecting the antenna. The WaveLAN Range Extender Antenna has a mounting bracket and a base for perfect vertical positioning that allows you to put the antenna on top of on your desktop computer, a table or filing cabinet, or to hang it on the wall, or ceiling etc.

CAUTION:

Many computer monitors today support a degauss option, that can either be enabled manually by the user, but is often also enabled automatically whenever you turn on the monitor. The electromagnetic discharge that may occur when degaussing the monitor may cause damage to the WaveLAN equipment. To avoid damage to your sensitive WaveLAN equipment, do not place the Range Extender Antenna on top of, or too close to, your monitor. WaveLAN Vehicle-Mount Antenna 1 The WaveLAN Vehicle-Mount Antenna enables you to connect vehicles with an on-board terminal to your LAN infrastructure. The ruggedized design of this antenna allows you to mount it on vehicles (for example fork-lift trucks) that need continuous access to networked data, whether inside or outside of the building. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-15 About WaveLAN/IEEE Optionally Available Figure 1-8 Vehicle Mount Omni-Directional Antenna You can connect the Vehicle Mount Antenna to the WaveLAN PC Card using the special 2.5 m WaveLAN IEEE Mobile Vehicle Solution cable assembly. 1-16 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE Connecting to a Network Connecting to a Network 1 You can use your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card to connect to Local Area Network (LAN) systems that include Lucent Technologies WavePOINT-II access points. The WavePOINT-II access point is a transparent bridge between:

n WaveLAN stations that have been equipped with IEEE 802.11 compliant PC Cards. n WaveLAN stations that have been equipped with previous generation WaveLAN cards such as WaveLAN/PCMCIA and WaveLAN/ISA. n Ethernet stations that are connected to the WavePOINT-II device via a 10Base-T or 10Base2 backbone. To allow communication between your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 station and the Infrastructure, the access point must be equipped with an IEEE 802.11 compliant WaveLAN card. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 networks are identified by a unique WaveLAN Network Name. All WavePOINT-II units that belong to the same WaveLAN Infrastructure will share the same WaveLAN Network Name. You can configure your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card to:

n n n Connect to Any IEEE 802.11 LAN Connect to a Specific IEEE 802.11 LAN, or Create a Stand-Alone IEEE 802.11 LAN (also referred to as

"ad-hoc mode"). WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-17 About WaveLAN/IEEE Connecting to a Network Connect to Any IEEE 802.11 LAN 1 This configuration setting is recommended when you intend to use your computer in various networking environments. When you start up your computer, your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 station will attempt to establish a radio connection with the first IEEE 802.11 compliant network system that provides a good quality for radio communications. In situations where multiple IEEE 802.11 compliant systems are operational in the vicinity of the location where you powered-up your computer, the WaveLAN card will connect automatically to the network that provides the best level of communications. Once your WaveLAN card finds an IEEE 802.11 compliant access point, it will automatically:

n Retrieve the radio channel required to connect to this access point. n Establish the radio connection to the WavePOINT-II access point that provides the best communications quality When moving your computer to another location within the network environment, i.e. out of range of the current access point, the WaveLAN roaming functionality will automatically connect your computer to other access points that belong to the same network. This will allow continuous network connectivity as long as your WaveLAN computer remains within range of one or more access points that belong to the same network infrastructure. NOTE:

Once your computer connects to ANY IEEE 802.11 network system, it will remain attached to this network until you restart your computer again. During run-time it will not switch dynamically between systems identified by different WaveLAN Network Names. 1-18 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card About WaveLAN/IEEE Connecting to a Network Connect to a Specific IEEE 802.11 LAN 1 When you would like to connect to a specific IEEE 802.11 network system, you are advised to configure your station to connect only to the IEEE 802.11 network that is identified by the same WaveLAN Network Name. When your WaveLAN card finds the network with the matching WaveLAN Network Name, it will automatically:

n Retrieve the radio channel required to connect to the specific network. n Establish the radio connection to the WavePOINT-II access point that provides the best communications quality. When moving your computer to another location within the network infrastructure, i.e. out of range of the current access point, the WaveLAN roaming functionality will automatically connect your computer to other access points that belong to the same network. This will allow continuous network connectivity as long as your WaveLAN computer remains within range of one or more access points that belong to the same network infrastructure. NOTE:

We recommend that you use the Connect to a Specific IEEE 802.11 LAN option when multiple IEEE 802.11 networks are operational within the same networking environment, or in neighboring buildings. This will prevent your computer from unintentionally connecting to a different IEEE 802.11 system. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-19 Hardware Installation Contents Installing your WaveLAN Kit Preparation Card Removal and Re-insertion n Plug & Play Compatible Systems n Systems That Do Not Support Plug & Play 2 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 Hardware Installation 2 Installing your WaveLAN Kit 2 This chapter describes how to install your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card into the PC Card slot of your computer. NOTE:

If you intend to use the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card in a WavePOINT-II access point, or WaveLAN/EC device, please refer to the User Documentation that was shipped with the device, or that is available for download from the WaveLAN website at http://www.wavelan.com. Preparation 2 Unpack your WaveLAN PC Card kit and verify that all items are present, as described in Kit Contents on page 1-1. If any of the items described appear to be damaged or missing, please contact your supplier. Insert the WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card into the PC Card slot of your computer as pictured in Figure 2-1 on page 2-2. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 2-1 Hardware Installation Installing your WaveLAN Kit Figure 2-1 Inserting the PC Card into Your Computer Card Removal and Re-insertion 2 WaveLAN adapter cards can be installed on various operating systems, that may show different behavior when installing your using your WaveLAN card:

n Plug & Play Compatible Systems n Systems That Do Not Support Plug & Play Depending on the type of operating system installed on your computer, you can remove and re-insert your WaveLAN PC Card whenever you like. This feature, also referred to as Hot Swapping for PC Cards is supported by operating systems as described under Plug & Play Compatible Systems below. For systems that do not support Plug & Play you are advised to follow the procedure as described under Systems That Do Not Support Plug & Play on page 2-4. 2-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Hardware Installation Installing your WaveLAN Kit Plug & Play Compatible Systems 2 Plug & Play for WaveLAN PC Cards is supported by the following operating systems:

n MS-Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows 2000 (formerly known as Windows NT v5.0) n Windows CE (version 2.0/2.11 and higher) n Apple/Macintosh PowerBook systems. When re-inserting the WaveLAN PC Card into your computer, these operating systems will automatically:

1. Recognize the card 2. 3. Attempt to restore the network connection.

(Re-)load the driver and activate card operation When removing the card, these operating systems will:

1. Disable the WaveLAN driver and 2. Disconnect power to the PC Card slot.

CAUTION:

When removing the WaveLAN card you will lose your connection to the network. Certain network operating systems however may not allow you to restore the network logon automatically. In that case you may need to restart your computer to rerun the network login procedure to restore the network connection. You are advised to always disable the PC Card prior to removing the card from the PC Card slot. This will allow the Windows operating system to log off from the network server, disable the driver properly and disconnect power to the PC Card slot. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 2-3 Hardware Installation Installing your WaveLAN Kit For example to stop using the WaveLAN PC Card in Ms-Windows environments, proceed as follows:

1. Click the Start button on the Windows Taskbar. 2. Click on Settings and then Control Panel item. 3. On the Control Panel double-click the PC Card icon to open the PC Card (PCMCIA) properties window. 4. Select the PC Card socket that contains your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card and click the Stop button. 5. Wait for the operating system to acknowledge that the device has been disabled and then remove the PC Card form the PC Card slot. NOTE:

A shortcut to disable the PC Card is clicking once on the PC Card icon on the right side of the Windows Task bar, and select the option "Stop WaveLAM/IEEE PC Card". Double-clicking the PC Card icon, will open the PC Card properties windows. Systems That Do Not Support Plug & Play 2 Although Windows 95/98 and Windows NT version 4.0 are similar in appearance, only Windows 95 and Windows 98 support true Plug & Play. When your computer runs one of the operating systems listed below, neither Plug & Play support nor Hot Swapping are available for your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card:

n Windows NT version 3.51 n Windows NT version 4.0 n MS-DOS 2-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Hardware Installation Installing your WaveLAN Kit To remove your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card from these systems, you are advised to:

1. Power off your computer 2. Remove the WaveLAN PC Card from the PC Card slot 3.

(optional) Restart the computer to proceed working with your computer without the WaveLAN PC Card. To (re-)insert the WaveLAN PC Card:

1. Power off your computer 2. 3.

(Re-)insert the WaveLAN PC Card into the PC Card slot

(optional) Restart the computer to proceed working with your computer and the WaveLAN PC Card. For more information about the differences between the referenced Microsoft operating systems read the section What You Need to Know on page 3-2. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 2-5 Installation for Windows Contents Introduction Before You Start the Installation What You Need to Know Getting Started in Windows 95/98 Starting Installation Getting Started in Windows NT Starting Installation n Enabling PCMCIA Services n Enabling Network Support Installing the Miniport Driver Network Installation Setting the WaveLAN Parameters Which Parameters Do You Need?

Basic WaveLAN Parameters n WaveLAN Network Name n Station Name n Connecting to an Ad-hoc Network WaveLAN Encryption Parameters 3 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-9 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-17 3-18 Finishing the WaveLAN Installation After Restarting Your Computer Working with WaveLAN & Windows Infrastructure Networks View Other WaveLAN Stations Selecting the Networking Protocol n n Ad-hoc Workgroup Networks Verifying the Current Protocol Setting Display or Modify WaveLAN Parameters 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-23 3-24 Installation for Windows Introduction 3 3 This chapter describes the installation of the WaveLAN Miniport Driver for Microsoft Windows 95, 98 & NT v.4.0. Before You Start the Installation 3 To install and begin using your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card, you will need to install the following items:

The WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Miniport Driver. n n Network (client) Operating Software and Protocols.

(optionally) The WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program. n The Network client software is included with the Windows operating system software. Before you start the installation, you are advised to keep the Windows CD-ROM or software diskettes close at hand. If your computer came with a factory-installed Windows operating system, these files will be stored on your computers hard disk, in the form of *.cab files. NOTE:

If you are upgrading from an earlier version of the WaveLAN Miniport driver, please read the section Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver in Appendix B . WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-1 Installation for Windows Introduction What You Need to Know 3 Installing a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card requires the same level of expertise that you would need to install any other type of standard Ethernet network adapter card. It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of standard Windows 95, 98 or NT operations and of installing network adapter cards. Although similar in appearance, Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows NT operating systems show different behavior when installing or operating new hardware on your computer. The major differences between the operating systems are:

n n Plug & Play support User Profiles Thats why, you will find different Getting Started instructions for each of the Microsoft operating systems described in this chapter:

n n Getting Started in Windows 95/98 on page 3-3 Getting Started in Windows NT on page 3-5 The actual setting of the WaveLAN parameters is the same for both type of systems (described on page 3-13). 3-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows 95/98 Getting Started in Windows 95/98 3 Windows 95 and Windows 98 operating systems support Plug &

Play for PC Cards. Once you insert the WaveLAN card into your computer, these operating systems will automatically:

n Detect the card, and enable the WaveLAN Miniport Driver, or n Prompt you to install the driver, when the operating system cannot find the required driver. This would typically occur when inserting the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card into your computer for the very first time. Once the WaveLAN Miniport Driver is installed, you can remove and re-insert the card whenever you like. This is also referred to as Hot Swapping (see also Card Removal and Re-insertion on page 2-2). The user profiles in Windows 95 and Windows 98 operating systems are primarily used to customize the visual appearance of your Windows desktop and user-defined preferences. These profiles do not have any impact on the installation of your WaveLAN card. Starting Installation 3 To install the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card on a computer running either Windows 95 or Windows 98, proceed as follows:

1. 2. Insert the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM in your computer. Insert the WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card into your computer. 3. Power up your computer. Because both Windows 95 and Windows 98 support Plug & Play, the operating system functionality will automatically detect your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-3 Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows 95/98 Once the operating system has identified the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card, a message will be displayed identifying that the WaveLAN drivers are being installed. Turn to Installing the Miniport Driver on page 3-9 to continue the installation of your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card. NOTE:

In some occasions Windows 95/98 operating systems may not detect the new hardware. This may be the case in situations where:

n The laptop computer into which you wish to install the WaveLAN card is a brand-new out-of-the-box computer, where the Windows 95/98 operating system was already factory-installed. n A previous installation of the WaveLAN adapter card was aborted before it was finished. When any of these situations applies, please consult Appendix B <$paratext> for more information. 3-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows NT Getting Started in Windows NT 3 Unlike Windows 95/98, Windows NT operating systems (v3.51 and v4.0) do not support Plug & Play and Hot Swapping of PC Cards:

n n In order to start the driver installation for your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card, you will need to introduce the card to the operating system. To swap PC cards, Windows NT machines typically require you to restart the computer in order to recognize the card and load the drivers. Like Windows 95/98 systems, the Windows NT operating system also identifies user profiles. On Windows NT systems, however, user profiles (accounts) are associated with dedicated levels of authority (privileges) like the ones listed below:

n Users - are allowed to change the visual appearance of the Windows NT desktop and user-defined preferences. n Power Users - can create User Accounts or User Groups. n Administrators - can manage and control the overall configuration of the workstation. NOTE:

To install (or uninstall) the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card in a Windows NT environment, you will need to login as the Administrator, or ensure that your login profile provides the same level of privileges. The privilege settings for each user (account) are set in the Microsoft Windows NT User Manager program. Please consult the documentation that was shipped with your Microsoft Windows NT operating system or station for more information. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-5 Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows NT Starting Installation 3 To install the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card on a computer running Windows NT (version 3.51 or 4.0), proceed as follows:

Insert the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card into your computer. 1. 2. Power up your computer. 3. Enable PCMCIA Services 4. Enabling Network Support for your (client) station. NOTE:

To be able to perform the steps as described on the following pages, you will need the privileges of the Windows NT station administrator. From the Start menu, use the option Log Off xxxxx to close all windows and log on as Administrator. Secondly, you will need to verify that the computer system has at least NT Service pack v4.0 installed (check the blue start-up screen of Microsoft Windows NT). If the computer on which you plan to install the WaveLAN PC Card is running with Service Pack v3.0 or lower, you will need to download Service Pack v4.0 from the Microsoft website (http://www.microsoft.com) and install the Service Pack prior to installing the WaveLAN PC Card. Enabling PCMCIA Services 3 To allow the Windows NT operating system to detect PC Cards in the computers PC Card slot , you must enable the PC Card Socket controller, identified as the PCMCIA device. 1. Click the Start button, then select Settings and then click Control Panel. 2. Double-click the Devices icon. 3. Scroll down the list of devices and select the item PCMCIA. 3-6 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows NT Figure 3-1 Enable the PCMCIA service for Windows NT 4. Click the button Startup on the right side of the Devices window, and set the Startup type for the item PCMCIA to Boot. 5. Click OK to confirm and return to the Devices window. 6. Click Close to return to the Control Panel. Enabling Network Support 3 To introduce your WaveLAN network adapter card to the Windows NT operating system, you will need to enable Network support for your WaveLAN station. 1. From the Windows NT Taskbar, click the 2. Click on Settings, then Control Panel. 3. In the Control Panel window, double-click the Network icon to open the Network Settings window. button. n n If no network has been installed yet, you will be prompted to install it now. Click Yes to install Windows NT Networking, and follow the instructions as they appear on your screen. If networking support was already installed, you will see a window with multiple tabs. Select the tab Adapters, and click the Add button. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-7 Installation for Windows Getting Started in Windows NT Windows NT Networking Setup will determine the type of network adapter card that you will use to connect to the network. 4. When prompted to select a driver, proceed with Installing the Miniport Driver on page 3-9. 3-8 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Installing the Miniport Driver Installing the Miniport Driver 3 If your Windows operating system automatically detected your hardware, it will prompt you to select a driver from a list, or install the driver from a Disk provided by Hardware Manufacturer. Some Windows operating systems may prompt you to select the type of network adapter first, to select the appropriate driver (see Figure 3-2). Figure 3-2 Select WaveLAN Adapter Type This is usually the case when:

n Your computer came with a factory-installed version of Windows 95 (usually referred to as Windows 95 OSR2). n Your computer runs the Windows NT operating system

(version 3.51 or 4.0), and you performed the steps as described in Getting Started in Windows NT on page 3-5. NOTE:

To make sure you install the latest available driver, always select the Disk provided by Hardware Manufacturer or WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-9 Installation for Windows Installing the Miniport Driver the Have Disk option, to install the driver from the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM that came with your WaveLAN card. Alternatively, you can use the Browse option to navigate to the directory where you stored the set of files that you downloaded from the WaveLAN website. As Windows operating systems differ slightly (see What You Need to Know on page 3-2), some of the screens pictured in this chapter may look different from the actual display on your screen. However, the parameter settings for your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card will be similar for all Windows operating systems. 1. In the Select Network Adapter window, click the Have Disk button. 2. Ensure that the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM has been button to inserted into your computer, and click the proceed. When you downloaded the latest driver files from the WaveLAN website:

n Use the Browse option on Windows 95/98 systems, to navigate to the harddisk drive and folder where you saved the driver files. n Windows NT systems will not allow you to browse for a harddisk folder as an alternative to a floppy disk. For such systems you will need to extract the downloaded files first, and copy the extracted files to a diskette. Windows will start copying files from your Windows installation disks or CD-ROM and the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM. If the system prompts you to identify the location of files (see Figure 3-3 on page 3-11), enter the correct drive and directory, and click the button to proceed. 3. 3-10 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Installing the Miniport Driver Figure 3-3 Identify the Location of Files n For Windows system files (typically *.dll) this is usually the Windows CD-ROM. e.g. d:\cd-rom. n When your computer came with the Windows operating system factory-installed, point to the directory that contains the Windows setup files (*.cab): e.g. c:\windows\options\cabs n When the system prompts you to identify the WaveLAN Driver files (typically file names starting with the characters wv*.*), specify the drive and directory that contains your WaveLAN software:

If installing from the WaveLAN CD-ROM d:\software\adapter\pc_card\drivers\windows where d represents the drive letter of your CD-ROM. if installing files that you downloaded from the internet point to the floppy disk drive or directory where you saved the downloaded files. When you had a network adapter installed on your computer before, most of these files are already available on your hard disk drive. If you do not have the Windows CD-ROM available, you may try replacing the proposed path in the Copy files from dialog box with:

c:\windows\system or c:\windows\

WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-11 Installation for Windows Installing the Miniport Driver Network Installation 3 If this is the very first time that Networking support is installed onto your computer, the Windows operating system will prompt you to enter a computer and workgroup name. These names will be used to identify your computer on the Microsoft Network Neighborhood. Figure 3-4 Windows Network Identification Properties 1. Click the button to display the window as pictured in 2. 3. 4. Figure 3-4. In the Computer Name field, enter a unique name for your computer. In the Workgroup field, enter the name of your workgroup.

(Optional) Provide a description of the computer in the Computer Description field. For more information about setting your Windows Network Properties, consult your Windows documentation or the Windows on-line help information. 3-12 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters Setting the WaveLAN Parameters 3 When you confirm the Windows Network Identification parameters, Windows will open the parameter window for your WaveLAN adapter as pictured in Figure 3-5. On computers running the Windows NT operating system, you will see additional tab labeled Adapter, that enables you to verify and/or modify the factory-set values for the I/O Port address of your WaveLAN Adapter, and its IRQ value1. 1. Enter the values that you wrote down when running the Windows NT Diagnostics as described on page B-7. 2. Click the Continue button, to display the parameter window for your WaveLAN adapter. The WaveLAN Properties window enables you to specify the WaveLAN specific parameters, required to connect your computer to the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 network system. Which Parameters Do You Need?

3 When connecting your station to an IEEE 802.11 wireless network infrastructure, you will only need to set the following parameters:

n WaveLAN Network Name n Station Name In this Quick Installation Guide these parameters are described as the Basic WaveLAN Parameters. Looking at the WaveLAN Parameter window, you will also see a set of Advanced WaveLAN Parameters, and Power 1 For computers running the Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating system, you do not need to set these parameters. On these systems, the allocation of these device settings is controlled via the Plug & Play mechanism. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-13 Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters Management, which are described in the on-line help file of the driver and in Chapter 4 . You are advised to leave these to their default settings, unless there are special situations, for example, upon advice of a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 expert. NOTE:

Always consult your LAN Administrator for the parameter settings that apply to your network environment. Basic WaveLAN Parameters 3 The Basic WaveLAN Parameters are the minimum set of parameters that should be set to get your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 network up and running. These parameters include:

n WaveLAN Network Name n Station Name WaveLAN Network Name 3 When you wish to connect your computer to an IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure as pictured in Figure 1-3 on page 1-3 and Figure 1-4 on page 1-4, you have two options:

n n Connecting to Any Network as described on page 3-15, or Connecting to a Specific Network as described on page 3-16. The WaveLAN Network Name will determine to how your WaveLAN station will behave when powered up in an IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure. If you are unfamiliar with the two types mentioned above, please consult the section Connecting to a Network in Chapter , on page 1-17. 3-14 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters Figure 3-5 Setup WaveLAN Parameters Connecting to Any Network To connect to any IEEE 802.11 network in the vicinity of your WaveLAN computer, you can leave WaveLAN Network Name field blank, or enter the name ANY (all characters in upper-case). 3 When your WaveLAN Network name is set to ANY, your computer will attempt to establish a radio connection with any IEEE 802.11 network that provides good communications quality. You may wish to use the ANY option when:

n You operate your computer in multiple network environments, that are identified by different WaveLAN Network Names. n You do not know the WaveLAN Network Name of the network to which you would like to connect your computer. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-15 Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters Connecting to a Specific Network If you would like to connect to one specific WaveLAN Network only, enter the WaveLAN Network Name that applies to your network, for example: MY_WAVELAN_NETWORK. 3 This is the WaveLAN Network Name that the LAN Administrator programmed into the WavePOINT-II access points. Consult your LAN Administrator for the value that applies to your network. Setting up a New IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure?

When setting up a new IEEE 802.11 network, you may enter a WaveLAN Network Name of your choice. This name should also be programmed into other WaveLAN stations, and (if applicable) the WavePOINT-II access points. 3 The WaveLAN Network Name can be any alphanumeric string in the range of a to z, A to Z and 0 to 9. This string which can contain from 1 to 32 characters is case-sensitive. Example: MY_WAVELAN_NETWORK Station Name 3 The Station Name is a name that will be used to identify your WaveLAN station in the WaveLAN diagnostic tools described in Chapter 4. n When your computer runs the Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating system, enter a string of alphanumeric characters in the range of a-z, A-Z and 0-9 with a maximum of 32 characters. You are advised to use the same name as the one you entered in the Computer Name field in your Windows Network Neighborhood Properties (see Figure 3-4 on page 3-12). 3-16 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters n When your computer runs the Windows NT operating system, the Station Name field is not available. On these systems, the diagnostic tools will use the Computer Name value from the Identification tab. Connecting to an Ad-hoc Network 3 In case you do not wish to connect to a network infrastructure, but prefer to setup a small wireless workgroup as pictured in Figure 1-2 on page 1-2, you can enable the Ad-hoc Demo Mode tick box. In Ad-hoc Demo Mode, your computer will:

n n n Ignore the WaveLAN Network Name Ignore WavePOINT-II access points Fix the radio to operate at its factory-set default channel. This means that your WaveLAN IEEE station can communicate with any other WaveLAN IEEE station within its range, provided that these stations have been equipped with cards that have a matching default radio frequency (see Table A-6 on page A-8). WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-17 Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters WaveLAN Encryption Parameters 3 The encryption tab enables you to define the encryption keys that your WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card should use to:

n Decrypt wireless messages received via its wireless interface. n Encrypt data that will be transmitted via the wireless interface.

CAUTION:

The encryption feature only works with WaveLAN IEEE Silver and Gold Label PC Cards. If the PC Card in your computer is an an older type WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card which does not support encryption (typically (identified by a Bronze or White Label ), do not enable encryption. Doing so may prevent the card from normal operation. Figure 3-6 Setup WaveLAN Encryption Parameters 3-18 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Setting the WaveLAN Parameters You can identify up to 4 different key values to decrypt wireless data, and select one of these keys to encrypt wireless data transmissions. Subject to the type of WaveLAN PC Card, the key value of your choice may either be:

n n 5 alphanumeric characters in the range of a-z, A-Z and 0-

9 for Silver cards. 16 alphanumeric characters in the range of a-z, A-Z and 0-

9 for Gold cards. The alphabetical characters you select are case-sensitive. Example: Secu1 for silver cards, or Security Key1234 for Gold cards. Alternatively, you may select to enter a hexadecimal string, preceded by the characters 0xvalues, being either:

n n

10 digit hexadecimal values in the range of A-F and 0-9 for Silver cards. 32 digit hexadecimal values in the range of A-F and 0-9 for Gold cards. Example: 0xABCD1234FE for Silver cards, or 0x1234567890ABCDEF0987654321FEDCBA for Gold cards CAUTION:

To allow encrypted data communications, you must set the same encryption key values on all stations and/or access points. Carefully write down the values you enter here, and keep this note in a secure place. The values you enter on the encryption tab, will only be visible the first-time you enter the keys. After closing this tab, all key values will be displayed as xxxxxxxxxxx every time the tab is displayed again. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-19 Installation for Windows Finishing the WaveLAN Installation Finishing the WaveLAN Installation 3 When you have finished Setting the WaveLAN Parameters, click the button to proceed with the installation process. Windows will finish building the driver configuration database and copy some files from your CD-ROM or diskette to your computers hard disk. If the Windows operating system prompts you to identify the location of the Windows files, specify the drive and directory of the Windows Installation CD-ROM or diskettes (see also page 3-11). When Windows has finished the copying of files, it will prompt you to restart your computer. 1. Remove the WaveLAN software diskette from drive A:\

2. Click the button to restart your computer. Figure 3-7 Finished Setting up the Hardware After Restarting Your Computer 3 After you have restarted your computer, the Windows operating system should detect the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card (you can hear the two-tone sound of the PC Card Socket Controller). Windows will load the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Miniport driver and will open with a dialog box that enables you to enter a user name and password. The password you enter here will be the one used to log into the Windows Network Neighborhood. 3-20 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Working with WaveLAN & Windows Working with WaveLAN & Windows 3 View Other WaveLAN Stations 3 When multiple WaveLAN stations are up-and-running in your wireless network, you can use the procedure described below to display the other computers:

1. Start Windows Explorer. 2. Scroll down the list of files and folders to look for the item Network Neighborhood. 3. Double-click the Network Neighborhood item to display all stations in your Microsoft Networking Group. 4. To display other workgroups in the network environment, 5. double-click the Entire Network icon. If there is a second network operating system running in your network environment (for example a Novell NetWare network), the Entire Network window, will also display available servers running under the second network operating system. If you click on these servers, you may be asked to enter your user name and password that apply to the other network operating system If you cannot find other (WaveLAN) networked computers, verify whether or not the other WaveLAN computers are:

n Powered up and logged on to the network. n Configured to operate with an identical:

Networking Protocol. WaveLAN Network Name To verify the radio connection with other stations, you can also run the Monitoring Options as described in Chapter 5 . WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-21 Installation for Windows Working with WaveLAN & Windows Selecting the Networking Protocol 3 Upon initial installation, your Windows operating system will typically install a basic set of networking protocols. You may need to check whether the network installation process:

n Truly added the protocols required to communicate with other computers in your network environment. n Configured the appropriate protocol settings to allow communication within your networking environment. Infrastructure Networks 3 When connecting your station to a network infrastructure, you will usually need additional networking protocols, according to the network operating system used within your LAN environment. The most common protocols are:

n IPX/SPX compatible protocols when your networking environment is using the Novell NetWare network operating system. n NetBEUI when you would like to use file and printer sharing, as supported by Microsoft Networking for Windows Workgroups. TCP/IP when you would like to connect your computer to a network that uses IP addressing, and/or you would like to connect to the internet. n These networking protocols can operate simultaneously with any other networking protocol. Ad-hoc Workgroup Networks 3 When connecting your station to an ad-hoc wireless workgroup, you will also need a networking protocol that will allow your station to participate in peer-to-peer networking. 3-22 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installation for Windows Working with WaveLAN & Windows The most common protocols are:

n n NetBEUI when you would like to use file and printer sharing, as supported by Microsoft Networking for Windows Workgroups. TCP/IP when you would like to use local webserver capabilities that allow participants to surf (designated areas of) one-anothers disk-drives using an Internet Browser. When using the TCP/IP protocol, each workgroup participant must be identified by a unique IP Address value. Consult your Microsoft documentation for more information about protocols and peer-to-peer networking. Verifying the Current Protocol Setting 3 To verify whether your station has been configured for the correct type of network and networking protocols:

button from the Windows Taskbar. 1. Click the 2. Click on Settings, then Control Panel. 3. 4. Verify that the list of network components includes the In the Control Panel, double-click the Network icon. following items:

n Client for Microsoft Networks.

(optional) Client for NetWare Networks. n If the item of your choice is already available, click the button to exit this configuration screen and skip to the next step. If the items you require are missing, click the Add button and select Add Client to add the client software of the networking software that you would like to install. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 3-23 Installation for Windows Working with WaveLAN & Windows 5. When the proper Client software is installed, but you do not see the required protocols, click the Add button, and follow the instructions of the Windows operating system as they appear on your screen. Consult your LAN Administrator for more help or information about configuring the IPX/SPX and/or TCP/IP properties. Display or Modify WaveLAN Parameters 3 If you would like to view or modify WaveLAN parameters, for example because you would like to connect to another network or type of network, proceed as follows:

button from the Windows Taskbar. 1. Click the 2. Click on Settings, and then on Control Panel. 3. Double-click the Network icon. 4. In the Network Properties Window, select the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Adapter and click the Properties button.

(Optional) Change the parameters you would like to modify, and click the the button to confirm your changes, or button to ignore your modifications. n n 5. 3-24 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Contents Introduction MAC Address AP Density Transmit Rate The Auto Transmit Rate Select Mechanism The User-defined Transmit Rate Medium Reservation n About the Hidden Station Problem n About the Medium Reservation Mechanism Power Management Enable Power Management:

n Maximum Sleep Duration n Receive All Multicasts 4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-11 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-15 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Introduction 4 4 In most network environments you will not need to change the settings of the Advanced Parameters, as their default settings will prove most efficient for normal network communications. Figure 4-1 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters In special situations however, for example upon advice of an IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN expert, you may wish to change the defaults of the parameters described in this chapter. To display the parameters, follow the instructions as described under Display or Modify WaveLAN Parameters on page 3-24. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-1 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters MAC Address MAC Address 4 All WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Cards have a unique Universal MAC Address that is used to identify your computer on the network. n For most network operating systems, you will not need to change this parameter, i.e. you can leave this field blank. n When your network system uses a Local MAC Addressing scheme, you may need to assign a Local MAC Address value to the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card of your computer. Valid address values are 12-digit, hexadecimal values, where the 2nd digit must be either 2, 6, A, or E. Consult your LAN Administrator to find out whether your network requires Local MAC Addresses, and (if applicable) to obtain a unique Local MAC Address value. NOTE:

The Access Control security feature for WavePOINT-II access points (described on page 6-3) does not work in systems that use Local MAC Addressing. If you would like to use Access Control, you must disable Local MAC Addressing. If you do not wish to assign a Local MAC Address, you should leave the MAC Address field blank, or enter the value 0 (zero). 4-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters AP Density AP Density 4 The Access Point Density parameter controls the roaming sensitivity of your wireless station. This parameter should be set according to match:

n n The density of the WavePOINT-II access points that have been installed throughout the wireless network area, and The setting of this parameter in the configuration of the access points. Figure 4-2 Access Point Density Parameter Consult your LAN Administrator for the appropriate values that apply to your network. Valid values are:

Low (default) n n Medium n High

CAUTION:

Using non-matching values may seriously affect wireless performance of your wireless station. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-3 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Transmit Rate Transmit Rate 4 The actual data transmission speed of your WaveLAN device is subject to the following criteria:

n n n The type of WaveLAN IEEE cards at both ends of the wireless link, being:

n n The card inserted into your computer, and The card inserted into the WavePOINT-II or, the peer-to-peer partner in an Ad-hoc network. The communications quality of the wireless link. The user-defined preference for the data Transmit Rate. NOTE:

Transmissions at high data rates do not cover the same distances as wireless data transmitted at Standard or Low data rates (see Table A-4 on page A-5). When upgrading from standard WaveLAN cards to Turbo cards, you may need to perform a site survey again to verify that the entire coverage area allows for data transmissions at the highest transmit rates. The Auto Transmit Rate Select Mechanism 4 In most networking scenarios, you will see that the factory-set default High will prove the most efficient. Whenever your card communicates via the wireless medium it will:

n Sense the maximum transmit rate as supported by both communication partners, and switch to that Transmit Rate. n Determine if the communication quality allows for communicating at this data rate. 4-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Transmit Rate Transmissions at lower data speeds are usually more reliable. Therefore when the communications quality drops beneath a certain level, the WaveLAN cards will automatically switch to a lower data rate. When the communications quality improves again, both WaveLAN cards will gradually increase the data rate again, until they have reached the highest available Transmit Rate as supported by both cards. The User-defined Transmit Rate 4 If you wish to balance speed versus reliability, you can also select a user-defined preference from the following four options:

n High (default) n Medium n Standard n Low Figure 4-3 WaveLAN Transmit Rate WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-5 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Transmit Rate Optionally, you can select to disable the Auto-Transmit Rate Select mechanism, by fixing the Transmit Rate to the selected user-

defined preference. You are advised however to do so only in special circumstances, typically upon advice of a WaveLAN IEEE expert or WaveLAN Technical Support representative. n Use the default High with Auto-Transmit Rate Select rate

(i.e. the Fixed tick box is cleared) to in regular networking environments. This setting will allow your WaveLAN card to operate at the maximum data rate as supported by the hardware:

Ethernet equivalent speed for WaveLAN IEEE Turbo cards. IEEE 802.11 Standard speed for regular WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 cards. n Use High - Fixed data rate only in networking environments where:

You are certain that all wireless devices can communicate at the highest Transmit Rate, and Where performance appears to slow down as a result of many retransmissions, even though the wireless coverage provides an Excellent Radio Connection. This situation may occur in exceptional cases where for example Microwave ovens in the WaveLAN Signal path interfere with WaveLAN data communication. n Use Standard in Ad-hoc wireless workgroups, where the wireless peers in the workgroup have been equipped with standard WaveLAN IEEE adapters, that do not support the Medium and High data rates. n Use Low - Fixed only in networking environments where range of the wireless connection is more important than speed. This setting will instruct your WaveLAN adapter to conserve resources by not attempting to (re-)transmit data at higher data rates. 4-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Transmit Rate NOTE:

The actual transmit rates High and Medium are only supported by WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Turbo cards. Regular WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 adapter cards that do not support these transmit rates, will interpret the settings High and Medium in the same way as the setting Standard. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-7 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Medium Reservation Medium Reservation 4 It is normal behavior for WaveLAN stations to defer transmissions automatically when they sense that another WaveLAN device is using the wireless medium. This behavior also referred to as the Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance protocol (CSMA/CA) will avoid that wireless messages would collide in situations where two or more stations would start transmissions at the same time. The Medium Reservation mechanism enables you to improve wireless performance in network environments where the CSMA/

CA protocol would fail due to the hidden station problem as pictured in Figure 4-4 on page 4-9. Medium Reservation may provide a solution for networks where:

n The density of WaveLAN stations and WavePOINT-II access points is very low. n You witness poor network performance due to excessive frame collisions at the WavePOINT-II access points. About the Hidden Station Problem 4 A hidden station is a situation in which two stations are within range of the same WavePOINT-II, but are not within range of each other. Figure 4-4 on page 4-9 illustrates an example of the Hidden Station problem. Both Station A and Station B are within range of the WavePOINT-II access point however, Station B cannot hear Station A, therefore Station A is a hidden station for Station B. 4-8 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Medium Reservation Figure 4-4 The Hidden Station Problem When Station B starts to communicate with the WavePOINT-II access point, it might not notice that Station A is already using the wireless medium. When Station A and Station B send messages at the same time, they might collide when arriving simultaneously at the WavePOINT-II access point. The collision will most certainly result in a loss of messages for both stations. In situations as pictured Figure 4-4, Medium Reservation may provide a solution to prevent message collisions by handing over transmission control to the WavePOINT-II access point. Troubleshooting a Hidden Station problem usually provides the best results when it is performed on the suspected WaveLAN Client stations that suffer from errors as a result of the hidden station problem. When configuring the WaveLAN card parameters (in the PC Card properties window) you can set the Medium Reservation parameter to either:

n n Hidden Station, or Off WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-9 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Medium Reservation Figure 4-5 Medium Reservation Parameters You can enable Medium Reservation on individual stations, i.e. the setting of this parameter does not have to be the same for all WaveLAN devices in your network. Figure 4-6 Medium Reservation Request to Send 4-10 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Medium Reservation About the Medium Reservation Mechanism 4 When you enable Medium Reservation on a suspect hidden station, this WaveLAN station and its WavePOINT-II access point will use a Request to Send/Clear to Send protocol (RTS/CTS). n The station will send an RTS to the WavePOINT-II device, that will include information about the length of the frame that the station would like to transmit (see Figure 4-6). n Upon receipt, the WavePOINT-II device will respond with a CTS message to all stations within its range to:

Notify all other stations to defer transmissions for the time-

frame of the requested transmission. Confirm the requestor station that the WavePOINT-II has checked the medium for availability, and has reserved it for the time-frame of the requested transmission. The CTS process is Figure 4-7 on page 4-11. Figure 4-7 Medium Reservation Clear to Send WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-11 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Medium Reservation NOTE:

In most networking environments it is very unlikely that you will need to enable Medium Reservation on the WavePOINT-II to prevent collisions. Since all stations connected to a WavePOINT-II device are typically within range of the WavePOINT-II device they should be able to sense whenever the WavePOINT-II is using the medium to transmit messages via the wireless medium. Enabling Medium Reservation on the WavePOINT-II would require the WavePOINT-II to ask for a CTS for every message that it wishes to forward to stations within its range, even if it is forwarding traffic between stations that belong to the same wireless cell. This might cause redundant network overhead that could negatively affect the throughput performance instead of providing a remedy. 4-12 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Power Management Power Management 4 The Power Management option on your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card is designed to conserve battery life of your portable computing device. When Power Management is enabled, your WaveLAN card will go into sleep mode, to minimize power consumption. While in sleep mode, all network traffic addressed to your station will be buffered in the WavePOINT-II unit. At regular intervals, your WaveLAN card will wake up to verify whether there is information buffered at the WavePOINT-II access point. n n If there is no traffic, your WaveLAN card will return to power-

saving sleep mode. If there is buffered traffic, the station will collect it and return to sleep mode. The Power Management feature is best suited for transaction-

based processing. In network environments characterized by heavy data traffic, enabling Power Management may affect throughput performance as perceived at the wireless station. NOTE:

Power Management requires dedicated support from the WavePOINT-II access points. Previously purchased/

installed WavePOINT-II access points may not yet support buffering of traffic for wireless clients in sleep mode. Before enabling Power Management on your WaveLAN computer, please consult your LAN Administrator to verify whether the WavePOINT-II access points have been upgraded to support this feature. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 4-13 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Power Management Enable Power Management:

4 1. Right click the Network Neighborhood icon, and select Properties. 2. Select the WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card, and click Properties. 3. Select the Power Management tab 4. Enable Card Power Management. Figure 4-8 WaveLAN Power Management Parameters When Power Management is enabled, the Power LED will flicker, as compared to a stable green Power LED for the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card not utilizing the Power Management feature. To manage the power consumption of your WaveLAN card, you will use the following PC Card property settings:

n Maximum Sleep Duration n Receive All Multicasts 4-14 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Installing WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Installing WaveMANAGER/CLIENT 5 To install the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE software:

1. Insert the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM in the station that you have designated as the WaveMANAGER Station. If you downloaded the software from the web, please refer to the installation instructions found on the web. 2. Select Run from Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT Start menu. 3. Use the option Browse to navigate to the CD-ROM drive and folder that contains the installation files for your WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program:

This is typically: software\adapter\pc_card\tools\windows if you are installing form the WaveLAN Software CD-ROM 4. Select the file setup.exe and click OK to return to the Start menu. 5. Click OK again to start the installation program. If you had a previous version of the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program installed, it will be overwritten. 6. Follow the instructions of the setup program that are displayed on the screen. The installation program will:

n Create a WaveMANAGER folder on your computers hard disk, typically:

c:\program files\wavelan\wavemanager\client ieee. n Copy the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program with the associated on-line help files to this folder, and n Create an icon on the Programs menu. 5-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT 5 To start WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE:

1. Click the button in the Windows Task bar. 2. Click on Programs and then select WaveLAN. 3. In the list of WaveLAN program files select WaveMANAGER CLIENT IEEE to start the diagnostic utility. The opening window of WaveMANAGER/CLIENT will give a general indication of the wireless connection from your WaveMANAGER/CLIENT station to the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure. Looking at this window you will be able to:

n Determine whether your card is functioning properly. n Determine the WaveLAN Network to which your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card has established a connection. n Assess the communications quality with the selected IEEE 802.11 network. Monitoring Options 5 WaveMANAGER/CLIENT offers you various options to investigate wireless performance of your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN network:

n n n The WaveLAN Status/Function Window The WaveLAN Link Test The WaveLAN Card Diagnostics This chapter will provide a set of guidelines to determine which tool to use in your situation. For more detailed information about each of the diagnostic options and screens, you are advised to consult the on-line help file of the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-3 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT To access context-sensitive help in the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program file:

n Click the n Press the button on your screen, or F1 function key on your keyboard. What to Monitor 5 To analyze wireless performance of your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN network there are two major diagnostic indicators:

n n The Communications Quality of the radio connection. The Data Throughput Efficiency of your wireless connection. Communications Quality 5 The radio communications quality is expressed in the Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR). When communications quality is good, in most situations the data throughput efficiency will be good as well. When the communications quality of the radio connection is poor, this is usually the result of:

n A poor WaveLAN Signal Level, for example when your wireless station and access points are too far apart, or n A high level of interference (Noise Level), usually caused by other (wireless) devices emitting radio signals in the same frequency band as your WaveLAN adapter card. To monitor the communications quality of your connection to the network, the Link Test tool in WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE actively exchanges messages to test the quality of the link. If your computer is idle, you can see the Transmit/Receive LED flickering due to these test messages. (These are test messages only; no email or other files are sent as part of the Link Testing). 5-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT To quickly view the quality of your communication with the network, open the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program, and you can quickly view the quality of the link in two different locations:

n On the opening WaveMANAGER/CLIENT window, there is a visual Green/Yellow/Red indicator along with a text description of the connection (Good, Adequate, Poor). n On the Windows Taskbar, an icon (in the shape of a dish antenna) will indicate whether the connection is Good (Green), Adequate (Yellow) or Poor (Red). When you minimize the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program, you can still view the communications quality of your connection. You will notice a small icon next in the right corner of your Windows Taskbar. This icon will display either Green (Good connection), Yellow (adequate) or Red (poor) Data Throughput Efficiency 5 The Data Throughput Efficiency is largely determined by:

n n The communications quality of the radio connection The congestion of the medium A poor communications quality will most likely affect the data throughput efficiency. When communications quality is poor it is likely that messages may get lost. Losing some messages is not dramatic, as your WaveLAN network adapter will automatically retransmit lost data frames. Losing many frames however may result in longer network response times, as numerous retransmissions will require more time and bandwidth to maintain successful network communication, while contributing to the congestion of the medium. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-5 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Running WaveMANAGER/CLIENT When many wireless stations try to communicate simultaneously, the congestion of the medium might slow down network performance. The network performance may slow down because:

n WaveLAN stations defer data transmissions for one another to avoid frame collisions n WaveLAN stations need to retransmit frames repeatedly because initial transmissions failed, for example due to a frame collision. How to analyze Data Throughput Efficiency is described under WaveLAN Link Test on page 5-8. Choosing your WaveMANAGER Tool 5 To monitor performance of your WaveLAN adapter and your IEEE 802.11 network, you can select either one of the following WaveMANAGER/CLIENT options:

n The WaveLAN Status/Function Window when you are only interested in the general performance of your wireless connection. n When you are troubleshooting wireless performance, or when you would like to perform more thorough investigations select:

Link Test to investigate a specific connection or location in detail, or n n WaveLAN Card Diagnostics, when you suspect a failure of your card. 5-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Status/Function Window WaveLAN Status/Function Window 5 The WaveMANAGER/CLIENT always opens with a general status window, that informs about whether your WaveLAN card managed to connect to an IEEE 802.11 network. This window will display:

n n n The name of the network to which you are currently connected. The communications quality of the radio connection between your station and the network. The Impact of the communications quality on your network communication. Figure 5-1 WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Status Window Optionally you can use one of the available buttons to:

n Click the Advice button to troubleshoot unexpected results. n Start the WaveLAN Link Test. n Use the Card Diagnostics option when the Status window indicates that the WaveLAN Card is not functioning properly. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-7 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Link Test WaveLAN Link Test 5 You can use the Link Test to investigate the specific link between a WaveLAN computer and its WavePOINT-II unit in your WaveLAN Infrastructure environment (see Figure 1-3 on page 1-3). The Link Test mode enables you to investigate:

n n The Communications Quality of the radio connection The Data Throughput Efficiency of the radio connection. When you run the Link Test mode while roaming throughout the network environment, you will notice that the Link Test Partner will change according to the WavePOINT-II devices that service the wireless areas that you pass. Figure 5-2 WaveMANAGER Link Test 5-8 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Link Test Testing Radio Communications Quality 5 The primary indicator to monitor is the communications quality of the radio connection. This value is expressed in a Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR). The SNR indicator will change color in the range Green, Yellow and Red, according to communications quality result as identified below:

Color n Green Description Communication quality is Good. No intervention is required. n Yellow Communications quality is Adequate. n Red No intervention is required. Communications quality is Poor and requires user-

intervention (see Appendix B Troubleshooting) When the SNR is rated as Good or Adequate the performance of your WaveLAN station will be good as well. When SNR is rated Poor you may need to consider one of the options proposed by the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT tool. To access WaveMANAGER/CLIENT tips for troubleshooting click the Advice button. Advice may include:

n Optimizing antenna placement to increase the WaveLAN Signal Level, or n Eliminating sources of interference to decrease the Noise Level that affects the Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR). Use the indicators for Signal Level and Noise Level to determine the cause of reduced performance. The panels for Your Station and the Link Test Partner will help you to identify where you should start optimizing antenna placement or eliminating interference. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-9 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Link Test Testing Data Throughput Efficiency 5 The secondary indicator for wireless performance is the Data Throughput Efficiency of the radio connection. Data Throughput Efficiency is measured in:

n n High, Medium, Standard & Low Data Rates Sent, Received & Lost Messages High, Medium, Standard & Low Data Rates 5 WaveLAN/IEEE PC Cards use an automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism to ensure reliable communications:

n When communicating with another wireless IEEE 802.11 compliant LAN device, both devices will automatically synchronize their data rate to the highest compatible transmit rate. n As data communications at lower speeds may travel larger distances that communications at high speed, the WaveLAN adapters will automatically switch to a lower data rate when one or both of the two link partners are moving away from one another. NOTE:

When running a network with multiple types of WaveLAN PC Cards, all communications between the different types of PC Cards will be at the Standard speed (see About Using Different Card Types on page 1-7). When running the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Link Test, the diagnostic tallies will inform you at which speed the both Link test partners synchronized their data transmissions. 5-10 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Link Test You can use these tallies to determine whether you might need to:

n Move wireless stations closer to the WavePOINT-II access point (or together when operating in an Ad-hoc Wireless Workgroup as pictured in Figure 1-2 on page 1-2). n Verify the type of card installed at both Link Test Partners, for example by displaying the information on the "Configuration Info tab. Sent, Received & Lost Messages 5 Messages Sent/Received/Lost, displayed on the left-bottom side of the Link Test window. When a data transmission fails, the WaveLAN card will automatically retransmit the data. When the number of Messages Lost is relatively high, this may indicate a problem that is either related to:

n A poor Signal to Noise Ratio (SNR), or Frame collisions, due to a congestion of the medium. n When SNR is low and the number of Messages Lost is high, the problem is most likely due to a poor Communications Quality, for example because your station and the Link Test Partner are too far apart, or because the connection suffers from a source of interference (Noise) that affects the quality of your communications. However when SNR is rated Good or Adequate but you still witness a relatively large number of lost messages, this might indicate:

n A very busy network, where many stations try to access the WaveLAN medium at the same time. n A microwave oven in the signal path is causing short bursts of interference. This noise might not be displayed by the Noise Level indicator, but still be forcing the WaveLAN stations to retransmit frames over and over again. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-11 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Link Test n Another station is suffering from a Poor communications quality, and consequently sending many retransmissions n Numerous frame collisions occur due to a hidden station problem. You are advised to run the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Link Test from multiple stations to determine whether:

n n This problem is a local problem, i.e. for one station only, or This problem is experienced by all stations. When all stations suffer from poor Data Throughput Efficiency, despite a Good SNR value, investigate what is causing the heavy traffic load. Link Test Options 5 To investigate Link Test results in more detail, you can use one of the following options:

Freeze the display by clicking the Freeze button. n n Display Radio Communications Quality in a line-chart graphic, n by selecting the Link Test History window. Log measurement results to a disk file (see Advanced User Options on page 5-14). 5-12 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance WaveLAN Card Diagnostics WaveLAN Card Diagnostics 5 The Card Diagnostics enables you to:

n Run a Card Test. n Display a set of communication statistics. n Display the configuration settings of your card

(Enhanced Mode only, see Advanced User Options). You will need to run the Card Test only in situations where the Status window (as pictured in Figure 5-1 on page 5-7) reports a card failure, or when you suspect a configuration mismatch.

CAUTION:

Running the Card Test may temporarily disrupt the communication of your computer with the network. In exceptional cases you may lose your network connection. When this is the case, restart the computer to restore your network connection. When contacting WaveLAN Technical Support, the Card Test results may help the support representative determine the cause of a malfunctioning device. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-13 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Advanced User Options Advanced User Options 5 Basic Mode versus Enhanced Mode 5 The default configuration of your WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program will provide all the diagnostic information that you would need to perform standard diagnostic routines:

n Verify if the card is functioning properly. n Verify if your WaveLAN station is within range of the IEEE 802.11 network. n Determine or optimize placement of WavePOINT-II access points. This configuration setting also enables you to perform basic troubleshooting routines such as n Optimizing antenna placement. n Detecting the occurrence of in-band interference (noise). When you are an experienced user of WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 products, you may be interested in using the Enhance Mode of WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE. The Enhanced Mode option is typically used by skilled LAN Administrators or Network Installation Technicians in situations where you are troubleshooting a problem related to WaveLAN networking. This mode will enable you to:

n Display the Configuration Settings of your WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT station and the WavePOINT-II access point. n Display the tallies of standard communication statistics, such as Unicast/Multicast Frames, Fragments or the number of deferred Transmissions or Communication Errors. n Display the Communication Protocol settings. n Save measurement data to a log file as described in Logging Measurement Data on page 5-15. 5-14 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Advanced User Options Enabling/Disabling Enhanced Mode 5 1. Start the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program. 2. Open the Status/Functions window (pictured in Figure 5-1 on page 5-7) 3. Click the Options button. 4. Select or clear the Enhanced Mode check box. 5. Click OK to confirm and return to the WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT program. NOTE:

Optionally, you can also place a check-mark in the Skip Initial Screen box, when you would like to open the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program directly to the Status/Function screen. Logging Measurement Data 5 The WaveMANAGER/CLIENT enables you to save measurement results of your Link Test session to a log file. You can use this log file for example to:

n Evaluate the results at a later stage. n Compare the results with previous measurements. n Send the measurement results to your WaveLAN Support representative when troubleshooting a specific problem. Comparison of measurement data with previous measurements may help you investigate the performance of your wireless LAN over a period of time, for example to analyze the consequences of relocated network equipment. WaveMANAGER/CLIENT log files are saved in Comma Separated Value (CSV) file format. You can read these files with any ASCII editor, or import the data into any standard spreadsheet or database application. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-15 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Advanced User Options Logging Options 5 To enable logging option, you must set the WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT to Enhanced Mode as described in Enabling/Disabling Enhanced Mode on page 5-15. Once the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT runs in Enhanced Mode, you can set the log option to store measurement data manually, or automatically at regular intervals. n Use manual when you would like to save measurement data at specific locations and moments, e.g. when you are investigating a particular source of interference. n Use automatic when you would like to collect measurement data on network performance over a longer period of time. This may be useful if you wish to analyze recurring events or variation in values. Automatic logging is typically used when the WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT station is running a Link Test at a particular location. Setting the Logging Options 5 To set the logging options, click the Log Settings tab in Link Test window. In both modes, the measurement data will be saved in the file entered in the Path and file name field. Each time new data is saved, this information is added to the existing file. If you wish to save the data in a new file, use this field to enter a new file name. 5-16 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Advanced User Options Figure 5-3 Logging Setup Dialog Box Start or Stop Logging 5 When you have set the Logging Options, the WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT will create a button on the lower-right side of the diagnostic window. Depending on your choice of logging option, this button will read:

n n Log Once for the manual log option, or Start for the automatic log option. If you selected the manual option, click the Log Once button each time you wish to save measurement data. For the automatic option, click the Start button. Click this button again to stop the logging function. To change the logging option, proceed as described in Setting the Logging Options on page 5-16. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 5-17 Monitoring WaveLAN Performance Advanced User Options 5-18 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide WaveLAN Security Options Contents Introduction Closing the Infrastructure Wireless Access Control Wireless Data Encryption 6 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 WaveLAN Security Options Introduction 6 6 Wireless network systems that comply to the IEEE 802.11 standard for wireless LANs, allow computing devices to attempt to establish a wireless (radio) connection to the network, as easy as possible. Such a wireless connection however, only refers to a physical connection to the LAN, similar to a cable that is pulled between an Ethernet station and a hub, or patch panel. The physical connection will not provide access to networking data or services, which would typically require a station to:

n Have the appropriate network operating system software installed. Log on to the network, using a login name and password. n Besides standard security measures as supported by most of todays network operating systems, the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 system allows you to implement a number of additional security options, that can help to prevent unauthorized access to your network, and network data. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 6-1 WaveLAN Security Options Introduction Examples of such additional WaveLAN security measures are:

n n n Closing the Infrastructure described on page 6-2. Wireless Access Control described on page 6-3. Wireless Data Encryption described on page 6-4. For more detailed information on operating system security measures, please refer to the documentation that came with the network operating system, or consult the reseller of your LAN software.l Closing the Infrastructure 6 The IEEE 802.11 standard on wireless LANs was designed to allow mobile computing devices to establish a (radio) connection to a Local Area Network (LAN) as easy as possible. This means that mobile users that do not know the correct WaveLAN Network Name can use the value ANY, or use an empty string for the network name to establish a radio connection with the nearest access point. Although such a physical connection does not provide access to network data without the appropriate username and password, in some occasions, you may wish to restrict access to the network resources in a more stringent way. Lucent Technologies WavePOINT-II access points, allow you to close the wireless infrastructure via a special setting of the access point(s). Doing so, the WavePOINT-II devices will:

n n Ignore radio association request from users that have configured their WaveLAN IEEE device to use the value ANY Ignore radio association request from users that use a non-

Lucent WaveLAN adapter. 6-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide WaveLAN Security Options Introduction This means that the WavePOINT-II will only allow WaveLAN IEEE stations that have been configured with the correct WaveLAN Network Name to establish a radio connection. NOTE:

The Closed option is not fully compliant with the IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANs. For more information please consult the WaveMANAGER IEEE Users Guide that was shipped with your WavePOINT-II access point(s), or download the latest copy from the WaveLAN website. Wireless Access Control 6 When your IEEE 802.11 compliant infrastructure includes WavePOINT-

II access points, you are advised to use the WaveLAN Access Control feature of your WavePOINT-II access points to restrict wireless access to the network to authorized stations only. Authorized stations are listed by the MAC Address of their WaveLAN card in an Access Control Table. The MAC Address of your WaveLAN Card is printed on a label on the backside of your WaveLAN PC Card. To enable the Access Control feature, the LAN Administrator must:

1. Determine which WaveLAN cards will be authorized to communicate with the WavePOINT-II access points. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 6-3 WaveLAN Security Options Introduction 2. Enter the MAC Address of these cards into an Access Control Table file. 3. Load the Access Control Table file into all WavePOINT-II access points that belong to the network infrastructure. With the Access Control file loaded, the WavePOINT-II access points will:

n Only forward wireless data to/from Authorized Stations that n are identified in the Access Control table file, and Ignore all request to forward data from/to stations that use a WaveLAN card of which the MAC Address is not listed in the Access Control table file. Consult your LAN Administrator to verify whether your network infrastructure uses the WavePOINT-II Access Control feature. If this is the case, the LAN Administrator should add the MAC Address of your card to the Access Control Table. The MAC Address of your WaveLAN card is printed on a label on the back-side of your WaveLAN card. Wireless Data Encryption 6 If you would like to add an extra security layer to your wireless communication, you can optionally install a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 system that supports wireless data encryption. Two types of WaveLAN PC Cards allow you to build such a system:

n WaveLAN/IEEE Silver Label Cards (described on page 1-6). n WaveLAN/IEEE Gold Label Cards (described on page 1-7). To install such a system, all devices in your wireless network, must be equipped with WaveLAN/IEEE PC Cards that support encryption. 6-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide WaveLAN Security Options Introduction n Silver cards support the IEEE compliant "Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) data encryption, based upon the 64 bit RC4 encryption algorithm. n Gold cards support an enhanced type of data encryption, based upon the 128 bit RC4 algorithm. When enabling encryption, the WaveLAN interface of your wireless stations and/or WavePOINT-II Access Points, will encrypt all data that will be transmitted via the wireless intrerface. n The encryption feature allows you to define up to four encryption keys to decypher messages received via the wireless interface. n You can select one of these four keys to encrypt the wireless data tranmissions. If you plan to use data encryption within your network, all stations and access points must be:

n Equipped with a WaveLAN PC Card that supports encryption. n Configured with a matchinng set of encryption keys. The option to specify up to four decryption keys allows you to refresh the key values at regular intervals (for example starting at the access points) without the necessity to update all station at the same time. For information about setting encryption key parameters, please consult the section WaveLAN Encryption Parameters on page 3-18 as described in Chapter 3. NOTE:

Early models of the WaveLAN/IEEE Silver PC Cards,

(typically shipped prior to July 1999), may need an update of the card firmware to v4.08 or higher, to enable the encryption feature. This update for Silver Cards, is managed via a dedicated "WaveLAN Station Update" tool

(WSU version 4.08 or higher) that can be downloaded from the WaveLAN website. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide 6-5 Card Specifications Contents Physical Specifications Networking Characteristics Radio Characteristics Supported Frequency Sub-bands WaveLAN PC Card Types About Previously Purchased Cards n Standard IEEE 802.11 PC Cards n About the IEEE 802.11 Turbo Card n About the Fixed wireless PC Card Can I Upgrade WaveLAN Cards?

A A-1 A-2 A-3 A-7 A-9 A-9 1-9 1-11 1-11 1-12 Card Specifications A Physical Specifications A Table A-1 Physical Specifications Form Factor PC Card Type-II Extended Color1 n Black for WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Cards

(both Gold and Silver Label) n Red for IEEE Fixed Wireless PC Cards

(LxWxH) 117.8 x 53.95 x 8.7 mm 45 gram (PC Card) Dimensions Weight Temperature & Humidity Operation Transit Storage 1 0 to 55 C2

-20 to 70 C

-10 to 60 C maximum humidity 95%

15 to 95% (no condensation allowed) 10 to 90% (no condensation allowed) Color of the extended antenna is related to the Radio Characteristics described on page A-3 Although the card may still operate in the range of -20 to 70 C, operation outside the range of 0 to 55 C may no longer be according to specifications. 2 Table A-2 Power Characteristics Doze Mode Receive Mode Transmit Mode Power Supply 10 mA 180 mA 280 mA 5 V WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card A-1 Card Specifications Networking Characteristics Networking Characteristics A Table A-3 Networking Characteristics Compatibility Network Operating System Host Operating System Media Access Protocol Data Rate IEEE 802.11 Standard for Wireless LANS (DSSS) n Novell Client 3.x & 4.x n Microsoft Windows Networking Microsoft Windows 95/98 and Windows NT:

n NDIS Miniport Driver MS-DOS & Microsoft Windows 3.x:

n DOS ODI Driver n Packet Driver Windows CE n Windows CE v.2.0 & 2.11 Apple Macintosh Operating Systems:

n Apple PowerBook G3 CSMA/CA (Collision Avoidance) with Acknowledgment (ACK) n High n Medium n Standard n Low The cards use an automatic Transmit Rate Select mechanism. Optionally the user can choose the fix the transmit rate at a specific speed. 11 Mb/s 5.5 Mb/s 2 Mb/s 1 Mb/s A-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Card Specifications Radio Characteristics Radio Characteristics A Radio Characteristics of WaveLAN adapter cards may vary according to:

n n The country where the product was purchased. The type of product that was purchased. Wireless communication is often subject to local radio regulations. Although WaveLAN wireless networking products have been designed for operation in the license-free 2.4 GHz band, local radio regulations may impose a number of limitations to the use of wireless communication equipment. To comply with such regulations, WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 cards are marketed with dedicated channel-sets with a number of factory-

programmed channels identified by the following acronyms:

n n ETS for countries that adhere to the regulations as defined by the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). FCC for countries that adhere to the regulations as defined by the US Federal Communications Commission (FCC). FR for France, and JP for Japan. n n The acronym of the channel-set supported by your card is printed on a label on the back-side of your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 card

(see Table A-6 on page A-8 for a detailed list of channels). If you plan to install and use WaveLAN adapter cards to connect a WavePOINT-II or other computing device to an outdoor antenna installation, additional regulations may apply. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card A-3 Card Specifications Radio Characteristics To comply with such regulations Lucent Technologies offers two types of WaveLAN adapter cards:

n n In countries that adhere to the FCC regulations, you can use the standard black-colored WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 card. In countries that adhere to the ETSI regulations, including France and Japan, you must select the card-type based upon the antenna that will be used:

n You can use the black-colored WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 card when connecting the device to standard Lucent omni-

directional antennas. n You must use the red-colored IEEE Fixed Wireless PC Card when connecting the device to the standard Lucent 14 dBi directional antenna for outdoor use. When you ordered a WaveACCESS LINK WP-II kit1 for outdoor antenna installations, your kit includes the correct card type that complies with the regulations that apply in your country.

WARNING:

At all times, it will be the responsibility of the end-user to ensure that an outdoor antenna installation complies with local radio regulations. The end-user must verify that:

n The antenna installer is aware of these regulations. n The correct type of WaveLAN card is used to connect the host device to the outdoor antenna installation. Lucent Technologies and its resellers or distributors are not liable for any damage or violation of government regulations that may arise from failing to comply with these guidelines. 1 Formerly identified as the WaveLAN IEEE PTP Kit A-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card i R a d o C h a r a c t e r i s t i c s C a r d S p e c i f i c a t i o n s A

5 Table A-4 Radio Characteristics R-F Frequency Band Number of selectable sub-channels Modulation Technique 2.4 GHz (2400-2500 MHz) North America (FCC) Europe (ETS) France (FR) Japan (JP) Other Countries:

11 13 4 1 n FCC 11 n ETS 13 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum n CCK for High & Medium Transmit Rate n DQPSK for Standard Transmit Rate n DBPSK for Low Transmit Rate 11-chip Barker Sequence Better than 10-5 15 dBm W a v e L A N

I E E E T u r b o 1 1 M b P C C a r d Spreading Bit Error Rate (BER) Nominal Output Power Range (100 bytes User Data) /

Transmit Rate Open Office Environment 160 m (525 ft.) Semi-Open Office Environment 50 m (165 ft.) Closed Office 25 m (80 ft.) Receiver Sensitivity

-83 dBm Delay Spread (at FER of <1%) 65 ns High Speed 11 Mb/s Medium Speed Standard Speed Low Speed 5.5 Mb/s 270 m (885 ft.) 70 m (230 ft.) 35 m (115 ft.)

-87 dBm 225 ns 2 Mb/s 1 Mb/s 400 m (1300 ft.) 90 m (300 ft.) 40 m (130 ft.)

-91 dBm 400 ns 550 m (1750 ft.) 115 m (375 ft.) 50 m (165 ft.)

-94 dBm 500 ns Card Specifications Radio Characteristics The range of the wireless signal is related to the Transmit Rate of the wireless communication. Communications at lower Transmit range may travel larger distances. NOTE:

The range values listed in Table A-4 on page A-5 are typical distances as measured at the Lucent Technologies WaveLAN laboratories. These values may provide a rule of thumb and may vary according to the actual radio conditions at the location where the WaveLAN product will be installed. n The range of your wireless devices can be affected when the antennas are placed near metal surfaces and solid high-density materials. n Range is also impacted due to obstacles in the signal path of the radio that may either absorb or reflect the radio signal. Table A-4 lists the typical ranges when used indoors in office environments that can be described as follows:

n n n In Open Office environments, antennas can see each other, i.e. there are no physical obstructions between them. In Semi-open Office environments, work space is divided by shoulder-height, hollow wall elements; antennas are at desktop level. In Closed Office environments, work space is separated by floor-to-ceiling brick walls. If you intend using the WaveLAN PC Card as part of an outdoor antenna installation, the range of the outdoor antenna installations will be related to:

n Type of outdoor antennas connected to the WaveLAN card. Length of antenna cables. n n Clearance of the radio signal path. A-6 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Card Specifications Radio Characteristics For more information please consult the WaveLAN IEEE Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide Table A-5 WaveLAN Fixed Wireless PC Card R-F Frequency Band Number of selectable sub-channels:

Modulation Technique:

Spreading Bit Error Rate (BER) Nominal Output Power:

Range 13 4 1 13 2.4 GHz (2400-2500 MHz) Europe (ETS) France (FR) Japan (JP) Other Countries (ETS)1 Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum n CCK for High & Medium Transmit Rate n DQPSK for Standard Transmit Rate n DBPSK for Low Transmit Rate 11-chip Barker Sequence Better than 10-5 8 dBm Consult the WaveLAN IEEE Outdoor Antenna Installation Guide2 1 2 The Fixed Wireless PC Card is not available in FCC regulated countries. This card is designed for outdoor antenna installations in countries that adhere to radio regulations as defined by the ETSI. Supported Frequency Sub-bands A Subject to the radio regulations that apply in your country, your WaveLAN card may support a different set of 2.4 GHz channels

(see Table A-6). Consult your Authorized WaveLAN Reseller or Lucent Technologies Sales office for information about the radio regulations that apply in your country. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card A-7 Card Specifications Radio Characteristics Table A-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets Frequency Range Channel ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2400-2500 MHz FCC 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462

ETSI 2412 2417 2422 2427 2432 2437 2442 2447 2452 2457 2462 2467 2472

France

2457 2462 2467 2472

Japan

2484 When installing WaveLAN adapter cards the channel configuration is managed as follows:

n n For wireless clients that operate in a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure, the WaveLAN card will automatically start operation at the channel identified the WavePOINT-II access points. When roaming between different access points the station can dynamically switch to another channel if required. For WaveLAN cards installed into wireless clients that operate in a Ad-hoc Demo Mode, the WaveLAN card will use the factory-set default channel (printed in bold). n When inserted into a WavePOINT-II access point, the WaveLAN card will use the factory-set default channel (printed in bold), unless the LAN Administrator selected a different channel when configuring the WavePOINT-II device. A-8 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting B Contents LED Activity Windows Operating Systems Generic Problems n Windows does not detect my new card n Enabling the PC Card Controller n Station Cannot Connect to the Network Hardware Conflict n Running Windows NT Diagnostics n Despite NT Diagnostics, still facing problems n PC Card Conflict Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver n Upgrading the driver for Windows 98 n Upgrading the driver for Windows NT n Upgrading the driver for Windows 95 Removing the WaveLAN Miniport Driver n Deleting the WaveLAN Driver Files MS-DOS Systems Error Messages n No PACKET.INI found Can Not Connect To The Network B-1 B-4 B-4 B-4 2-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-11 B-12 B-14 B-15 B-17 B-18 B-20 B-21 B-23 B-23 B-23 B-23 Troubleshooting LED Activity B B If you encounter difficulty using and/or installing your WaveLAN product, the error may be related to various causes:

n Out-of range situation, which prevents the WaveLAN PC Card from establishing a wireless connection with the network. n Configuration mismatch, which prevents the WaveLAN PC Card from establishing a wireless connection with the (correct) network. n Absence of, or conflict of the WaveLAN Driver. n A problem or conflict with the PC Card slot which prevents the PC Card from powering on. n A conflict of the WaveLAN hardware with another device. The starting point to troubleshoot problems with your WaveLAN card is looking at the LED activity of the WaveLAN PC Card. Table B-1 on page B-2 provides an overview of the various modes of operation and the associated LED activity. Table B-1 also includes a number of troubleshooting hints, if required, that may help you solve the problem. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-1 Troubleshooting LED Activity Table B-1 LED Activity Table Power LED Transmit Description/Action Receive LED Blinking Continuous Green Off Flicker Flicker Both LEDs blink once every 10 seconds Standard operational mode. n Card is powered on. n Sensing/transmitting wireless data. n Card is powered on. n No wireless activity. No action is required. Power Management mode:

n Card is powered on, but set to power saving mode, to conserve battery life. n Flashes indicates that the card wakes up at regular intervals to verify if there is wireless data addressed to your computer. WaveLAN card works fine, but did not yet succeed establishing a wireless connection with the wireless Infrastructure. Actions:

n Contact the LAN Administrator to verify the WaveLAN Network Name assigned to the wireless infrastructure. n Contact the LAN Administrator to verify the correct value(s) of the encryption keys. n Contact the LAN Administrator to verify whether the network infrastructure has been closed (see page 6-2). n Change the configuration of your WaveLAN PC Card to enter the correct WaveLAN Network Name n If there are no WavePOINT-II devices available, change the configuration of your WaveLAN PC Card to run in Ad-hoc Demo mode. B-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting LED Activity Table B-1 LED Activity TableContinued Power LED Transmit Description/Action Off Receive LED Off Card is not powered on, so it can not transmit/receive data. The cause may either be:

n No Driver loaded/installed n Card - Driver mismatch which prevented the driver from loading n Device conflict which prevented the driver from loading Actions:

n Verify if a driver has been installed, if not install the driver. n Verify the device settings of the PC Card to determine the occurrence of a conflict with another device. If so, change the settings of either your WaveLAN or the conflicting device to resolve the problem. n Verify the versions of the driver, and the embedded software in the WaveLAN card

(also referred to as Station firmware). n Consult the WaveLAN website to see if newer versions are available and if so, upgrade both the embedded software and driver to the latest available version. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-3 Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems Windows Operating Systems B Generic Problems Windows does not detect my new card B B n Windows NT operating systems v3.51 and v4.0 do not support n Plug & Play. On such systems, you will need to manually introduce the card to your operating system as described in Chapter 3 under Getting Started in Windows NT on page 3-5

. In some occasions, Windows 95 and/or Windows 98 do not detect a new card either. This may be the case in one of the following situations:

n The laptop computer into which you wish to install the WaveLAN card is a brand-new out-of-the-box computer, where the Windows 95/98 operating system was already factory-installed (see Enabling the PC Card Controller on page B-4). n A previous installation of the WaveLAN adapter card was aborted before it was finished. Enabling the PC Card Controller 2 Today, most brand-new out-of-the-box laptop computers come with the Windows 95/98 operating system factory-installed. On some of these computers, a number of options like PC Card &

Socket Services have been disabled by default to save on disk and memory space. In order to use such options you must first finalize the Windows 95/98 installation in order to enable such options. If a Windows 95/98 computer does not detect your WaveLAN PC Card, proceed as described below, to enable the PC Card socket interface, or to verify that it has been enabled, proceed as follows:

B-4 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems button on the Windows Taskbar. 1. Click the 2. Click on Settings, then Control Panel. 3. In the Control Panel window, double-click the PC Card icon to open the PC Card Properties window (see Figure B-1). Figure B-1 Enabling the PC Card Controller 4. In the PC Card Properties window, double-click one of the PC Card Sockets. If the PC Card socket interface was not yet enabled, the Windows operating system will display a message that it is finalizing the PC Card Socket installation. 5. Click the button to confirm and close the PC Card Properties window. Station Cannot Connect to the Network B This situation may occur in any of the following situations:

Incorrect WaveLAN Network Name n n No driver loaded WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-5 Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems n Closed System (see Closing the Infrastructure on page 6-2). n Station not authorized to access network (see Wireless Access Control on page 6-3). n Card defect n Hardware Conflict on page B-6 Hardware Conflict B When installing adapter cards or peripheral devices on a computer you may occasionally run into hardware conflict that may:

n n prevent your WaveLAN card from working properly, or disturb operation of other devices after the installation of the WaveLAN drivers. Such problems are most of the times caused when multiple devices installed onto your computer are using identical values for I/O Base Address and/or Interrupt Request (IRQ). The factory-set values of your WaveLAN cardhave been set to use the following defaults:

Table B-2 Default Strappings of the WaveLAN Hardware Device Resource Default Value WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card1 I/O Port IRQ 0400-0437 10 1 For older driver versions the default I/O Base Address value is 0300 B-6 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems Unlike the Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems, Windows NT is not able to check automatically whether the proposed values are already used by another device. To avoid or troubleshoot hardware conflicts with another device, you are advised to use the Windows NT Diagnostic program, to determine whether the default I/O port and IRQ for your WaveLAN card are available, and if not to select an alternative value. NOTE:

Sometimes it may be pretty difficult to determine where a device conflict is locared. As a rule of thumb, you can use the following troubleshooting hint:

n n When the conflict is related to an conflcitng I/O Base setting, in most cases the WaveLAN card will not work at all: i.e. you will not see any LED activity. If the problem is related to a conflicting IRQ value, LEDs may flicker, but you can notconnect to the network. In a number of cases you may be able to verify that the card succeeded in establishing a radio connection with a WavePOINT-II device, but fails to really connecting to the network operating system. Running Windows NT Diagnostics B When installing the WaveLAN card, the Windows NT operating system will prompt you to confirm or modify the factory-set device values for your WaveLAN card:

Starting Windows NT Diagnostics B 1. Click the button on the Windows NT Taskbar. 2. Click on Programs, and then Administrative Tools. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-7 Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems 3. From the list of Administrative Tools, click the item Windows NT Diagnostics. Verifying IRQ Settings B To display the IRQ values that are already in use by other devices installed on your computer:

1. Click the Resources tab on the Windows NT Diagnostics screen. This will display the screen pictured in Figure B-2. Figure B-2 Verifying IRQ Availability 2. Click the IRQ button to display the Interrupt Request (IRQ) vectors currently in use by other devices in your computer. The default IRQ value for WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Cards is 10. Is the value 10 already listed?

n If No, you can use the WaveLAN default. Write down IRQ 10 and proceed with the next step. B-8 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems n If Yes, this means that another device is already using the IRQ, i.e. you will need to select another value for your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card. 3. See whether one of the following values is available (i.e. not listed in the Windows NT Diagnostics window):

03, 04, 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 15. 4. Select one non-listed value and write it down before you proceed with Verifying I/O Port Settings. Verifying I/O Port Settings To display the values of I/O Ports that are already in use by other devices installed on your computer, proceed as follows:

B 1. On the Resources screen of the Windows NT Diagnostics program, click the button I/O Port. This will display the window pictured in Figure B-3. The default I/O Port value for WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Cards is 04001. Is this appropriate value already listed for your version of the Miniport driver?

n n If No, you can use the WaveLAN default. Write down I/O Port 0400 and proceed with the next step. If Yes, this means that another device is already using this port address, i.e. you will need to select another value for your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card. 1 This applies to WaveLAN/IEEE Miniport driver version 1.33 and higher. For earlier versions of this driver, the default I/O Base Address is 0300. If you are unsure about the version of the Miniport driver that is currently installed, use the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE tool. Use the option Diagnose Card to display the Version Info tab which will list the version numbers of the cards hardware, embedded software and driver. For the latest WaveLAN Miniport driver, consult the WaveLAN website at:

http://www.wavelan.com. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-9 Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems Figure B-3 Verifying I/O Port Availability If the default WaveLAN I/O Port has already been assigned to another device, select an alternative I/O Port value from the range listed below:

0200

0280

0300*

0380

0400**

0440 0480 04C0 0500 0540 0580 05C0 0600 0640 0680 06C0 0700 0740 0780 07C0

* For driver versions 1.32 or earlier, the default was 0300.

** For version 1.33 or higher, the default setting is 0400. 2. Verify that the alternative value is available (i.e. not listed in the Windows NT Diagnostics window). B-10 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems 3. Write down the alternative I/O Port value and close the Windows NT Diagnostics Program. Having finished these steps, you should now have a note that identifies the following (alternative) values:

n IRQ value I/O Port Address n You can use these values to install the WaveLAN Miniport Driver as described later in this chapter. Despite NT Diagnostics, still facing problemsB The Windows NT Diagnostics program is not bullet-proof. Occasionally you may run into a hardware conflicts despite the fact that the Windows NT Diagnostics program displayed resources as being available to your WaveLAN card. This may be the case when your computer has one or more devices and/or peripherals installed which claimed an I/O Base Address and/or IRQ value without notifying the Windows NT operating system: Your Windows NT Diagnostics program will not be able to display these values, simply because it doesnt know. If this is the case, a value you perceived as being available to your WaveLAN card, had already claimed by a conflicting device resulting in:

n A WaveLAN card that does not work, and/or n A conflicting device that does not work properly. It will depend on your preferences and the configuration options supported by each of the conflicting devices to determine which device settings should be changed to allow flawless operation. In most situations the WaveLAN Miniport driver will prove most flexible to select alternative settings for I/O Base Address or IRQ WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-11 Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems values. However since the conflicting device apparently did not communicate its System Resource claims to Windows NT, you may need to try multiple values before the problem will be resolved. n Consult the documentation that came with your computer and/

or the conflicting device to find out which values are used by the conflicting device that have not been listed in the Windows NT Diagnostics.

CAUTION:

To isolate the problem, you are advised to change only one parameter at a time. For example: first try to resolve a possible conflict with the I/O Base Address. If that does not work, try to resolve a possible IRQ conflict. PC Card Conflict B When your WaveLAN PC Card installation has completed successfully, but it does not become operational, it is possible that there is an I/O Port conflict. The Windows Resource Manager may not have been able to detect the conflict, allowing the installation to complete successfully, but not allowing the PC Card to operate properly because another device has been assigned the specified port. The default I/O Base address used by your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card is 0400 (when using Miniport driver version 1.33 or higher) and 0300 (when using Miniport version 1.32 or earlier). You are advised to try different I/O Port values, as described in Verifying I/O Port Settings on page B-9. B-12 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Windows Operating Systems Table B-3 Default Configuration Settings Description Station Name Connect to Network Type WaveLAN Network Name MAC Address AP Density Transmit Rate Medium Reservation Card Power Management n Receive All Multicasts n Maximum Sleep Duration Encryption Default Value

(none) IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure n Connect via access points n Ad-hoc Demo disabled

(none)

(none: use Universal MAC Address)1 Low Density High - Auto Rate Select OFF OFF Enabled 100 OFF 1 The Universal MAC Address of your WaveLAN card is printed on a label on the backside of the card. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-13 Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver B Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver installed may be required in one of the following situations:

n You would like to use new features that have become available for your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card. n You installed a newer version of the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE tool. n Your WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE Card Diagnostics reported a Driver/Firmware mismatch.

CAUTION:

Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver should only be done by a skilled LAN Administrator or support engineer that has a working knowledge of the Microsoft Windows 95, 98 and/or the Windows NT operating system. The procedure to upgrade device drivers differs between the various Windows operating systems:

n Windows 98 and Windows NT systems feature an update driver function that allows you to easily replace the current driver with a more recent version. n Windows 95 systems usually require you to first to completely remove the driver from your computer, prior to installing the latest driver. This is described on page B-18. B-14 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Upgrading the driver for Windows 98 B 1. On the Windows Taskbar, click the Start button. 2. Click on Settings, and then click Control Panel. 3. 4. In the Control PaneI window, double-click the System icon. In the System Properties window, select Device Manager tab. Figure B-4 The Windows 98 Device Manager 5. 6. In the top section of the Device Manager tab, select the option View devices by type as pictured in Figure B-4 on page B-15. In the list of computer devices, double-click Network Adapters. 7. Select the item WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card and click the 8. Properties button. In the WaveLAN/IEEE PC Card Properties window, select the Driver tab to display the window pictured in Figure B-5. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-15 Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Figure B-5 Windows 98 Update Driver Window n n To display information about the currently installed driver, click the Driver File Details button. To upgrade your current driver to a newer version click the Update Driver button and follow the instructions as displayed on your screen. 9. Restart your computer to finish the driver upgrade procedure and to have the new driver loaded by the operating system. 10. (Optional) Upgrade the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT program. NOTE:

The procedure described above may look familiar to users of computers that run Windows 95 operating systems which are identified as OSR2 versions. Although such systems may also show an Update Driver button, thorough testing in the Lucent Technologies WaveLAN labs have proven that this procedure does not work for the Windows 95 systems (the operating system will NOT replace the current driver). For Windows 95 systems, proceed as described on page B-18. B-16 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Upgrading the driver for Windows NT B 1. On the Windows Taskbar, click the Start button. 2. Click on Settings, then click Control Panel. 3. 4. Select the Adapters tab to display the window as pictured in In the Control PaneI, double-click Network Neighborhood. Figure B-6 on page B-17 5. Select the IEEE WaveLAN Adapter and click Update. 6. Follow the instructions as they appear on your screen. Figure B-6 Update Driver in Windows NT WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-17 Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Upgrading the driver for Windows 95 B To upgrade the WaveLAN Miniport driver on a Windows 95 system, you will typically need to perform the following three steps:

1. Remove the current WaveLAN Miniport Driver. 2.

(Optional) Physically delete the driver file from your hard disk.

(Re-)install the latest WaveLAN Miniport Driver. 3. Step 2 is optional, subject to the type of driver you have currently installed:

n When the interface of your current driver looks as displayed in Figure B-7 on page B-18, you must delete the driver files from the hard-disk, prior to installing the new drivers. n When the interface of your current driver looks as pictured in Figure B-8 on page B-19, you may, but do not need to delete the driver files from the hard-disk. Figure B-7 Interface of early WaveLAN Drivers B-18 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Why delete the old driver? The Plug & Play support of Windows 95 operating systems associates a specific driver with specific hardware. When you select the option Remove Driver from the Network (Neighborhood) Control Panel, the operating system will only disable the driver, but will not delete the driver from your harddisk (see also What You Need to Know on page 3-2). When trying to upgrade a driver, the Windows operating system will recognize your WaveLAN card as a piece of hardware that had been installed before and will attempt to re-install the old driver: i.e. when the operating system finds the appropriate driver files on your hard disk, it will not bother copying the files from the diskette with the new drivers. Figure B-8 Setup WaveLAN Parameters WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-19 Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Removing the WaveLAN Miniport Driver B 1. Close all applications that are currently open 2. On the Windows Taskbar, click the Start button. 3. Click on Settings, then click Control Panel. 4. 5. Select the IEEE WaveLAN Adapter and click the Remove In the Control PaneI window, double-click the Network icon. button. The Windows operating system will disable the Miniport driver and update the driver configuration files. It will not delete the driver from your computers harddisk. This means that when you would re-insert the WaveLAN card, your Windows operating system will attempt to activate the same driver files again (see also What You Need to Know on page 3-2). 6. When prompted to Restart your computer select:

n Yes, if you dont mind that the driver and configuration files reside on your hard disk (the restart will finish your procedure to disable the driver). n No, if you would like to physically remove the drivers from your hard disk (typically required to upgrade the driver on a Windows 95, 98 operating system). Proceed as described under Deleting the WaveLAN Driver Files on page B-21 to delete the driver and its information and configuration files from your harddisk. B-20 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver Deleting the WaveLAN Driver Files B The procedure to physically remove the WaveLAN Miniport Driver files from your harddisk is similar for all Windows operating systems.

CAUTION:

Prior to deleting the files from your harddisk, it is important to remove the drivers as described on page B-20. Failing to do so prevents the Windows operating system from cleaning the Windows Registry, which might lead to complications when you try to re-install the WaveLAN driver in the future. 1. Open the Windows Explorer. 2. 3. From the View tab, select Show all files and clear the In the Explorer menu, click on View and select Options check-box Hide MS-DOS file extensions. 4. Click the Apply button to return to the Explorer window. 5. Back in the Explorer, open the Windows System folder:

n n c:\windows\system for Windows 95 and 98 c:\winnt\system32\drivers for Windows NT systems 6. Delete the WaveLAN driver files listed below, as identified for your operating system:

n For Windows 95/98 delete the following files from the folder c:\windows\system:

wvlan41.sys wvlanuif.vxd If present (subject to the driver version you had previously installed) also delete the files:

wv41int.dll wvlan41.hlp wvlan41.cnt WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-21 Troubleshooting Upgrading the WaveLAN Miniport Driver n For Windows NT systems delete the files listed below from the folder c:\windows\system32:

wvlan41.dll wvlan41.hlp wvlan41.cnt From the folder c:\windows\system32\drivers delete:

wvlan41.sys 7. Next delete the inf files:

n n For Windows 95 open the folder c:\windows\inf and delete the file: wvlan41.inf For Windows 98 delete the file: Provider - Lucent Technologies WVLAN41 from the folder c:\windows\inf and/

or c:\windows\inf\other 8. Close the Windows Explorer and Restart your computer. When deleting the WaveLAN Miniport Driver files was part of an Upgrade Driver routine, you can now (re-)install the new WaveLAN Miniport Driver as described in Chapter 3 Installation for Windows. B-22 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Troubleshooting MS-DOS Systems MS-DOS Systems Error Messages No PACKET.INI found B B B The WaveLAN Packet Driver will display this error message in one of the following two situations:

n n The driver could not find the file PACKET.INI The file PACKET.INI contained invalid parameter values that prevented the driver from loading. Subject to the type of error, the driver may either load using the factory-set defaults or not load at all. You are advised to verify the path statement in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. You may need to add a statement to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file that will make the directory that contains the WaveLAN Packet driver the active directory. When the PACKET.INI file is stored in the same directory as the WaveLAN Packet Driver, the driver should be able to automatically find the PACKET.INI file. Can Not Connect To The Network B The WaveLAN Netwrok Name is case-sensitive. When you entered this name, the value should have been placed between quotation marks e.g. "My WaveLAN Network". If you omitted the quotation marks, the driver will interpret the value as all upper-case e.g. MY WAVELAN NETWORK. If your access points have been configured with both lower- and uppre-case characters, the driver will not be able to establish a radio connection. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card B-23 Troubleshooting MS-DOS Systems B-24 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Installing in Windows CE Contents Introduction Installing the WaveLAN Driver n What you Need n Running the Installation Program Using WaveLAN with Windows CE n Monitoring Wireless Performance Modifying Configuration Parameters C C-1 C-2 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-5 Installing in Windows CE Introduction C C Windows CE devices are most commonly used on hand-held computing devices also referred to as H/PC devices. Subject to the type and brand of the device, you will see that multiple versions of the Windows CE operating system exist today, where each CE device may also use a specific type of processor. The WaveLAN/IEEE drivers will only work with CE devices that:

n Run the MS-Windows CE operating system version 2.0 in combination with a MIPS, SH3 and X86 processor, or n Run the MS-Windows CE operating system version 2.111 in combination with a SH4, ARM or X86 processor. To determine whether your Windows CE device satisfies these requirements:

button on the Windows Taskbar. 1. Click the 2. Click on Settings, then Control Panel. 3. On the Control Panel, double-click the System icon to display the window pictured in Figure C-1. 1 v2.11 is sometimes also referred to as MS-Windows CE HPC PRO v3.0. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide C-1 Installing in Windows CE Introduction Figure C-1 Windows CE CPU Type Installing the WaveLAN Driver What you Need C C Windows CE devices are typically used in combination with desktop computers running Windows CE Services to transfer data between the desktop computer and the H/PC device. To use WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 in your Windows CE device, you will need to:

1. Run the WaveLAN installation file setup.exe for Windows CE to copy the Miniport driver and configuration files from the floppy disk to the synchronization folder for Windows CE services on your desktop computer, and 2. Use the Windows CE Services to transfer files to your H/PC device. The default location of the Windows CE synchronization folder is: C:\Program Files\Windows CE Services\wavelan Please refer to the Microsoft Handheld PC Companion booklet and the user documentation of your H/PC device for more information about installing the Windows CE Services. C-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Windows CE Introduction Running the Installation Program C To install the WaveLAN drivers on your Windows CE device, simply do the following:

Insert the WaveLAN CD-ROM into the desktop computer. 1. 2. Browse to the CD-ROM folder that includes the Windows CE driver files. For example:

e:\software\adapter\pc_card\drivers\win_ce Where "e" represents the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive. 3. Double-click the "setup2xx.exe" file that matches the version of the Windows CE operating system on the handheld device:

n Use setup200.exe when your handheld device runs n Microsoft Windows CE version 2.0 Use setup211.exe when your handheld device runs Microsoft Windows CE version 2.11 n When finished, use the serial cable and/or docking station to connect your Windows CE device to the desktop computer. Once the computers have been connected, the Windows CE services will automatically copy the files and drivers from your desktop computer to the Windows CE device. NOTE:

If you encounter difficulty copying the WaveLAN driver files to your Windows CE device, please refer to the Microsoft Handheld PC Companion booklet and the user documentation of your H/PC device for more information about installing and/or troubleshooting the Windows CE Services. If you encounter difficulty establishing a network connection after you installed the WaveLAN drivers successfully, consult the readme.txt of the WaveLAN driver files for Windows CE for troubleshooting hints. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide C-3 Installing in Windows CE Introduction Using WaveLAN with Windows CE C When you insert the WaveLAN card into your Windows CE device, it will start operation with the following factory-set defaults:

n Connect to a Network Infrastructure n Use the WaveLAN Network Name ANY to connect to the first access point that provides a communications quality that is acceptable or better. On the Control Panel of your Windows CE device, you will also find a WaveLAN icon, to view or modify the WaveLAN parameters. Monitoring Wireless Performance C The WaveLAN software for Windows CE devices, does not include diagnostic tools. This is partially due to the memory limitations of Windows CE devices. However you can use other WaveLAN stations to monitor wireless communications between the other station and your Windows CE device. n n For Independent Network environments, you should start the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program on a WaveLAN computer running either the Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT operating systems. The Link Test mode of this utility enables you to analyze the communications quality between the Initiator station and your Windows CE device (identified as the Remote Station). In Infrastructure Networks, consult the LAN Administrator to run the WaveMANAGER/AP tool. The Remote Link Test of this utility enables the LAN Administrator to analyze the communications quality between the WavePOINT-II (identified as the Initiator station) and your Windows CE device

(identified as the Remote Station). C-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Windows CE Introduction Modifying Configuration Parameters C To view or modify the WaveLAN configuration parameters, open the Control Panel on your Windows CE device and double-click the WaveLAN icon. For more information about these parameters, please consult:

n n The WaveLAN help system for your Windows CE drivers by clicking the ? help icon, or The chapters about other Windows operating systems described earlier in this Users Guide. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide C-5 Installation for MS-DOS Contents Introduction What You Need to Know Driver Types Installation Overview Copy the WaveLAN Software Setup the WaveCAD Program Card & Socket Services Intel 82365 PCIC Install the Network Client Software Setup the WaveLAN Parameters DOS ODI Driver Configuration n About the NET.CFG File Packet Driver Configuration n Setup the WaveLAN Packet Driver Finishing Installation Advanced Options Dual Card Configuration Start-up Menu Configuration D D-1 D-1 D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-4 D-5 D-9 D-10 D-10 D-17 D-19 D-19 D-25 D-27 D-27 D-27 Installation for MS-DOS Introduction D D What You Need to Know D Installing an IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card requires the same level of expertise that you would need to install any other type of standard Ethernet network adapter card. It is assumed that you have a working knowledge of MS-DOS operations and of installing network adapter cards and network client software. Driver Types D When your computer runs the MS-DOS operating system, or Microsoft Windows for Workgroups (usually referred to as Windows 3.x), you can use one of the following network drivers:

n WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver (WVLAN43.COM) n WaveLAN Packet Driver (WVLAN42.COM) To install these network drivers, you will also need a program called the WaveLAN Card Access Driver (WaveCAD). The WaveCAD software is included with the MS-DOS Driver software that was shipped with your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Card. The WaveCAD driver (wvlancad.sys) will enable you to access the WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-1 Installation for MS-DOS Introduction WaveLAN Card via any PC Card slot that is controlled by an Intel 82365 PCIC or computers that support Card & Socket Services. Installation Overview D To install the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card in an MS-DOS environment, you will need to:

1. Copy the WaveLAN software manually to the hard disk of your computer. 2. Setup the WaveCAD program. 3. Install the Network Client Software for your network operating system. 4. Setup the WaveLAN configuration parameters. 5. Restart the computer to verify that the WaveCAD executes successfully and the network driver is loaded. To setup the various configuration parameters, you may need to edit a number of system files. You can use any MS-DOS line editor to edit these files, for example the MS-DOS EDIT command. Example DOS commands:

c:\

edit config.sys D-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Copy the WaveLAN Software Copy the WaveLAN Software D The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card disk includes a small batch file (CPY2HDSK.BAT). This file will:

n Create a new directory on your hard disk, and n Copy the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card software to this new directory. To copy the WaveLAN software, proceed as follows:

1. Choose a name for the hard disk directory where you would like to store the WaveLAN software: e.g. c:\wavelan 2. Place the WaveLAN software diskette in drive A:

3. Make drive A: the current drive 4. Run the batch file CPY2HDSK.BAT with the chosen hard disk directory name as parameter. Example DOS commands:

a:\

cpy2hdsk c:\wavelan WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-3 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveCAD Program Setup the WaveCAD Program D To allow MS-DOS-based computers to identify the presence of a PC Card in the PC Card slot, the computer needs dedicated software that will enable it to do so. For your WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 card this can either be:

n Card & Socket services software as provided by various n software vendors, or The WaveLAN Card Access Driver (wlancad.sys), a Lucent Technologies proprietary driver, that was designed specifically for WaveLAN cards. The card software must be loaded before any other program

(network driver or utility) tries to access the WaveLAN card. In this section, we describe the proper WaveCAD installation procedure and settings for the following systems:

n Computers using Card & Socket Services n Intel 82365 PCIC based computers Card & Socket Services D To ensure the WaveCAD is always run at start-up time, you must edit the system file CONFIG.SYS to include a DEVICE statement that will identify the path and filename of the WaveCAD program. Example DOS commands:

c:\

edit c:\config.sys The format of the device line is as follows:

DEVICE = [path name]wvlancad.sys D-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveCAD Program When for example your device line looks as follows:

DEVICE = c:\wavelan\wavecad\wvlancad.sys With Card & Socket Services, you do not need to set any parameters (Memeory, IRQ, I/O Port) in the DEVICE statements. However, if you would like to overrride the default settings, follow the directions for Intel 82365 PCIC on page D-5, using Table D-1 on page D-7 to identify valid parameter values that can be included in the wvlancad.sys DEVICE statement. Intel 82365 PCIC D For Intel 82365 PCIC based computers, you must start the WaveLAN Card Access Driver (wvlancad.sys) before any other program (network driver or utility) can access the WaveLAN card. To ensure the WaveCAD is always run at start-up time, you must edit the system file CONFIG.SYS to include a DEVICE statement that will identify the:

n Path and file name of the wvlancad.sys program n Memory Address of the WaveLAN card I/O Port Address of the WaveLAN card Interrupt Request Line number (IRQ) of the WaveLAN card. n n Use Table D-1 on page D-7 to identify valid parameter values that can be included in the wvlancad.sys DEVICE statement. In order for your card to function properly, you will need to verify whether the values that you select to include in the DEVICE statement are not already used by another device that has been installed in your computer. Consult your LAN Administrator or a computer expert to determine an available Memory Address, I/O Port Address and IRQ value that you can use to install the WaveCAD driver. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-5 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveCAD Program Alternatively you can use the Microsoft Diagnostics program

(MSD.EXE) to determine the available values. For more information about Microsoft diagnostics, please refer to the documentation that came with your MS-DOS operating system. You can use any MS-DOS line editor to edit the CONFIG.SYS file. The format of the device line is as follows:

DEVICE = [path name]wvlancad.sys /m=xxxx /b=xxxx /i=nn For example, if your device line looks as follows:

DEVICE = c:\wavelan\wavecad\wvlancad.sys /m=d100 /b=0340 /i=11 The WaveCAD will be programmed to use:

n Memory Address d100 - dFFF I/O Port Address 0340H and IRQ 11 n n D-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveCAD Program Table D-1 WaveCAD Configuration Parameter Values Parameter Description

<path>

Disk drive and directory containing WaveCAD program wavecad.sys (do not type brackets) Memory Address

/m=xxxx Valid Values

/b=xxxx I/O Port Address

/i=nn IRQ 4-digit hexadecimal value Valid range: C000 - EF00 in increments of 100 For example:

C000, C100, C200, or C300, etc. 4-digit hexadecimal value Valid range: 0300 - FFC0 in increments of 40 For example:

0300, 0340, 0380, 03C0 or FF00, FF40, FF80, or FFC0 1- or 2-digit decimal value Valid values:

3, 4, 5, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, or 15 NOTE:

When editing the CONFIG.SYS file, please note the following:

Remove any other PCMCIA-related DEVICE statement from the CONFIG.SYS file. When for example the CONFIG.SYS file includes DEVICE statements for Card Services or Socket Services you must remove these statements. You are advised to consult the documentation that came with your computer or other PCMCIA device to help you to identify these statements. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-7 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveCAD Program When your computer has a memory manager program installed, for example EMM386.EXE, you must exclude the Memory Address space that you assigned to the WaveCAD program in the previous step (see page D-6). To exclude the Memory Space address, you must add an exclude parameter to DEVICE statement that activates the memory manager program. For example, if your computer uses the EMM386.EXE memory manager program, your DEVICE statement could look as follows:

DEVICE=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems x=d100-d1ff When your computer runs Microsoft Windows 3.x, you must also edit the Windows SYSTEM.INI to protect the Memory Address space that you assigned to the WaveCAD program in the previous step (see page D-6). You can use any ASCII text editor, such as Windows Notepad to edit the SYSTEM.INI file and add the following statement to the section 386Enh:

Example:

= [386Enh] ... EMMExclude=D100-D1FF D-8 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Install the Network Client Software Install the Network Client Software D To use the WaveLAN card in a network environment, you will need to install Network Client software. If you already had Network Client software installed, you are advised to remove this software, and run the Network Client installation program again. 1. Make the directory that contains the Network Client software the active directory. For example when installing the Network Client software from a floppy disk:

a. b. Make drive A: the active drive. Insert the disk into floppy drive A:, and 2. Proceed as described in the User documentation that came with the Network Client software to start the installation. 3. When prompted to select a driver use the option Other driver. Sometimes this option is referred to as updated or OEM driver, or driver provided by other vendor. 4. Remove the Network Client software disk from the floppy disk drive and insert the WaveLAN disk for MS-DOS environments. 5. Follow the instructions as they appear on your screen. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-9 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Setup the WaveLAN Parameters D To connect your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card to a WaveLAN network system, you must configure the WaveLAN parameters to match the values of the network. In LAN Infrastructure environments, these values should typically match the values as set for the WavePOINT-II access points. Consult your LAN Administrator for the values that apply in your network. This section describes how to set the parameters for the following IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Drivers:

n WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver n WaveLAN Packet Driver DOS ODI Driver Configuration D When you are installing the Network Client software for Novell NetWare, the installation program will prompt you to enter the WaveLAN parameters, and save your parameter settings in the Novell network configuration file NET.CFG. If your Network Client Software did not prompt you to enter the parameters, or if you wish to modify the WaveLAN parameter settings you may need to edit the NET.CFG file manually, as described in About the NET.CFG File on page D-17. Table D-1 lists the various WaveLAN parameters with their value ranges and usage. NOTE:

Alphabetical character values are case-sensitive and should be entered between quotation marks . Values without quotes will be interpreted as UPPERCASE only. D-10 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver Parameters Parameter 1 Station Name 2 Network Type 2a WaveLAN Network Name Description Alphanumeric string with a maximum of 32 ASCII characters that will identify your computer on the network when using the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT diagnostics tool. Valid Values: any character in the range of A-Z, a-z and 0-9. Enter your value between quotes. Use this parameter to select the type of network to which you wish to connect your computer. Valid values: 1 or 3. n 1 will connect your computer to an anonymous Ad-hoc workgroup (BSS) n 3 Will connect your computer to an IEEE 802.11 Infrastructure (ESS) identified by parameter 2a WaveLAN Network Name. Alphanumeric string with a maximum of 32 ASCII characters that identifies the network to which you would like to connect your computer. This parameter is only used when you selected the Network Type Infrastructure. Valid Values: any character in the range of A-Z, a-z and 0-9 where:

n The value ANY enables your station to connect to any IEEE 802.11 compliant network (see also Closed System). n A user-defined name allows your station to connect to a specific network only. This value should match the value as set for the WavePOINT-II access points in your network. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-11 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 3 Transmit_Rate1 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver ParametersContinued 4a Card Power Management 4b Maximum Sleep Duration Controls the data rate at which your WaveLAN card will transmit its data. Valid Values:

1. Fixed Low 2. Fixed Standard 3. Auto Select High-Medium-Standard-

Low (default). 4. Fixed Medium (Turbo cards only) 5. Fixed High (Turbo cards only) 6. Auto Select Standard-Low 7. Auto Select Medium-Standard-Low Enables/disables Power Management Valid Values:

n Y - Yes, enable Power Management n N - No, disable Power Management

(=default). When enabling Power Management you will also need to set the Maximum_Sleep_Duration, and Receive_All_Multicasts parameter. When you disable Power Managment, these two parameters will be disabled as well. This parameter specifies the maximum time the station is allowed to spend consecutively in DOZE state. Valid Values: any numerical value in the range of 1-65535 (default value is 100). This parameter determines the Listen Interval of the stations Power Management scheme. If 4a Card Power Management is disabled, this parameter will be ignored D-12 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver ParametersContinued 4b Receive All Multicasts 5 AP Density This parameter specifies whether the station must receive all multicast frames when in Power Management mode. Valid Values:

n Y - Yes, receive all Mulitcasts (= default) n N - No, do not receive all Multicast When this parameter is enabled, the WaveLAN station will wake up at regular intervals to receive the multicast frames. Although enabling this option may yield less optimal power savings, you are advised to leave this parameter enabled when using your computer in regular networking environments. If 4a Card Power Management is disabled, this parameter will be ignored. Parameter that controls the Roaming sensitivity of your computer (must be set according to the settings of the WavePOINT-II access points). Valid Values:

1. 2. Medium Density 3. High Density Low Density (default) WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-13 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver ParametersContinued 6 Medium Reservation 7 Node Address (MAC Address) Enables/disables the RTS/CTS Mechanism Valid Values:

n 2347 (default) Disables Medium Reservation n Numeric value in the range of 0-2346 Enables the RTS/CTS Mechanism, and sets the frame length threshold from which the station should start using the RTS/CTS Mechanism (recommended value is 500). See Medium Reservation on page 4-8 for more information. To be used only when your network system requires Local MAC Addressing. Valid Values:

n None to use the cards factory installed Universal MAC address (=default) n 12 hexadecimal digits that identify the user-defined Local MAC Address.2 The 2nd digit of the first digit-pair must be 2, 6, A, or E. D-14 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver ParametersContinued 8 Enable Encryption 8a WEP Key 1 Enables/disables WEP encryption. Valid values:

n Y - Yes, enable WEP encryption n N - No, do not enable WEP encryption

(=default). When this parameter is enabled, you can:

n Select up to four key for decrypting data received via the wireless interface. n Select one Transmit key (8e) for encryptiing data that will be transmitted via the wireless interface. This parameter should only be enabled when using WaveLAN IEEE Silver cards. If you decide to enable encryption, please note that all stations will be configured with identical WEP key values. Identifies one of the four keys that your waveLAN card can use to decrypt data received via its wireless interface. Valid values for Silver cards:

n 5-character ASCII key or 10-digit hexadecimal key. Valid values for Gold cards:

n 5-character ASCII key or 10-digit hexadecimal key. n 13-characterASCII key or 26-digit hexadecimal key. The key value is case-sensitive. Hexadecimal values must be preceded by 0x. All wireless clients and access points should be configured with identical key values. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-15 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver ParametersContinued 8b WEP Key 2 8c WEP Key 3 8d WEP Key 4 8a WEP Transmit Key 9 Media Frame Type See 8a WEP Key 1 See 8a WEP Key 1 See 8a WEP Key 1 Use this parameter to select one of the identified WEP decription keys for encrypting data that will be transmitted via the wireless interface. Valid values:

n 1 - to use WEP Key 1 n 2 - to use WEP Key 2 n 3 - to use WEP Key 3 n 4 - to use WEP Key 4 Use this parameter to select the frametype that is used within the network to which you wish to connect the computer. Consult your LAN Administrator for the value that applies in your network. Valid values:

n Ethernet 802.2 (=default) n Ethernet 802.3 n Ethernet 802.II n Ethernet 802.SNAP 1 2 This parameter does not influence at which data rate the station will be able to receive data. I.E. When the transmit rate is locked to Fixed Low, the station may still receive messages that were transmitted at Standard speed. Note: The Access Control security feature of WavePOINT-II access points does not recognize Local MAC addresses. When the WavePOINT-II devices in your network infrastructure have been programmed to use this feature, leave this parameter Access Control D-16 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters About the NET.CFG File D The WaveLAN configuration parameters for the DOS ODI driver are stored in a network configuration file called NET.CFG. A sample of the NET.CFG file is included on the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN software diskette. If you installed the Novell Network Client software as described earlier in this chapter, this file was created automatically. You may skip this section and proceed with Finishing Installation on page D-25, unless you would like to modify the WaveLAN parameter settings or wish to learn more about the NET.CFG file. A NET.CFG file must always include a Link Driver statement that refers to the appropriate network driver, and a list of parameters and parameter values that apply to the referenced driver. For the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN driver the NET.CFG file will look as follows:

LINK DRIVER WVLAN43

; BASIC PARAMETERS WAVELAN_NETWORK_NAME XXXXXXXX PORT_TYPE X STATION_NAMEXXXXXXXX

;ADVANCED PARAMETERS

;AP_DENSITYx

;TRANSMIT RATEX

;MEDIUM RESERVATIONXXXX

;NODE ADDRESS All lines that start with a semi-colon ( ; ) are informational comments to the user, i.e. the driver will ignore this information. The basic parameters that you should set are:

n WaveLAN Network Name n Station Name for your station n Port Type - to identify the type of network to which you wish to connect your computer. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-17 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters All other parameters are optional and should preferable only be used in special situations, typically upon advice of a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 expert. Table D-2 on page D-11 lists the various WaveLAN parameters with their value ranges and usage. The WaveLAN parameter values for the WaveLAN DOS ODI driver are not case-sensitive:

the WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver will interpret all values as upper-

case values. When the installation program of your Network Client software did not prompt you to identify a driver or specify the WaveLAN parameters you may need to identify the proper location of the WaveLAN DOS ODI driver and the NET.CFG file. This will allow your Network Client software to find the correct driver. You are advised to copy the WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver and the NET.CFG file to the same directory that you selected to install the network operating system software. For example, when you selected the directory c:\network use the following copy commands:

c:\

cd\wavelan\drivers\dosodi copy wvlan43.com c:\network copy net.cfg c:\network 1. Edit the NET.CFG file to add the statement Link Driver WVLAN43. 2. Enter the WaveLAN parameter values on a new line, directly after the link driver statement. Consult your LAN Administrator for values that apply in your network environment. D-18 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters NOTE:

When modifying the NET.CFG file ensure that all WaveLAN parameter lines will be indented. Use the key of your keyboard to create an indent at the beginning of each line that will contain a WaveLAN parameter. TAB 3. When finished, save the NET.CFG file and restart your computer. 4. Proceed with Finishing Installation on page D-25. Packet Driver Configuration D The installation of the WaveLAN Packet Driver is a procedure that requires you to edit a number of system files manually. To ensure that the WaveLAN Packet Driver is loaded at start-up, you will need to add a few command line statements to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. These statements should include:

n A path to the directory that contains the Packet Driver. n A load driver statement. The WaveLAN parameters will be identified in a network configuration file called PACKET.INI. The WaveLAN Packet Driver and the PACKET.INI file must reside in the same directory on the hard disk of your computer. When you used the commands as identified Copy the WaveLAN Software on page D-3, this directory is typically c:\wavelan\drivers\packet. Setup the WaveLAN Packet Driver D 1. Edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file of your computer to add the path and file name of the WaveLAN Packet Driver, and the load driver statement:

WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-19 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters cd\wavelan\packet lh=wvlan42.com l 2. To set the WaveLAN parameters, edit the PACKET.INI file. The structure of the PACKET.INI file is as follows:

; BASIC PARAMETERS WAVELAN_NETWORK_NAME XXXXXXXX STATION_NAMEXXXXXXXX

;ADVANCED PARAMETERS

;AP_DENSITYx

;TRANSMIT RATEX

;MEDIUM RESERVATIONXXXX

;MAC ADDRESS All lines that start with a semi-colon ( ; ) are informational comments to the user, i.e. the driver will ignore the information. The basic parameters that you should set are:

n WaveLAN Network Name n Station Name for your station. All other parameters are optional and should preferably only be used in special situations, typically upon advice of a WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 expert. NOTE:

The string for a WaveLAN Network Name is case-

sensitive. If your network includes stations that also use the WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver, you are advised to select upper-case characters only (see also DOS ODI Driver Configuration on page D-10). 3. To set a parameter value, remove the semi-colon ( ; ) preceding the parameter name and enter a value within the range as specified in Table D-3 on page D-22. D-20 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters At the end of the PACKET.INI file you will find an additional set of generic Packet Driver parameters that are not directly related to WaveLAN operation.

;DRIVER_CLASSX

;NOVELL_FLAGYES/NO

;PACKET_INTERRUPT0x XX 4. Consult your LAN Administrator to select the appropriate values that apply in your situation from the range as specified in Table D-4 on page D-24. 5. When finished, save the PACKET.INI file and restart your computer. 6. Proceed with Finishing Installation on page D-25. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-21 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters Table D-3 WaveLAN Packet Driver Parameter Values Parameter WaveLAN_Network_ Name Station_Name AP_Density Transmit_Rate1 Description Alphanumeric string with a maximum of 32 ASCII characters that identifies the network to which you would like to connect your computer. Valid Values: any character in the range of a-z and 0-9 (no spaces allowed) where:

n The value ANY enables your station to connect to any IEEE 802.11 network. n A user-defined name allows your station to connect to a specific network only. This value should matches the value as set for the WavePOINT-II access points in your network. Alphanumeric string with a maximum of 32 ASCII characters that will identify your computer on the network, e.g. when using the WaveMANAGER/

CLIENT diagnostics tool. Valid Values: any character in the range of a-z and 0-9 (no spaces allowed). Parameter that controls the Roaming sensitivity of your computer (must be set according to the settings of the WavePOINT-II access points). Valid Values:

1. 2. Medium Density 3. High Density Controls the data rate at which your WaveLAN card will transmit its data. Valid Values:

1. Fixed 1 Mbit/second 2. Fixed 2 Mbit/second 3. Auto Rate Select 2 Mbit/s -1 Mbit/s (default)

....continued on following page. Low Density (default) D-22 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters MAC_Address To be used only when your network system requires Local MAC Addressing. Valid Values:

n None to use the cards factory installed Universal MAC address (=default) n 12 hexadecimal digits that identify the user-

defined Local MAC Address.2 The 2nd digit of the first digit-pair must be 2, 6, A, or E. Medium_Reservation Enables/disables the RTS/CTS Mechanism Valid Values:

n 2347 (default) Disables Medium Reservation n Numeric value in the range of 0-2346 Enables the RTS/CTS Mechanism, and sets the frame length threshold from which the station should start using the RTS/CTS Mechanism

(recommended value is 500). See Medium Reservation on page 4-8 for more information. 1 2 This parameter does not influence at which data rate the station will be able to receive data. I.E. When the transmit rate is locked to 1 Mbit/s, the station may still receive messages that were transmitted at 2 Mbit/second. Note: The Access Control security feature of WavePOINT-II access points does not recognize Local MAC addresses. When the WavePOINT-II devices in your network infrastructure have been programmed to use this feature, leave this parameter blank. For more information about each of the WaveLAN parameters:

n Consult the description for the WaveLAN parameters as described in Setting the WaveLAN Parameters on page 3-13. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-23 Installation for MS-DOS Setup the WaveLAN Parameters n Alternatively type the following command lines at the MS-DOS prompt to display help for the WaveLAN Packet Driver. cd\wavelan\drivers\packet wvlan42.com h Table D-4 Packet Driver Specific Parameters Driver_Class Novell_Flag A specific Packet Driver parameter that controls the frame format. Valid Values:

1. DIX Ethernet (v2.0) frame format (Default) 11. Enables support the Novell IPX 802.3 frame format. Valid Values:

Y. Convert all 802.3 type packets to 8137 type IEEE 802.3 with 802.2 headers frame format. packets. N. No, do not use the NovellFlag (=default) Packet_Interrupt This parameter identifies the software interrupt number that the Packet Driver should use. Valid Values (hexadecimal):

n 0x60 (default) n 0x70 Enter the value without the 0x prefix. D-24 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Finishing Installation Finishing Installation D To finish the installation insert your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card and restart your computer. Carefully read the messages that appear on your screen, to verify that:

The WaveCAD program executes correctly, and n n Your computer loads the correct driver parameter settings of your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card. Correct execution of the WaveCAD program is confirmed with the message (example):

WaveLAN/IEEE Card Access Driver, Variant X, Version XX.XX Memory: xxxx, I/O Base: xxxx, IRQ xx Card Access Driver Installed Where:

n n XX.XX identifies the version of the WaveLAN Driver xx or xxx identifies the values that you entered upon installation of the WaveCAD software as described in Intel 82365 PCIC on page D-5 A successful load of the WaveLAN Driver is confirmed with either one of the following messages:

Example WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver:

WaveLAN/IEEE DOS ODI Driver Variant X, v0.0x (yymmdd) Desired SSID = AAAAAAAAAA Driver loaded successfully IRQ xx, Port xxxx, Node Address = xxxxxxxxxxxx L Max Frame 1514 bytes, Line Speed 2 Mbps, Bus ID 3 Board 1, Frame ETHERNET_802.2, LSB Mode Where:

n AAAAAAAAA identifies the WaveLAN Network Name that you entered in the NET.CFG file, WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-25 Installation for MS-DOS Finishing Installation n xx or xxx identifies the values that you entered upon installation as described in Intel 82365 PCIC on page D-5 Example WaveLAN Packet Driver:

WaveLAN/IEEE Packet Driver, Variant X, Version X.XX Novell Flag NOT set IO Base=xxxx IRQ=xx MAC Address=xxxxxxxxxxxx Packet Interrupt=0xXX Where:

n Version X.XX identifies the version of the WaveLAN n Packet Driver xx or xxx identifies the values that you entered upon installation of the WaveCAD software as described in Intel 82365 PCIC on page D-5 n Packet Interrupt 0xXX identifies the value you specified in the PACKET.INI file. D-26 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Advanced Options Advanced Options D Dual Card Configuration D When you intend to use multiple WaveLAN PC Cards in a single computing device, for example a wireless server, the CONFIG.SYS file should contain a DEVICE statement with unique parameter values for each card. Example:

DEVICE = c:\wavelan\wavecad\wavecad.sys /m=d100 /b=0340 /i=11 DEVICE = c:\wavelan\wavecad\wavecad.sys /m=e300 /b=04C0 /i=14 Start-up Menu Configuration D If you intend to use your computer in combination with multiple PC Cards, an MS-DOS Start-up Menu may provide a useful solution in one or more of the following situations:

n You are using your computer in combination with another PC Card that requires Card & Socket Services, or n You would like to use your computer with either your WaveLAN card or an Ethernet adapter card. The Start-up Menu will enable you to setup your computer to prompt the computer user to select a specific configuration. Subject to the selected menu option, the computer will automatically load the drivers and programs required for each specific option. The Start-up Menu is a standard MS-DOS feature that is described in the Microsoft MS-DOS Users Guide. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-27 Installation for MS-DOS Advanced Options NOTE:

When using Multiple Boot options to swap WaveLAN with Ethernet adapters and vice versa, you will need to install the Network Client software twice, selecting separate directories for each of the Network Client configurations. The start-up Menu should identify which Network Configuration file will be loaded for each item subject to the selected menu-item. Failing to do so could lead to a situation where the Network Client install programs would simply overwrite the configuration settings of the card you installed first. Example of a Start-up Menu Configuration This section includes samples of the system files CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT that enable you to setup a Start-up Menu. The names and values printed do not necessarily correspond with the actual path and file names or parameter values that apply in your situation. D CONFIG.SYS File

[MENU]

menuitem=WaveLAN menuitem=CSSS

[COMMON]

DEVICE=c:\dos\himem.sys D D-28 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installation for MS-DOS Advanced Options DEVICE=c:\dos\emm386.exe noems x=xxxx-xxxx1 DEVICE=c:\dos\setver.exe

[WaveLAN]

REM This menu item will enable WaveLAN Card Access Driver DEVICE = c:\wavelan\wavecad\wvlancad.sys /m=xxxx /b=xxxx /i=xx2

[CSSS]

REM This menu item will enable Card and Socket Services DEVICE=c:\csss\socksvce.exe3 DEVICE=c:\csss\cardsvce.exe

[COMMON]

DEVICE=c:\windows\ifshlp.sys AUTOEXEC.BAT File D SET TEMP=c:\temp PROMPT $P$g SET DIRCMD=/O/P GOTO %config%

:WaveLAN REM This section contains WaveLAN related commands PATH c:\dos;\c:\wavelan;c:\network\wavelan4;c:\windows c:\network\wavelan\startnet goto end

:CSSS REM This section contains Card and Socket Services related commands PATH c:\dos;\c:\wavelan;c:\network\ethernet\5;c:\windows 1 2 3 4 5 See page D-19 See Intel 82365 PCIC on page D-5 The program path and file names should match the actual path and file names of your Card Services and Socket Services (CS&SS) software. Path to the NET.CFG file that contains the parameter values for your WaveLAN card. Path to the second NET.CFG file that contains the parameter values for an Ethernet card. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide D-29 Installation for MS-DOS Advanced Options c:\network\ethernet\startnet goto end

:end LH c:\windows\smartdrv.exe LH c:\dos\doskey.com LH c:\mouse\mouse.com LH c:\windows\odi.hlp c:\windows\net start win For more information about MS-DOS Start-up Menus, please consult the user documentation that came with your computer or MS-DOS software. D-30 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Apple Macintosh Contents Introduction Installing the WaveLAN Driver Installing Networking Protocols Enabling your WaveLAN Card Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks Type of Network Basic Parameters n n WaveLAN Network Name Advanced Parameters Monitoring Wireless Performance Modifying Configuration Parameters Removing the WaveLAN Driver E E-1 E-2 E-2 E-3 E-5 E-6 E-6 E-7 E-7 E-9 E-9 E-10 Installing in Apple Macintosh Introduction E E To connect your Apple PowerBook to a wireless network, you will need to:

1. 2. Install the WaveLAN card software Install one or more networking protocols to allow your WaveLAN computer to communicate with other wireless and/

or wired computers on the network. 3. Power up the computer with the WaveLAN card. 4. Configure the networking protocols of your MAC operating system to select the WaveLAN interface for network communication. NOTE:

Before you proceed, please note the following:

n When upgrading from previous driver versions, always remove previously installed WaveLAN drivers as described on page E-10. n When installing a new driver, always do so without the card inserted into the computer. n New WaveLAN drivers must be installed prior to inserting the card!

WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide E-1 Installing in Apple Macintosh Installing the WaveLAN Driver Installing the WaveLAN Driver E 1. Insert the WaveLAN diskette for the MAC operating system into your Apple PowerBook. 2. Double-click the diskette icon on the desktop of your computer, to display the contents of this WaveLAN diskette. 3. Now double-click the file called WaveLAN Installer to start the installation program. In the welcome window click the button Continue to proceed. 4. 5. From the list of options select Easy Install. If you have any applications open during the WaveLAN installation process, you will be prompted to close these applications. n Click No to abort installation, or n Click Continue to proceed and have the MAC operating system close all the open applications. 6. Follow the instructions as they appear on your screen and restart your computer. NOTE:

Now that you have installed the WaveLAN driver, you will need to add a networking protocol to allow communication with other networking devices. Installing Networking Protocols E Subject to the type of networking environment, you should install one or more of the following protocols:

n AppleTalk, most commonly used to connect a number of Apple workstations to a networking environment identified as the Applezone TCP/IP to connect to larger network infrastructures, and/or allow connections to the internet via the network. n E-2 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Apple Macintosh Installing the WaveLAN Driver Optionally you can install and enable both networking protocols. For more information about installing protocols, please consult the balloon help and Users Manual that came with your Apple PowerBook. To finish the installation of the WaveLAN drivers and networking protocols, please restart your Apple PowerBook computer. Enabling your WaveLAN Card E Insert the WaveLAN PC Card into your computer. Once your computer has restarted, you will see the WaveLAN/IEEE icon appear on the desktop of your Apple PowerBook. NOTE:

If this icon is not displayed, verify if the PC Card is properly inserted into the PC Card slot of your Apple PowerBook. To enable your WaveLAN connection, you will need to configure the AppleTalk protocol to use the WaveLAN card for its network communication. 1. Double-click the WaveLAN/IEEE icon to launch the AppleTalk 2. installation. In the top side of the AppleTalk window, open the pull-down list of the item Connect via:

3. Select the item WaveLAN/IEEE as pictured in Figure E-1. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide E-3 Installing in Apple Macintosh Installing the WaveLAN Driver Figure E-1 Setting the AppleTalk Parameters 4. Use the button on the top right side of the window to confirm your changes and close the window again. E-4 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Apple Macintosh Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks E When you insert the WaveLAN card into your Apple PowerBook computer, it will start operation with the following factory-set defaults:

n Connect to a Network Infrastructure. n Use the WaveLAN Network Name ANY to connect to the first access point that provides a communications quality that is acceptable or better. To view or modify the WaveLAN parameters, open the WaveLAN Setup window that is listed under the Apple Menu, as an item in the Control Panels (see Figure E-2 below). Figure E-2 Setup WaveLAN Parameters WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide E-5 Installing in Apple Macintosh Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks Basic Parameters E For standard operation of your WaveLAN IEEE PC Card, you will only need to set the following parameters, characterized as the Basic Parameters:

n n Type of network to which you wish to connect your WaveLAN computer. The WaveLAN Network Name of the network. Type of Network E IEEE 802.11 compliant LANs identify two types of networks:

n IEEE 802.11 Infrastructures - Wireless networks that include

(WavePOINT-II) access points to allow the wireless stations to connect to other wired or wireless stations, and provide seamless wireless connectivity to roaming mobile stations. n Ad-hoc wireless workgroups - small stand-alone workgroups of wireless computers, which do not include access point devices. To connect to an infrastructure network, clear the Enable Demo Mode tick box and enter the name of the IEEE 802.11 wireless infrastructure. To connect to an ad-hoc workgroup of wireless stations, place a check mark in the Enable Demo Mode tick box. Inthis mode your WaveLAN card will:

n n n Ignore the WaveLAN Network Name value. Ignore WavePOINT-II access points. Fix the radio channel to operate at its factory-set default channel. This means that your WaveLAN IEEE station can commmunicate with any other WaveLAN IEEE station within its range, provided E-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Apple Macintosh Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks that these stations have been equipped with cards that have a matching defualt radio frequency (see Table A-6 on page A-8). WaveLAN Network Name E If you selected to connect to an infrastructure network, you will need to identify the name of that network. Consult your LAN Administrator for the value that applies in your situation. n Valid values are any alphanumeric string in the range of a-z, A-Z and 0-9 including spaces, with a maximum of 32 characters. For example: Your WaveLAN Network. n Alternatively, you can use the value ANY (all-uppercase). This might be the preferred option when:

n You operate your computer in multiple network environments that are identified by different WaveLAN Network Names. n You do not know the WaveLAN Network Name of the network to which you would like to connect your computer. NOTE:

If you select the value ANY please note that the LAN Administrator may have selected to close the network infrastructure as described on page 6-2. Advanced Parameters E The other parameters listed on the WaveLAN DSetup window, are advanced parameters that will work most efficient when you leave the settings to these parameters to their factory-set defaults. You may only need to modify these parameters only when troubleshooting WaveLAN performance upon advice of a WaveLAN IEEE expert, or a WaveLAN Technical Support representative. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide E-7 Installing in Apple Macintosh Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks A detailed description of these parameters can be found in Chapter 4 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters. Although Chapter 4 is basically oriented at Microsoft Windows operating systems, this chapter will provide you sufficient information to learn more about the setting fo these parameters. NOTE:

The parameter names described in Chapter 4 are slightly different from the names in the WaveLAN Setup window for MAC operating systems. Please use the list below to identify which section in Chapter 4 corresponds with the parameter for your computer:

n Station Address - see MAC Address on page 4-2. n RTS/CTS Medium Allocation - see . n Power Management - Power Management on page 4-13. Figure E-3 WaveLAN Power Managment Setup E-8 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide Installing in Apple Macintosh Using WaveLAN with PowerBooks Monitoring Wireless Performance E The WaveLAN software for Apple PowerBook devices, does not include diagnostic tools to validate the radio link quality. However if your network also includes MS-Windows 95/98 or MS-

Windows NT v4.0 computers, you can use such stations to monitor wireless communications between the other station and your Apple PowerBook device. n n For Independent Network environments, you should start the WaveMANAGER/CLIENT IEEE program on a WaveLAN computer running either the MS-Windows 95, 98 or Windows NT operating system. The Link Test mode of this utility enables you to analyze the communications quality between the Initiator station and your Apple PowerBook device (identified as the Remote Station). In Infrastructure Networks, consult the LAN Administrator to run the WaveMANAGER/AP tool. The Remote Link Test of this utility enables the LAN Administrator to analyze the communications quality between a WavePOINT-II device (identified as the Initiator station) and your Apple PowerBook (identified as the Remote Station). Modifying Configuration Parameters E To view or modify the WaveLAN parameters, open the WaveLAN Setup window that is listed under the Apple Menu, as an item in the Control Panels (see Figure E-2 on page E-5). n Click the button at the top-right side of the window to confirm changes and close the window. n Click the button Undo Changes at the lower left-side of the window to restore any modification, and cick the button at the top-right side of the window to close the window again. WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide E-9 Installing in Apple Macintosh Removing the WaveLAN Driver Removing the WaveLAN Driver E If you wish or need to remove previously installed WaveLAN drivers, you can do so using the WaveLAN Installer program. Removing previously drivers is mandatory if you wish to:

n Upgrade a driver n Change the type of driver (e.g. migrate from Apple Classic to Apple Open Transport. To remove the drivers, proceed as follows:

1. Insert the WaveLAN diskette for the MAC operating system into your Apple PowerBook. 2. Double-click the diskette icon on the desktop of your computer, to display the contents of this WaveLAN diskette. 3. Now double-click the file called WaveLAN Installer to start the installation program. In the welcome window click the button Continue to proceed. 4. 5. From the list of options select Custom Remove. If you have any applications open during the WaveLAN installation process, you will be prompted to close these applications. n Click No to abort the process, or n Click Continue to proceed and have the MAC operating system close all the open applications. 6. Follow the instructions as they appear on your screen and restart your computer. E-10 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 PC Card Users Guide WWarranty Repair Card About Warranty and Repair W In case your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN product is not working properly, you are advised to consult the Troubleshooting hints, prior to contacting WaveLAN Technical Support. In case your IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN product is defective, return it to your Dealer/Distributor in the original packaging. Warranty Repairs:

W When returning a defective product for Warranty, always include the following documents:

The Warranty Repair card, and n n A copy of the invoice/proof of purchase All other Repairs:

W When returning a defective product for Repair, always include the the Warranty Repair card You are advised to read the Information about Limited Warranty as described on the following page. WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card W-1 Warranty Repair Card Limited Warranty Limited Warranty W Lucent Technologies extends a limited warranty from date of purchase of:

n n n Thirty-six (36) months for WaveLAN hardware products Twelve (12) months for WavePOINT access points Twelve (12) months for for the media on which the software is furnished and the reproduction of the software on the media. Upon proof-of-purchase Lucent Technologies shall at its option, repair or replace the defective item at no cost to the buyer. Defective items shall be returned to the dealer/distributor:

Freight prepaid. n n Accompanied by a copy of proof-of-purchase. n Accompanied by a filled out Warranty/Repair card. This warranty is contingent upon proper use in the application for which the products are intended and does not cover products which have been modified without the sellers approval or which have been subjected to unusual physical or electrical demands or damaged in any way. This Warranty constitutes the sole and exclusive remedy of any buyer or sellers equipment and the sole and exclusive liability of Lucent Technologies in connection with the products and is in lieu of all other warranties, express, implied or statutory, including, but not limited to, any implied warranty of merchantability of fitness for a particular use and all other obligations or liabilities of Lucent Technologies. In no event will Lucent Technologies Inc. or any other party or person be liable to you or anyone else for any damages, including lost profits, lost savings or other incidental or consequential damages, or inability to use the software provided on the software media even if Lucent Technologies or the other party person has been advised of the possibility of such damages. W-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card

W

3 W a v e L A N

I E E E T u r b o 1 1 M b P C C a r d To be filled out by the User 0 To be filled out by the Dealer/Distributor 0 Product Description COMCODE (Product ID) Serial Number:

Invoice Date:

Name:

Title:

Company:

Address:

City/State/Zipcode:

Country:

Telephone:

Fax:

Email:

Reported Problem:

Out-of-Box Failure Other

(dd/mm/yyyy) Comment:

Dealer Name:

Address:

City/State/Zipcode:

Country:

Telephone:

Fax:

Warranty?

Yes No RMA Reference Problem Description:

W a r r a n t y R e p a i r C a r d q q q q List of Figures Stand Alone Wireless LAN Select WaveLAN Adapter Type Identify the Location of Files 1-1 Figure 1-1 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Kit Contents 1-2 Figure 1-2 Ad-hoc Wireless Workgroup 1-3 Figure 1-3 1-4 Figure 1-4 LAN Infrastructure 1-5 Figure 1-5 The WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1-11 Figure 1-6 Contents of the Software CD-ROM 1-14 Figure 1-7 Range Extender Antenna 1-16 Figure 1-8 Vehicle Mount Omni-Directional Antenna Figure 2-1 2-2 Inserting the PC Card into Your Computer Figure 3-1 Enable the PCMCIA service for Windows NT 3-7 Figure 3-2 3-9 3-11 Figure 3-3 3-12 Figure 3-4 Windows Network Identification Properties Setup WaveLAN Parameters 3-15 Figure 3-5 Setup WaveLAN Encryption Parameters Figure 3-6 3-18 3-20 Figure 3-7 Finished Setting up the Hardware 4-1 Figure 4-1 Advanced WaveLAN Parameters Figure 4-2 Access Point Density Parameter 4-3 4-5 Figure 4-3 WaveLAN Transmit Rate Figure 4-4 The Hidden Station Problem 4-9 4-10 Figure 4-5 Medium Reservation Parameters Figure 4-6 Medium Reservation Request to Send 4-10 4-11 Figure 4-7 Medium Reservation Clear to Send 4-14 Figure 4-8 WaveLAN Power Management Parameters 5-7 Figure 5-1 WaveMANAGER/CLIENT Status Window Figure 5-2 WaveMANAGER Link Test 5-8 5-17 Figure 5-3 Logging Setup Dialog Box B-5 Figure B-1 Enabling the PC Card Controller Figure B-2 Verifying IRQ Availability B-8 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card 1 List of Figures Figure B-3 Verifying I/O Port Availability Figure B-4 The Windows 98 Device Manager Figure B-5 Windows 98 Update Driver Window Figure B-6 Update Driver in Windows NT Figure B-7 Interface of early WaveLAN Drivers Figure B-8 Setup WaveLAN Parameters Figure C-1 Windows CE CPU Type Figure E-1 Setting the AppleTalk Parameters Figure E-2 Setup WaveLAN Parameters Figure E-3 WaveLAN Power Managment Setup B-10 B-15 B-16 B-17 B-18 B-19 C-2 E-4 E-5 E-8 LOF-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card List of Tables Physical Specifications Power Characteristics A-1 Table A-1 A-1 Table A-2 A-2 Table A-3 Networking Characteristics A-5 Table A-4 Radio Characteristics A-7 Table A-5 WaveLAN Fixed Wireless PC Card A-8 Table A-6 WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 Channels Sets Table B-1 B-2 Table B-2 Default Strappings of the WaveLAN Hardware B-6 B-13 Table B-3 Default Configuration Settings Table D-1 WaveCAD Configuration Parameter Values D-7 D-11 Table D-2 WaveLAN DOS ODI Driver Parameters Table D-3 WaveLAN Packet Driver Parameter Values D-22 Table D-4 D-24 Packet Driver Specific Parameters LED Activity Table WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card LOT-1 Index A Access Control 6-4, D-16, D-23 Ad-hoc workgroup MS-DOS D-11 Advanced Parameters Medium Reservation 4-8 Transmit Rate 4-4 AP Density default B-13 DOS ODI Driver D-13, D-22 Miniport Driver 4-3 Apple E-1 AppleTalk E-2 B BSS MS-DOS D-11 C Carrier Sense Multiple Access/

Collission Avoidance 4-8 CSMA/CA 4-8 CTS see Medium Reservation 4-11 D Data Encryption 6-4 Data Speed 4-4 Display Parameter Settings 3-24 Documentation Updates i Driver_Class Packet Driver D-24 Drivers DOS ODI Driver D-10 Miniport Driver 3-9 Packet D-19 DSSS ii E Encryption 3-18 Enhance Mode WaveMANAGER/CLIENT 5-14 Enhanced Mode Disabling 5-15 Enabling 5-15 ESS MS-DOS D-11 G Gold Label Cards 1-7 H Hot Swapping 2-2, 2-4 I I/O Base (see I/O Port) B-6, D-7 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card IX-1 Index I/O Port default B-6 DOS D-7 IEEE ii Manual Logging 5-16 Measurement Data automatic logging 5-16 logging options 5-16 Standard on Wireless LANs ii Medium Reservation Information World Wide Web i Infrastructure MS-DOS D-11 Installation, network operating system D-9 Interoperability ii Interrupt Request DOS D-7 IRQ Display B-8 DOS D-7 ISA Card (Windows 95/98 only) B-6 PC Card defaults B-6 verify availability B-8 L LED activity B-2 Logging Measurement Data stop 5-17 M MAC Address 6-4 default B-13 DOS ODI D-14, D-23 Miniport Driver 4-4 Macintosh E-1 default B-13 DOS ODI D-14, D-23 Miniport Driver 4-4 Memory Address DOS D-7 Message Fragmentation Miniport Driver 4-4 MS-DOS D-1 N Novell Flag Packet Driver D-24 P Packet_Interrupt Packet Driver D-24 PCIC MS-DOS systems D-2 Plug & Play 2-3, 2-4, 3-5 Protocol verify current setting 3-23 Protocols ad-hoc workgroup 3-22 infrastructure networks 3-22 R Radio Safety ii IX-2 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card Index Technology ii RTS see Medium Reservation 4-11 U Updates i W WaveCAD D-1 WaveLAN Network Name 3-14 default B-13 DOS ODI Driver D-11 Miniport Driver 3-14 Packet Driver D-20, D-22 WaveLAN Parameters Advanced 4-1 Basic 3-14 WaveMANAGER/CLIENT 5-15 Windows 95, OSR2 B-16 WVLAN42.COM D-1 WVLAN43.COM D-1 S Security 6-3, 6-4 Access Control 6-3 Silver Label Cards 1-6 Software Updates i SOHO 1-2 SSID see WaveLAN Network Name 1-19, 3-14 Station Address DOS ODI Driver D-14, D-23 Miniport Driver 4-2 Station Name 3-16 default B-13 DOS ODI Driver D-11, D-22 Miniport Driver 3-16 Packet Driver D-20 System Scale (AP Density) 4-3 T TCP/IP Macintosh environments E-2 Technical Support i Transmit Rate default B-13 DOS ODI Driver D-12, D-22 Miniport Driver 4-4 Transmit Rate Select 5-10 WaveLAN/IEEE Turbo 11 Mb PC Card IX-3

 

 

9EHAAII/=JAM=O 7IAH=K=

KA " '''

2=HJ  &""+

1 0 0 9 O S I d e i f i t r e C 9HEJJA>O/=>HEAAABB 6DEIEA=K=EIEJA@A@BHJDAAN?KIELAKIAB6ACENFAHIA

66*-,15641*76-,7651,-6-/1:916076-:24-55 2-41551.460-,+7-6)6,-2)46-6

+FOHECDJ'''>O6ACEN1?EIIEII=KC=J=HE

This document and the information it contains is the property of Teklogix Inc., is issued in strict confidence, and is not to be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, except for the sole purpose of promoting the sale of Teklogix manufactured goods and services. Furthermore, this document is not to be used as a basis for design, man-

ufacture, or sub-contract, or in any manner detrimental to the interests of Teklogix Inc. All trademarks are the property of their respective holders. 4AJKH6.=?JHO9=HH=JO Teklogix warrants a return-to-factory warranty for a period of 90 days from shipment or 120 days from shipment where Teklogix installs the equipment. The warranty on Teklogix manufactured equipment does not extend to any product that has been tampered with, altered, or repaired by any person other than an employee of an authorized Teklogix service organization. See Teklogix terms and conditions of sale for full details. 5AHLE?A When requesting service, please provide information concerning the nature of the failure and the manner in which the equipment was used when the failure occurred. Type, model, and serial number should also be provided. Before returning any products for a Return Authorization number. This will help us to service your product more efficiently. For a listing of worldwide offices, please refer to the last page of this manual.

,EI?=EAH Every effort has been made to make this material complete, accurate, and up-to-

date. Teklogix Inc. reserves the right to make changes without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages, including but not limited to consequential damages, caused by reliance on the material presented, including but not limited to typographical errors. the Customer Services Group factory, call the to

 

 

APPENDIX A PORT PINOUTS AND CABLE DIAGRAMS A.1 Console Port Pin No. Name Function Direction 3 2 5 4*

7*

TD RD SG DTR RTS Transmit Data Receive Data Signal Ground Data Terminal Ready Request to Send Out In Out Out

* always pulled high A.2 RS-232 Plus Port (SLIM Card) Pin No. Name Function Direction 1 2 3 7 FG TD RD SG Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Signal Ground Out In Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-1 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams RS-232/Current Loop Port (SLIM Card) A.3 RS-232/Current Loop Port (SLIM Card) Pin No. Name Function Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 19 20 FG TD RD RTS CTS DSR SG Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect 20 mA Current Loop 20 mA Current Loop 20 mA Out Loop Enable DTR Data Terminal Ready Out In Out In In In In In Out Out Out A-2 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams DA15 Connector Pinout (10Base5 Ethernet) A.4 DA15 Connector Pinout (10Base5 Ethernet) Pin No. Function Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Signal Ground Collision +

Transmit +

Signal Ground Receive +

Signal Ground No Connection Signal Ground Collision -

Transmit -

Signal Ground Receive -

+12 Volt Supply Signal Ground No Connection In Out In In Out In Out Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-3 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams RJ-45 Connector Pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) A.5 RJ-45 Connector Pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) Contact Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TD+

TD RD+

Not used Not used RD Not used Not used Note: Usually, a straight-through connection is needed to connect Twisted-Pair

(10Base-T) to the hub. A-4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Token Ring Dsub9 Connector A.6 Token Ring Dsub9 Connector Function Pin No. Direction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ring Input (A) Frame Ground

+5 Volt Supply Frame Ground Ring Output (B) Ring Input (B) Frame Ground Frame Ground In Out Out In Ring Output (A) Out

* This connection supports Shielded Twisted Pair (IBM STP) cable Type 1 or 6. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-5 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions A.7 Serial Cable Descriptions Cable No. Function Connection Standard Length 16590 9400/9300 to 9150 Direct RS-232 15 feet 16598 9400/9300 to 9150 Modem RS-232 8 feet 16599 9400/9300 to 9150 Current Loop 15 feet 19387 9150 to Console Direct 6 feet DTE to DTE Cable No. 16590 A-6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions DTE to DCE Cable No. 16598 Current Loop Cable No. 16599 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual A-7 Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams Serial Cable Descriptions Console Port Cable No. 19387 A-8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

 

 

Declaration Of Conformity Product:

9150 Wireless Gateway Application of Council Directives:

Conformity Declared to Standards:

EMC Directive:

89/336/EEC Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC EN 55022: 1994; Class B; ETS 300 328: 1996 EN 50082-1: 1997; ETS 300 683: 1997 EN 61000-4-2; 4kV CD; 8kV AD EN 61000-4-3; 3V/m, 80-1000 MHz EN 61000-4-4; 1kV Signal lines; 2kV Power lines EN 61000-4-5; 1kV Common; 0.5kV Differential mode EN 61000-4-6; 3VRMS, 150kHz-80 MHz EN 61000-4-11; AC Mains Ports EN 60950: 1992 + A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A11 Manufacturer:

Teklogix Incorporated 2100 Meadowvale Blvd. Mississauga, Ontario; Canada L5N 7J9 Year of Manufacture:

1998 Manufacturers Address in the European Community:

Teklogix S.A. Parc Club Du Golf - Bat 1. 13856 Aix-En-Provence Cedex 3; France Type of Equipment:

Information Technology Equipment Equipment Class:

Commercial and Light Industrial

 

 

TABLE OF CONTENTS Caution To Users . vii Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 About This Manual . 3 1.2 Text Conventions . 4 1.3 About The 9150 . . 4 1.3.1 Base Station Functions . 6 1.3.2 Mini-Controller Functions. 6 1.3.3 Access Point Functions . 6 1.4 Radio Options . 7 1.5 Radio Protocols . 7 1.5.1 Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol. 8 1.5.2 Wlan Protocol . 8 IEEE 802.11 Protocol . 10 1.5.3 1.5.3.1 Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) . 11 Chapter 2: Installation Requirements 2.1 Choosing The Right Location. 15 2.1.1 Environment . 15 2.1.2 Maintenance . 16 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables . 16 2.2 Connecting To External Devices . 17 2.2.1 Ports . 17 2.2.2 Status Indicators (LEDs) . 18 2.2.3 Preparing For LAN Installation . 18 2.2.3.1 Ethernet . 19 2.2.3.2 Token Ring . 19 2.2.4 Preparing For Serial Installation. 20 2.2.5 Connecting A Video Display Terminal . . . 21 2.3 Changing The Configuration With A Web Browser . 21 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual i Contents Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration 3.1 Configuration Main Menu . 25 3.2 Configuring The IP Address . 25 3.3 Accessing The Menus . . 27 3.4 General Configuration Options . 29 3.4.1 Interfaces . 30 3.4.1.1 Onboard Ethernet . 30 3.4.1.2 Slot n: Token-Ring . 32 3.4.1.3 Slot n: PC Card Radio . 34 3.4.2 Users . 34 3.4.3 SNMP . 35 3.4.3.1 System Parameters . 36 3.4.3.2 SNMP Communities . 36 3.4.3.3 Trap Receivers . 36 3.4.4 TCP/IP Parameters . 36 3.4.4.1 Host Table . 37 3.4.4.2 Bootp . 38 3.4.4.3 DNS . 39 3.4.5 Serial Ports Parameters. 40 3.4.5.1 Console Port . 40 3.4.5.2 Serial Port

. 40 3.5 Access Point/Base Station Configurations. 41 3.6 Miscellaneous Commands . 42 3.6.1 System Info. 42 3.6.2 Reboot Unit. 43 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 4.1 Overview . 47 4.2 Interfaces . 49 4.2.1 TekLAN Parameters . 49 4.2.1.1 Radio . 50 4.2.1.2 Wireless LAN Parameters . 52 4.2.2 Narrow Band Radio Parameters . 53 4.2.2.1 Polling Protocol Parameters . 56 4.2.2.2 Radio Parameters. 59 4.2.2.3 Radio Channels. 60 4.2.2.4 TRX7370 Radio Card Parameters . . . 60 ii Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Contents 4.3 Hosts. 63 4.4 Main Host Menu . 65 4.4.1 General Host Options . 66 4.4.2 9010 / TCP/IP . 67 4.4.2.1 Emulation Options . 67 4.4.2.2 Protocol Options And Function Key Mappings. . 68 4.4.3 9010 / Serial . 68 4.4.3.1 Emulation Options . 69 4.4.3.2 Protocol Options: Serial Line . 69 4.4.3.3 Protocol Options: 9010 Protocol

. 70 4.4.3.4 Function Key Mappings . 70 4.5 Base Stations . 71 4.6 Radio Link Features . 72 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5.1 Overview . 77 5.2 Hosts. 80 5.3 Main Host Menu . 82 5.3.1 General Options . 83 5.3.2 9010 Emulations. 84 5.3.3 3274/Telnet . 84 5.3.3.1 Emulation Options. 84 5.3.3.2 Protocol Options. 95 5.3.3.3 Function Key Mappings . 98 5.3.4 5250/Telnet . 99 5.3.4.1 Emulation Options. 99 5.3.4.2 Protocol Options. 110 5.3.4.3 Function Key Mappings . 112 5.3.5 ANSI/Telnet . 113 5.3.5.1 Emulation Options. 113 5.3.5.2 Protocol Options. 116 5.3.5.3 Function Key Mappings . 121 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration 6.1 Overview . 125 6.2 Interfaces . 126 IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) . . . 126 6.2.1 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual iii Contents 6.2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) . 128 6.3 MAC Bridge Parameters . 129 6.3.1 General Configuration . 131 6.3.2 Address Filters: MAC Address. 132 6.3.3 Protocol Filters . 133 6.3.3.1 Ethernet II Filters. 136 6.3.3.2 LLC Filters . 137 6.3.3.3 SNAP Filters . 138 6.3.3.4 Storm Detection . 139 6.4 Mobility Configuration . 140 6.4.1 IAPP Parameters . 142 Chapter 7: Specifications 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway . . 145 7.1.1 PC Card Radios . 145 7.1.2 Power Requirements . 146 7.1.3 Physical Description . . . 146 7.1.4 Processor And Memory . 147 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements . 147 7.1.6 Network Interfaces . 147 7.1.7 SLIM Cards . 147 7.1.8 Approvals. 147 Appendices Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams A.1 Console Port . A-1 A.2 RS-232 Plus Port (SLIM Card) . . . A-1 A-2 A.3 RS-232/Current Loop Port (SLIM Card) . A-3 A.4 DA15 Connector Pinout (10Base5 Ethernet) . . . A.5 RJ-45 Connector Pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) . . A-4 A.6 Token Ring Dsub9 Connector . . . . A-5 A.7 Serial Cable Descriptions . A-6 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs B.1 Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) . . . . B-1 iv Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Contents B.1.1 Listing by Description . B-1 B.1.2 Listing By Type (Hexadecimal) . B-8 B.2 DSAP/SSAP Types . B-14 B.3 OUI Values . B-15 Index . I Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual v

 

 

APPENDIX B MAC BRIDGE PROTOCOL FILTERS AND OUIS B.1 Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) B.1.1 Listing by Description DESCRIPTION 3Com Corporation TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x6010-0x6014 3Com(Bridge) loop detect 3Com(Bridge) TCP-IP Sys 3Com(Bridge) XNS Sys Mgmt 0x9003 0x9002 0x9001 Advanced Encryption System 0x823E-0x8240 Aeonic Systems Allen-Bradley Alpha Micro Apollo Computer Apollo Computers Appletalk AppleTalk AARP (Kinetics) Applitek Corporation Apricot Computers ARAI Bunkichi ARP Artisoft Ascom Banking Systems 0x8036 0x80E0-0x80E3 0x814A 0x80F7 0x8019 0x809B 0x80F3 0x80C7 0x81CC-0x81D5 0x81A4 0x0806 0x81D6-0x81DD 0x8221-0x8222 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-1 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION TYPE (HEX VALUES) AT&T AT&T AT&T AT&T 0x8008 0x8046 0x8047 0x8069 Athena Programming 0x827F-0x8282 ATOMIC Autophon Banyan Systems Banyan Systems Banyan Systems BBN Simnet BBN VITAL-LanBridge cache 0x86DF 0x806A 0x0BAD 0x80C4 0x80C5 0x5208 0xFF00 Berkeley Trailer encap/IP 0x1001-0x100F Berkeley Trailer nego BIIN BIIN 0x1000 0x814D 0x814E Bridge Communications 0x8132-0x8136 Cabletron Chaosnet Charles River Data System Charles River Data System ComDesign Computer Network Tech Computer Protocol Pty Ltd. Computgraphic Corp. Comsat Labs 0x7034 0x0804 0x8164-0x8166 0x8263-0x826A 0x806C 0x869E-0x86A1 0x815C-0x815E 0x806D 0x81F0-0x81F2 B-2 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION Counterpoint Computers Counterpoint Computers Cronus Direct Cronus VLN Dansk Data Elektronik Datability Datability DCA Data Exchange Cluster DEC Customer Protocol DEC DECNET Phase IV Route DEC Diagnostic Protocol DEC Ethernet Encryption DEC LAN Traffic Monitor DEC LANBridge DEC LAT DEC LAVC, SCA DEC MOP Dump/Load DEC MOP Remote Console DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned (Exp.) Delta Controls DLOG DLOG TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x8062 0x8081-0x8083 0x8004 0x8003 0x807B 0x809C-0x809E 0x80E4-0x80F0 0x80C0-0x80C3 0x6006 0x6003 0x6005 0x803D 0x803F 0x8038 0x6004 0x6007 0x6001 0x6002 0x6008-0x6009 0x8039-0x803C 0x803E 0x8040-0x8042 0x6000 0x86DE 0x0660 0x0661 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-3 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION ECMA Internet Evans & Sutherland Excelan ExperData TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x0803 0x805D 0x8010 0x8049 Gateway Communications 0x86A3-0x86AC General Dynamics Harris Corporation Hayes Microcomputers HP Probe IBM SNA Service on Ether Idea Courier Inst Ind Info Tech Integrated Solutions TRFS Intergraph Corporation Internet IP (IPv4) Invisible Software ISC Bunker Ramo Kinetics KTI Landis & Gyr Powers Landmark Graphics Corp. Little Machines Logicraft Loopback LRT Matra 0x8068 0x80CD-0x80CE 0x8130 0x8005 0x80D5 0x8694-0x869D 0x829A-0x829B 0x80DE-0x80DF 0x80C8-0x80CC 0x0800 0x8A96-0x8A97 0xFF00-0xFF0F 0x80F4-0x80F5 0x8139-0x813D 0x86E0-0x86EF 0x806E-0x8077 0x8060 0x8148 0x9000 0x7020-0x7029 0x807A B-4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION Merit Internodal Motorola Motorola Computer NBS Internet Nestar Network Computing Devices Nixdorf Computers Novell, Inc. Pacer Software PCS Basic Block Protocol Planning Research Corp. Polygon Proteon Protocol Engines PUP Addr Trans Qualcomm Qualcomm Quantum Software RAD Network Devices Rational Corp Retix Reverse ARP Rosemount Corporation SAIC SECTRA SGI bounce server TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x807C 0x8700-0x8710 0x818D 0x0802 0x8006 0x8149 0x80A3 0x8137-0x8138 0x80C6 0x4242 0x8044 0x81E6-0x81EF 0x7030 0x817D-0x818C 0x0A01 0x8151-0x8153 0x819A-0x81A3 0x8203-0x8205 0x81A5-0x81AE 0x8150 0x80F2 0x8035 0x80D3-0x80D4 0x81F3-0x81F5 0x86DB 0x8016 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-5 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION SGI diagnostics SGI network games SGI reserved TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x8013 0x8014 0x8015 Siemens Gammasonics Inc. 0x80A4-0x80B3 SNMP Spider Systems Ltd. Stanford V Kernel exp. Stanford V Kernel prod. Symbolics Private Symbolics Private Taurus Controls Taylor Instrument Technically Elite Concept Tigan, Inc. Tymshare Ungermann-Bass dia/loop Ungermann-Bass download Ungermann-Bass net debugr Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Valid Systems Varian Associates Veeco Integrated Auto. VG Analytical 0x814C 0x809F 0x805B 0x805C 0x081C 0x8107-0x8109 0x829C-0x82AB 0x80CF-0x80D2 0x814F 0x802F 0x802E 0x7002 0x7000 0x0900 0x8065 0x8066 0x1600 0x80DD 0x8067 0x81F6-0x81F8 VG Laboratory Systems 0x8131 Vitalink Communications 0x807D-0x807F B-6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) DESCRIPTION TYPE (HEX VALUES) Vitalink TransLAN III Walker Richer & Quinn Wellfleet Communications X.25 Level 3 X.75 Internet Xerox IEEE802.3 PUP XEROX NS IDP XNS Compatibility Xyplex Xyplex 0x8080 0x82AC-0x8693 0x80FF-0x8103 0x0805 0x0801 0x0A00 0x0600 0x0807 0x0888-0x088A 0x81B7-0x81B9 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-7 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) B.1.2 Listing By Type (Hexadecimal) TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x0600 0x0660 0x0661 0x0800 0x0801 0x0802 0x0803 0x0804 0x0805 0x0806 0x0807 0x081C XEROX NS IDP DLOG DLOG Internet IP (IPv4) X.75 Internet NBS Internet ECMA Internet Chaosnet X.25 Level 3 ARP XNS Compatibility Symbolics Private 0x0888-0x088A Xyplex 0x0900 0x0A00 0x0A01 0x0BAD 0x1000 Ungermann-Bass net debugr Xerox IEEE802.3 PUP PUP Addr Trans Banyan Systems Berkeley Trailer nego 0x1001-0x100F Berkeley Trailer encap/IP 0x1600 0x4242 0x5208 0x6000 0x6001 0x6002 Valid Systems PCS Basic Block Protocol BBN Simnet DEC Unassigned (Exp.) DEC MOP Dump/Load DEC MOP Remote Console B-8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x6003 0x6004 0x6005 0x6006 0x6007 0x6008-

0x6009 DEC DECNET Phase IV Route DEC LAT DEC Diagnostic Protocol DEC Customer Protocol DEC LAVC, SCA DEC Unassigned DEC Unassigned 0x6010-0x6014 3Com Corporation 0x7000 0x7002 0x7020-0x7029 0x7030 0x7034 0x8003 0x8004 0x8005 0x8006 0x8008 0x8010 0x8013 0x8014 0x8015 0x8016 0x8019 0x802E 0x802F Ungermann-Bass download Ungermann-Bass dia/loop LRT Proteon Cabletron Cronus VLN Cronus Direct HP Probe Nestar AT&T Excelan SGI diagnostics SGI network games SGI reserved SGI bounce server Apollo Computers Tymshare Tigan, Inc. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-9 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x8035 0x8036 0x8038 Reverse ARP Aeonic Systems DEC LANBridge 0x8039-0x803C DEC Unassigned 0x803D 0x803E 0x803F DEC Ethernet Encryption DEC Unassigned DEC LAN Traffic Monitor 0x8040-0x8042 DEC Unassigned 0x8044 0x8046 0x8047 0x8049 0x805B 0x805C 0x805D 0x8060 0x8062 0x8065 0x8066 0x8067 0x8068 0x8069 0x806A 0x806C 0x806D Planning Research Corp. AT&T AT&T ExperData Stanford V Kernel exp. Stanford V Kernel prod. Evans & Sutherland Little Machines Counterpoint Computers Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Univ. of Mass. @ Amherst Veeco Integrated Auto. General Dynamics AT&T Autophon ComDesign Computgraphic Corp. 0x806E-0x8077 Landmark Graphics Corp. B-10 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x807A 0x807B 0x807C Matra Dansk Data Elektronik Merit Internodal 0x807D-0x807F Vitalink Communications 0x8080 Vitalink TransLAN III 0x8081-0x8083 Counterpoint Computers 0x809B 0x809C-0x809E Appletalk Datability 0x809F 0x80A3 Spider Systems Ltd. Nixdorf Computers 0x80A4-0x80B3 Siemens Gammasonics Inc. 0x80C0-0x80C3 DCA Data Exchange Cluster 0x80C4 0x80C5 0x80C6 0x80C7 Banyan Systems Banyan Systems Pacer Software Applitek Corporation 0x80C8-0x80CC Intergraph Corporation 0x80CD-0x80CE Harris Corporation 0x80CF-0x80D2 Taylor Instrument 0x80D3-0x80D4 Rosemount Corporation 0x80D5 0x80DD IBM SNA Service on Ether Varian Associates 0x80DE-0x80DF Integrated Solutions TRFS 0x80E0-0x80E3 Allen-Bradley 0x80E4-0x80F0 Datability 0x80F2 Retix Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-11 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x80F3 AppleTalk AARP (Kinetics) 0x80F4-0x80F5 Kinetics 0x80F7 0x80FF-0x8103 0x8107-0x8109 0x8130 0x8131 0x8132-0x8136 0x8137-0x8138 Apollo Computer Wellfleet Communications Symbolics Private Hayes Microcomputers VG Laboratory Systems Bridge Communications Novell, Inc. 0x8139-0x813D KTI 0x8148 0x8149 0x814A 0x814C 0x814D 0x814E 0x814F 0x8150 Logicraft Network Computing Devices Alpha Micro SNMP BIIN BIIN Technically Elite Concept Rational Corp 0x8151-0x8153 Qualcomm 0x815C-0x815E Computer Protocol Pty Ltd 0x8164-0x8166 Charles River Data System 0x817D-0x818C Protocol Engines 0x818D Motorola Computer 0x819A-0x81A3 Qualcomm 0x81A4 ARAI Bunkichi 0x81A5-0x81AE RAD Network Devices B-12 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) TYPE (HEX VALUES) 0x81B7-0x81B9 DESCRIPTION Xyplex 0x81CC-0x81D5 Apricot Computers 0x81D6-0x81DD 0x81E6-0x81EF Artisoft Polygon 0x81F0-0x81F2 0x81F3-0x81F5 0x81F6-0x81F8 0x8203-0x8205 0x8221-0x8222 0x823E-0x8240 0x827F-0x8282 Comsat Labs SAIC VG Analytical Quantum Software Ascom Banking Systems Advanced Encryption System Athena Programming 0x8263-0x826A Charles River Data System 0x829A-0x829B Inst Ind Info Tech 0x829C-0x82AB Taurus Controls 0x82AC-0x8693 Walker Richer & Quinn 0x8694-0x869D Idea Courier 0x869E-0x86A1 Computer Network Tech 0x86A3-0x86AC Gateway Communications 0x86DB 0x86DE 0x86DF SECTRA Delta Controls ATOMIC 0x86E0-0x86EF Landis & Gyr Powers 0x8700-0x8710 Motorola 0x8A96-0x8A97 Invisible Software 0x9000 0x9001 Loopback 3Com(Bridge) XNS Sys Mgmt Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-13 Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs DSAP/SSAP Types TYPE (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x9002 0x9003 0xFF00 3Com(Bridge) TCP-IP Sys 3Com(Bridge) loop detect BBN VITAL-LanBridge cache 0xFF00-0xFF0F ISC Bunker Ramo B.2 DSAP/SSAP Types DSAP/SSAP

(HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x0404 0x0505 0x0606 0x0808 0x0C0C 0x0E0E 0x4242 0x4E4E 0x5E5E 0x8E8E SNA Path Control SNA reserved (DOD IP) SNA SNA PROWAY-LAN network management and initialization (ISA-S72) MAC Bridge Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D-1993) MAP messaging service (EIA RS-511) ISI IP PROWAY-LAN active station list maintenance (ISA-S72) 0xAAAA Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) 0xE0E0 0xF0F0 0xFEFE Novell Netware NetBIOS ISO network layer protocol (ISO CLNS DIS 8473) B-14 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs OUI Values B.3 OUI Values A few important OUI values:

OUI (HEX VALUES) DESCRIPTION 0x000000 0x0000F8 0x0020A6 0x00601D 0x00C0AF RFC 1042 encapsulation Bridge-Tunnel encapsulation Proxim Inc. Lucent Technologies Teklogix Inc. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual B-15

 

 

CAUTION TO USERS This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-

tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user is required to correct the interference at personal expense. The transmitters supplied are not to be operated within the frequency band 406 - 406.1 MHz. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Teklogix Inc. can void the users authority to operate the equipment. An unshielded plug or cable may cause radiation interference. All peripheral devices must be used with properly shielded interface cables and external filters as required. The shield must be connected directly to the chassis of the peripheral device. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual vii Safety Summary IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS This safety information is for the protection of both operating and service personnel. DO NOT OPERATE IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE Operating Teklogix equipment where explosive gas is present may result in an explosion. DO NOT REMOVE COVERS OR OPEN ENCLOSURES To avoid injury, the equipment covers and enclosures should only be removed by qualified service personnel. Do not operate the equipment with-

out the covers and enclosures properly installed. DO NOT HOLD ANTENNA To avoid discomfort due to the local heating effect of radio frequency energy, do not touch the antenna when a 9150 is transmitting. CONNECTION TO OUTDOOR ANTENNA Outdoor antenna to be earthed in accordance with International Standard EN 50083-1 (1993), Cabled Distribution Systems for Television and Sound Signals - Safety Requirements. ANSCHLU AN ANTENNENNANLAGEN Auenantennennanlagen mssen nach nationalen oder internationalen Normen (z.B. EN50083-1(1993) geerdet werden. viii Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

 

 

INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 About This Manual . 3 1.2 Text Conventions. 4 1.3 About The 9150 . . 4

.6

. 1.3.1 Base Station Functions. 1.3.2 Mini-Controller Functions . 6 1.3.3 Access Point Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1.4 Radio Options . 7 1.5 Radio Protocols . 7 1.5.1 Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol . . . . . . . . .8 1.5.2 Wlan Protocol . 8 1.5.3 IEEE 802.11 Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 1.5.3.1 Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) . . . . . . 11

. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 1 Chapter 1:

Introduction About This Manual 1.1 About This Manual This manual contains information about the installation, basic operation, and configuration of the 9150 Wireless Gateway. Chapter 1: Introduction describes the 9150 and the radio protocols it supports. Chapter 2: Installation Requirements describes the physical installation of the Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway and how to connect to the 9150 for configuration and diagnostics. Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration describes the options available from the main configuration menus. Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as a base station linked to a network controller. Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as a mini-controller. Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration describes the configuration for a 9150 used as an access point device between wired and wireless networks. Chapter 7: Specifications outlines the performance specifications for the 9150. Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams includes pinouts and diagrams of the ports and cables for the 9150. Appendix B: MAC Bridge Protocol Filters and OUIs presents tables of values for Ethernet II and DSAP/SSAP types, and OUI. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 3 Chapter 1:

Text Conventions Introduction 1.2 Text Conventions Note: Notes highlight additional helpful information. Important:

These statements provide particularly important instructions or additional information that is critical to the operation of the computer and other equipment. Warning:

These statements provide important information that may prevent injury, damage to the equipment, or loss of data. 1.3 About The 9150 The 9150 Wireless Gateway is designed to support a wide variety of system config-

urations. Using the IEEE 802.11 Wireless LAN Standard, the 9150 is capable of operating as a transparent bridge (access point) between wireless and wired networks. This allows wireless clients to access the network and also move seamlessly between the 9150s in the network. The 9150 can also operate as a Teklogix base station or a mini-controller. The 9150 supports Type II PCMCIA cards so that multiple radio interfaces are pos-

sible. The 9150 also has dual-radio functionality. It can support several combina-

tions of radio types to function as both a mini-controller and base station, access point and base station, or access point and mini-controller. For details, see Radio Options on page 7. The 9150 Flash memory holds the boot code, configuration parameters and firm-

ware. The 9150 Configuration program allows various parameter settings to be changed, added or deleted. The Flash can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a standard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape or MS Internet Explorer

(for instructions, see Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration). 4 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction About The 9150 Figure 1.1 The 9150 Wireless Gateway - Front View Figure 1.2 The 9150 Wireless Gateway - Bottom View Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 5 Chapter 1:

Introduction Base Station Functions 1.3.1 Base Station Functions As a base station, the 9150 provides a link between the local area network and the wireless network consisting of Teklogix mobile terminals, and base stations such as the 9140 Wireless Gateway. The 9150 and 9400/9300 Network Controller (or host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit) communicate using the 9010 propri-

etary protocol with TCP/IP over Ethernet, Token Ring or serial connectivity. Wlan protocol enables the 9150 to communicate with 9140s without cable attachments

(see Figure 4.1 on page 47). For information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. For details on Wlan, see Wlan Protocol on page 8. 1.3.2 Mini-Controller Functions The 9150 is equipped with some emulation capabilities, allowing it to act as a mini-

controller. When a 9150 is configured as a mini-controller, Teklogix terminals can emulate an ANSI, 5250 or 3274 terminal via a 9150 rather than through a 9400/9300 Network Controller. To configure the 9150 as a mini-controller, see Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Config-

uration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 5.1 on page 78. 1.3.3 Access Point Functions As an access point, the 9150 Wireless Gateway forms a communication link between Teklogix RF terminals or wireless access point clients and a Teklogix Network Controller or a host computer. It communicates over an IEEE 802.11 RF data link with terminals and over a cable with a network controller or a host com-

puter. The 9150 can be connected to the network through an Ethernet or Token Ring connection. The diagram in Figure 6.1 on page 125 illustrates a 9150 access point connection between a Teklogix 9400 Network Controller on Ethernet and IEEE 802.11 wireless devices. Figure 1.4 on page 12 shows a generalized Token Ring configuration. For information on the 9150 as an access point, see IEEE 802.11 Protocol on page 10 and Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. 6 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction Radio Options 1.4 Radio Options The 9150 supports Type II PCMCIA cards so that multiple radio interfaces are possible. There is one internal and one external PC card slot available. The type of PCMCIA radio card installed in the 9150 is dependent on your wireless network. Currently supported radios are:

TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP. TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7410). TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7425). Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7440). Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7430). The 9150 has dual-radio functionality. It can support several combinations of radio types to function as both a mini-controller and base station, access point and base sta-

tion, or access point and mini-controller. The 902 MHz, 2.4 GHz (802.11 and TekLAN) and Narrow Band radios can be used in any combination, with the exception of dual TekLAN or dual Narrow Band radios. Important:

The radio in the terminal must match the radio in the 9150 Wireless Gateway. If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: Turn the 9150 off before changing the radio. 1.5 Radio Protocols RF protocols allow terminals to communicate with a base station by sharing the use of a radio channel in an efficient way. Teklogix systems use one of three types of RF protocols: the Teklogix Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol, the Teklogix Wireless LAN (Wlan) protocol, or the non-proprietary IEEE 802.11 protocol. When used as a base station, the 9150 uses either the Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol or the Wlan protocol. These two protocol types cannot be mixed on a single system. When used as an access point device, the 9150 employs the IEEE 802.11 protocol. These protocols are described in the following sections. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 7

Chapter 1:

Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol Introduction 1.5.1 Adaptive Polling/Contention Protocol The Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol is always used on Narrow Band radio systems with baud rates of up to 19.2 kbps, and may also be used on Spread Spec-

trum systems at higher rates. Terminals operating with this protocol do not transmit unless they receive polls from the 9150. Terminals are generally polled en masse. Following each poll, groups of terminals are assigned response windows in which they may respond to the poll. If a collision occurs more than one terminal attempts to respond in a particular window the 9150 that is polling divides and reassigns that group until the colliding terminals can respond without a collision. Adaptive features of this protocol allow the response windows to be adjusted to accommodate high or low RF traffic conditions, and to prevent data from being queued too long when a particular terminal has a burst of data to send or receive. Systems using adaptive polling/contention can use the cellular option so that terminal operators can roam the site, maintaining uninterrupted communication as they pass between coverage areas. If cellular base is not enabled, a RESET: Press Enter message appears on the terminal screen each time an operator moves from one base station coverage area to another. (Pressing <ENTER> restores communication, but some data may be lost.) 1.5.2 Wlan Protocol The Wlan (Wireless LAN) protocol is used only on Spread Spectrum radio systems at baud rates of 122 kbps and higher. The Wlan protocol allows base stations to be added to a system without cable connections. A Wlan system consists of a minimum of one wired base station and zero or more wireless base stations. It can operate on either one channel usually the case or on multiple channels. When a Wlan system is operating, base stations do not send out polls. Instead, both wired and wireless base stations regularly broadcast routing information, indicating the available routes back to the controller. Both terminals and wireless base stations receive these broadcasts, determine the best communication route, and send their messages. If a better route becomes available, the terminal or wireless base will change communication paths. 8 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction Wlan Protocol Only one base station or terminal may transmit at one time. When the channel is clear, a combination of preset priorities and random choices determines who goes next. Even if two transmitters attempt to send at the same time, message acknowledgements and retransmissions prevent any data from being lost. Terminals moving through the Wlan communicate with the base stations that provide the best communication path to a wired base station. If multiple channels are used, the terminal looks for a better channel only if it cannot find an acceptable path back on its current channel. Note: For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 1.3, below. 8055 Vehicle-Mount RF Terminal HOST 9150 Wireless Gateway ETHERNET TCP/IP SERIAL 9400 Network Controller 9140 Wireless Gateway 7030 Hand-Held RF Terminal 9150 Wireless Gateway Figure 1.3 9150 LAN And Serial Configuration Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 9 Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol 1.5.3 IEEE 802.11 Protocol The IEEE 802.11 protocol is an OSI standard for Wireless Local Area Networks

(WLANs). With this standard, any IEEE 802.11 radio can communicate with any other similarly-equipped device. However, IEEE 802.11 does not provide a standard for a total WLAN system. IEEE 802.11 solely standardizes two communications layers: Physical (PHY) and Medium Access Control (MAC). Three different PHY layer media are covered: 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum radio, 2.4 GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum radio, and infrared. Each station in a WLAN system has its own unique MAC address. Important:

Equipment using one physical medium (e.g. Frequency Hopping versus Direct Sequence) will not interoperate with equipment using a different physical medium. IEEE 802.11 uses 2.4 GHz radios of relatively low power. The range is limited to no more than a hundred feet or so, depending on the conditions, and is usually restricted to line of sight operation. Therefore, most wireless networks need more than one coverage area, with terminals moving between the areas. To integrate those areas, systems using IEEE 802.11 protocol for their wireless networks require an IEEE 802.11-equipped bridge device (or access point), such as the 9150 Wireless Gateway. Using bridging software, the 9150 Wireless Gateway enables communication between any wireless IEEE 802.11-equipped stations and LAN stations operating on Ethernet or Token Ring. The 9150 itself is resident on the LAN and functions as a MAC bridge, providing transparent integration between the stations on the wire-

less and wired networks. Each terminal is associated with one 9150. A frame from an RF terminal is sent to the 9150 that the terminal is associated with. The terminal puts a destination MAC address in the frame, which specifies a hardware address on the wired LAN side. Because the receiving 9150 is connected to an Ethernet or Token Ring network, it encapsulates the data in an Ethernet or Token Ring frame, respectively, including the destination MAC address specified by the terminal. The 9150 then sends the frame onto the physical network; the frame is picked up by whichever device is at the des-

tination hardware address. 10 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol When sending frames from the LAN side, the sending device puts the MAC address of the terminal in the frame header. Whichever 9150 has that terminal associated with it, takes the frame and passes it over the RF to the terminal. By passing frames in this way, the 9150 is acting as a MAC bridge. Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) 1.5.3.1 The Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) is an extension to the IEEE 802.11 protocol. IAPP facilitates roaming of mobile stations across different Basic Service Sets

(groups of stations and their access points), and specifies how access points commu-

nicate with each other. In a multiple-9150 system, IAPP informs the other 9150 Wireless Gateways when a new 9150 becomes active, and enables the awareness of the 9150s of each other. With IAPP, an IEEE 802.11 system can operate on one or more channels, with terminals moving between the 9150s. Although each terminal is associated with one 9150, it can reassociate with another 9150 to maintain uninterrupted communica-

tions. The newly-associated 9150 will receive the terminals data frames and pass them onto the LAN. Returning frames are no longer accepted by the original 9150, which has disassociated from that terminal. The returning frames are now accepted by the newly-associated 9150 and passed over the RF to the terminal. Note: For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as an access point, please see Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. For a generalized system diagram, see Figure 1.4 on page 12. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 11 Chapter 1:

Introduction IEEE 802.11 Protocol 7040 Hand-Held RF Terminal HOST 9150 Wireless Gateway 7035 Hand-Held RF Terminal 9400 Network Controller 9150 Wireless Gateway Figure 1.4 9150 Access Point Configuration 7040 Hand-Held RF Terminal 7035 Hand-Held RF Terminal 12 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

 

 

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2

. 2.1 Choosing The Right Location . 15

. 15 2.1.1 Environment . 2.1.2 Maintenance . 16 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 2.2 Connecting To External Devices. 17 2.2.1 Ports . 17 2.2.2 Status Indicators (LEDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.2.3 Preparing For LAN Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 18 2.2.3.1 Ethernet . 19 2.2.3.2 Token Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 2.2.4 Preparing For Serial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 20 2.2.5 Connecting A Video Display Terminal . . . . . . . 21 2.3 Changing The Configuration With A Web Browser. 21

. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 13 Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Choosing The Right Location The 9150 must be installed by qualified Teklogix personnel. Warning:

2.1 Choosing The Right Location Typically, Teklogix conducts a site survey in the plant and then recommends the preferred locations for the 9150s. These locations provide good radio coverage, minimize the distance to the host computer or network controller, and meet the environmental requirements. 2.1.1 Environment The 9150 should be located in a well-ventilated area and should be protected from extreme temperature fluctuations (i.e. direct heater output, shipping doors or direct sunlight). If a protective cover is required, it must have enough ventilation to maintain the 9150s surface at or near room temperature. The 9150 should be situated away from the path of vehicles and free from water or dust spray. The 9150 should only be mounted in the upright position, as shown in Figure 2.1, below. This orientation minimizes the risk of water entering the 9150, should the unit accidentally be sprayed. The 9150 is attached to a vertical surface using four fasteners on the rear plate (type of fasteners are dependent on mounting surface). The top two holes in the rear plate are slots, allowing the unit to be hung in position before the remaining bolts are installed, thus easing installation. The bolts used for installation are SAE 1/4-20. Mounting Slot Cable Tie Mount Mounting Hole Figure 2.1 9150 Installation Position Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 15 Chapter 2:

Maintenance Installation Requirements Refer to Chapter 7: Specifications for a more detailed description of environmen-

tal requirements. Keep in mind that the long term stability of this equipment will be enhanced if the environmental conditions are less severe than those listed in this manual. 2.1.2 Maintenance The 9150 has no internal option switches and does not require physical access;

all configuration settings are done remotely (see Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configura-

tion). Environmental and radio communication considerations do, however, still apply. 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables To prevent accidental disconnection and stress on the 9150, antenna and power cables should be secured within 30 cm of the unit. Secure the cables with ties to the cable tie mounts on the 9150 (see Figure 2.1 on page 15). A single phase power outlet (range 100 to 240 VAC rated 1.0A minimum) should be installed within one metre (3.1 feet) of the 9150. The 9150 automatically adjusts to input within that power range. The power cable is removable and is available in the power type spe-

cific to your location. Warning:

To avoid electric shock, the power cord protective grounding conductor must always be connected to ground. There are several omnidirectional antennas available from Teklogix. The type of antenna required for each installation depends on the coverage requirements and the frequencies used. Generally, a site survey determines the appropriate antenna. Teklogix can also provide special, directional antennas. Consult Teklogix service personnel for more information. Warning:

Never operate the 9150 without a suitable antenna or a dummy load. Connection to Outdoor Antenna: Outdoor antenna to be earthed in accordance with International Standard EN 50083-1 (1993), Cabled Distribution Systems for Television and Sound Signals -

Safety Requirements. The antenna must be installed by a qualified service person and installed according to local electrical installation codes. The antenna should be located such that it is always at least 20 cm away from the user and other people working in the area. 16 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Connecting To External Devices Warning:

For RF safety considerations, users are not allowed to approach close to the antenna. Teklogix supplies the coaxial cable required to connect the 9150 to the antenna. When determining the location of the antenna, the coverage requirements of the antenna are considered in conjunction with the environmental requirements of the 9150. The coaxial cable must be routed and secured using wire anchors and/or coaxial nail clips. A few extra inches of cable are required near the antenna and the 9150 to make disconnection easier. 2.2 Connecting To External Devices This section contains general guidelines for connecting the 9150 to external devices such as network controllers, base stations, host computers, PCs and video display terminals. 2.2.1 Ports Figure 2.2 below shows the locations of the port and power connectors on the under-

side of the 9150. The port pinouts are described in Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. AC Power Socket 10Base-T 10Base2 On-Board Ethernet Adaptors 10Base5 Console Port 10Base-T 10Base5 10Base2 Console Lock Unlock Token Ring Token Ring Adaptor Figure 2.2 Base Of The 9150 (inset: optional Token Ring adaptor) Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 17 Chapter 2:

Status Indicators (LEDs) Installation Requirements 2.2.2 Status Indicators (LEDs) The 9150 has six status indicators on the front of the enclosure. These numbered and coloured LEDs indicate the operating status for each port:

LED Number Name Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ethernet link1 Link indicator for 10base-T:

ON = good link; OFF = no link Ethernet activity Ethernet LAN activity (Rx/Tx) PC Card A status2 PC Card A activity (Rx/Tx) PC Card B status2,3 PC Card B activity (Rx/Tx; Token Ring) SLIM Power SLIM card activity LED flashing = BIST4 running/error detected LED On solid = BIST4 Passed LED Off = no power to unit Colour yellow green yellow green yellow green 1 For 10Base2 and 10Base5: LED 1 is always OFF when these connections are used. 2 When a TekLAN 902 MHz radio is installed, the PC Card status LEDs blink only when data is received from or transmitted to a terminal. When a TRX7370 narrow band radio is installed, these LEDs blink for all received and transmitted data traffic. 3 When a Token Ring PC card is installed, LED #4 shows Token Ring activity. 4 Built-in Self-Test. Table 2.1 LED Functions 2.2.3 Preparing For LAN Installation Because the 9150 provides Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity, it can be added to an existing LAN. Generally, LAN installations are handled with the help of the network administrators, as they are familiar with their network and its configuration. Once the 9150 is installed, connected and powered on, the system administrator can access the unit to check the configuration and to assign the 9150 its unique IP address. This may be done through the Console port or through the network (see Connecting A Video Display Terminal on page 21 and Changing The Configura-

18 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Preparing For LAN Installation tion With A Web Browser on page 21). Subsequent changes in the network, such as the addition of stations or users, would also require that the 9150 configuration be changed. Important: Once the 9150 is configured and rebooted the first time, the Employ bootp parameter should be disabled (see page 38), unless the 9150 obtains its IP address from a bootp server or the system administrator intends to update the software through bootp. Ethernet 2.2.3.1 The 9150 is equipped with three variations of Ethernet connection: 10Base-T

(RJ-45), 10Base2 (BNC coax), and 10Base5 (Dsub 15). See Figure 2.2 on page 17 for an illustration of the connector locations. Since these ports are auto-selecting, jumper or configuration settings are not required. The maximum packet size sup-

ported over the network is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. For a description of port pinouts, please refer to Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. Note:

10Base2 termination is not required if the port is not used. Token Ring 2.2.3.2 To connect a 9150 to a Token Ring network, a Madge Token Ring Smart 16/4 Ring-

node Adapter Type II PC card, 4 or 16 Mbps, is pre-installed in the internal PC card slot. The connector plate shown in the inset in Figure 2.2 on page 17 is fixed to the base of the 9150 to accommodate the Token Ring Dsub9 cable. This connection supports Shielded Twisted Pair (IBM STP) cables Type 1 or 6. The maximum packet size supported over the network is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. For a description of port pinouts, please refer to Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 19 Chapter 2:

Preparing For Serial Installation Installation Requirements 2.2.4 Preparing For Serial Installation The 9150 offers serial connection as an option when a local area network is not used. Data cables are generally prepared after the site survey report is available and should be in place before the equipment arrives so that Teklogix can install them. The type of data cable used depends on the type of port required at the site. The type of port depends on the location of the 9150 and whether it is to be connected to a host computer or a network controller. Modems can be used to better accommodate long distances between the 9150 and the host computer or network controller. Port options include RS-232 Plus and Current Loop. Connector pinouts are listed in Appendix A: Port Pinouts And Cable Diagrams. The baud rate and the maximum length of the cable for each type of port is tabulated in Table 2.2, below. The cable lengths are based on a quality, 2-pair shielded cable (Belden #8723). The default baud rate for the 9150 serial connection is 19.2k. Each method of connection has different advantages and capabilities:

RS-232/Current Loop This is a standard RS-232 asynchronous port with extra lines for synchronous communication. Cable length is limited by the RS-232 specification of 2500pF on the capacitance of the receiving stations. An optional current loop is available to extend the limits of this connection. Optically isolated RS-232-Plus This is a standard RS-232 asynchronous port with an RS-423 driver. Cables connected to this port can span longer distances at higher baud rates than the RS-232/Current Loop option. Port Options Cable Part No. Baud Rate Max. Length RS-232 Plus

(asynchronous communications only) 16590, 16598, 19387 Current Loop 20 mA

(asynchronous communications only) 16599 up to 19.2k 2250 ft. 38.4k 2400 9600 19.2k 38.4k 2000 ft. 6250 ft. 3250 ft. 1500 ft. 1000 ft. Table 2.2 Maximum Cable Lengths For RS-232 Plus And Current Loop 20 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Connecting A Video Display Terminal Warning:

Installation using an outdoor data cable between two buildings requires that transient protection (a lightning arrestor) be added to the data cable. The RS-232 Plus port is recommended in this situation because it provides optical isolation between the cable and the controller. To avoid ground problems (on the data cables), the 9150 should be connected to the same transformer/voltage distribution system as the network controller. If this is not possible, use Current Loop ports or a pair of modems. 2.2.5 Connecting A Video Display Terminal An ANSI compatible video display terminal (e.g., DEC VT220 or higher), or a PC running terminal emulation, is used for diagnostic purposes and to configure the IP address for the first time before the 9150 can be accessed using a Web Browser (see Configuring The IP Address on page 25). The terminal is connected to the port labelled Console on the 9150 (see Figure 2.2 on page 17). This port is normally set to operate at 19,200 baud, 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity. To comply with Part 15 of the FCC rules for a Class B computing device, only the cable supplied (Part no. 19387) should be used. 2.3 Changing The Configuration With A Web Browser The 9150 Flash memory can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a stan-

dard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape Navigator (version 4.05 or later) or MS Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or later). See Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration for instructions on changing the parameters. When setting up the 9150 as an access point device, refer to Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration for additional information. When setting up the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration for additional information. When setting up the 9150 as a mini-controller, please refer to Chapter 5: Mini-

Controller Configuration for additional information. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 21

 

 

9150 MAIN CONFIGURATION 3

. 3.4.1 Interfaces . 3.4.2 Users . 3.4.3 SNMP . 3.1 Configuration Main Menu . 25 3.2 Configuring The IP Address . 25 3.3 Accessing The Menus . 27 3.4 General Configuration Options . 29

. 30 3.4.1.1 Onboard Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 3.4.1.2 Slot n: Token-Ring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 3.4.1.3 Slot n: PC Card Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

. 34

. 35 3.4.3.1 System Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

. 36 3.4.3.2 SNMP Communities. 36

. 3.4.3.3 Trap Receivers . 3.4.4 TCP/IP Parameters . 36

. 37

. 38

. 39

. 40 3.4.5.1 Console Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 3.4.5.2 Serial Port . 40 3.5 Access Point/Base Station Configurations. . 41 3.6 Miscellaneous Commands . . . 42 3.6.1 System Info . 42 3.6.2 Reboot Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

. 3.4.5 Serial Ports Parameters. 3.4.4.1 Host Table . 3.4.4.2 Bootp . 3.4.4.3 DNS . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 23 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Configuration Main Menu 3.1 Configuration Main Menu The 9150 Flash memory can be reconfigured remotely via the network using a standard HTML Web Browser such as Netscape Navigator (version 4.05 or later) or MS Internet Explorer (version 4.0 or later). The 9150 Configuration program allows various configuration parameter settings to be changed, added or deleted. Important:

The 9150 must be warm rebooted after parameter changes are made , including configuring the IP address (see below), in order for the changes to take effect. For details, see Reboot Unit on page 43. 3.2 Configuring The IP Address Before the configuration menus can be accessed using your Web Browser, the 9150 must be assigned an IP address using a PC console connection. Virtually any PC can be connected to the console port of the 9150, provided that the PC has a terminal communication program such as the Windows HyperTerminal utility or Procomm Plus for Windows. These programs emulate an ANSI terminal such as VT220 or higher. Cable no. 19387 should be used to connect the PC to the 9150. Make sure the communications settings on your PC are set to 8 bits, 1 stop, no parity, and that the baud rate of the serial port matches that of the 9150 console port

(19,200 baud). After the PC is attached and turned on, press the <RETURN> key several times until the > prompt appears. The commands used to configure IP addresses are described here. If your system uses a bootp server to assign IP addresses, make sure that bootp is enabled. Once enabled, and the 9150 is rebooted, you will be able to access the 9150 configuration menus through the Web Browser, using the IP address identified in the server's bootp table. If you do not use a bootp server, make sure that bootp is disabled and continue with the configuration commands to manually assign an IP address. Important: When your configuration is completed, the changes should be saved to flash by entering the following command (commands are case-sensitive):

>cfg commitCache Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 25 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Configuring The IP Address To display the bootp setting:

>cfg get system.dobootp To enable bootp:

>cfg put system.dobootp 1 To disable bootp:

>cfg put system.dobootp 0 To display the default IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx represents the IP address):

>cfg get interface.1.defaultipaddress To configure the default IP address

>cfg put interface.1.defaultipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx To display the default gateway:

>cfg get system.defaultgateway To configure the default gateway:

>cfg put system.defaultgateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx To display the default subnetmask:

>cfg get interface.1.defaultsubnetmask To configure the default subnetmask:

>cfg put interface.1.defaultsubnetmask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 26 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Accessing The Menus 3.3 Accessing The Menus When the Web Browser is pointed to the 9150s IP address, a name and password dialog box appears. The password is comprised of alphanumeric characters and is case-sensitive. If you change the password (see Users on page 34), set all 9150s to the same password, and write it down in a secure place. A default user name user and the password 123456 are created on 9150 system startup if no users are already configured. You can use the default to enter the Configuration Main Menu for the first time. For security, change this default name and password immediately after entering the configuration menus. Should you acci-

dentally delete your user names, re-booting the 9150 will re-create the default name and password so that you can get back in to the unit. After the password is accepted, the Configuration Main Menu appears. The 9150 software automatically detects the system information of the unit, and most of the parameters have already been properly configured for each site. Warning:

Parameters should not be altered without a clear understanding of how they operate. Parameters that are incorrectly set can increase response time or cause communication difficulties. To highlight and move through the different options, use the <TAB> key or mouse pointer. To view and select the items in the listboxes, either press the <UP> or

<DOWN> arrow keys or click on the arrow at the side of the menu and highlight the item. To enter the related configuration sub-menu dialog box, highlight Configure and either press <ENTER> or click on the Configure button.

Where string entry parameters are given in the menus, changes are keyed in. Numerical parameters can be entered as hexadecimal values. Precede hexa-

decimal values with 0x. To leave a menu page, select either the <OK> or <Cancel> button at the bottom of the page. Selecting <OK> will save your changes and exit the page, while selecting <Cancel> will exit the page without saving the changes. Important: Do not use the Web Browsers <Back> button to leave a page. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 27

Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Accessing The Menus Figure 3.1 9150 Configuration Main Menu: View From Browser 28 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration General Configuration Options 3.4 General Configuration Options The General Configuration menu on the Configuration Main Menu page presents five options of sub-menus: Interfaces , Users, SNMP, TCP/IP Parameters, and Serial Ports Parameters. Figure 3.2 Overview Of General Configuration Menus Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 29 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces 3.4.1 Interfaces The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option indicates which interfaces have been detected in use by the 9150. Onboard Ethernet 3.4.1.1 For the selection Onboard Ethernet, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters page for the Ethernet connection, which shows the 9150s physical

(hardware) address and IP address parameters. Physical Address A unique Physical Address is assigned by Teklogix personnel for each 9150. The values entered for this parameter are presented in hexadecimal in descending order beginning with the MSB (Most Significant Byte), the highest value, and ending with the LSB (Least Significant Byte), the lowest value. The allowable value for each field ranges from 00 to FF. Warning:

It is not advisable to modify the Physical Address. However, if these values are changed, the Network Administrator must assign a unique address to each Ethernet station on the network, including all 9150s. 30 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces IP Parameters Each 9150 that is connected to a local network has a unique IP address designated for it. The IP Parameters used to assign the IP address are accessed by entering the Configure dialog box. Actual IP Address The Actual IP Address is the IP address currently set on the 9150. Default IP Address This parameter allows you to change the value of the IP address. The IP address must be a unique value on the network, including any Token Ring IP addresses being used, so that each 9150 in your system can be identified. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note: The value 255.255.255.255 is reserved for the broadcast address. Actual Subnet Mask The Actual Subnet Mask is the subnet mask currently set on the 9150. Default Subnet Mask This parameter allows you to change the value of the subnet mask. The 9150 uses the Default Subnet Mask, its own IP address, and the destination IP address to deter-

mine if a packet should be sent on the local network or to a remote segment. If the destination is found on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destina-

tion. If the destination resides on a remote network, the packet is routed to the gate-

way. Enter your subnet mask in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx notation. Important:

The maximum packet size supported is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 31 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces Slot n: Token-Ring 3.4.1.2 For the selection Slot n: Token-Ring, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters page for the Token Ring connection, which shows the 9150s physi-

cal (hardware) address, ring speed, and IP address parameters. Physical Address Each Madge Token Ring PC card has a unique MAC address (Physical Address), which is displayed here in the 9150 parameters. The MAC address is presented in standard hexadecimal format. Ring Speed This parameter indicates the Token Ring network speed. The ring speed must be set through the console, prior to installation, using the configuration command line:

>cfg put interface.#.tokenring.datarate 16

(or 4 if the network is running at 4 Mbps) The # depends on which slot the PC card occupies. Usually this is slot B, inside the 9150, so the # would be 3. The default ring speed is 16 Mbps. 32 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Interfaces IP Parameters Each 9150 that is connected to a local network has a unique IP address designated for it. The IP Parameters used to assign the IP address are accessed by entering the Configure dialog box. Actual IP Address The Actual IP Address is the IP address currently set on the 9150. Default IP Address This parameter allows you to change the value of the IP address. The IP address must be a unique value on the network, including any Ethernet IP addresses being used, so that each 9150 in your system can be identified. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note: The value 255.255.255.255 is reserved for the broadcast address. Actual Subnet Mask The Actual Subnet Mask is the subnet mask currently set on the 9150. Default Subnet Mask This parameter allows you to change the value of the subnet mask. The 9150 uses the Default Subnet Mask, its own IP address, and the destination IP address to deter-

mine if a packet should be sent on the local network or to a remote segment. If the destination is found on the local network, the packet is sent directly to its destina-

tion. If the destination resides on a remote network, the packet is routed to the gate-

way. Enter your subnet mask in xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx notation. Important:

The maximum packet size supported is 1500 bytes. This parameter is not set at the 9150, but should be set at the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 33 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Users Slot n: PC Card Radio 3.4.1.3 Each PC (PCMCIA) card radio resident in the 9150 will be located in one of two Slots: A or B. Selecting a PC card will open the sub-menu for that radio. IEEE 802.11 FH or DS: See IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parame-

ters) on page 126, or IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) on page 128 for details on setting the radio parameters for the PC card. TekLAN Card: See TekLAN Parameters on page 49 for details on setting the radio and Wlan parameters. Teklogix Narrowband: See Narrow Band Radio Parameters on page 53 for details on setting the radio and polling parameters. 3.4.2 Users The Users option provides security for access to the 9150 Configuration menus. New individuals can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the listbox before entering the Configure dialog box. Individual names and their assigned passwords may be changed or deleted in the Configure dialog box for this option by selecting the name in the listbox and then opening the Configure dialog box. The password can be comprised of alphanumeric characters and is case-sensitive. 34 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration SNMP 3.4.3 SNMP The SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Configure page allows various network management parameters to be set or changed. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 35 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters System Parameters 3.4.3.1 The entries in these parameters set the name, contact and location identifiers for this specific 9150 Wireless Gateway. The name and location are then shown as the sub-heading of each Configuration page. In this example the identifier appears as Unit 12 [Warehouse A: Pillar 32B]. 3.4.3.2 These parameter settings allow the network administrator to define the network environment and determine the type of access allowed (read-only, or read-write) for each area name and IP address. 3.4.3.3 These IP addresses determine which SNMP managers stations will receive SNMP Traps from the 9150. The 9150 sends the Cold Start Trap on reboot or power up. SNMP Communities Trap Receivers 3.4.4 TCP/IP Parameters The 9150 is situated on a wired network which uses TCP/IP. Both Bootp and DNS options are available to resolve IP addressing issues. 36 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters Host Table 3.4.4.1 If no external DNS server is available, the 9150 may resolve host names to IP addresses using its internal host table. Hosts are added to the table by selecting Configure beside [#} Add Entry in the listbox. This will open the New Host Table Entry menu. An existing hosts name and IP address may be edited in the Host Table Entry menu by selecting Configure beside the host name in the listbox. The host may also be deleted from the table. Name This is the designated name of the host. IP Address This is the assigned IP address for the host. Note: The name must not contain space characters. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 37 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters Bootp 3.4.4.2 The 9150 has designated default IP addresses for itself and the Gateway. Alterna-

tively, the IP address of the 9150 can be assigned using a BOOTP Server. The primary purpose of the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is to assign a designated IP address to the appropriate 9150 on the network. When Employ bootp is enabled, a request for address is automatically broadcast to all hosts on the local network. BOOTP Servers search the bootptab files for a hardware address which matches that of the 9150 that initiated the request for address. (Bootptab files list each hardware address with a corresponding IP address.) The host with a matching hard-

ware address in its bootp table replies to the request, sending the appropriate IP address to the 9150. Employ bootp Enable Employ bootp (), to automatically broadcast a request for address to all hosts on the local network. Important: Once the 9150 is configured and rebooted the first time, the Employ bootp parameter should be disabled, unless the 9150 obtains its IP address from a bootp server or the system administrator intends to update the software through bootp. Actual Default Gateway Address This parameter shows the Default Gateway address currently set for the 9150. 38 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration TCP/IP Parameters Default Gateway Address The Default Gateway Address is assigned by the network administrator. This address creates an identifiable communication link between the 9150 and a network other than the one to which the 9150 is directly wired. The acceptable values for the Gateway IP address range from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Note:

Setting the Gateway IP Address to 0.0.0.0 disables this feature. A communication link will not exist between sub-networks. DNS 3.4.4.3 Domain Name System allows users to locate destinations on the TCP/IP network by domain (host) name. The DNS server maintains a database of host names and their corresponding IP addresses. For example, if the server was presented with the name www.teklogix.com, it would return the IP address: 207.219.2.3. DNS Resolver Enabled When this parameter is enabled (), the 9150 will use the DNS Name Server identi-

fied by the IP address entered in the DNS Name Server parameter. DNS Default Domain This is the default domain name for this 9150. DNS Name Server This is the IP address of the designated DNS Name Server. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 39 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Serial Ports Parameters 3.4.5 Serial Ports Parameters 3.4.5.1 The default baud rate for the console port is 19.2k. Console Port 3.4.5.2 The default baud rate for the serial port is 19.2k. Serial Port 40 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Access Point/Base Station Configurations 3.5 Access Point/Base Station Configurations The 9150 is capable of operating as a transparent bridge (access point) between the wireless and wired networks, and also as a mini-controller or base station. For these operations, the parameters in these pages must be set appropriately. For detailed information on the sub-menus and to set up the 9150 as a base station, see Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. To configure an access point device, see Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration. To configure the 9150 as a mini-

controller, see Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 41 Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Miscellaneous Commands 3.6 Miscellaneous Commands There are two miscellaneous commands: System Info and Reboot Unit. 3.6.1 System Info The System Information, hardware and software, for the 9150 Wireless Gateway unit is detected automatically and summarized in this page. The screen is shown on page 43. 42 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration Reboot Unit 3.6.2 Reboot Unit This option opens a dialog box which allows you to remotely warm reboot the 9150. If the OK button is chosen, the 9150 will be rebooted, the LEDs will turn off momentarily, and the following message will be received:

Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, and therefore changing the Radio Type parameter (see page 50), the unit must be powered OFF and ON again (cold rebooted). Rebooting with the Reboot Unit option will not implement the radio parameter change. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 43

 

 

BASE STATION CONFIGURATION 4

. 4.2.1 TekLAN Parameters . 4.2.1.1 Radio. 4.2.1.2 Wireless LAN Parameters . 4.1 Overview . 47 4.2 Interfaces . 49

.49

.50

.52 4.2.2 Narrow Band Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 4.2.2.1 Polling Protocol Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 4.2.2.2 Radio Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 4.2.2.3 Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 4.2.2.4 TRX7370 Radio Card Parameters . . . . . . . . . .60 4.3 Hosts . 63 4.4 Main Host Menu . 65 4.4.1 General Host Options . 66 4.4.2 9010 / TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.4.2.1 Emulation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 4.4.2.2 Protocol Options And Function Key Mappings . . .68 4.4.3 9010 / Serial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 4.4.3.1 Emulation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 4.4.3.2 Protocol Options: Serial Line . . . . . . . . . . . .69 4.4.3.3 Protocol Options: 9010 Protocol . . . . . . . . . .70 4.4.3.4 Function Key Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 4.5 Base Stations . 71 4.6 Radio Link Features . 72

. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 45 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Overview 4.1 Overview The 9150 Wireless Gateway can operate as a base station, facilitating communica-

tions between terminals and wireless base stations and a Teklogix 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or 9140 Wireless Gateway (as a mini-controller) with a range of host platforms. Alternatively, the network controller can be a host running a Teklogix SDK (handler). The 9150 can also act as a slave base station to a 9140 on the network. As a base station, the 9150 uses the Wireless LAN (Wlan) or Adaptive Polling/Contention RF protocols. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3:

9150 Main Configuration For details on the RF protocols, see page 8. 8055 Vehicle-Mount RF Terminal HOST 9150 Wireless Gateway ETHERNET TCP/IP SERIAL 9400 Network Controller 9140 Wireless Gateway 7030 Hand-Held RF Terminal 9150 Wireless Gateway Figure 4.1 9150 Base Station Configuration Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 47 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Overview For operation as a base station, the parameters in the Base Station Configuration pages on the Configuration Main Menu screen should be set appropriately, as described in the sections that follow. In addition, the appropriate radio parameters must be applied. These are found in the Interfaces pages for TekLAN and Narrow Band radios. See pages 49 and 53, respectively. Figure 4.2 Overview Of Base Station Configuration Menus 48 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Interfaces 4.2 Interfaces 4.2.1 TekLAN Parameters The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option in the 9150 Configuration Main Menu page indicates which interfaces have been detected in use. Entering the Configure dialog box for Slot A: TekLAN Card, opens the parameters page for TekLAN, which presents both the radio and Wlan parameters. Figure 4.3 Overview Of TekLAN Menus Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 49 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters 4.2.1.1 Radio Radio Type The type of PC radio card installed on the 9150 is dependent on your wireless net-

work. This parameter should be set to the installed radio. The radios for TekLAN are the TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum, and the TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum. Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: turn the 9150 off before changing the radio. Following this, when changing the Radio Type parameter, the unit must be powered OFF and ON again (cold rebooted). Rebooting with the Reboot Unit option will not implement the radio parameter change. Data Rate This parameter determines the data (baud) rate for the radio channel. This is a decimal value in bits per second. The acceptable value for the Data Rate parameter differs depending on the type of radio installed in the 9150. TekLAN 902 MHz DS SS: 122 kbps. TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS SS: 1 Mbps. 50 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters Channel n Enabled These parameters are used to enable ( ) or disable a channel. The number of chan-

nels available is determined by the type of radio installed. See PC Card Radios on page 145 for the number of available channels for each radio type. Active Channel This parameter determines the current default radio channel. Range The federal agencies, Industry Canada and the Federal Communications Commis-

sion in the United States, as well as other country-specific agencies world-wide, regulate the use of radio frequencies to ensure that communication conflicts are avoided. See PC Card Radios on page 145 for the assigned frequencies for each radio type. The Range parameter determines which channels can be enabled and is set accord-

ing to the approved frequency range in the country where the system is installed. The TekLAN 902 MHz radio is only assigned the 902 MHz frequency. For the TekLAN 2.4 GHz radio, the frequency range and the associated channels and countries are assigned as follows:

Country For testing purposes only. Canada, U.S., U.K. Australia Range 2412-2462 2422-2462 2422-2442 Channels Available 1 to 6 2 to 6 2 to 4 Table 4.1 Frequency Range TekLAN 2.4 GHz Spread Spectrum (TRX7425) Enable Card This parameter enables the PC card ( ). The card may be disabled temporarily when, for testing purposes, it is required that there be no radio interference. Auto Startup This parameter enables ( ) polling immediately when the 9150 is rebooted. If Auto Startup is disabled, the 9150 will wait until polling is initialized from the network controller. When the 9150 is operating as a Wlan base station under a network con-

troller, this parameter should be disabled. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 51 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration TekLAN Parameters 4.2.1.2 The Wlan protocol can only be used with spread spectrum radios. Wireless LAN Parameters Important:

If your system is using the Wlan protocol, make sure that Operate in Cellular Mode is enabled (see page 72) in the Radio Link Features sub-menu and that cellular mode is also set on the 9400/9300 Network Controller. Base Number This parameter is used to assign a unique address to each base station. As the termi-

nals move from one base station to another, this address is transmitted by the base stations to the terminals, identifying each 9150 on a multiple base station system. The allowable range of base station numbers is 1 to 64. Timeout This value is used to adjust Wlan performance and should be set to 10. Max Priority This value is used to adjust Wlan performance and should be set to 20. 52 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Base Priority (TekLAN 2.4 GHz) The Base Priority parameter determines the number of priority transmit slots reserved for each base station. The allowable range for this parameter is 0 to 100. For optimal performance, this parameter should be set to a value of 2. Message Duration (TekLAN 2.4 GHz) This parameter controls the duration of transmit slots to optimize communications and decrease the likelihood of collisions. A Message Duration value of 1 translates into a slot duration of 130 micro seconds. The allowable range for this parameter is 2 to 200. For optimal performance, this parameter should be set to 15. Offline Timeout This parameter determines the time in minutes that a terminal is allowed to be inac-

tive before the 9150 declares it offline. An offline terminal is still considered part of the system. Messages to offline terminals are queued at the 9150. The terminal remains offline until it transmits any message. Values for this parameter range from 0 to 100. If the parameter is set to 0, terminals are never declared offline. 4.2.2 Narrow Band Radio Parameters The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option on the 9150 Configuration Main Menu page indicates which interfaces have been detected in use. For the selec-

tion Slot A: Teklogix Narrowband, entering the Configure dialog box will open the parameters pages for the TRX7370 Narrow Band PC card radio. These pages list the polling protocol and radio parameters, and show the radio cards permanent communications settings. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 53 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Figure 4.4 Overview Of Teklogix Narrow Band Menus 54 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Enable Card This parameter enables the PC card ( ). The card may be disabled temporarily when, for testing purposes, it is required that there be no radio interference. Important:

If changing radio types in the 9150, DO NOT hot swap the PC cards: turn the 9150 off before changing the radio. Auto-Startup This parameter enables ( ) polling immediately when the 9150 is rebooted. If Auto Startup is disabled, the 9150 will wait until polling is initialized from the network controller. Shared Channel Shared Channel is only used in Holland to accommodate government requirements. When enabled ( ), it imposes timing restrictions for polling. Every 2 seconds of polling is followed by 0.5 seconds of silenceno polling occurs. Further, if another carrier is detected on the channel, the 9150 will cease radio trans-

missions on that channel until the path is clear. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 55 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters 4.2.2.1 Polling Protocol Parameters Number of Poll Windows This parameter defines the number of poll windows the 9150 will use. The value assigned to this parameter is dependent on the number of terminals and the radio link protocol used. Table 4.2 indicates how the value assigned to the Number of Poll Windows parame-

ter is determined. Number of Terminals Minimum # of Windows 1-16 17-81 82-256 2 3 4 Table 4.2 Number Of Poll Windows Cellular Protocol Size of Poll Windows The value assigned to this parameter determines the largest message that can be passed between the 9150 and the terminal in a normal poll window. The window size can be adjusted to accommodate anywhere from 4 to 32 characters. 56 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Larger windows increase the polling period and can increase the response time. Smaller windows increase the number of message and long message polls, and can also increase the response time. Important:

In Cellular mode, the minimum value for this parameter is 8. Maximum Message Segment Size This parameter determines the largest single message that can be passed to a terminal in message mode or from a terminal in long message mode. In a 9150 base station, the value entered in this parameter must be greater than or equal to the value entered in the network controller or 9150 mini-controller. The range of this parame-

ter is between 32 and 116 characters. (Longer messages are broken into several packets.) The default value is 100. Number of Retries This parameter determines how many times the 9150 attempts to resend a message if an acknowledgement is not received from the terminal. (These retries do not necessarily occur in consecutive polls because incomplete messages are returned to the bottom of the message queue.) After all retries have been exhausted, the terminal is declared offline. The 9150 does not transmit any messages to the terminal until the terminal declares itself online. The allowable values range from 1 to 7. Collision Size This parameter reduces the probability that random noise on the radio link will be interpreted as a collision between terminals. Response time increases when the 9150 resolves collisions unnecessarily. Collision Size places an upper limit on the number of characters that are received prior to the receipt of an error message (CRC, CD lost, etc.). If eight is the value of this parameter, eight or less characters followed by an error message appearing over the radio link are considered noise. If there are more than eight characters, it is con-

sidered a collision. Acceptable values range from 3 to 15. Free Window Factor The value entered in this parameter determines if free window mode will be used. In free window mode, all terminals transmit in the free poll window instead of the window to which they are normally assigned. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 57 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Entering a value of 0 (zero) in this parameter disables free window mode. Increas-

ing the value of this parameter increases the likelihood of a message being transmit-

ted in the free window. Message Mode Limit This parameter defines an upper limit to the number of messages that must be queued for transmission before message mode polling starts. Accepted values range from 0 to 7, where 0 disables message mode. Note: The number of terminals and past events are also part of the algorithm that determines whether or not to start message mode. Callsign Period A call sign is periodically transmitted as an audible Morse code signal. This parameter specifies the interval in minutes between call sign transmissions. Acceptable values range from 0 to 60. The federal agencies, Industry Canada and the Federal Communications Commission in the United States, require that each system transmit its own identification call sign every 15 minutes. In countries where a call sign is not required, setting this parameter to 0 prevents the transmission of any call signs, allowing for shorter poll time-outs in terminals and faster channel switching. Callsign String This string can be a maximum of 10 characters long. All characters are either numbers or letters. The prefix DE (from) is added to the beginning of the transmit-

ted call sign. 58 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters 4.2.2.2 Radio Parameters Sync Delay Important:

This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without a clear understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. Sync Delay specifies the delay between the time of the base station transmission and the first response window, measured in milliseconds. The value assigned to this parameter must be compatible with other base stations and terminals in the system. The default setting of 22 is based on the requirements of a 2 level modulation narrow band radio, operating at 9600 baud. Remote Txon Remote Txon accommodates the turn on time of the radio in the base station. It specifies the number of fill characters sent to the radio before real data is output. Since this parameter is based on character times, the number is dependent on the radio link baud rate. When the baud rate is changed, this parameter automatically changes to the correct value. The value assigned to the Remote Txon parameter must be consistent across all terminals and base station equipment. Important:

This parameter should not be changed from its factory setting without an understanding of the timing of the radio protocol. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 59 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters 4.2.2.3 Radio Channels Active Channel This parameter determines the operating radio channel of the 9150. The channel selected must be an enabled channel. Refer to Enabled Channels, below, for details. Enabled Channels This parameter is used to enable ( ) or disable up to 20 channels the maximum number of channels supported by the TRX7370 radio. Enabling a channel allows the channel to be set to an operating channel (Active Channel) and also makes the channel available for channel searching. If, for example, the operating channel is 1 and all other channels are enabled, terminals may roam through all 20 channels. Note that the Enabled Channels menu only displays channels that have been config-

ured with frequencies. See page 62 for the list of associated frequencies. 4.2.2.4 TRX7370 Radio Card Parameters Entering the Get Card Parameters dialog box will open the list of General, Fre-

quencies, and Tuning Values parameters for the TRX7370 Narrow Band PC card radio. These manufacturers settings are not configurable. The settings are shown on pages 62 and 63. 60 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 61 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Narrow Band Radio Parameters General Parameters Frequencies 62 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Hosts Tuning Values 4.3 Hosts The drop-down menu in this option shows the host names present on the system. Up to six hosts can be supported. A host must be configured for each master network controller, TSDK host, or master base station that communicates with the 9150. Opening the Configure dialog box for a selected host lists the parameters that can be modified or deleted for that host. New hosts can be added by selecting [#]

Create New in the drop-down menu before entering the Configure dialog box. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 63 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Hosts Name This parameter indicates the assigned host name. The host name also appears on the RF terminal when switching between hosts in a multiple-host environment. Note: The name must not contain space characters. Enabled The Enabled option must be turned on ( ) for terminals to communicate with this host. Emulation and Protocol This drop-down menu provides a list of host emulations and communication proto-

cols supported by the 9150. The supported emulations with their respective protocols are:

9010/ TCP/IP (See page 67 for configuration parameters). 9010/ Serial (See pages 68 to 70 for configuration parameters). 3274/Telnet (See pages 84 to 98 for Configuration Parameters). 5250/Telnet (See pages 99 to 112 for Configuration Parameters).

ANSI/Telnet (See pages 113 to 121 for Configuration Parameters). When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 protocol (a proprietary protocol developed by Teklogix) with either a TCP/IP or serial connection to com-

municate with a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). This protocol uses TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) or ANSI data streams to communicate with terminals. For detailed information, please refer to the appropriate Teklogix User Manual for: 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, TSDK, TESS or ANSI. When the 9150 acts as a mini-controller, it uses the 3274 and 5250 emulation protocols to communicate with IBM hosts, or the ANSI emulation protocol to com-

municate with ANSI hosts. For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a mini-controller, please refer to Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration. Protocols are the methods by which terminals communicate with host computers over various physical media such as Ethernet, Token Ring, and serial connections, as well as radio-link connections. The 9150 supports the TCP/IP protocol. 64 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Main Host Menu Terminal Range The values entered in this parameter designate the first and last terminals in the range of terminals that will communicate with the host. These terminal numbers are mapped to this particular host. 4.4 Main Host Menu When you choose an existing host from the Hosts listbox and then select the Config-

ure button, the 9150 displays the Host Menu. Figure 4.5 Overview Of Host Menus For 9010 / TCP/IP Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 65 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration General Host Options The Host Menu has four configuration sub-menus:

General Host Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the General Options page for the host. Emulation Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Emulation Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. Protocol Options (not applicable to 9010/TCP/IP emulation) When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Protocol Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and pro-

tocol selected for the host. Function Key Mappings (3274, 5250, ANSI emulations only) When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Function Key Mapping page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. There is also a Main Menu button. When you select this button, the 9150 displays the Configuration Main Menu (see page 48). 4.4.1 General Host Options In this screen, you can select general options for the host connection. The host con-

nection may also be deleted. Name This parameter allows you to enter a name for the new host. 66 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / TCP/IP Emulation and Protocol This parameter allows you to select the emulation and protocol to be used for the connection to this host. As a base station, the 9150 can use either 9010/ TCP/IP or 9010/SERIAL, depending on the connection to the network controller or host. Terminal Range This parameter allows you to specify the range of terminals which will communi-

cate with this host. The left-hand textbox contains the lowest terminal number which is allowed to communicate with the host; the right-hand textbox contains the highest terminal number. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 3840. 4.4.2 9010 / TCP/IP 4.4.2.1 Emulation Options Refrain from sending On-line & Off-line messages If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station does not notify the host if the status of a terminal changes between offline and online. If this parameter is disabled, the 9150 does notify the host regarding any terminal status changes. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 67 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial 4.4.2.2 These parameters are not applicable to the 9010 / TCP/IP emulation. Protocol Options And Function Key Mappings 4.4.3 9010 / Serial Figure 4.6 Overview Of Host Menus For 9010 / Serial 68 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial 4.4.3.1 Emulation Options Refrain from sending On-line & Off-line messages If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station does not notify the host if the status of a terminal changes between offline and online. If this parameter is disabled, the 9150 does notify the host regarding any terminal status changes. 4.4.3.2 Protocol Options: Serial Line Line Protocol This listbox specifies the serial line protocol used on this host connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 69 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration 9010 / Serial The three available choices are STX/ETB, LF/CR, and DEL/LF. Each of these three choices specifies the start and end characters that delimit the start and end of data on the serial link to the host. These characters are:

Character Code Meaning Hex Value STX ETB LF CR DEL Start of Text End of Text Block Line Feed Carriage Return Delete 01 17 0A 0D 7F Table 4.3 Serial Line Protocol Character Codes Note: For communication to Teklogix handlers or SDKs, always use STX/ETB. LF/CR and DEL/LF are used in third-party handlers. The default setting is STX/ETB. Use Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses a CRC checksum on the data sent over the serial line to the host. 4.4.3.3 Use NS/NR If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses NS/NR protocol for this serial host connection. Protocol Options: 9010 Protocol Note: Only use NS/NR with the STX/ETB protocol. Teklogix recommends that this be enabled when possible. Full Duplex Mode If this parameter is enabled ( ), the 9150 base station uses full-duplex communica-

tion on this serial host connection. 4.4.3.4 These parameters are not applicable to the 9010/Serial emulation. Function Key Mappings 70 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Base Stations 4.5 Base Stations These options and parameters allow you to configure the 9150 as a master base station connected to up to 32 slave 9150 and 9140 base stations over an Ethernet or Token Ring network. The master 9150 is connected to a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or up to six hosts running TSDK (Teklogix Software Development Kit). From the Base Stations option under Base Station Configuration (see Figure 4.2 on page 48), entering Configure will open the Configure New Base Station page, which will enable you to add a new slave base station to the system or change the parameters on an existing slave base station. Name The name entered in this parameter is used as an alternate way of identifying the IP address of a slave base station. IP Address This parameter provides the corresponding IP address for the slave base station. The IP Address must be a unique value so that each slave base station can be iden-

tified on the network. The acceptable value ranges from 0.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The default value for the IP port is 16100. Protocol IAC/EOR (TCP/IP) is the default protocol for the Ethernet or Token Ring connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 71 Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Radio Link Features Message Size Message Size determines the largest single message that can be passed to a terminal. The range of this parameter is between 32 and 380 characters. (Longer messages are broken into several packets.) For polling protocol base stations, the upper limit is 116. Auto-Startup When this parameter is enabled ( ), the slave base stations will start polling when the master 9150 boots up. When Auto-Startup is disabled, the base stations will not start polling until they receive a start polling command from the host. 4.6 Radio Link Features From the Radio Link Features option under Base Station Configuration (see Figure 4.2 on page 48), entering Configure will open the Radio Link Features page for the polling and cellular parameters. Operate in Cellular Mode To operate as a Wlan base station, this parameter should be enabled ( ). For further information see Wlan Protocol on page 8. Note: The 9400 or 9300 Network Controller must also be set to cellular mode. 72 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration Radio Link Features Poll ID In Wlan protocol, this is a unique identifying number set only in a 9150 master base station, 9150 mini-controller or a network controller, which is used in the poll header when polling terminals. Poll ID is set by Teklogix personnel. In Adaptive Polling/Contention protocol for narrow band radios, Poll ID is used to assign a unique address to each base station. As the terminals move from one base station to another, this address is transmitted by the base stations to the terminals, identifying each 9150 in a multiple base station system. Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout This parameter determines the time in minutes that a terminal can be inactive before the 9150 declares it offline. Before this happens, the terminal will be declared offline by the Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout parameter (see below). After the terminal is removed from the system, it will need to re-initialize in order to communicate with the 9150. This parameter reduces the overhead on the radio link caused when terminals which are not communicating are supported. The allowable values range from 1 to 240. Note: This parameter is not relevant for Wlan. Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout This parameter determines the time that a terminal is allowed to be inactive before the 9150 declares it offline. This time is expressed as a percentage of the Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout parameter, above. For example, if the Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout is 60, and this parameter is set to 75%, then the timeout would be 60 min x 75% = 45 minutes. An offline terminal is still considered part of the system. Messages to offline terminals are queued at the 9150. The terminal remains offline until it transmits an online message. Values for this parameter range from 50 to 90. Direct TCP Connections for TekTerm Enabling this parameter allows the TekTerm program resident in Teklogix terminals to connect directly to the 9150, when it is acting as a base station to a host via TCP/IP. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 73

 

 

ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION 6 6.1 Overview . 125 6.2 Interfaces . 126 6.2.1 IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) . . 126 6.2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) . . . . 128 6.3 MAC Bridge Parameters . 129 6.3.1 General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 6.3.2 Address Filters: MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 6.3.3 Protocol Filters . 133 6.3.3.1 Ethernet II Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

. 137

. 6.3.3.2 LLC Filters . 6.3.3.3 SNAP Filters . 138

. 139 6.3.3.4 Storm Detection . 6.4 Mobility Configuration . 140

. 142 6.4.1 IAPP Parameters . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 123 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Overview 6.1 Overview The 9150 can operate as an access point device between IEEE 802.11 wireless and wired networks. Using IEEE 802.11 protocol, the 9150 provides a transparent bridge between Teklogix or client terminals and a network controller or host. For an overview of IEEE 802.11, please refer to IEEE 802.11 Protocol on page 10. For operation as an access point, the parameters in the following pages must be set appropriately. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configuration. 9150 Wireless Gateway 7040 Hand-Held RF Terminal 7035 Hand-Held RF Terminal ETHERNET TCP/IP 9400 Network Controller Figure 6.1 9150 Access Point Configuration Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 125 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Interfaces 6.2 Interfaces The pull-down menu shown for the Interfaces option indicates which interfaces have been detected in use by the 9150, including one of two 802.11 PCMCIA radios:

IEEE 802.11 FH: Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz. IEEE 802.11 DS: Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz. Selecting a radio type from the drop-down list and entering Configure will open the radio parameters page for that radio. 6.2.1 IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) When the Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz PCMCIA card is installed in the 9150, the following radio parameters page is opened:

126 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IEEE 802.11 (Frequency Hopping Radio Parameters) Physical Address This parameter shows the hardware address (MAC address) of the radio card. A globally unique MAC address is assigned to each card by the card manufacturer. The value cannot be changed. Regulatory Domain The regulatory domain value identifies the regulatory bodys country code for the RF regulations with which the radio complies. For the USA, the regulatory body is the FCC, for Canada it's Industry Canada, and for Europe it's ETSI. The hex value in brackets beside the name is the code (as specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard) for that domain. The country codes that are decoded into a name are listed below. For other country codes the name portion will be replaced with "Unknown". Regulatory Body Domain Code Country FCC-USA Industry Canada ETSI-Europe Spain France MKK-Japan 0x10 0x20 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x40 USA (for DS radios this is also the code used for Canada) Canada (currently only for FH radios, this may change in the future) Most of Europe Spain France Japan ESSID This is the Extended Service Set Identifier parameter. The ESSID is an alphanumeric character string of up to 32 characters and is case-sensitive. If your network includes devices that use the DOS ODI Driver, select alphabetical charac-

ters in uppercase only to allow the DOS ODI devices to connect to the network as well. The ESSID should be the same for all devices in a system. Hopping Pattern The combined settings for the Hopping Pattern and Hopping Set parameters deter-

mine the operating channel for a radio using frequency hopping. Please refer to your network administrator for details. Hopping Set The combined settings for the Hopping Set and Hopping Pattern parameters deter-

mine the operating channel for a radio using frequency hopping. Please refer to your system administrator for details. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 127 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) 6.2.2 IEEE 802.11 (Direct Sequence Radio Parameters) When the Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz PCMCIA card is installed in the 9150, the following radio parameters page is opened:

Physical Address This parameter shows the hardware address (MAC address) of the radio card. A globally unique MAC address is assigned to each card by the card manufacturer. The value cannot be changed. Regulatory Domain The regulatory domain value identifies the regulatory bodys country code for the RF regulations with which the radio complies. For the USA, the regulatory body is the FCC, for Canada it's Industry Canada, and for Europe it's ETSI. The hex value in brackets beside the name is the code (as specified in the IEEE 802.11 standard) for that domain. The country codes that are decoded into a name are listed on page 127. For other country codes the name portion will be replaced with "Unknown". ESSID This is the Extended Service Set Identifier parameter. The ESSID is an alphanumeric character string of up to 32 characters and is case-sensitive. If your network includes devices that use the DOS ODI Driver, select alphabetical charac-

ters in uppercase only to allow the DOS ODI devices to connect to the network as well. The ESSID should be the same for all devices in a system. Channel This parameter sets the operating channel for this radio, as determined by the system administrator. For a listing of the allowable channels for each country, please see PC Card Radios on page 145. 128 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration MAC Bridge Parameters 6.3 MAC Bridge Parameters The MAC Bridge parameters consist of protocol filters which direct the 9150 to forward or discard frames that contain a known protocol type. This enables the 9150 to be selective of what type of frames will be bridged over the radio, in order to limit the amount of data on busy networks. Filtering frames is based on the protocol infor-

mation in the frame. This is discussed in detail in Protocol Filters on page 133. The MAC Bridge Parameters page is entered from the Access Point Configuration menu on the first page. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 129 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration MAC Bridge Parameters Figure 6.2 below charts the pages for the MAC bridge filters. Entering OK or Cancel in the individual Filter pages will return you to the Bridge Parameters page. Figure 6.2 Overview Of MAC Bridge Configuration Menus 130 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration General Configuration 6.3.1 General Configuration Address Filters Enabled The checkbox in this parameter enables or disables the Address Filters function. If filtering is enabled ( ), the 9150 can filter out frames based on destination MAC addresses. The list of MAC addresses for filtering is set by the Address Filters option on page 132. Frames are filtered and either forwarded or discarded, depending on the rest of the settings in this configuration. If filtering is disabled, no filtering will be done based on MAC addresses. Protocol Filters Enabled The checkbox in this parameter enables or disables the Protocol Filters function. If filtering is enabled ( ), frames are filtered and either forwarded or discarded, depending on the rest of the settings in this configuration. If filtering is disabled, no filtering will be done based on protocol frames. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 131 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Address Filters: MAC Address Protocol Default Action This parameter determines which Protocol Default Action (discard or forward) will be performed when the Protocol Filters are enabled. Each Protocol Filter (see page 133) also has a forward/discard action associated with it. If a frame does not match any of the filters set in the Protocol Filters configuration, then it will take the Protocol Default Action selected in this parameter. For example, the Protocol Default Action may be to discard all frames. If a type field is matched in the configuration database, and the Filters action is forward, the frame will be passed on. If the field is not matched, then the frame will be dis-

carded. Therefore if you want only IP frames forwarded, after selecting the appro-

priate IP Type in the Ethernet II Filters (see page 136) the discard setting here will drop all frames containing other protocol types. Important:

If Protocol Filters Enabled is checked, and the Protocol Default Action is discard, an HTTP browser will not be able to access the 9150s configuration pages unless an ARP filter is defined to forward ARP packets. To do this, configure Ethernet II Filters to forward pro-

tocol type 0x0806 (ARP) packets (see page 136). Alternatively, you can create a static entry in the ARP table on the computer that is running the browser. 6.3.2 Address Filters: MAC Address The 9150 can use a list of destination MAC addresses to filter out frames. The MAC addresses are those of any terminals associating with the 9150. If Address Filters on page 131 is enabled, then any frame destined for any address in the list will be for-

warded. If an address is not on the list when Address Filters is enabled, the frame will be discarded. Addresses are added to the filter list by entering the Configure dialogue box from the Bridge Parameters menu. Name This is any name you wish to use to describe this terminal. Address This parameter provides the corresponding MAC address for the terminal. 132 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 6.3.3 Protocol Filters When the 9150 receives frames, it can forward or discard the messages by filtering the protocol Type fields encapsulated in the frame. The filtering is done on three types of Ethernet headers: Ethernet II, LLC and SNAP. Figure 6.3 on page 134 illustrates the Ethernet header formats. The parameters to configure these filters are described in the sections which follow. Notes:

1. Although both LLC and SNAP headers are filtered on Ethernet and Token Ring networks, Ethernet headers are not filtered on Token Ring. 2. Throughout these menus, the values for all the protocol types are, by convention, entered in hexadecimal, preceded by 0x. The fields for a basic IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame consist of a six-byte destination MAC address, followed by a six-byte source MAC address, and a two-byte protocol Type. The final fields in a frame are the Data field and the FCS field (Frame Check Sequence, or CRC). If the Type field contains a value that is greater than or equal to Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 133 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 0x0600, it is assumed to be the protocol identifier for an Ethernet II header. This field is used to determine which protocol is being used in the frame, and this is what can be filtered (see Ethernet II Filters on page 136). If the protocol Type is less than 0x05DC, then the value is interpreted as a Length field instead. It is assumed that an IEEE 802.2 Logical Link Control (LLC) header is to follow the Length. This header consists of the Destination Service/Source Service Access Point (DSAP/SSAP) and Control fields (see LLC Filters on page 137). If the DSAP and SSAP are both 0xAA, and the Control field has a value of 0x03, the LLC header will be followed by an extension which is a SNAP header. The SNAP header includes the Organizational Unit Identifier (OUI) and the protocol type (see SNAP Filters on page 138). Figure 6.3 Ethernet Frame Types The listboxes in the Protocol Filters option show the protocol filters already set in the configuration database. Selecting a protocol name and then opening the Config-

ure dialog box gives a list of parameter settings that can be modified or deleted for that protocol. 134 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters Figure 6.4 Protocol Filters Main Menu And Sub-menus New filters can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the listbox before enter-

ing the Configure dialog box. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 135 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters If a hexadecimal number is entered that is outside the minimum or maximum allow-

able value for these parameters, you will receive an alert that the Type value is invalid for the specified protocol. 6.3.3.1 Ethernet II Filters Note: This parameter is only valid for Ethernet networks. Ethernet II headers are not filtered on Token Ring networks. Name This is any name you wish to use to describe this Ethernet II filter. Action This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter. 136 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters Type The value entered in this parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0x0600 to 0xFFFF, which represents the Ethernet II protocol type you wish to filter. For example, if you only use TCP/IP, create two protocol filters, one to forward IP (Type 0x0800) and the other to forward ARP (Type 0x0806). For a listing of Ethernet II types, see Ethernet II Types (RFC 1700) on page B-1. 6.3.3.2 LLC Filters Name This is any name you wish to use to describe this LLC filter. Action This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter. DSAP/SSAP The value entered in the Destination Service/Source Service Access Point

(DSAP/SSAP) parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFF, where the first pair of digits is the DSAP and the last pair is the SSAP. For a listing of DSAP/SSAP types, see DSAP/SSAP Types on page B-14. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 137 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters 6.3.3.3 SNAP Filters Name This is any name you wish to use to describe this SNAP (SubNet Access Protocol) filter. Action This parameter can be set to either forward or discard frames with protocol types that match this filter. OUI The value entered in this parameter must be a six-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFFFF, which is the Organization Unique Identifier. When this parameter is enabled ( ), the OUI will be filtered. Type The value entered in this parameter must be a four-digit hexadecimal number ranging from 0 to 0xFFFF, which represents the SNAP type you wish to filter. When this parameter is enabled ( ), this Type will be filtered. For a short listing of OUI values, see OUI Values on page B-15. 138 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Protocol Filters Storm Detection 6.3.3.4 This filter parameter can prevent broadcast/multicast storms from spreading throughout the network. Network storms can burden radio traffic with unnecessary data transmissions. Enabled This parameter enables ( ) or disables the Storm Detection filters. Threshold The maximum number of broadcast/multicast frames that should be received in one second is defined in this parameter. When that threshold is exceeded, a broadcast storm is declared. Every broadcast/multicast frame received will be discarded until it is determined that the storm is over (see Restart, below). Setting the value for Threshold is determined by the characteristics of your network. Restart The broadcast storm is determined to be over when the number of broadcast frames received for a one second period is less than or equal to the value entered in this parameter. Setting the value for Restart is determined by the characteristics of your network. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 139 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Mobility Configuration 6.4 Mobility Configuration The Mobility Configuration page is entered from the Access Point Configuration menu on the first page. Going to the Mobility Configuration page opens the IAPP Parameters options. 140 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration Mobility Configuration The Inter-Access Point Protocol (IAPP) is an extension to the IEEE 802.11 protocol. In a multiple-9150 system, IAPP facilitates roaming of mobile stations among the 9150s, and enables communication and awareness between the 9150s. Every termi-

nal is associated with one 9150, but it can reassociate with another 9150 to maintain uninterrupted communications. The association is handed over from one 9150 to the next. The newly-associated 9150 will receive the terminals data frames and pass them onto the LAN. Returning frames are no longer accepted by the original 9150, which has disassociated from that terminal. Returning frames are now accepted by the newly-associated 9150 and passed over the RF to the terminal. To implement these procedures and coordinate the 9150s, IAPP specifies two message types:

Announce and Handover. In IAPP Announce procedures, when the 9150 is initialized, it sends an IP multicast message to inform the other 9150s in the network that it has become active. It also informs the other 9150s of its continued operation (alive status) by periodically multicasting the Announce beacon. The Handover protocol is intended to inform the old 9150 that a terminal has been associated with a new 9150, and to update the filter tables of intermediate MAC-

bridges to correctly forward frames destined for the terminal. The newly-associated 9150 sends a Handover request to the old 9150, which disassociates itself and acknowledges the request. Important:

These parameters are set with optimum default values. Do not adjust these values without discussing the effects with your Teklogix representative. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 141 Chapter 6: Access Point Configuration IAPP Parameters 6.4.1 IAPP Parameters Announce Period The Announce Period parameter indicates the number of seconds between Announce broadcasts. For further information, see Mobility Configuration on page 140. Handover Timeout If there is no response to the Handover request by the 9150 within the time specified in the Handover Timeout parameter, the request is retransmitted. If no response is received after a number of retries (set in the Handover Retries parameter, below), the 9150 will complete the reassociation procedure itself. For further information, see Mobility Configuration on page 140. Handover Retries This parameter sets the number of times the 9150 will transmit a Handover request to the disassociated 9150, before it completes the association transfer itself. See also Handover Timeout, above. Delay Double The Delay Double parameter doubles the amount of Handover Timeout between Handover Retries. For example, if the first retry is after 500 milliseconds, the next Handover request is sent after 1 second, followed by a retry after 2 seconds, etc. 142 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

 

 

SPECIFICATIONS 7 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway . 145 7.1.1 PC Card Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

. 146 7.1.2 Power Requirements . 7.1.3 Physical Description . 146 7.1.4 Processor And Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 147 7.1.6 Network Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 7.1.7 SLIM Cards . 147

. 147

. 7.1.8 Approvals . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 143 Chapter 7: Specifications Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway Note: Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice. 7.1 Specifications For The 9150 Wireless Gateway 7.1.1 PC Card Radios Important:

For sites in Canada, Lucent WaveLAN 802.11 and Proxim Range-

LAN 802.11 radios require a radio licence, unless they are installed totally within a building. (The user shall obtain this licence from Industry Canada.) TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 2.0 Watts (North America) 0.5 to 2.0 Watts (International) 403 to 512 MHz 9600 bps 20 TekLAN 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7410) Transmit Power Frequency Data Rate No. of Channels 0.25 Watts (United States) 1.0 Watts (Canada and Australia) 902 MHz 122 kbps 7 TekLAN 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum (TRX7425) Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 0.1 Watt 2.412 to 2.462 GHz 1 Mbps 7 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 145 Chapter 7: Specifications Power Requirements Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7440) Transmit Power Frequency Data Rate No. of Channels 100 mW, 400 mW (XR) 2.4 GHz 2 Mbps 79 (FCC, ETSI) 23 (JP) 35 (FR) 27 (SP) Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz (TRX7430)*

Transmit Power Frequency Range Data Rate No. of Channels 32 mW 2.4 to 2.4835 GHz 2 Mbps 11 (FCC) 4 (FR) 2 (SP) 13 (ETSI) 1 (JP)

* For regulatory information concerning the Lucent WaveLAN PC Card, please see page 148. 7.1.2 Power Requirements Input voltage Frequency Current 100 - 240 V 50/60 Hz 1.0 A 7.1.3 Physical Description Enclosure Dimensions Weight Bayer Makroblend EL-700 (PC/PET blend), jet black in colour, texture to MT-11030 or equivalent Nominal 36.3 x 26.2 x 7.4 cm (14.3 x 10.3 x 2.9 in.) Maximum 36.8 x 26.7 x 7.6 cm (14.5 x 10.5 x 3.0 in.) Nominal 2.9 kg (6.5 pounds) Maximum 3.2 kg (7.0 pounds) 146 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 7: Specifications Processor And Memory 7.1.4 Processor And Memory Power PC 860DC, 40 MHz Processor 16 MB DRAM 2 MB Flash ROM 7.1.5 Environmental Requirements Operating Temperature Operating Rel. Humidity Storage Temperature Dust and Rain 0C to 50C (32F to 122F) 10% to 90% (Non-condensing)

-40C to 70C (-40F to 158F) IEC 529 IP42 7.1.6 Network Interfaces On-Board Ethernet 10Base5 10Base2 10Base-T Token Ring 7.1.7 SLIM Cards Options 7.1.8 Approvals Madge Token Ring Smart 16/4 Ringnode Adapter Type II PC card, 4 or 16 Mbps RS-232/20 mA Current Loop Optically isolated RS-232 Plus FCC Part 15, subpart B, Class B Electrical Safety: CSA/NRTL, TV, CB Scheme CE Mark ETS 300 113 ETS 300 086 ETS 300 220 ETS 300 328 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 147 Chapter 7: Specifications Approvals Lucent WaveLAN PC Card Regulatory Information The IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card must be installed and used in strict accor-

dance with the manufacturers instructions. This device complies with the following radio frequency and safety standards. Canada - Industry Canada (IC) This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Europe - EU Declaration of Conformity This device complies with the specifications listed below, following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC:

ETS 300-826 General EMC requirements for Radio equipment. ETS 300-328 Technical requirements for Radio equipment. USA - Federal Communications Commission (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation of the devices in a WaveLAN System is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation. Important:

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation. The radiated output power of the IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN PC Card is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the WaveLAN PC Card shall be used in such a manner that the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized. When using this device in combination with WaveLAN Outdoor Antenna products, a certain separation distance between antenna and nearby persons has to be kept to ensure RF exposure compliance. Refer to the Regulatory State-

ments as identified in the documentation that comes with those products for additional information. 148 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

Chapter 7: Specifications Approvals Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-

aged to try and correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the distance between the equipment and the receiver. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Lucent Technologies is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of the devices included with this IEEE 802.11 WaveLAN Kit, or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equip-

ment other than specified by Lucent Technologies. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modification, substitu-

tion or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. For country-specific approvals, please consult the flyer Radio Certification Infor-

mation that is included with the 9150 Wireless Gateway. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 149

 

 

INDEX BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. A ACCESS POINT CONFIGURATION MAC Bridge Parameters 129139 ANSI/Telnet 113115 antenna requirements 16, 17 approvals 147 Auto-login, ANSI Telnet Address Filters 132 General Configuration 131 Protocol Filters 133 Mobility Configuration 140142 access point configuration 10, 41, 125142 Action Ethernet II filters 136 LLC filters 137 SNAP filters 138 Active Channel TekLAN 51 TRX7370 parameters 60 Actively Negotiate with Host 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Actual IP Address Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Actual Subnet Mask Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Adaptive polling/contention protocol 8 addresses, network 3637 Address Filters 132 Address Filters Enabled, MAC Bridge parameters 131 AIAG Alarm 3274 Emulation 90 5250 Emulation 104 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Announce (IAPP message) 141 Announce Period 142 ANSI compatible terminals, connecting 21 parameter 115 Auto-telnet/login Enable 118 failed login 120 Password 119 User ID 119 Auto Startup Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 TekLAN 51 Auto-Startup 72 Auto-telnet, ANSI Telnet Auto-telnet/login Enable 118 Host 119 Terminal Prompt 119 B Barcode 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 109 Base Number, Wlan 52 Priority, Wlan 53 base station configuration 41, 4553 IP Address 71 Name 71 wireless 47 BASE STATIONS 71 baud rate ports 20 baud rates console port 40 serial port 40 baud rate See Data Rate BOOTP, TCP/IP 38 bootptab file 38 Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) 38 broadcast storm 139 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual I Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. C cables commands (IP) 25 connecting 21 port coaxial 17 console port No. 19387 A-8 Current Loop No. 16599 A-7 diagrams A-6, A-7 DTE to DTE #16590 A-6 DTE to DTE #16598 A-7 ground problems 21 maximum length RS-232 Plus, Current Loop 20 outdoor data cable 21 part numbers 20 serial descriptions A-6 Callsign Period, narrow band radio 58 Callsign String, narrow band radio 58 cellular base 8, 72 Channel, IEEE 802.11 DS 128 Channel n Enabled, TekLAN 51 channels (Narrow Band) 60 Clear 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Cold Start Trap 36 Collision Size, narrow band radio 57 Command Region 3274 Emulation 95 5250 Emulation 109 configuration access point 10, 41, 125142 base station 41, 4553 general options 29 IEEE 802.11 DS 34, 128 FH 34, 126 main menu 25 mini-controller 41, 75122 CONFIGURATION MAIN MENU 25 connecting ANSI compatible terminals 21 Ethernet 19 Token Ring 19 video display terminal 21 connectors DA15 A-3 RJ-45 A-4 Token Ring A-5 console cable No. 19387 A-8 pinouts A-1 Console Port, baud rate 40 Convert 7 to 8 Bits ANSI Emulation 115 Current Loop port 20 port pinouts A-2 Current Loop cable no. 16599 A-7 D data rate serial 21, 25 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 50 902 MHz 50 Data Rate, TekLAN radio 50 DA15 connector pinout A-3 DEC VT220, connecting 21 Default Actual Gateway Address, bootp 38 Gateway Address, bootp 39 IP Address Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Subnet Mask Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Delay Double 142 directional antenna 16 Direct Sequence (DS) radios all 7, 34 IEEE 802.11 10, 126, 128 specifications IEEE 802.11 146 TekLAN 145 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 50, 51, 53 902 MHz 18, 50, 51 73 DNS 3739 Default Domain 39 Name Server 39 Resolver Enabled 39 Domain Name System See DNS Direct TCP Connections for TekTerm II Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index DRAM 147 DSAP/SSAP 137 DSAP/SSAP types (table) B-14, B-15 DTE to DCE cable No. 16598 A-7 DTE to DTE cable No. 16590 A-6 E Echo ANSI Emulation 114 electrical safety approvals 147 Employ bootp 19, 38 Emulation and Protocol 64 General Host menu 84 General Host menu, 9010 emulation mini-controller configuration 80 67 emulations ANSI/Telnet 113115 overview 77 3274/Telnet 8495 5250/Telnet 95110 9010/Serial 6970 9010/TCP/IP 67 Enable Card Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 TekLAN 51 Enabled Channels TRX7370 parameters 60 Entry Line 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 109 environmental requirements 15 operating relative humidity 147 operating temperature 147 overview 16 storage temperature 147 Escape Timeout ANSI Emulation 114 ESSID IEEE 802.11 DS 128 IEEE 802.11 FH 127 Ethernet adaptor cards 147 base station 71 connections 19 Frame Types (diagram) 134 IP Parameters 31 packet size 19, 31 Physical Address 30 port pinout A-3 status indicator LED 18 10Base-T 19, A-4 10Base2 19 10Base5 19, A-3 Ethernet II header 134 types (tables) B-1B-14 Ethernet II Filters 136 external devices 17 F Field Overhead 3274 Emulation 95 5250 Emulation 109 filters 131, 132 broadcast storm 139 Ethernet II 136 LLC 137 MAC bridge 133 PROTOCOL FILTERS 133 SNAP 138 First Local Terminal Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 First Terminal Listen Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Free Window Factor, narrow band radio Frequencies, narrow band radio 62 Frequency Hopping (FH) radio 7, 34, 126, 57 146 frequency See Range Full Duplex Mode 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 Function Key n Function Key Mapping screens ANSI 122 3274 98 5250 112 Function Key Remapping ANSI Emulation 115 G General Host Options base stations 66 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual III Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. General Parameters, narrow band radio Channel 128 mini-controller 83 62 ground problems, cables 21 H Handover Retries 142 Timeout 142 Handover (IAPP message) 141 header types Ethernet II 134 LLC 134 SNAP 134 Hidden Match Character 3274 Emulation 93 5250 Emulation 108 Hopping Pattern 127 Set 127 Host Port ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 110 Print 3274 Emulation 88 5250 Emulation 102 Table, DNS 37 Timeout, ANSI Emulation 113 HOST MENU base station 6570 mini-controller 82 Hosts I IAPP 11, 140 messages Announce 141 Handover 141 IAPP PARAMETERS Announce Period 142 Delay Double 142 Handover Retries 142 Handover Timeout 142 IEEE 802.11 configurations 34, 126, 128 IV Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual DS FH Hopping Pattern 127 Hopping Set 127 protocol description 10 radios Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 7, 126, 128, 146 Proxim RangeLAN802 7, 126, 128, 146 IEEE 802.11 (DIRECT SEQUENCE RADIO PARAMETERS) 128 IEEE 802.11 (FREQUENCY HOPPING RADIO PARAMETERS) 126 input voltage (power requirements) 16, 146 installation environmental requirements 16, 147 LAN 18 Inter-Access Point Protocol See IAPP INTERFACES Ethernet 30 IEEE 802.11 126 main menu 30 narrow band 5363 TekLAN 4953 Token Ring 32 interfaces, network 147 Internet Explorer 21, 25 IP Address base station 71 Host Table 37 IP address IP Parameters Ethernet 31 Token Ring 33 Is Host Fujitsu 3274 Emulation 86 L LAN installations 18 Last Active Session Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 118 LEDs Ethernet 18 PC card status 18 base station configuration 63 mini-controller configuration 80 configuring with console 25 9150 18 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index 9010 Serial Protocol Options 69 MOBILITY CONFIGURATION SLIM card 18 TekLAN 18 Token Ring 18 TRX7370 18 Line Protocol LLC FILTERS 137 LLC header 134 Local 3274 Emulation 87 5250 Emulation 102 Local IP Address to Bind ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 LSB (Least Significant Byte) 30 Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 2.4 GHz 128, 146 PC Card regulatory information 148 M MAC address 127, 128 Bridge Configuration menus (chart) 130 bridge parameters 129139 layer 10 MAC Address 132 MAC BRIDGE PARAMETERS 129139 Madge Token Ring PC card specifications 147 maintenance requirements 16 Maximum Message Segment Size, narrow band radio 57 ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 111 Max Priority, Wlan 52 Medium Access Control See MAC memory 147 menus, accessing 27 Message Duration, Wlan 53 Mode Limit, narrow band radio 58 Size 72 Microsoft Internet Explorer 21, 25 mini-controller configuration 41, 75122 emulations 77 networks 77 MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS 4243 140142 MSB (Most Significant Byte) 30 multicast storm 139 N Name DNS Host Table 37 Ethernet II filters 136 General Host menu base stations 66 mini-controller 84 LLC filters 137 SNAP filters 138 narrow band radio 7 Active Channel parameter 60 configuration 34 Enabled Channels parameter 60 overview of menus 54 parameters 5363 POLLING PROTOCOL PARAMETERS 56 RADIO CHANNELS parameter 60 RADIO PARAMETERS 59 specifications 145 TRX7370 5363 Netscape Navigator 21, 25 network addresses 3637 interfaces 147 radio 56 Number of Retries, narrow band radio 57 O Offline Timeout, Wlan 53 omnidirectional antenna 16 Onboard Ethernet 30 pinout (10Base-T) A-4 pinout (10Base5) A-3 online/offline messages 67, 69 Operate in Cellular Mode 72 operating relative humidity 147 Maximum Sessions per Terminal Number of Poll Windows, narrow band Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual V Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. temperature 147 OUI 138 OUI values (table) B-15 P packet size Ethernet 31 Token ring 33 packet size, Ethernet 19 packet size, Token ring 19 Page ANSI Emulation 115 Pages 3274 Emulation 89 5250 Emulation 104 parameters changing configurations 25 changing with a web browser 21 MAC Bridge 129139 radio 126128 System Parameters 36 Passthru 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 101 password, default 27 PCMCIA cards radio configurations 34 specifications 145146 status indicator LEDs 18 802.11 DS 128 802.11 FH 126 Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 PHY layer 10 physical description 146 Physical Address 30, 127, 128 specifications 146 pinouts See port pinouts Poll ID 73 POLLING PROTOCOL PARAME-

TERS TRX7370 parameters 56 Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 port location 17 options 20 pinouts console port A-1 VI Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Ethernet (10Base5) A-3 RJ-45 connector (10Base-T) A-4 RS-232/Current Loop port A-2 RS-232 Plus port A-1 Token Ring A-5 power requirements 16, 146 Print Form Length 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Print Line 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Procedures 3274 Emulation 87 5250 Emulation 102 processor 147 protocol adaptive polling/contention 8 BOOTP 38 Protocol, base station Ethernet connection 71 radio adaptive polling/contention 8 IEEE 802.11 10 Wireless LAN (Wlan) 8 Protocol Default Action, MAC Bridge parameters 132 PROTOCOL FILTERS 133 Ethernet II 136 LLC 137 SNAP 138 Storm Detection 139 Protocol Filters Enabled, MAC Bridge parameters 131 Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 FHSS 2.4 GHz 7, 146 R radio Lucent WaveLAN IEEE 802.11 DSSS 7, 146 options 7 parameters 126128 PCMCIA cards 7, 145 Percent Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 Poll ID 73 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index Polling Protocol Terminal Timeout 73 802.11) 7 Proxim RangeLAN802 IEEE 802.11 protocols (Wlan, adaptive polling, IEEE RS-232 Current Loop port pinouts A-2 ports 20 connectivity 20 specifications 147 RS-232 Plus connectivity 20 specifications 147 S safety approvals 147 instructions viii FHSS 7, 146 Range, TekLAN 51 specifications 145 IEEE 802.11 145 TekLAN 2.4 GHz 146 902 MHz 145 spread spectrum 7, 126, 128 TekLAN 145 2.4 GHz 7, 50 902 MHz 7, 50 TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP 7, 145 RADIO CHANNELS TRX7370 parameters 60 RADIO LINK FEATURES 7273 RADIO PARAMETERS, TRX7370 59 Radio Type, TekLAN 50 RAM 147 Range, TekLAN 51 RangeLAN 802 PCMCIA with Proxim FHSS 2.4GHz Radio 7, 126, 146 Reboot Unit, Miscellaneous Commands 43 Refrain from sending On-line & Off-line messages 9010/Serial emulation 69 9010/TCP/IP emulation 67 Regulatory Domain IEEE 802.11 DS 128 IEEE 802.11 FH 127 Remote Print 3274 Emulation 89 5250 Emulation 103 Remote Txon, narrow band radio 59 Restart, Storm Detection 139 Retries, Number of 57 Ring Speed, Token Ring 32 RJ-45 connector pinouts (10Base-T Ethernet) A-4 RLE, ANSI Emulation 115 ROM 147 RS-232/RS-232 Plus port pinouts A-1 Send IAC Break as an Attention Key 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 Send IAC Interrupt Process as a System Request 3274 Telnet Protocol 97 serial base stations 6 connectivity 20 Line Protocol character codes 70 port pinouts A-1, A-2 specifications 147 status indicator LED 18 Serial I/O 3274 Emulation 94 5250 Emulation 108 Serial Port, baud rate 40 SERIAL PORTS PARAMETERS 40 Session Cycle Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 118 Shared Channel Narrow Band, TRX7370 55 Size of Poll Windows, narrow band radio 56 SLIM card See serial Slot n PC card 34 Token-Ring 32 SNAP, header 134 SNAP Filters 138 SNMP menu 35 SNMP Communities 36 System Parameters 36 Trap Receivers 36 specifications PCMCIA card radios 145146 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual VII Index BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. physical 146 spread spectrum radios 7 IEEE 802.11 (2.4 GHz) 126, 128, 146 TekLAN 145, 146 status indicators (LEDs) 18 Storm Detection 139 Subnet Mask See Default Subnet Mask Sync Delay, narrow band radio 59 System Info, Miscellaneous Commands 42 System Parameters, SNMP 36 T TCP/IP PARAMETERS 36 TCP Session Request Key ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 TekLAN card 34 overview of menus 49 parameters 4953 radio parameters 5051 specifications 145 Wlan parameters 5253 2.4 GHz DS Spread Spectrum 7, 50 902 MHz DS Spread Spectrum 7, 50 TekTerm 73 terminal associating with 9150 140 connecting a video display 21 Terminal Range 65 General Host menu 84 General Host menu, 9010 emulation 67 mini-controller configuration 81 Terminal Type ANSI Telnet Protocol 117 3274 Telnet Protocol 96 5250 Telnet Protocol 110 text conventions 4 Threshold ANSI Emulation 114 Storm Detection 139 Timeout, Wlan 52 Token Ring 32 adaptor PC card specifications 19, 147 base station 6, 71 connections 19 IP Parameters 33 packet size 19, 33 VIII Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual port pinout A-5 Ring Speed 32 status indicator LED 18 Transmit Line 3274 Emulation 90 5250 Emulation 104 Trap Receivers, SNMP 36 TRX7370 Narrow Band DSP radio See also narrow band radio 7, 145 TRX7370 RADIO CARD PARAMETERS 60 TRX7410 TekLAN radio 7, 145 TRX7425 TekLAN radio 7, 145 TRX7430 WaveLAN radio 7, 146 TRX7440 RangeLAN radio 7, 146 Tuning Values, narrow band radio 63 Type Ethernet II filters 137 SNAP filters 138 U Use Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 Use International EBCDIC 3274 Emulation 86 5250 Emulation 100 Use NS/NR 9010 Serial Protocol Options 70 user name, default 27 USERS 34 V video display terminal, connecting 21 Visible Match Character 3274 Emulation 92 5250 Emulation 106 voltage, input 16, 146 W web browser 21, 25 WIRELESS LAN (Wlan) PARAMETERS 5253 Wireless LAN (Wlan) protocol cellular base considerations 72 description 8 Write Error Code 5250 Emulation 100 BOLDFACE indicates a menu or sub-menu name; Boldface indicates a parameter name. Index 10Base-T Ethernet 19, A-4 10Base2 Ethernet 19 10Base5 Ethernet 19, A-3 2.4 GHz radios 145 3274/Telnet 8495 5250/Telnet 95110 9010 / Serial 6870 9010 / TCP/IP 67 9010 Emulation Options serial 69 TCP/IP 67 9010 Emulation Parameters 84 902 MHz radio 145 9400/9300 Network Controllers, cellular mode 52, 72 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual IX

 

 

94, 0-),37)46-45

), +)),1) 5-481+- +-64-

460 )-41+) 0-),37)46-45

), 75 5-481+- +-64-

-742-) 0-),37)46-45

6ACEN 1?

 A=@ML=A *KAL=H@

EIIEII=KC=

J=HE # %'

6A  '# &! ''

.=N  '# & $!

6ACEN +HF

& )EHFHJ -N?D=CA *L@

5KEJA #

-H=CAH AJK?O 75) "&

6A  $$ !% $$

.=N  $$ !% $"

6ACEN -KHFA= FAH=JEI

=>=EIAH5JH=A 

,"%&%% 9EE?D ?DDAE@A

/AH=O 6A "' #" "''""

.=N "' #" "''""''

16-4)61) 57*51,1)41-5

6ACEN />0

=>=EIAH5JH=A !

,"%&%% 9EE?D ?DDAE@A

/AH=O 6A "' #" ' & 

.=N "' #" ' & #'

6ACEN 5)

2=H? +K> ,K /B

*=JEAJ 

!&#$ )ENA2HLA?A

+A@AN !

.H=?A 6A !! " " " #%"

.=N !! " " !' "$!

6ACEN J@

=?=IJAH +KHJ +H=JE 4=@

0ECD 9O?>A

*K?ECD=IDEHA 7EJA@ EC@ 02 !6, 6A "" "'" "#$$$

.=N "" "'" "###

6ACEN )*

5@H= /K>>AHC=J= &

"$ $! /JDA>KHC 5MA@A

6A "$ ! # % !

.=N "$ ! # # %&

6ACEN .E=@

AJIAE@K= $

 ! -IF

.E=@

6A !#& ' % ## " 

.=N !#& ' % ## " #

6ACEN ,A=H

8AIJAH>=ALA "$

,% .HA@AHE?E=

,A=H

6A "# %$ "  !!

.=N "# %# '" "$ %'

6ACEN 1J=E= 5H1

/=AHE= /=@DE  #

% = ,E 4D

E=

1J=O 6A !' '!'""%

.=N !' '!'""$'

6ACEN 1? 5EC=FHA

#&! H?D=H@ 4=@

 # .HK

5EC=FHA !&&&"

6A $# %!# &&

.=N $# %!! #''

6ACEN 5) @A +8

5EAHH= =@= $ $ 2EI

+ =I *=HHE=? +2 

ANE? ,.

ANE?

6A # # ! %  "#

.=N # # ! %  !

6ACEN @ *H=IE J@=

) +=I= *H=?=

5= 2=K  52 "&

*H=IE

6A ##  !$" &$&

.=N ##  !$" &$&

6ACEN 1? )CA?E=

8EJ=?KH=  '' BE?E= %!

=I +@AI 5=JE=C

+DEA 6A #$ !!" '!""

.=N #$ !! !&$&

6ACEN @A )HCAJE= 5)

)L )E?E= HA=K @A KIJ &

2EI  BE?E= +#

% *KAI )EHAI

)HCAJE=

6A #"  !"! '!"

.=N #"  !"! $!

6ACEN -IF=
= 5

+EJOF=H? 4@= @A ,=J+JH= 0IFEJ=AJ

"%"' -@EBE?E )JA=I !=

+HA= @A >HAC=J

*=H?A=

5F=E &'"

6A !" ' !"%#  

.=N !" ' !"%#  !

94, 91,- 9-*

MMMJACEN?

 

 

MINI-CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION 5

. 5.1 Overview . 77 5.2 Hosts . 80 5.3 Main Host Menu . 82

. 83 5.3.1 General Options . 5.3.2 9010 Emulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 5.3.3 3274/Telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 5.3.3.1 Emulation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 5.3.3.2 Protocol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 5.3.3.3 Function Key Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 5.3.4 5250/Telnet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 5.3.4.1 Emulation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 5.3.4.2 Protocol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 5.3.4.3 Function Key Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . 112

. 113 5.3.5.1 Emulation Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 5.3.5.2 Protocol Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 5.3.5.3 Function Key Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . 121 5.3.5 ANSI/Telnet . Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 75 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview 5.1 Overview The network controller in a Teklogix system performs a number of important tasks. One of these tasks is emulation: the translation of data between the protocol of the host computer and the protocol used by Teklogix terminals. The data which is sent from a host computer to a terminal to provide its display, and returned to the host as a result of operations at the terminal, is called a data stream. Host computers can provide data streams of various types to their terminals. Teklogix terminals can directly accept only two types of data stream: TESS and ANSI. TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) is the proprietary data stream used by Teklogix terminals. ANSI data streams are a standard type of data stream used by wired ANSI terminals. Other types of data stream provided by the host must be converted into TESS or ANSI before Teklogix terminals can work with them. This translation is done by emulation software in a network controller. The 9150 is equipped with emulation capabilities, allowing it to act as a mini-

controller. When a 9150 is configured as a mini-controller, Teklogix terminals can emulate an ANSI, 5250 or 3274 terminal via a 9150 rather than through a 9400/9300 Network Controller. Important:

9150s acting as mini-controllers are designed for small, low-

transaction sites. A 9400/9300 Network Controller is required for systems that support more than 50 terminals. Acting as a mini-controller, the 9150 can support up to 32 additional networked base stations and up to 50 terminals. A 9150 mini-controller can also manage wireless LAN configurations. A 9150 configured as a mini-controller can support the following emulations:

5250 emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN. 3274 emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN.

ANSI emulation using TCP/IP over an Ethernet or Token Ring LAN. Note: The 9150 main parameters should first be set up as described in Chapter 3:

9150 Main Configuration. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 77

Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview 7030 Hand-Held RF Terminal 9140 Wireless Gateway 9150 Wireless Gateway Mini-Controller 8055 Vehicle-Mount RF Terminal 802.11 / 2.4 G Hz HOST ETHERNET TCP/IP 9 0 2 M H z 7030 Hand-Held RF Terminal 9150 Wireless Gateway Base Station and Access Point Figure 5.1 9150 Mini-Controller Configuration 7035 Hand-Held RF Terminal 78 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Overview For operation as a mini-controller, the parameters in the Hosts pages under Base Station Configuration should be set appropriately. The Hosts options are found on the Configuration Main Menu page. For information on configuring radio protocol parameters, please refer to Radio Link Features on page 72. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 79 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Hosts 5.2 Hosts The drop-down menu in this option shows the host names present on the system. Up to six hosts can be supported. A host must be configured for each host that com-

municates with the 9150 mini-controller. Opening the Configure dialog box for a selected host lists the parameters that can be modified or deleted for that host. New hosts can be added by selecting [#] Create New in the drop-down menu before entering the Configure dialog box. Name This parameter indicates the assigned host name. The host name also appears on the RF terminal when switching between hosts in a multiple-host environment. Enabled The Enabled option must be turned on ( ) for terminals to communicate with this host. Emulation and Protocol This drop-down menu provides a list of host emulations and communication proto-

cols supported by the 9150. Working with Teklogix terminals and base stations, the 9150 can emulate IBM 3278-2, 5251-11, and 5555-B01 terminals, as well as ANSI terminals. Protocols are the methods by which terminals communicate with host computers over various physical media such as Ethernet, Token Ring, and serial connections, as well as radio-link connections. The 9150 supports the TCP/IP protocol. 80 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Hosts The supported emulations with their respective protocols are:

9010/ TCP/IP or Serial (See page 84 for Configuration Parameters). 3274/Telnet (See pages 84 to 98 for Configuration Parameters). 5250/Telnet (See pages 99 to 112 for Configuration Parameters).

ANSI/Telnet (See pages 113 to 121 for Configuration Parameters). When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 emulation (a proprietary asyn-

chronous protocol developed by Teklogix) to communicate with a 9300 Network Controller or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. When the 9150 acts as a mini-controller, it uses the 3274 and 5250 emulation protocols to communicate with IBM hosts, or the ANSI emulation protocol to com-

municate with ANSI terminals. Terminal Range The values entered in this parameter designate the first and last terminals in the range of terminals that will communicate with the host. These terminal numbers are mapped to this particular host. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 50. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 81 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration Main Host Menu 5.3 Main Host Menu When you choose an existing host name from the Hosts listbox and then select the Configure button, the 9150 displays the Host Menu. The Host Menu presents the options for four sub-menus: General Host Options, Emulation Options, Protocol Options, and Function Key Mappings. There is also a Main Menu button. When you select this button, the 9150 displays the Configuration Main Menu page

(see page 79 for an enlarged illustration). Figure 5.2 Overview Of Host Menus 82 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration General Options As illustrated in Figure 5.2 on page 82, the four configuration sub-menus display the following options:

General Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the General Options page for the host. Emulation Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Emulation Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and proto-

col selected for the host. Protocol Options When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Protocol Options page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and proto-

col selected for the host. Function Key Mappings When you select this sub-menu, the 9150 displays the Function Key Mappings page for the host. This page may vary depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected for the host. Note: The Function Key Mappings parameters are not applicable to either of the 9010 emulations; the Protocol Options parameters do not apply to the 9010/TCP/IP emulation. 5.3.1 General Options In this page, you can select general options for this host connection. The host con-

nection may also be deleted. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 83 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 9010 Emulations Emulation Options Name This parameter allows you to enter a name for the new host. Emulation and Protocol This parameter allows you to select the emulation and protocol to be used for the connection to this host. Available combinations of emulation and protocol are:

3274/Telnet, 5250/Telnet, ANSI/Telnet. Terminal Range This parameter allows you to specify the range of terminals which will communi-

cate with this host. The left-hand textbox contains the lowest terminal number which is allowed to communicate with the host; the right-hand textbox contains the highest terminal number. Terminal numbers may range from 1 to 50. 5.3.2 9010 Emulations When the 9150 acts as a base station, it uses the 9010 protocol (a proprietary asyn-

chronous protocol developed by Teklogix) to communicate with a 9400 or 9300 Network Controller, or a host using a Teklogix Software Development Kit (TSDK). For detailed information on configuring the 9150 as a base station, please refer to Chapter 4: Base Station Configuration. 5.3.3 3274/Telnet 5.3.3.1 The 9150 mini-controller displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the 3274/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. Emulation Options With IBM 3274, or IBM 5250 emulation, the 9150 mini-controller converts the application data stream from the host to TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) commands. Some of the parameters in this page govern the conversion of the host screens to TESS. 84 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 85 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Is Host Fujitsu If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller sends its data in Fujitsu format. Enabling this parameter causes the standard IBM formatting codes (for start of field, setting buffers, etc.) to be replaced by the codes used by Fujitsu host computers. Use International EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller uses the International EBCDIC character set, swapping the positions of the ! and ] characters. Alarm When this parameter is enabled, terminals beep when the word ALARM appears on the application screen in the location specified by the Command Region parame-

ter (see page 95). The word ALARM should be a display-only field. Note: The Command Region parameter must be enabled for this parameter to work. Clear If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller creates an empty entry field for an entry field that is filled with spaces. Some host applications rely on the video attributes of displayed characters to high-

light fields, particularly entry fields. For example, the application screen may define all entry fields with reverse video and fill the field with spaces. This is effective on terminals that support reverse video, but on terminals that do not, it can make the field invisible since it is made up entirely of spaces. By default, all empty entry fields displayed at the Teklogix terminal are highlighted by the entry character chosen in the terminals configuration (not all Teklogix ter-

minals support video attributes). Note: This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent to the host remains unaffected. Passthru If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to send data directly to the RF terminals serial port. This is most commonly used for printing. 86 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Preparing Host Screens for Pass-Through On the screen to be sent through the terminal serial port, the word PASSTHRU (in capital letters) must appear on the first line, starting on the second column. The actual data to be sent to the terminal may start anywhere below the first line. With 5250 or 3274 emulations, attributes occupy a position in the screen buffer. An attribute placed between column 2 and the end of the word PASSTHRU will push all following characters one position to the right. Therefore, any required attributes should occupy column 1 of the first line (just preceding the word PASSTHRU). Example:

column: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 line 1: @ P A S S T H R U @

line 2: @ P A R T : 1 2 3 4 5 where @ is an attribute. When the 9150 is finished sending the data to the terminals printer, it will send an ENTER key to the host. The host must wait for the ENTER key before sending any more screens (including other PASSTHRU screens) to this terminal. Note: Refer to the Terminals User Manual for information about setting parameters on the terminal for pass-through. Procedures If this parameter is enabled, the host may send TESS procedures through the 9150 to the terminals. A TESS procedure is a group of TESS commands that can be exe-

cuted by the TESS execute procedure command. Local If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to provide pages to be loaded as local TESS procedures in the terminals. The local procedures are selected from a menu at the terminal. The terminals can perform these procedures when they are offline. Later when the terminals are online, they send the results of these functions to the host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 87 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Note: The Procedures parameter must also be enabled for Local to work. Host Print When this parameter is enabled, the host can send extra data to the terminals screens, and instruct the terminal to print it. This is in contrast to the Local Print fea-

ture, where the terminal makes the initial print request. The text that is passed to the printer is formatted into the 24 x 80 application screen. If the host can initiate the print operation, the text is printed. The 9150 identifies the additional text as a print page by the presence of the word PRINT (in capital let-

ters) beginning in the 2nd column of line 13 on the 24 x 80 screen. The word PRINT should be defined as display-only text. The print page is positioned below the terminals display page (see the following figure). The size of the print page is always the same as the terminals display page

(assuming that in the terminals configuration, the page length is less than 12 lines). When Host Print is enabled, the 9150 passes the print page to the terminal after receiving the application screen from the host. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Display Page (8 x 40) PRINT Print Page (8 x 40) Figure 5.3 Application Screen With Print Page 88 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Notes:

1. Unlike the Passthru option, when using Host Print no escape commands can be sent to the printer. 2. Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal in its Printer command under the TESS Features menu; refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. Remote Print When this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the print page to a terminal when-

ever the terminal requests it (by sending the F17 function key from the terminal, or the PRINT key on older terminals). The 9150 sends the function response back to the host. This is in contrast to Host Print, where the host makes the initial print request. Note:

Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal. Refer to the Terminals User Manual or the Parameter Guide for more information. Pages This parameter determines the number of host screens (or pages) stored at the terminal, to a maximum of 16. The 9150 reduces data transmitted to the terminals by using the terminals capability to store a page of data for each screen it displays. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If a similar page is already in the terminals memory, the 9150 instructs the terminal to redisplay its copy of the page; only the necessary changes are sent from the controller. If no match is found, the complete page is sent to the terminal over the radio link. Note: There is a corresponding parameter on the terminal itself, and the actual number of saved pages will be the smaller of the two values. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 89 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Transmit Line When this feature is enabled, all modified data at the terminal is automatically transmitted when the operator enters data into a transmit-upon-entry field. The value in this textbox specifies the line on the screen which is designated the transmit line. The last entry field above or on the transmit line on the screen will be identified as the transmit-upon-entry field. If any entry fields exist on lines below the transmit line, no entry field will be designated as the transmit-upon-entry field. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. A value of 24 designates the last entry field on each application screen as transmit-upon-entry. AIAG This parameter provides auto-locate and fill for input coming from bar code readers. When bar code data is entered at a terminal, the terminal searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data. The data preloaded into the AIAG field by the application program determines whether or not the bar code data is accepted. At the 9150 mini-controller, a decimal value of an ASCII character from 0 to 127 is set to match the AIAG Field Identifier set at the host. A value of 0 disables this feature. The format of the preloaded data is as follows:

<mode> <AIAG prefix(data)>

The mode character used with the command allows for different operating modes to suit various application operations. The automatic locate and fill operation applies only to data received from a bar code reader. Descriptions of the modes and AIAG prefix are listed in Table 5.1 on page 91. These modes are set at the host. 90 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Mode 0 1 2 3

+4

+8

+16 Function Display prefix, send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, send prefix to host. Display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Add 4 to above values to cause transmit to host when all AIAG fields with 4 set are filled. Function 0 is pressed if there are any fields with this bit set, and all fields with this bit set have been filled by operator input. Add 8 to above values to allow overwrite of previously entered data. Add 16 to above values to indicate cursor position priority for search and fill. AIAG Prefix

(data) The text to be matched in the AIAG field. Table 5.1 Mode Functions And AIAG Prefix Description Example:

The information in the sample screen below is defined at and sent from the host. It includes the AIAG Identifier the tag identifying this as an AIAG field followed by the mode, in this case Mode 0, and finally, the AIAG Prefix I. AIAG Information From Host AIAG Field Identifier AIAG Prefix (data) Item No. @ 0 I Mode Figure 5.4 AIAG Field Sent From The Host Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 91 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options When the information arrives at the terminal screen, the appropriate AIAG field for the scanned information is located using the AIAG Identifier. Because Mode 0 was set at the host, the AIAG Prefix I is displayed on the terminal screen, and when this screen is completed, the prefix will be sent back to the host. AIAG Information From Host To Terminal Screen AIAG Field Identifier Item No.

I AIAG Prefix (data) Figure 5.5 AIAG Field Sent To The Terminal Visible Match Character By inserting a special ASCII character directly before an entry field, the application program distinguishes a match field from an entry field. For example, suppose an angle bracket > is defined for visible match fields. Inserting > immediately preceding the entry field identifies it as a match field, as illustrated below. Part #> ___________ The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. To use the Visible Match feature, the host computer preloads data into a match entry field; the data is visible on the terminal screen. The preloaded data sent to a terminal can consist of exact characters, special match characters or a combination of the two. Refer to Table 5.2 on page 93 for match characters recognized by Teklogix terminals. If an entry does not match the preloaded data, the entry is displayed, the terminal beeps, and the cursor moves to the first position in the match field. The operator can either make another entry in the match field, or move the cursor to a new field. 92 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options When an entry (even one that doesnt match the preloaded data) is made in a match field, the entry is sent to the host as part of the terminals modified data during the next transmission. Character Description

Match a number. Match a letter (either case). Match an uppercase letter. Match a lowercase letter. Match an alphanumeric character. Match a letter, number or space. Match a punctuation character. Match any character. Match all character positions in the field with the preceding character. Match any remaining characters, but not necessarily the remainder of the field, with the preceding character. Table 5.2 Match Characters Example:

Suppose you want to preload an entry field with a part number. If the part number is known, you can preload the field with that part number. If more flexibility is needed, and the part number always begins with two alphabetic characters followed by a hyphen and four digits, the match string for the field would be: &&#### . Hidden Match Character Unlike data in a visible match field, the preloaded data in a hidden match field is not displayed at the terminal. Note: Refer to Visible Match Character on page 92 for detailed information about field matching. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 93 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Emulation Options Serial I/O Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by pre-

ceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field, the data will be sent to the terminals serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the field accepts data from the terminals serial port. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Print Line This parameter allows you to enter the starting line number of the print page in the application screen. A value of 1 causes the display page to be printed; a value of 0

(zero) disables this feature. Print Form Length This parameter sets the printers form length in lines. The range is 0 to 24. Barcode Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader. The application program distinguishes an entry field as barcode-input-

only by preceding the field with a special character. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Entry Line This parameter contains the number of the first line displayed if there is no entry field in the upper-left portion of the screen, and if an entry field is at or below this line. The Entry Line parameter allows an automatic offset within the host screen, so that the area displayed by the terminal includes an entry field that would normally be out of bounds. Normally, Teklogix terminals only display the upper-left corner of the application screen because of their smaller display size. 94 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options Field Overhead This parameter contains the maximum number of characters allowed between two fixed fields which still allows the 9150 to join them into one field. Sometimes the 9150 will join two adjacent fixed fields and then send them as one field. This reduces the overhead on the radio link. For example, if two fields were 4 characters apart and this parameter was 5, then these fields would be joined into one. Command Region This parameter defines a region of the host screen which the 9150 will examine for the presence of reserved commands. The four numbers in the Command Region textboxes represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region. The first textbox of each pair contains the row number; the second contains the column number. The range of row values is 0 to 24; column values are 0 to 80. To define the last two lines of the host screen as the command region, for example, enter the values 23, 1 and 24, 80. Currently, the only command supported is ALARM (refer to page 86 for details on this command). When the word ALARM is placed anywhere within the command region, the 9150 will send a TESS beep command to the terminal. Protocol Options 5.3.3.2 This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of 3274/Telnet for this host. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 95 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options Terminal Type This parameter allows you to choose the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150 for this host. At present there is only one choice of terminal for 3274/Telnet:

the IBM 3278-2. Host Port This parameter allows you to enter a host port value for the selected 3274/Telnet host connection. The default value is 23. Maximum Sessions per Terminal This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. 96 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Protocol Options First Local Terminal Port This parameter contains the port number from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. The default value is 0. Local IP Address to Bind This parameter contains the IP address of the network adaptor in the 9150 from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. First Terminal Listen Port This parameter specifies the first port number at which the 9150 will listen for telnet connection requests to the terminals. The default value is 10000. Actively Negotiate with Host If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 negotiates with the host during setup of the telnet connection. Send IAC Interrupt Process as a System Request If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the IAC Interrupt Process request to the host as a 3274 System Request. Send IAC Break as an Attention Key If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the IAC Break request to the host as a 3274 Attention key. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 97 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 3274/Telnet Function Key Mappings Function Key Mappings 5.3.3.3 This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page when you select 3274 emulation for this host. Function key n The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on this page. 98 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options 5.3.4 5250/Telnet 5.3.4.1 Emulation Options Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 99 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The 9150 displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the 5250/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. With IBM 5250, or IBM 3274 emulation, the 9150 mini-controller converts the application data stream from the host to TESS (Teklogix Screen Subsystem) commands. Some of the parameters in this page govern the conversion of the host screens to TESS. Write Error Code If advisory text is selected here, the 9150 sends error codes to the terminal screen as advisory text, which is written at the bottom of the screen. If screen text is chosen, the 9150 sends the error codes as regular screen text. Use International EBCDIC If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 will swap the positions of the ! and ] charac-

ters in the EBCDIC character table. Alarm If this parameter is enabled, terminals will beep when the word ALARM

(in capital letters) appears on the application screen, in the location specified by the Command Region parameter (see page 109). The word ALARM should be a display-only field. Note: The Command Region parameter must be enabled for this parameter to work. Clear If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 mini-controller creates an empty entry field for an entry field that is filled with spaces. Some host applications rely on the video attributes of displayed characters to high-

light fields, particularly entry fields. For example, the application screen may define all entry fields with reverse video and fill the field with spaces. This is effective on terminals that support reverse video, but on terminals that do not, it can make the field invisible since it is made up entirely of spaces. 100 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options By default, all empty entry fields displayed at the Teklogix terminal are highlighted by the entry character chosen in the terminals configuration (not all Teklogix ter-

minals support video attributes). The Clear feature creates an empty entry field in place of an entry field filled with spaces. Note: This operation is only performed on screens received from the host. Data sent to the host remains unaffected. Passthru If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to send data directly to the RF terminals serial port. This is most commonly used for printing. Preparing Host Screens for Pass-Through On the screen to be sent through the terminal serial port, the word PASSTHRU

(in capital letters) must appear on the first line, starting on the second column. The actual data to be sent to the terminal may start anywhere below the first line. With 5250 or 3274 emulations, attributes occupy a position in the screen buffer. An attribute placed between column 2 and the end of the word PASSTHRU will push all following characters one position to the right. Therefore, any required attributes should occupy column 1 of the first line (just preceding the word PASSTHRU). Example:

column: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 line 1: @ P A S S T H R U @

line 2: @ P A R T : 1 2 3 4 5 where @ is an attribute. When the 9150 is finished sending the data to the terminals printer, it will send an ENTER key to the host. The host must wait for the ENTER key before sending any more screens (including other PASSTHRU screens) to this terminal. Note: Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for information about setting parameters on the terminal for pass-through. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 101 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options Procedures If this parameter is enabled, the host may send TESS procedures through the 9150 to the terminals. A TESS procedure is a group of TESS commands that can be exe-

cuted by the TESS execute procedure command. Local If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 allows the host to provide pages to be loaded as local TESS procedures in the terminals. The local procedures are selected from a menu at the terminal. The terminals can perform these procedures when they are offline. Later when the terminals are online, they send the results of these functions to the host. Note: The Procedures parameter must also be enabled for Local to work. Host Print When this parameter is enabled, the host can send extra data to the terminals screens, and instruct the terminal to print it. This is in contrast to the Local Print fea-

ture, where the terminal makes the initial print request. The text that is passed to the printer is formatted into the 24 x 80 application screen. If the host can initiate the print operation, the text is printed. The 9150 identifies the additional text as a print page by the presence of the word PRINT (in capital let-

ters) beginning in the 2nd column of line 13 on the 24 x 80 screen. The word PRINT should be defined as display-only text. The print page is positioned below the terminals display page (see Figure 5.6 on page 103). The size of the print page is always the same as the terminals display page (assuming that in the terminals configuration, the page length is less than 12 lines). When Host Print is enabled, the 9150 passes the print page to the terminal after receiving the application screen from the host. 102 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Notes:

Display Page (8 x 40) PRINT Print Page (8 x 40) Figure 5.6 Application Screen With Print Page 1. Unlike the Passthru option, when using Host Print no escape com-

mands can be sent to the printer. 2. Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal in its Printer command under the TESS Features menu; refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. Remote Print When this parameter is enabled, the 9150 sends the print page to a terminal when-

ever the terminal requests it (by sending the F17 function key from the terminal, or the PRINT key on older terminals). The 9150 sends the function response back to the host. This is in contrast to Host Print, where the host makes the initial print request. Note:

Support for printing must be enabled at the terminal level. Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for more information. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 103 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options Pages This parameter determines the number of host screens (or pages) stored at the terminal, to a maximum of 16. The 9150 reduces data transmitted to the terminals by using the terminals capability to store a page of data for each screen it displays. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If a similar page is already in the terminals memory, the 9150 instructs the terminal to re-display its copy of the page; only the necessary changes are sent from the con-

troller. If no match is found, the complete page is sent to the terminal over the radio link. Note: There is a corresponding parameter on the terminal itself, and the actual number of saved pages will be the smaller of the two values. Transmit Line When this feature is enabled, all modified data at the terminal will be automatically transmitted when the operator enters data into a transmit-upon-entry field. The value in this textbox specifies the line on the screen which is designated the transmit line. The last entry field above or on the transmit line on the screen will be identified as the transmit-upon-entry field. If any entry fields exist on lines below the transmit line, no entry field will be designated as the transmit-upon-entry field. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. A value of 24 will cause the last entry field on each application screen to be defined as transmit-upon-entry. AIAG This parameter provides auto-locate and fill for input coming from bar code readers. When bar code data is entered at a terminal, the terminal searches for AIAG fields on the current page that can accept the bar code data. The data preloaded into the AIAG field by the application program determines whether or not the bar code data is accepted. At the 9150 mini-controller, a decimal value of an ASCII character from 0 to 127 is set to match the AIAG Field Identifier set at the host. A value of 0 disables this feature. 104 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The format of the preloaded data is as follows:

<mode> <AIAG prefix(data)>

The mode character used with the command allows for different operating modes to suit various application operations. The automatic locate and fill operation applies only to data received from a bar code reader. Descriptions of the modes and AIAG prefix are listed in the table below. These modes are set at the host. Mode 0 1 2 3

+4

+8

+16 Function Display prefix, send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, send prefix to host. Display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Do not display prefix, do not send prefix to host. Add 4 to above values to cause transmit to host when all AIAG fields with 4 set are filled. Function 0 is pressed if there are any fields with this bit set, and all fields with this bit set have been filled by operator input. Add 8 to above values to allow overwrite of previously entered data. Add 16 to above values to indicate cursor position priority for search and fill. AIAG Prefix

(data) The text to be matched in the AIAG field. Table 5.3 Mode Functions And AIAG Prefix Description Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 105 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options Example:

The information in the sample screen below is defined at and sent from the host. It includes the AIAG Identifier the tag identifying this as an AIAG field followed by the mode, in this case Mode 0, and finally, the AIAG Prefix I. AIAG Information From Host AIAG Field Identifier AIAG Prefix (data) Item No. @ 0 I Mode Figure 5.7 AIAG Field Sent From The Host When the information arrives at the terminal screen, the appropriate AIAG field for the scanned information is located using the AIAG Identifier. Because Mode 0 was set at the host, the AIAG Prefix I is displayed on the terminal screen, and when this screen is completed, the prefix will be sent back to the host. AIAG Information From Host To Terminal Screen AIAG Field Identifier Item No.

I AIAG Prefix (data) Figure 5.8 AIAG Field Sent To The Terminal Visible Match Character By inserting a special ASCII character directly before an entry field, the application program distinguishes a match field from an entry field. For example, suppose an angle bracket > is defined for visible match fields. Inserting > immediately preceding the entry field identifies it as a match field, as illustrated below. Part #> ___________ 106 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. To use the Visible Match feature, the host computer preloads data into a match entry field; the data is visible on the terminal screen. The preloaded data sent to a terminal can consist of exact characters, special match characters or a combination of the two. Refer to the table below for match characters recognized by Teklogix terminals. If an entry does not match the preloaded data, the entry is displayed, the terminal beeps, and the cursor moves to the first position in the match field. The operator can either make another entry in the match field, or move the cursor to a new field. When an entry (even one that doesnt match the preloaded data) is made in a match field, the entry is sent to the host as part of the terminals modified data during the next transmission. Character Description

Match a number. Match a letter (either case). Match an uppercase letter. Match a lowercase letter. Match an alphanumeric character. Match a letter, number or space. Match a punctuation character. Match any character. Match all character positions in the field with the preceding character. Match any remaining characters, but not necessarily the remainder of the field, with the preceding character. Table 5.4 Match Characters Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 107 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options Example:

Suppose you want to preload an entry field with a part number. If the part number is known, you can preload the field with that part number. If more flexibility is needed, and the part number always begins with two alphabetic characters followed by a hyphen and four digits, the match string for the field would be: &&#### . Hidden Match Character Unlike data in a visible match field, the preloaded data in a hidden match field is not displayed at the terminal. Note: Refer to Visible Match Character on page 106 for detailed information about field matching. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 disables this feature. The ASCII decimal value entered at the 9150 must coincide with the value set by the application program. Serial I/O Serial I/O fields are special entry and fixed fields that accept input from and output to a serial port. The application program distinguishes this field as Serial I/O by pre-

ceding the field with a special character. If this character precedes a fixed field, the data will be sent to the terminals serial port. If it precedes an entry field, the field accepts data from the terminals serial port. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Print Line This parameter allows you to enter the starting line number of the print page in the application screen. A value of 1 causes the display page to be printed; a value of 0

(zero) disables this feature. Print Form Length This parameter sets the printers form length in lines. The range is 0 to 24. 108 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Emulation Options Barcode Barcode-input-only fields are special entry fields that only accept input from a bar code reader. The application program distinguishes an entry field as barcode-input-

only by preceding the field with a special character. The range for this parameter 0 to 127 represents the decimal values of ASCII characters. A value of 0 (zero) disables this feature. Entry Line This parameter contains the number of the first line displayed if there is no entry field in the upper-left portion of the screen, and if an entry field is at or below this line. The Entry Line parameter allows an automatic offset within the host screen, so that the area displayed by the terminal includes an entry field that would normally be out of bounds. Normally, Teklogix terminals only display the upper-left corner of the application screen because of their smaller display size. Field Overhead This parameter contains the maximum number of characters allowed between two fixed fields which still allows the 9150 to join them into one field. Sometimes the 9150 will join two adjacent fixed fields and then send them as one field. This reduces the overhead on the radio link. For example, if two fields were 4 characters apart and this parameter was 5, then these fields would be joined into one. Command Region This parameter defines a region of the host screen which the 9150 will examine for the presence of reserved commands. The four numbers in the Command Region textboxes represent the row and column addresses of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the command region. The first textbox of each pair contains the row number; the second contains the column number. The range of row values is 0 to 24; column values are 0 to 80. To define the last two lines of the host screen as the command region, for example, enter the values 23, 1 and 24, 80. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 109 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Protocol Options Currently, the only command supported is ALARM (refer to page 100 for details on this command). When the word ALARM is placed anywhere within the command region, the 9150 will send a TESS beep command to the terminal. Protocol Options 5.3.4.2 This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of 5250/Telnet for this host. Terminal Type This parameter allows you to choose the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150 for this host. At present there are two choices of terminal for 5250/Telnet:

the IBM 5251-11 and IBM 5555-B01. Host Port This parameter allows you to enter a host port value for the selected 5250/Telnet host connection. The default value is 23. 110 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Protocol Options Maximum Sessions per Terminal This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. First Local Terminal Port This parameter contains the port number from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. The default value is 0. Local IP Address to Bind This parameter contains the IP address of the network adaptor from which the first terminal will connect on outbound telnet sessions. First Terminal Listen Port This parameter specifies the first port number at which the 9150 will listen for telnet connection requests to the terminals. The default value is 0. Actively Negotiate with Host If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 negotiates with the host during setup of the telnet connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 111 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration 5250/Telnet Function Key Mappings Function Key Mappings 5.3.4.3 This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page when you select 5250 emulation for this host. Function key n The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on this page. 112 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options 5.3.5 ANSI/Telnet 5.3.5.1 The 9150 displays this version of the Emulation Options page after you have selected the ANSI/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. Emulation Options Host Timeout The Host Timeout is the interval (in ticks, or 60ths of a second) between bursts of data received from the host. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 15. If the 9150 does not receive any characters from the host after this timeout has elapsed, it assumes that the host has finished sending data and is waiting for user input (in other words, it assumes that a screen of data has been completed). Important: The Page parameter (page 115) must be enabled in order to change the value in the Host Timeout parameter. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 113 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options Escape Timeout The Escape Timeout is the length of time (in ticks, or 60ths of a second) that the 9150 will hold an ESC received from the host, and consider the next received byte to be part of an escape sequence. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 12. When this timeout has elapsed, the host will have to send another ESC character to start an escape sequence. Note: This is especially important when an ESC is at the end of a data packet. Threshold The Threshold is the minimum number of bytes of update data for the terminal screen which must be received from the host before the 9150 will store the screen as a new saved page. The range is 0 to 999, with a default value of 200. Important: The Page parameter (page 115) must be enabled in order to change the value in the Threshold parameter. Echo If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses Smart Echo. This mode reduces the amount of data sent to the terminal by decreasing the number of radio transmissions. Ordinarily, when a character mode application is being used, each keystroke is sent to the host in one transmission, and the character is echoed by the host in another transmission. When Smart Echo is enabled, the 9150 will not send the host echo to the terminals if it matches the data sent from the terminal. Thus, the number of radio transmissions is reduced. This mode also reduces or eliminates the delay between typing a character on the keyboard and displaying the character echoed by the host. The maximum number of characters waiting for echo is 25. Any additional characters will be sent to the host but not displayed. Notes:

1. This parameter also determines whether an ANSI parameter query is sent to the terminal. 2. Smart Echo also needs to be enabled at the terminal (refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual). 114 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Emulation Options ANSI If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses ANSI escape code filtering. When escape-code filtering is enabled, ANSI escape codes not supported by the terminals will be filtered out of the data stream to reduce radio traffic. The terminals currently support most, if not all, standard ANSI escape sequences, so this parame-

ter should be disabled in most cases. Function Key Remapping If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 remaps the function keys for this host connection as defined in the Function Key Remapping page (page 121). Page If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses page saving, reducing data transmitted to the terminals. The 9150 maintains an image of each page stored at the terminal. After receiving an application screen, the 9150 tries to match the screen with a stored page. If the page is already in the terminal, the 9150 instructs the terminal to redisplay its stored copy of the page; no data need be sent across the radio link for that page. If the 9150 finds no match for the page, the complete page is sent to the terminal. Note: When page saving is enabled, the number of saved pages is that which is set on the terminal. Refer to the 7030/8055/8060 Terminals User Manual for details. RLE If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 uses run-length encoding (RLE) on the data it sends across the radio link. RLE compresses repeated characters going from the host to the terminal. If repeated characters are found in the data stream, the first one is sent, followed by a short escape sequence (3 or 4 characters) which tells the terminal how many times to repeat this character. In this way RLE compresses the data and decreases the total amount of radio-link traffic. Convert 7 to 8 Bits If this parameter is enabled, the 9150 converts 7-bit control sequences to their 8-bit equivalents in ANSI data streams going to the terminals. This replaces two-charac-

ter escape sequences with a single equivalent character, compressing the data. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 115 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options 5.3.5.2 This page differs depending on the type of emulation and protocol selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Protocol Options page when you select the emulation/protocol combination of ANSI/Telnet for this host. Protocol Options 116 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options Terminal Type This parameter specifies the type of terminal to be emulated by the 9150, either a VT100 or VT200. Host Port This parameter specifies the value for the host port for the selected ANSI host con-

nection. The default value is 23. Maximum Sessions per Terminal This parameter contains the maximum number of telnet sessions which are allowed to originate from each terminal. The range is 0 to 127, with a default value of 4. First Local Terminal Port This parameter specifies the port number from which the 9150 attempts a telnet con-

nection for the first terminal. The default value is 0. Additional telnet sessions are assigned higher port numbers. Local IP Address to Bind This parameter specifies the IP address of the 9150 interface that connects to this host. It is used along with the local port numbers to create a unique socket for each terminal session. First Terminal Listen Port This parameter specifies the lowest port number at which the 9150 listens for telnet connections initiated by the host. The default value is 10000. TCP Session Request Key This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to request a new ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 1. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 117 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options Session Cycle Key This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to display the next ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 2. Last Active Session Key This parameter contains the decimal ASCII character code of the character which will prompt the terminal to display the last ANSI terminal session. The range is 0 to 255, with a default value of 5. Auto-telnet/login Enable This parameter enables you to disable or enable automatic connection of telnet ses-

sions from terminals to this host. The choices provided are: Disable; Enable Auto-

telnet; Enable Auto-telnet/login. The default value is Disable. When Auto-telnet is disabled, telnet sessions from the terminals to the host must be initiated manually from the terminals. When Auto-telnet is enabled, the 9150 initiates one telnet session from each termi-

nal whose terminal number is mapped to this host. Additional telnet sessions may be initiated from each terminal to the host, but they must be initiated manually. Note: Auto-telnet sessions are only initiated for terminals which are online

(turned on and operating properly on the Teklogix RF network). When Auto-telnet and Auto-login are enabled, the 9150 initiates one telnet session from each terminal whose terminal number is mapped to this host. It then logs each session in to the host using the User ID and Password provided in this page. Note: The User ID and Password is identical for all Auto-telnet sessions automatically logged in to this host. 118 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options Auto-telnet Host This parameter contains the host name or IP address for the host to which the 9150 connects Auto-telnet sessions. Note: A host name placed in this textbox must be resolvable by the 9150:

the 9150 must be able to obtain an IP address for it. For example, the host name may correspond to an entry in the 9150s host table, or the 9150 may be able to query a domain-name server. Any host name which can be used at the terminals TCP> prompt may be used here. Auto-telnet Terminal Prompt This parameter contains the text presented to the user to request a login. The charac-

ters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 32 characters. The default is no text, just press <ENTER> to login. Auto-login User ID This parameter contains the user ID presented by the 9150 to the host for the Auto-login sessions. The characters can be any ASCII string acceptable to the host, with a maximum of 15 characters. Auto-login Password This parameter contains the password presented by the 9150 to the host for the Auto-login sessions. The characters can be any ASCII string acceptable to the host, with a maximum of 15 characters. Auto-login User ID prompt The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent its request for a user name, and it sends the user ID specified in the Auto-Login User ID parameter to the host. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is gin: . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the user-ID prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 119 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Protocol Options Auto-login Password prompt The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent its request for a pass-

word, and it sends the password specified in the Auto-Login Password parameter to the host. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is word: . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the password prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen. Auto-login failed login The 9150 compares the text in this textbox to the text presented to it by the host. When they match, the 9150 assumes that the host has just sent a string informing the terminal of a failed login attempt. The 9150 then presents the Auto-telnet Terminal Prompt on the terminals screen to request the user to login manually. The characters can be any ASCII string, with a maximum of 15 characters. The default text is incorrect . Note: The match string should be as short as possible, yet long enough to uniquely identify the failed-login prompt. Do not include multi-part words separated by space characters, since some hosts send out characters other than space characters to present a space on the screen. 120 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Function Key Mappings Function Key Mappings 5.3.5.3 This page differs depending on the type of emulation selected in the General Host Options page. The 9150 displays this version of the Function Key Mapping page after you have selected the ANSI/Telnet emulation/protocol combination for this host connection. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 121 Chapter 5: Mini-Controller Configuration ANSI/Telnet Function Key Mappings Function key n The Function Key parameter allows you to select a code that will be sent to the host when you press a function key on the terminal. Each function key may be chosen from the same range of possible codes; however, each function key has a different default code. The default values are shown on the screen on page 121. 122 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual

 

 

Chapter 2:

Maintenance Installation Requirements Refer to Chapter 7: Specifications for a more detailed description of environmen-

tal requirements. Keep in mind that the long term stability of this equipment will be enhanced if the environmental conditions are less severe than those listed in this manual. 2.1.2 Maintenance The 9150 has no internal option switches and does not require physical access; all configuration settings are done remotely (see Chapter 3: 9150 Main Configura-

tion). Environmental and radio communication considerations do still apply. 2.1.3 Power And Antenna Cables To prevent accidental disconnection and stress on the 9150, antenna and power cables should be secured within 30 cm of the unit. Secure the cables with ties to the cable tie mounts on the 9150 (see Figure 2.1 on page 17). A single phase power outlet (range 100 to 240 VAC rated 1.0A minimum) should be installed within one metre (3.1 feet) of the 9150. The 9150 automatically adjusts to input within that power range. The power cable is removable and is available in the power type spe-

cific to your location. Warning:

To avoid electric shock, the power cord protective grounding conductor must always be connected to ground. There are several omnidirectional antennas available from Teklogix. The type of antenna required for each installation depends on the coverage requirements and the frequencies used. Generally, a site survey determines the appropriate antenna. Teklogix can also provide special, directional antennas. Consult Teklogix service personnel for more information. Warning:

Equipment requires professional installation. The antennas MobileMark model No. OD12-2400 and CONIFER Model No. 26T-2400F are exclusively for fixed, point-to-point operation. Installer is responsible for ensuring that the system is used for fixed, point-to-point operation only. The maximum output power from the radio transmitter is 15.2 dBm. 18 Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual Chapter 2:

Installation Requirements Power And Antenna Cables Warning:

Never operate the 9150 without a suitable antenna or a dummy load. Connection to Outdoor Antenna: Outdoor antenna to be earthed in accordance with International Standard EN 50083-1 (1993), Cabled Distribution Systems for Television and Sound Signals -

Safety Requirements. The antenna must be installed by a qualified service person and installed according to local electrical installation codes. The antenna should be located such that it is always at least 20 cm away from the user and other people working in the area. Warning:

For RF safety considerations, users are not allowed to approach close to the antenna. Teklogix supplies the coaxial cable required to connect the 9150 to the antenna. When determining the location of the antenna, the coverage requirements of the antenna are considered in conjunction with the environmental requirements of the 9150. The coaxial cable must be routed and secured using wire anchors and/or coaxial nail clips. A few extra inches of cable are required near the antenna and the 9150 to make disconnection easier. Teklogix 9150 Wireless Gateway User Manual 19

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

NOTES:

1. Material - .005" thickness, computer imprintable white mylar with mat lamination 2. Graphics & lettering to appear as per a/w on file 20599-086b.pdf (from TEKLOGIX). 3. Labels to be supplied on an 8.5 x 11 release liner. 4. Rear surface to be pressure sensitive V23 acrylic adhesive coated with release paper backing, adhesive to be compatible with polycarbonate/polyester blend plastic

(Bayer Makroblend UT403) material over a temperature range of -40 to +125 deg. C. Black Pantone Yellow 012 CAUTION LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 630-680nm LASER DIODE 1.0 MILLIWATT MAX. OUTPUT CLASS II LASER PRODUCT This product contains Teklogix Model: TRX7431 WaveLAN/IEEE, 2.4 GHz Radio CANADA:

FCC ID: GM3WLPC24H This device complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received,in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. SEE BATTERY COMPARTMENT FOR MANUFACTURING DATA. B 6 8 0

9 9 5 0 2 1.36"

+.000

-.030 CAUTION LASER RADIATION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM 630-680nm LASER DIODE 1.0 MILLIWATT MAX. OUTPUT CLASS II LASER PRODUCT This product contains Teklogix Model: TRX7431 WaveLAN/IEEE, 2.4 GHz Radio CANADA:

FCC ID: GM3WLPC24H This device complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received,in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. SEE BATTERY COMPARTMENT FOR MANUFACTURING DATA. B 6 8 0

9 9 5 0 2 Actual Size 1.04"

+.000

-.030 SIGNATURES DATE DRAWN David Madrick 99.11.12 CHKD APPVD ECO Date PROJ. SPEC./

PROD. ENG. MECH. ENG. REGULATORY Mississauga, Ontario Canada LBL CA/USA 7431 7035 WS Dwg No. 20599-086 REV. B Sheet 1 of 1 7 0 3 5 L A B E L L O C A T I O N F C C l a b e l P

N

2 0 5 9 9

0 8 6

 

 

1.00"

+.000

-.030 2.25"

+.000

-.030 This product contains TRX7431 2.4 GHz Radio FCC ID : GM3WLPC24H CANADA :

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. B 7 3 0

0 0 5 1 2 Made in Canada Actual Size NOTES:

1. Material - .002" thickness, computer imprintable white mylar with clear matte lamination on front (.001"). 2. Graphics & lettering to appear as per a/w on file 21500-037b.pdf (from TEKLOGIX). 3. Labels to be supplied on an 8.5 x 11 release liner textured baked enamel paint. be compatible with 5. Adhesive must not separate from -30 to +70 deg.C @ 0 to 100% R.H. SIGNATURES DATE DRAWN David Madrick 99.11.12 CHKD APPVD ECO Date PROJ. SPEC./

PROD. ENG. MECH. ENG. REGULATORY Mississauga, Ontario Canada LBL CA/USA 7431 8255/60 Dwg No. 21500-037 REV. B Sheet 1 of 1 8 2 5 5 A N D 8 2 6 0 L A B E L L O C A T I O N L A B E L P

N

2 1 5 0 0

0 3 7 P o s i t i o n c r a d l e o n u n i t

f a s t e n w i t h 4 s c r e w s a n d w a s h e r s

9 1 8 3 0

9 0 9 7 4

. T o r q u e t o 2 3

. 0 2

. 0 i n

l b s

. F o r A l l C o u n t r i e s e x c e p t C a n a d a

U S A a d d C E L a b e l

9 3 9 9 2

) I n l o c a t i o n s h o w n

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

D e a r M r

. D i c h o s o

1

) T h i s i s n o t a n a p p l i c a t i o n f o r a m o d u l a r a p p r o v a l

. H o w e v e r

, t h i s r a d i o w i l l b e u s e d w i t h m u l t i p l e T e k l o g i x H o s t S y s t e m s a n d M o b i l e

P o r t a b l e T e r m i n a l s

. T h e r e f o r e

, t h e r a d i a t e d e m i s s i o n s n e e d t o b e p e r f o r m e d w i t h a l l h o s t s y s t e m s t o e n s u r e t h a t t h e r a d i o w i l l c o m p l y w i t h a l l d i f f e r e n t p a c k a g i n g

. P l e a s e n o t e t h a t e v e n t h o u g h w e d o n o t a p p l y f o r m o d u l a r a p p r o v a l t h e r a d i o m o d u l e h a s i t s o w n p o w e r i n p u t r e g u l a t i n g c i r c u i t a n d e n c l o s u r e

t h e e n c l o s u r e i s n o t u s e d w h e n i t i s i n s t a l l e d i n s i d e t h e H a n d h e l d T e r m i n a l 7 0 3 5

. T h e r a d i o m o d u l e w i l l n o t b e s o l d b y i t s e l f

, i t i s o n l y s o l d w i t h T e k l o g i x H o s t S y s t e m s

2

) T h e a p p l i c a n t w i l l i n c l u d e t h e R F E x p o s u r e W a r n i n g i n t h e U s e r s M a n u a l

. P l e a s e s e e t h e R F E x p o s u r e W a r n i n g i n t h e F C C O E T R F E x p o s u r e I n f o f o l d e r

3

) T h e r e v i s e d i n t e r n a l p h o t o s h a v e b e e n r e

u p l o a d e d i n t o t h e F C C O E T I n t e r n a l P h o t o F o l d e r

. P l e a s e r e v i e w

4

) T h e c o n f i d e n t i a l l e t t e r f r o m L u c e n t

m a n u f a c t u r e r o f t h e r a d i o

) w i l l b e u p l o a d e d t o F C C O E T C o v e r L e t t e r f o l d e r b y L u c e n t

5

) A t t a c h e d i n t h e F C C O E T A t t e s t a t i o n S t a t e m e n t f o l d e r p l e a s e f i n d t h e r e v i s e d l e t t e r f o r m o r e d e t a i l e d c l a r i f i c a t i o n o f a n t e n n a i n s t a l l a t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e a n t e n n a s s p e c i f i e d t o b e u s e d w i t h b a s e s t a t i o n i n c l u d i n g C u s h c r a f t A n t e n n a

6

) T h i s e q u i p m e n t i s o n l y p r o v i d e d f o r u s e a t 1 1 M b p s d a t a r a t e

, a n d t h e P r o c e s s G a i n M e a s u r e m e n t D a t a w e r e m e a s u r e d b y L u c e n t a n d a t t a c h e d i n t h e F C C O E T T e s t R e p o r t F o l d e r

. T h e L u c e n t P r o c e s s G a i n m e a s u r e m e n t s d i d s h o w t h e i r t e s t d a t a f o r 1

, 2

, 5

. 5 a n d 1 1 M b

s

7

) T h e f i n a l c o n d u c t e d r f p o w e r a t t h e a n t e n n a p o r t i s 3 8

. 6 d B m i l i

w a t t s p e a k m a x

a m i s t a k e w a s m a d e b y a d d i n g 9

. 8 d B o f f s e t o n t h e p o w e r m e t e r w h e n t h e r e w a s n o a t t e n u a t o r u s e d

. T h i s p o w e r i s t h e s a m e f o r a l l T e k l o g i x h o s t s y s t e m s s i n c e i d e n t i c a l r a d i o i s u s e d f o r a l l T e k l o g i x S y s t e m s

8

) W e h a v e c h e c k e d o u r e i r p m e a s u r e m e n t s c a r e f u l l y b y u s i n g t h e S i g n a l G e n e r a t o r a n d 2 x C a l i b r a t e d H o r n A n t e n n a s a n d f o u n d o u r m e t h o d o f m e a s u r e m e n t s a g r e e d w i t h t h e t h e o r y

E I R P

T P

G

. W e h a v e c h e c k e d o u r r e s u l t s a g a i n a n d f i n d t h e r e s u l t s a s f o l l o w s

C O R R E S P O N D E N C E 3 0 0 0 B r i s t o l C i r c l e O a k v i l l e

, O n t a r i o

. L 6 H

6 G 4 D A T E

0 2

2 3

0 0 T O

F C C A T T N

M r

. J o e D i c h o s o P h o n e

3 0 1

3 6 2

3 0 2 4 F a x

3 0 1

3 4 4

2 0 5 0 S U B J E C T

F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H

, C O R R R E S P O N D E N C E

1 2 2 8 2 7 3 1 C O N F I R M A T I O N N O

E A 9 6 1 5 9 P A G E 1 O F 1 F R O M

T r i L u u E m a i l A d d r e s s

t r i

. l u u

s y m p a t i c o

. c a P H O N E

9 0 5

8 2 9

1 5 7 0 F A X

9 0 5

8 2 9

8 0 5 0 E U T E

F i e l d i n E

F i e l d i n T x A n t e n n a C a l c u l a t e d M e a s u r e d M e a s u r e d R F S a f e t y T e s t e d 1 M H z B W

3 m 9 9

B W 9 9

B W

3 m G a i n

G

t o t a l E I R P

T P

G E I R P

1 M H z B W P e a k E I R P

9 9

B W D i s t a n c e N o t e

d B u V

m

M H z

M H z

d B u V

m

9 9

B W

d B i

d B m

9 9

B W

d B m

d B m

c m

) T e s t J i g

2 4 1 2 M H z 1 0 6

. 3 1 0

. 6 1 2 6

. 8 0

. 0 1 5

. 6 2

. 2 1 2

. 5 3

. 9

1

2

) T e k l o g i x 8 2 5 5

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 0 6

. 6 1 0

. 6 1 2 7

. 1 0

. 0 1 5

. 6 3

. 8 1 4

. 1 1

. 4

1

) T e k l o g i x 8 2 6 0

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 0 6

. 8 1 0

. 6 1 2 7

. 3 0

. 0 1 5

. 6 4

. 3 1 4

. 6 1

. 5

1

) T e k l o g i x 7 0 3 5

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 1 4

. 4 1 0

. 6 1 3 4

. 9 2

. 0 1 7

. 6 7

. 1 1 7

. 4 6

. 8

2

) T e k l o g i x 9 1 5 0

2 4 6 2 M H z 1 1 4

. 7 1 0

. 6 1 3 5

. 2 7

. 5 2 3

. 4 1 3

. 2 2 3

. 5 1 3

. 7

2

) N o t e

1

T h e r e s u l t w a s f o u n d t o b e m o r e t h a n 1 d B l o w e r t h a n t h e c a l c u l a t e d v a l u e d u e t o c a b l e l o s s o f t h e m o b i l e a n t e n n a m o u n t i n g u n i t

. N o t e

2

T h e o r i g i n a l t e s t d a t a w a s i n c o r r e c t

. I t w a s a d d e d b y a f a c t o r o f 1 0 X l o g

1 0

. 6 M H z

) t w i c e f o r c o n v e r s i o n o f p o w e r i n 1 M H z t o p o w e r i n 9 9

B W

. T h i s i s d u e t o t h e c o m m u n i c a t i o n p r o b l e m s b e t w e e n t h e t e c h n i c i a n a n d t h e r e p o r t w r i t e r w h e n t h e t e s t d a t a w a s c a l c u l a t e d t o c o m p a r e w i t h t h e t h e o r e t i c a l v a l u e b a s e d o n 9 9

O B W

. R e g a r d s

, T r i M

. L u u

, P

. E n g V

. P

. o f E n g i n e e r i n g U l t r a t e c h E n g i n e e r i n g

 

 

I S O 9 0 0 1 C e r t i f i e d 2 1 0 0 M e a d o w v a l e B o u l e v a r d M i s s i s s a u g a

, O n t a r i o C a n a d a L 5 N 7 J 9 P h o n e

9 0 5

) 8 1 3

9 9 0 0 F a x

9 0 5

) 8 1 2

6 3 0 1 A U T H O R I T Y T O A C T A S A N A G E N T T O F E D E R A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S C O M M I S S I O N

F C C

) I h e r e b y a p p o i n t U l t r a T e c h E n g i n e e r i n g L a b s I n c

U l t r a T e c h

) t o a c t a s m y a g e n t i n t h e p r e p a r a t i o n o f t h i s a p p l i c a t i o n t o F C C f o r a u t h o r i z a t i o n o f e q u i p m e n t u n d e r F C C R u l e s

. I a l s o c e r t i f y t h a t t h e i n f o r m a t i o n p r o v i d e d p r o p e r l y d e s c r i b e d t h e d e v i c e o r s y s t e m f o r w h i c h a u t h o r i z a t i o n i s r e q u e s t e d

. D a t e d t h e 2 9 t h d a y o f N o v e m b e r 1 9 9 9

. A p p l i c a n t

T E K L O G I X I N C

. B y

D a n M e r i n g e r

M a n a g e r

, E l e c t r i c a l E n g i n e e r i n g

) D M P r i n t e d S i g n a t u r e

 

 

I S O 9 0 0 1 C e r t i f i e d 2 1 0 0 M e a d o w v a l e B o u l e v a r d M i s s i s s a u g a

, O n t a r i o C a n a d a L 5 N 7 J 9 P h o n e

9 0 5

) 8 1 3

9 9 0 0 F a x

9 0 5

) 8 1 2

6 3 0 1 F e b r u a r y 2 4

, 2 0 0 0 F E D E R A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S C O M M I S S I O N 7 4 3 5 O a k l a n d M i l l s R o a d C o l u m b i a

, M D 2 1 0 4 6 U

. S

. A

. S u b j e c t

R e q u e s t f o r w i t h h o l d i n g f r o m p u b l i c d i s c l o s u r e t h e s c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m s a n d s y s t e m b l o c k d i a g r a m s p u r s u a n t t o a n a p p l i c a t i o n f o r c e r t i f i c a t i o n

. A p p l i c a n t

T E K L O G I X I N C

. M o d e l

T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H D e a r S i r

M a d a m

, W e

, T E K L O G I X I N C

. w o u l d l i k e t o r e q u e s t t h a t t h e s c h e m a t i c d i a g r a m s a n d s y s t e m b l o c k d i a g r a m s

, s u b m i t t e d w i t h t h e a p p l i c a t i o n f o r c e r t i f i c a t i o n b e w i t h h e l d f r o m p u b l i c d i s c l o s u r e a s p e r S e c t i o n 0

. 4 5 9 o f F C C R u l e s

. T h i s r e q u e s t i s m a d e u n d e r t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f S e c t i o n 0

. 4 5 7

d

) o f t h e C o m m i s s i o n

s R u l e s

, a n d S e c t i o n 5 5 2

b

4

) o f t h e F r e e d o m o f I n f o r m a t i o n A c t

. T h e s e s e c t i o n s a u t h o r i z e a s a w i t h h o l d i n g f r o m p u b l i c i n s p e c t i o n m a t e r i a l s w h i c h w o u l d b e p r i v i l e g e d a s a m a t t e r o f l a w i f r e t a i n e d b y t h e p e r s o n s u b m i t t i n g t h e m

, a n d m a t e r i a l s w h i c h w o u l d n o t c u s t o m a r i l y b e r e l e a s e d t o t h e p u b l i c b y t h a t p e r s o n

. T h e d e t a i l e d c o n f i d e n t i a l m a t e r i a l s a r e l i s t e d a s f o l l o w s

N o

. T i t l e D r a w i n g N o

. S h e e t N o

. 1

. S t a r t i n g w i t h i d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r 0 1 2 4 2 6

S c h e m a t i c d r a w i n g s

) I f y o u h a v e a n y q u e r i e s

, p l e a s e d o n o t h e s i t a t e t o c o n t a c t u s

. Y o u r s t r u l y

, S a d a D h a r w a r k a r

, P

. E n g

, S u p e r v i s o r

, A p p r o v a l s T E K L O G I X I N C

 

 

UltraTech G roup of Labs 3000 Bristol Circle Oakville, Ontario, Canada L6H 6G4 Telephone (905) 829-1570 Facsimile (905) 829-8050 Website: www.ultratech-labs.com Email: tri.luu@Sympatico.ca vhk.ultratech@sympatico.ca D e c e m b e r 2 1

, 1 9 9 9 F E D E R A L C O M M U N I C A T I O N S C O M M I S S I O N 7 4 3 5 O a k l a n d M i l l s R o a d C o l u m b i a

, M D 2 1 0 4 6 U S A S u b j e c t

F C C C e r t i f i c a t i o n A u t h o r i z a t i o n A p p l i c a t i o n u n d e r F C C P A R T 1 5

, S u b p a r t C

, S e c

. 1 5

. 2 4 7

D i r e c t S e q u e n c e S p r e a d S p e c t r u m T r a n s m i t t e r s o p e r a t i n g i n t h e f r e q u e n c y b a n d 2 4 1 2

2 4 6 2 M H z

. P r o d u c t

L U C E N T W A V E L A N

I E E E 2

. 4 G H z

1 1 M b

s

) D S S S T R A N S C E I V E R M o d e l N o

T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H D e a r S i r

M a d a m

, W e d i s c o v e r e d t h a t t h e r e w a s a n e r r o r o n t h e m a x i m u m p e a k o u t p u t p o w e r a n d E I R P m e a s u r e m e n t s

. T h i s s i t u a t i o n w a s r e c t i f i e d b y a r e t e s t

, t h e n e w r e s u l t s e f f e c t t h e p r e v i o u s l y s u b m i t t e d a p p l i c a t i o n f o r m s a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g s e c t i o n s i n t h e o r i g i n a l T e s t R e p o r t

2

. 3

. E U T S T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C A T I O N S R F O u t p u t P o w e r R a t i n g

p a g e 7

) 3

. 2

. O P E R A T I O N A L T E S T C O N D I T O N S

A R R A N G E M E N T F O R T E S T S R F P o w e r O u t p u t

p a g e 1 4

) 5

. 7

. 5

. T e s t D a t a

p a g e 2 7

) T h e m o d i f i c a t i o n s o f t h e a b o v e s e c t i o n s a r e a t t a c h e d a l o n g w i t h t h i s c o v e r l e t t e r

. P l e a s e a l l o w u s t o c o r r e c t t h e p o w e r r a t i n g i n t h e a p p l i c a t i o n f o r m w h e r e v e r i t i s a p p l i c a b l e

. I f y o u h a v e a n y q u e r i e s

, p l e a s e d o n o t h e s i t a t e t o c o n t a c t u s

. Y o u r s t r u l y

, T r i M i n h L u u

, P

. E n g

, V

. P

, E n g i n e e r i n g E n c l 2 F C C P A R T 1 5

, S U B P A R T C

, S E C

. 1 5

. 2 4 7

D I R E C T S E Q U E N C E S P R E A D S P E C T R U M T R A N S M I T T E R S P a g e 7 L U C E N T W A V E L A N

I E E E 2

. 4 G H z

1 1 M b

s

) D S S S T r a n s c e i v e r

, M o d e l T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H U L T R A T E C H G R O U P O F L A B S F i l e

T E K

2 0 8 F T X 3 0 0 0 B r i s t o l C i r c l e

, O a k v i l l e

, O n t a r i o

, C a n a d a L 6 H 6 G 4 N o v

. 2 3

, 1 9 9 9 T e l

9 0 5

8 2 9

1 5 7 0

, F a x

9 0 5

8 2 9

8 0 5 0

, E m a i l

v h k

. u l t r a t e c h

s y m p a t i c o

. c a

, W e b s i t e

h t t p

w w w

. u l t r a t e c h

l a b s

. c o m A s s e s s e d b y I T I

U K

) C o m p e t e n t B o d y

, N V L A P

U S A

) A c c r e d i t a t i o n B o d y

A C A

A U S T E L

A u s t r a l i a

) R e c o g n i z e d

L i s t e d b y F C C

U S A

, I n d u s t r y C a n a d a

C a n a d a

) A l l t e s t r e s u l t s c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s e n g i n e e r i n g t e s t r e p o r t a r e t r a c e a b l e t o N a t i o n a l I n s t i t u t e o f S t a n d a r d s a n d T e c h n o l o g y

N I S T

) 4

. T h e a n t e n n a o f T e k l o g i x 8 2 5 5 a n d 8 2 6 0 M o b i l e T e r m i n a l s a r e r e q u i r e d t o b e l o c a t e d a t l e a s t 2 0 c m a w a y f r o m t h e u s e r s

. 5

. T h e a n t e n n a o f T e k l o g i x 9 1 5 0 b a s e i s r e q u i r e d t o b e l o c a t e d o n t h e r o o f o f a b u i l d i n g o r o u t s i d e a n t e n n a t o w e r

. 2

. 3

. E U T S T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C A T I O N S T R A N S M I T T E R E q u i p m e n t T y p e

P o r t a b l e M o b i l e B a s e s t a t i o n

f i x e d u s e

) I n t e n d e d O p e r a t i n g E n v i r o n m e n t

R e s i d e n t i a l C o m m e r c i a l

, l i g h t i n d u s t r y

h e a v y i n d u s t r y P o w e r S u p p l y R e q u i r e m e n t

7

. 2 V d c r e g u l a t e d v o l t a g e f r o m t h e T e k l o g i x S y s t e m s 7 0 3 5

, 8 2 5 5

, 8 2 6 0

9 1 5 0 R F O u t p u t P o w e r R a t i n g

3 8

. 6 m W P e a k O p e r a t i n g F r e q u e n c y R a n g e

2 4 1 2

2 4 6 2 M H z R F O u t p u t I m p e d a n c e

5 0 O h m s D u t y C y c l e

C o n t i n u o u s 6 d B B a n d w i d t h

1 0

. 6 4 M H z E m i s s i o n D e s i g n a t i o n

D i r e c t S e q u e n c e S p r e a d S p e c t r u m

D S S S

) O s c i l l a t o r F r e q u e n c i e s

3 5 2 M H z A n t e n n a C o n n e c t o r T y p e

R e v e r s e d t h r u s t S M A c o n n e c t o r

T e k l o g i x 7 0 3 5

, 8 2 5 5 a n d 8 2 6 0

) S t a n d a r d S M A c o n n e c t o r

T e k l o g i x 9 1 5 0

) A n t e n n a D e s c r i p t i o n

T e k l o g i x 7 0 3 5

P o r t a b l e

) M a n u f a c t u r e r

N C C T y p e

C u r r e n t f e d w a v e a n t e n n a w i t h r e v e r s e d t h r u s t S M A c o n n e c t o r M o d e l

N 2 4 0 0 S M 1 0 B F r e q u e n c y R a n g e

2

. 4

2

. 5 G H z I n

O u t I m p e d a n c e

5 0 O h m s G a i n

2 d B i T e k l o g i x 8 2 5 5

M o b i l e

) a n d 8 2 6 0

M o b i l e

) M a n u f a c t u r e r

L a r s e n T y p e

w a v e a n t e n n a w i t h r e v e r s e d t h r u s t S M A c o n n e c t o r M o d e l

K D M U Q 2 4 0 0 R S M F r e q u e n c y R a n g e

2

. 4

2

. 5 G H z I n

O u t I m p e d a n c e

5 0 O h m s G a i n

0 d B i T e k l o g i x 9 1 5 0

B a s e

) M a n u f a c t u r e r

C u s h C r a f t T y p e

D i r e c t l i n k w a l l m o u n t a n t e n n a M o d e l

S 2 3 0 7 A M P 1 0 S M F F r e q u e n c y R a n g e

2

. 3

2

. 5 G H z I n

O u t I m p e d a n c e

5 0 O h m s G a i n

7

. 5 d B i

F C C P A R T 1 5

, S U B P A R T C

, S E C

. 1 5

. 2 4 7

D I R E C T S E Q U E N C E S P R E A D S P E C T R U M T R A N S M I T T E R S P a g e 1 4 L U C E N T W A V E L A N

I E E E 2

. 4 G H z

1 1 M b

s

) D S S S T r a n s c e i v e r

, M o d e l T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H U L T R A T E C H G R O U P O F L A B S F i l e

T E K

2 0 8 F T X 3 0 0 0 B r i s t o l C i r c l e

, O a k v i l l e

, O n t a r i o

, C a n a d a L 6 H 6 G 4 N o v

. 2 3

, 1 9 9 9 T e l

9 0 5

8 2 9

1 5 7 0

, F a x

9 0 5

8 2 9

8 0 5 0

, E m a i l

v h k

. u l t r a t e c h

s y m p a t i c o

. c a

, W e b s i t e

h t t p

w w w

. u l t r a t e c h

l a b s

. c o m A s s e s s e d b y I T I

U K

) C o m p e t e n t B o d y

, N V L A P

U S A

) A c c r e d i t a t i o n B o d y

A C A

A U S T E L

A u s t r a l i a

) R e c o g n i z e d

L i s t e d b y F C C

U S A

, I n d u s t r y C a n a d a

C a n a d a

) A l l t e s t r e s u l t s c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s e n g i n e e r i n g t e s t r e p o r t a r e t r a c e a b l e t o N a t i o n a l I n s t i t u t e o f S t a n d a r d s a n d T e c h n o l o g y

N I S T

) E X H I B I T 3

. E U T O P E R A T I N G C O N D I T I O N S A N D C O N F I G U R A T I O N S D U R I N G T E S T S 3

. 1

. C L I M A T E T E S T C O N D I T I O N S T h e c l i m a t e c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e t e s t e n v i r o n m e n t a r e a s f o l l o w s

T e m p e r a t u r e

2 1 o C H u m i d i t y

5 1

P r e s s u r e

1 0 1 k P a P o w e r i n p u t s o u r c e

7

. 2 V d c r e g u l a t e d v o l t a g e f r o m t h e T e k l o g i x S y s t e m s 7 0 3 5

, 8 2 5 5

, 8 2 6 0

9 1 5 0 3

. 2

. O P E R A T I O N A L T E S T C O N D I T I O N S

A R R A N G E M E N T F O R T E S T S O p e r a t i n g M o d e s

E a c h o f l o w e s t

, m i d d l e a n d h i g h e s t c h a n n e l f r e q u e n c i e s t r a n s m i t s c o n t i n u o u s l y f o r e m i s s i o n s m e a s u r e m e n t s

. T h e E U T o p e r a t e s i n n o r m a l D i r e c t S e q u e n c e m o d e f o r o c c u p a n c y d u r a t i o n

, a n d f r e q u e n c y s e p a r a t i o n

. S p e c i a l T e s t S o f t w a r e

S p e c i a l s o f t w a r e i s p r o v i d e d b y t h e A p p l i c a n t t o s e l e c t a n d o p e r a t e t h e E U T a t e a c h c h a n n e l f r e q u e n c y c o n t i n u o u s l y

. F o r e x a m p l e

, t h e t r a n s m i t t e r w i l l b e o p e r a t e d a t e a c h o f l o w e s t

, m i d d l e a n d h i g h e s t f r e q u e n c i e s i n d i v i d u a l l y c o n t i n u o u s l y d u r i n g t e s t i n g

. S p e c i a l H a r d w a r e U s e d

T e k l o g i x s o f t w a r e i s p r o v i d e d t o o p e r a t e t h e E U T a t d i f f e r e n t c h a n n e l f r e q u e n c y

. T r a n s m i t t e r T e s t A n t e n n a

T h e E U T i s t e s t e d w i t h t h e a n t e n n a f i t t e d i n a m a n n e r t y p i c a l o f n o r m a l i n t e n d e d u s e a s n o n

i n t e g r a l a n t e n n a e q u i p m e n t

. T r a n s m i t t e r T e s t S i g n a l s

F r e q u e n c i e s 2 4 1 2

2 4 6 2 M H z b a n d

L o w e s t

, m i d d l e a n d h i g h e s t c h a n n e l f r e q u e n c i e s t e s t e d

2 4 1 2

, 2 4 3 7 a n d 2 4 6 2 M H z T r a n s m i t t e r W a n t e d O u t p u t T e s t S i g n a l s

R F P o w e r O u t p u t

m e a s u r e d m a x i m u m o u t p u t p o w e r

N o r m a l T e s t M o d u l a t i o n M o d u l a t i n g s i g n a l s o u r c e

3 8

. 6 m W P e a k D i r e c t S e q u e n c e S p r e a d S p e c t r u m

1 1 M b

s d a t a r a t e I n t e r n a l F C C P A R T 1 5

, S U B P A R T C

, S E C

. 1 5

. 2 4 7

D I R E C T S E Q U E N C E S P R E A D S P E C T R U M T R A N S M I T T E R S P a g e 2 7 L U C E N T W A V E L A N

I E E E 2

. 4 G H z

1 1 M b

s

) D S S S T r a n s c e i v e r

, M o d e l T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H U L T R A T E C H G R O U P O F L A B S F i l e

T E K

2 0 8 F T X 3 0 0 0 B r i s t o l C i r c l e

, O a k v i l l e

, O n t a r i o

, C a n a d a L 6 H 6 G 4 N o v

. 2 3

, 1 9 9 9 T e l

9 0 5

8 2 9

1 5 7 0

, F a x

9 0 5

8 2 9

8 0 5 0

, E m a i l

v h k

. u l t r a t e c h

s y m p a t i c o

. c a

, W e b s i t e

h t t p

w w w

. u l t r a t e c h

l a b s

. c o m A s s e s s e d b y I T I

U K

) C o m p e t e n t B o d y

, N V L A P

U S A

) A c c r e d i t a t i o n B o d y

A C A

A U S T E L

A u s t r a l i a

) R e c o g n i z e d

L i s t e d b y F C C

U S A

, I n d u s t r y C a n a d a

C a n a d a

) A l l t e s t r e s u l t s c o n t a i n e d i n t h i s e n g i n e e r i n g t e s t r e p o r t a r e t r a c e a b l e t o N a t i o n a l I n s t i t u t e o f S t a n d a r d s a n d T e c h n o l o g y

N I S T

) 5

. 7

. 3

. T e s t A r r a n g e m e n t 5

. 7

. 4

. T e s t E q u i p m e n t L i s t T e s t I n s t r u m e n t s M a n u f a c t u r e r M o d e l N o

. S e r i a l N o

. F r e q u e n c y R a n g e S p e c t r u m A n a l y z e r

E M I R e c e i v e r H e w l e t t P a c k a r d H P 8 5 9 3 E M 3 4 1 2 A 0 0 1 0 3 9 k H z 2 6

. 5 G H z P e a k P o w e r M e t e r

P e a k P o w e r S e n s o r H e w l e t t P a c k a r d 8 9 0 0 8 4 8 1 A 2 1 3 1 A 0 0 1 2 4 2 5 5 1 A 0 1 9 6 5 0

. 1

1 8 G H z 5 0 O h m s I n p u t M i c r o w a v e A m p l i f i e r H e w l e t t P a c k a r d H P 8 3 0 1 7 A 1 G H z t o 2 6

. 5 G H z H o r n A n t e n n a E M C O 3 1 5 5 9 7 0 1

5 0 6 1 1 G H z 1 8 G H z 5

. 7

. 5

. T e s t d a t a C h a n n e l F r e q u e n c y M e a s u r e d T o t a l L i m i t N o

M H z

) P e a k P o w e r

A n t e n n a P o r t

m W

m W

) 1 2 4 1 2 3 6

. 4 1 0 0 0 2 2 4 3 7 3 6

. 1 1 0 0 0 3 2 4 6 2 3 8

. 6 1 0 0 0 E U T E

F i e l d i n E

F i e l d i n T x A n t e n n a C a l c u l a t e d M e a s u r e d M e a s u r e d R F S a f e t y T e s t e d 1 M H z B W

3 m 9 9

B W 9 9

B W

3 m G a i n

G

t o t a l E I R P

3 E

) 2

3 0 E I R P

1 M H z B W P e a k E I R P

9 9

B W D i s t a n c e N o t e

d B u V

m

M H z

M H z

d B u V

m

9 9

B W

d B i

d B m

d B m

d B m

c m

) T e s t J i g

2 4 1 2 M H z 1 0 6

. 3 1 0

. 6 1 2 6

. 8 0

. 0 2 1

. 3 1 2

. 5 2 2

. 8 3

. 9 N o n e T e k l o g i x 8 2 5 5

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 0 6

. 6 1 0

. 6 1 2 7

. 1 0

. 0 2 1

. 6 3

. 8 1 4

. 1 1

. 4

1

2

) T e k l o g i x 8 2 6 0

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 0 6

. 8 1 0

. 6 1 2 7

. 3 0

. 0 2 1

. 8 4

. 3 1 4

. 6 1

. 5

1

2

) T e k l o g i x 7 0 3 5

2 4 3 7 M H z 1 1 4

. 4 1 0

. 6 1 3 4

. 9 2

. 0 2 9

. 4 1 7

. 4 2 7

. 7 6

. 8

4

) T e k l o g i x 9 1 5 0

2 4 6 2 M H z 1 1 4

. 7 1 0

. 6 1 3 5

. 2 7

. 5 2 9

. 7 2 3

. 5 3 3

. 8 1 3

. 7

3

) N o t e s

1

) T h e m e a s u r e d E I R P v a l u e i s l e s s t h a n t h e c a l c u l a t e d v a l u e

. I t m a y b e d u e t o t h e f a c t t h a t f o r v e h i c l e m o u n t s t e r m i n a l s

, t h e a n t e n n a e w e r e c o n n e c t e d t o a n a n t e n n a m o u n t w h i c h i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e t r a n s m i t t e r p o r t t h r o u g h a m i n i m u m 1 0 f e e t l o n g c o a x i a l c a b l e

1

) E X P O S U R E D I S T A N C E L I M I T S

r

P G

4 P S

) 1

2

E I R P

4 P S

) 1

2

2

) A n t e n n a o f m o b i l e e q u i p m e n t m u s t b e l o c a t e d a t l e a s t 2 0 c m a w a y f r o m t h e u s e r s

. R e f e r t o m a n u f a c t u r e r a n t e n n a i n s t r u c t i o n

3

) A n t e n n a o f b a s e s t a t i o n m u s t b e l o c a t e d o u t d o o r o n t h e b u i l d i n g r o o f o r a n t e n n a t o w e r a t t h e l o c a t i o n w e r e t h e u s e r s d o n o t r e a c h

. R e f e r t o m a n u f a c t u r e r a n t e n n a i n s t r u c t i o n

4

) T h e S p e c i f i c A b s o r t i o n R a t e

S A R

) t e s t w a s p e r f o r m e d b y 3 D

E M C L a b o r a t o r y I n c

. f o r t h e p o r t a b l e r a d i o

, t h e t e s t r e s u l t s w i l l b e s u b m i t t e d b y U l t r a t e c h E n g i n e e r i n g L a b s I n c

. T R A N S M I T T E R 2 0 d B A T T E N U A T O R P E A K P O W E R M E T E R

 

 

I S O 9 0 0 1 C e r t i f i e d 2 1 0 0 M e a d o w v a l e B o u l e v a r d M i s s i s s a u g a

, O n t a r i o C a n a d a L 5 N 7 J 9 P h o n e

9 0 5

) 8 1 3

9 9 0 0 F a x

9 0 5

) 8 1 2

6 3 0 1 N o v e m b e r 2 3

, 1 9 9 9 F e d e r a l C o m m u n i c a t i o n s C o m m i s s i o n 7 4 3 5 O a k l a n d M i l l s R o a d C o l u m b i a

, M D 2 1 0 4 6 U S A S u b j e c t

P r o f e s s i o n a l i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r a n t e n n a

. A p p l i c a n t

T E K L O G I X I N C

. P r o d u c t M o d e l

T R X 7 4 3 1 F C C I D

G M 3 W L P C 2 4 H D e a r S i r

M a d a m W e

, T E K L O G I X I N C

, w i s h t o a p p l y f o r t h e e x e m p t i o n o f u s i n g t h e s p e c i a l c o u p l i n g o r p e r m a n e n t l y a t t a c h e d r a d i a t i n g a n t e n n a a n d R F S a f e t y R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g r e a s o n s

O u r s p r e a d s p e c t r u m r a d i o s y s t e m c o n s t i t u t e s a v e r y f l e x i b l e s y s t e m t h a t p r o v i d e s w i r e l e s s r e a l t i m e t r a n s a c t i o n p r o c e s s i n g t y p i c a l l y r e q u i r e d f o r o r d e r p r o c e s s i n g i n a w a r e h o u s e e n v i r o n m e n t

. T h e m o d e l s c o n s i s t o f a n a c c e s s p o i n t

9 1 5 0

, a h a n d h e l d p o r t a b l e t e r m i n a l

7 0 3 5

, a n d m o b i l e u n i t s

8 2 5 5 a n d 8 2 6 0

. T h e 9 1 5 0 a c c e s s p o i n t i s u s e d t o p r o v i d e t h e b a s e f u n c t i o n s o f t h e r a d i o l i n k

. T h e s e u n i t s a r e a l w a y s p r o f e s s i o n a l l y i n s t a l l e d

. T h e f i e l d s e r v i c e p e r s o n n e l g o e s t o t h e c u s t o m e r s s i t e a n d p e r f o r m s a s i t e s u r v e y

. T h i s s i t e s u r v e y u s e s o u r p o r t a b l e t e r m i n a l s c o n f i g u r e d w i t h s p e c i a l i z e d s o f t w a r e w i t h t h e r a d i o s t h a t a r e t o b e i n s t a l l e d

. T h e r e s u l t s o f t h e s i t e s u r v e y a r e t h e n u s e d t o d e t e r m i n e t h e t y p e a n d q u a n t i t i e s o f e q u i p m e n t

, i n t e r f a c e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d w h e r e t o l o c a t e t h e b a s e a n t e n n a

s

) t o a d e q u a t e l y c o v e r t h e c u s t o m e r s s i t e

. T h e s e c o n d s t e p i s f o r t h e f i e l d s e r v i c e p e r s o n n e l t o i n s t a l l t h e e q u i p m e n t b y m a k i n g t h e h a r d w i r e d c o n n e c t i o n s t o m a i n f r a m e a n d p o w e r s o u r c e

, m a k i n g t h e h a r d w i r e d c o n n e c t i o n s b e t w e e n t h e s y s t e m n e t w o r k c o n t r o l l e r a n d t h e 9 1 5 0 a n d t o c o n n e c t t h e b a s e a n t e n n a

s

) t o t h e 9 1 5 0 i n t h e l o c a t i o n

s

) i n d i c a t e d b y t h e s i t e s u r v e y

. W h e t h e r o r n o t t h e s i t e s u r v e y w a s p e r f o r m e d

, t h e s y s t e m i s t h e n t e s t e d f o r c o v e r a g e b y t a k i n g t h e h a n d h e l d o r m o b i l e u n i t s t o t h e e d g e s o f t h e s i t e s t o c h e c k f o r f r i n g e c o v e r a g e

. A l s o a t t h i s t i m e t h e s y s t e m p a r a m e t e r s a r e s e t a n d o p t i m i z e d f o r t h e c u s t o m e r s u n i q u e c o n f i g u r a t i o n

. O n c e a g a i n

, s i n c e t h i s u n i t i s a l w a y s i n s t a l l e d b y p r o f e s s i o n a l l y t r a i n e d T e k l o g i x p e r s o n n e l

, n o i n s t r u c t i o n s a r e p r o v i d e d t o t h e c u s t o m e r

. F r o m t h e a b o v e y o u c a n s e e t h a t t h e r e i s a l o t o f e f f o r t e x p e n d e d b y o u r t r a i n e d f i e l d s e r v i c e p e r s o n n e l t h a t w o u l d b e i m p o s s i b l e f o r a c u s t o m e r t o d o f o r t h e m s e l v e s

. A m a j o r p o r t i o n o f t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p r o c e s s i s t h e f i n e t u n i n g o f t h e s y s t e m

, t h a t w o u l d b e i m p o s s i b l e f o r t h e c u s t o m e r t o d o t h e m s e l v e s

. W e p r i d e o u r s e l v e s i n n o t j u s t p r o v i d i n g a s y s t e m w e p r o v i d e a n R F s o l u t i o n

. W h a t w e m e a n b y t h i s i s t h a t w e g o t o t h e c u s t o m e r s i t e a n d p r o v i d e a s e a m l e s s t r a n s i t i o n f r o m t h e i r p r e s e n t m a i n f r a m e o r d a t a n e t w o r k s y s t e m t o o n e t h a t u s e s t h e s a m e o r i g i n a l e q u i p m e n t a n d s o f t w a r e

. O u r R F s y s t e m a p p e a r s a s a d d i t i o n a l t e r m i n a l e m u l a t i n g t h e t e r m i n a l s p r e s e n t l y i n t h e i r s y s t e m

. I S O 9 0 0 1 C e r t i f i e d 2 1 0 0 M e a d o w v a l e B o u l e v a r d M i s s i s s a u g a

, O n t a r i o C a n a d a L 5 N 7 J 9 P h o n e

9 0 5

) 8 1 3

9 9 0 0 F a x

9 0 5

) 8 1 2

6 3 0 1 T h e 9 1 5 0 a n t e n n a s y s t e m w o u l d h a r d l y e v e r h a v e t h e l u x u r y o f u s i n g u n i q u e c o n n e c t o r d u e t o t h e l o g i s t i c s o f l o c a t i n g t h e a n t e n n a h i g h u p i n t h e r a f t e r s o f t h e w a r e h o u s e a n d c a r e f u l l y l o c a t e d t o p r o v i d e t h e m a x i m u m c o v e r a g e

. T y p i c a l l y t h e n w e h a v e t o p r o v i d e a c o a x i a l c a b l e o f s t a n d a r d l e n g t h

2 5 O R 5 0 o f L M R 4 0 0 c a b l e

) r o u t e d f r o m t h e 9 1 5 0 t o t h e b a s e a n t e n n a

. T h e r e f o r e W e

, T E K L O G I X I N C

, w i s h t o c o n f i r m t h a t f o r R F S a f e t y R e q u i r e m e n t s a n t e n n a s y s t e m s i n c l u d i n g C u s h c r a f t a n t e n n a a r e p r o f e s s i o n a l l y i n s t a l l e d f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g r e a s o n s

T h e e x t e r n a l a n t e n n a i s r e q u i r e d t o b e i n s t a l l e d a w a y f r o m t h e u s e r s

o n t h e r o o f o f t h e b u i l d i n g

, o n t h e a n t e n n a t o w e r l o c a t e d o u t s i d e o f t h e b u i l d i n g

, o n t h e w a l l a t h e i g h t o f a t l e a s t 1 5 f e e t h i g h a n d 1 0 f e e t a w a y f r o m t h e u s e r s

, o r i n c a s e o f m o b i l e a t l e a s t 4 0 C m s a w a y f r o m t h e o p e r a t o r

) a t a l l t i m e

. T h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o f o u r s y s t e m i s a l w a y s r e q u i r e d t o b e p e r f o r m e d b y u s o r o u r p r o f e s s i o n a l s u b

c o n t r a c t o r f o l l o w i n g t h e I n s t a l l a t i o n P r o c e d u r e f o r t h i s e q u i p m e n t

. D u e t o t h e n a t u r e o f o u r s y s t e m

p r o v i d i n g a l a r g e a r e a o f c o v e r a g e

) t h e r e w o u l d b e n o a d v a n t a g e o f t h e c u s t o m e r u s i n g a h i g h e r g a i n a n t e n n a b e c a u s e h e w o u l d l o o s e t h e o m n i d i r e c t i o n a l i t y r e q u i r e d f o r o u r s y s t e m

w e a r e n o t a p o i n t t o p o i n t b u t a p o i n t t o m u l t i p o i n t e n v i r o n m e n t w h e r e t h e a r e a o f c o v e r a g e n o t d i s t a n c e i s i m p o r t a n t

. S i n c e o u r s y s t e m m u s t a l w a y s b e p r o f e s s i o n a l l y i n s t a l l e d b y o u r t r a i n e d f i e l d s e r v i c e p e r s o n n e l

, w e f e e l t h a t t h e 9 1 5 0 p o r t i o n o f o u r s y s t e m b e d e e m e d m u s t b e p r o f e s s i o n a l i n s t a l l e d

. T h e r e f o r e t h e u n i q u e a n t e n n a c o n n e c t o r c l a u s e o f t h e p a r t 1 5 r e q u i r e m e n t w o u l d n o t b e a p p l i c a b l e

. P l e a s e a c c e p t o u r g r a t i t u d e i n a d v a n c e f o r y o u r p r o m p t h a n d l i n g o f t h i s m a t t e r

. S i n c e r e l y

, S a d a D h a r w a r k a r

, P

. E n g

. S u p e r v i s o r

, A p p r o v a l s T E K L O G I X I N C